HiPath 3000 V4 Service Manual Issue 6.pdf

8/11/2019 HiPath 3000 V4 Service Manual Issue 6.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hipath-3000-v4-service-manual-issue-6pdf 1/904

HiPath 3000/5000

Version 4.0

Service Manual



*1PP31003-H3540-S403-6-7620*

1P P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620

The information provided in this document contains merely general descriptions orcharacteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply asdescribed or which may change as a result of further development of the products.An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expresslyagreed in the terms of contract. The trademarks used are owned by Siemens AG ortheir respective owners.

The device conforms to the EU directive 1999/5/EG, as attested by the CEmark.

This device has been manufactured in accordance with our certifiedenvironmental management system (ISO 14001). This process ensuresthat energy consumption and the use of primary raw materials are kept toa minimum, thus reducing waste production.

Siemens AG 2005 Siemens Communications,Hofmannstraße 51, D-81359 München, GermanyReference No.: P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620Subject to availability. Right of modification reserved.



hp3hp5shTOC.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual 0-1

Contents

Contents 0

1 Important information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.2 Important information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2.1 Structure of This Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21.2.2 Connection area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41.2.3 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.2.3.1 Safety Information: Dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61.2.3.2 Safety Information: Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81.2.3.3 Safety information: Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91.2.3.4 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.2.3.5 Emergencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121.2.3.6 Reporting Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121.2.3.7 Safety Information for Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

1.2.4 Privacy and Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141.2.5 Information on the Intranet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

1.3 Important Notices (for U.S. and Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161.3.1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

1.3.1.1 General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161.3.1.2 Safety With Electricity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

1.3.1.2.1 High Voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161.3.1.2.2 Equipment Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171.3.1.2.3 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

1.3.1.3 Reporting Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-181.3.2 About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

1.3.2.1 Prerequisite Knowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191.3.2.2 How to Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-201.3.2.3 Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

1.3.3 FCC and Industry Canada Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-211.3.3.1 FCC Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

1.3.3.1.1 FCC Rules, Part 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-221.3.3.1.2 FCC Rules, Part 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

1.3.3.2 Industry Canada Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-301.3.3.2.1 REN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-301.3.3.2.2 Equipment Attachment Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

2 System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.2 Introduction to HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22.3 HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.3.2 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3000 Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6



Contents

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/050-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

hp3hp5shTOC.fm

2.3.2.1 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.3.2.2 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82.3.2.3 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92.3.2.4 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102.3.2.5 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112.3.2.6 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.3.3 System Environment of the HiPath 3000 Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132.3.3.1 System Environment HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132.3.3.2 System Environment HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142.3.3.3 System Environment HiPath 3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152.3.3.4 System Environment HiPath 3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162.3.3.5 System Environment HiPath 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2.4 HiPath 5000 RSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182.5 System-Related Capacity Limits HiPath 3000/5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2.6 Technical Specifications HiPath 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212.7 Interface-to-Interface Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-222.8 Numbering Plan for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-232.9 Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

2.9.1 CE Compliance (not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242.9.2 U.S. and Canadian Regulatory Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242.9.3 SAFETY International. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242.9.4 Environmental Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

3 Boards for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.2 Central Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

3.2.1 CBCC and CBRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-213.2.2 CBCP (for Deutsche Telekom AG Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-293.2.3 CBCPR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-343.2.4 CMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-373.2.5 CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-383.2.6 CR8N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-423.2.7 CUC and CUCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-443.2.8 CUP and CUPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-453.2.9 IMODN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-463.2.10 LIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

3.2.11 MMC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-503.2.12 PSUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-513.2.13 UPSC-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-523.2.14 UPSC-DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-573.2.15 UPSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

3.3 Peripheral Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-703.3.1 HXGM3 (V4.0 SMR-4 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-703.3.2 HXGS3 and HXGR3 (V4.0 SMR-4 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-773.3.3 IVML8 and IVML24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86



hp3hp5shTOC.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Contents

3.3.4 IVMP8 and IVMP8R (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-903.3.5 IVMS8 and IVMS8R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-943.3.6 SLA8N (Not for U.S.), SLA16N, and SLA24N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-993.3.7 SLC16 and SLC16N (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106

3.3.8 SLMO8 (Not for U.S.) and SLMO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1223.3.9 SLU8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1283.3.10 SLU8R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1303.3.11 STLS2 (Not for U.S.) and STLS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1313.3.12 STLS4R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1383.3.13 STMD8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1403.3.14 TIEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1503.3.15 TLA2 and TLA4 and TLA8 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1653.3.16 TLA4R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1673.3.17 TMAMF (for selected countries only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169

3.3.18 TMCAS (for selected countries only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1733.3.19 TMDID8 (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1833.3.20 TMGL4 (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1863.3.21 TMGL4R (for U.S. only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1883.3.22 TMGL8 (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1903.3.23 TML8W (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1923.3.24 TMOM (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1953.3.25 TMQ4 (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2013.3.26 TMST1 (for U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2033.3.27 TMS2 (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2063.3.28 TST1 (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-213

3.3.29 TS2 and TS2R (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2153.3.30 4SLA (Not for U.S.), 8SLA, (for All Countries) and 16SLA (Not for U.S.) . . . . 3-2203.3.31 8SLAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-224

3.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2263.4.1 ALUM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2263.4.2 ANI4 (for selected countries only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2303.4.3 ANI4R (for selected countries only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2343.4.4 Announcement and Music Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2363.4.5 EXMNA (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2383.4.6 GEE8 (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2403.4.7 GEE12, GEE16, and GEE50 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2413.4.8 HOPE Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2433.4.9 OPAL and OPALR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2453.4.10 PFT1 and PFT4 (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2473.4.11 REAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2503.4.12 STBG4 (For France Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2543.4.13 STRB and STRBR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2553.4.14 V24/1(Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2603.4.15 V.24 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-262



Contents


hp3hp5shTOC.fm

3.4.16 V.24 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-263

4 Installation HiPath 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.2.1 Installation Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.2.2 Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34.2.3 HiPath 3750 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.2.3.1 Selecting the Installation Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64.2.3.1.1 AC Power (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

4.2.3.2 Unpacking the Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84.2.3.3 Mounting the Main Distribution Frame (MDFU or MDFU-E)

(Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.2.3.4 Setting up the System Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4.2.3.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4.2.3.4.2 Removing the Cabinet Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114.2.3.4.3 Setting Up a One-Cabinet System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124.2.3.4.4 Setting Up a Stacked Two-Cabinet System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154.2.3.4.5 Setting Up a Two-Cabinet System Side by Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-214.2.3.4.6 Setting Up a Stacked Three-Cabinet System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224.2.3.4.7 Installing the Seismic Anchors (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.2.3.5 Grounding the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-264.2.3.5.1 Not for U.S.: Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-264.2.3.5.2 For U.S. Only: Grounding the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

4.2.3.6 Checking the Protective Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-314.2.3.7 Connecting the Cables to the Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

4.2.3.7.1 Backplanes of the “8-Slot” Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-324.2.3.7.2 Connection Between the MDFU or MDFU-E and Backplane . . . . . . . . . 4-36

4.2.3.8 Laying the Line Network and Setting Jumpers on the MDFU or MDFU-E. . . 4-414.2.4 HiPath 3700 Installation (19-Inch Cabinet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

4.2.4.1 Selecting the Installation Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-474.2.4.1.1 AC Power (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

4.2.4.2 Unpacking the Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-474.2.4.3 Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19-Inch Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

4.2.4.3.1 Removing the Cabinet Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-484.2.4.3.2 Mounting the System Cabinet with Angle Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

4.2.4.4 Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-524.2.4.5 Grounding the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-534.2.4.6 Checking the Protective Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-554.2.4.7 Connecting the Cable to the Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

4.2.4.7.1 Backplanes of the “8-Slot” Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-564.2.4.7.2 Connecting the Patch Panel and Backplane (in the 19-Inch Cabinet) . . 4-60

4.2.4.8 Connecting the Line Network to the Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-684.2.5 Loading the System Software and Inserting Subboards on the Central

Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69



hp3hp5shTOC.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Contents

4.2.6 Configuration Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-704.2.6.1 Inserting and Removing Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

4.2.7 Connecting Workpoint Clients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-794.2.8 Make Trunk Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

4.2.9 Performing a Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-804.3 HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

4.3.1 Installation Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-814.3.2 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-824.3.3 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

4.3.3.1 Selecting the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-834.3.3.1.1 AC Power (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

4.3.3.2 Unpacking the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-854.3.3.3 Mounting the Main Distribution Frame (HiPath 3550 only) (Not for U.S.). . . 4-864.3.3.4 Remove System Housing Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

4.3.3.5 Attaching the System to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-904.3.3.6 Grounding the System and the External Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . 4-914.3.3.7 Installing the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-934.3.3.8 Laying the Line Network and Connecting Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-944.3.3.9 Attaching Ferrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-984.3.3.10 Configuration Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1004.3.3.11 Connecting Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1044.3.3.12 Make Trunk Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1044.3.3.13 Conducting a Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

4.3.4 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Installation (19-Inch Housing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1054.3.4.1 Installation Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

4.3.4.2 Selecting the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1064.3.4.2.1 AC Power (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

4.3.4.3 Unpacking the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1074.3.4.4 Attaching a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 to the Wall (19-Inch Housing)

(Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1084.3.4.5 Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1094.3.4.6 Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1114.3.4.7 Installing the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1124.3.4.8 Connecting Cables and the Line Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1134.3.4.9 Configuration Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1144.3.4.10 Connecting Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1174.3.4.11 Make Trunk Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1174.3.4.12 Performing a Visual Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

5 Startup HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.2.1 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.2.2 Supplying the System With Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.2.2.1 Assigning Station Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4



hp3hp5shTOC.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Contents

6.4.5.2.1 Determining the MAC ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-376.4.5.2.2 Generating a TAPI Service Provider License for the First Time . . . . . . 6-396.4.5.2.3 Repeated Retrieval of a TAPI Service Provider License . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-406.4.5.2.4 Repeated Retrieval of a TAPI Service Provider License with a

New MAC ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-406.4.5.3 Licensing Lines for Media Streaming using the MEB (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . 6-416.4.5.4 Licensing the CSTA Message Dispatcher (CMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-436.4.5.5 Licensing the CSTA Service Provider (CSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-436.4.5.6 Licensing the HG1500 (B Channels and Users) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43

6.4.6 Windows Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-446.5 Administering HiPath 5000 RSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

6.5.1 HiPath Server Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-466.5.1.1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-466.5.1.2 Prerequisites for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

6.5.2 Starting, Logging in, Ending HiPath Server Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-476.5.2.1 Starting HiPath Server Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-476.5.2.2 Logging in to HiPath Server Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-476.5.2.3 Ending HiPath Server Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

6.5.3 Error and Event Notification Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-486.5.4 User Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

6.5.4.1 Creating a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-506.5.4.2 Editing the User Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-516.5.4.3 Administering Access Privileges for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-526.5.4.4 Deleting a User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-546.5.4.5 Exporting a User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

6.5.5 Administering General Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-556.5.5.1 Configuring Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57

6.5.5.1.1 Importing the Configured Node Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-576.5.5.1.2 Editing Node Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-576.5.5.1.3 Exporting a Node List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

6.5.5.2 Configuring Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-606.5.5.2.1 General Properties of Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-606.5.5.2.2 Importing Configured Extension Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-616.5.5.2.3 Editing Extension Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-626.5.5.2.4 Editing Extensions with Multiple Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-666.5.5.2.5 Exporting an Extension List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67

6.5.5.3 Trunks for Private calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-686.5.5.3.1 Adding a Trunk for Private Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-686.5.5.3.2 Editing a Trunk for Private Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-696.5.5.3.3 Deleting a Trunk for Private Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-696.5.5.3.4 Exporting a Trunk List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69

6.5.6 PCM Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-706.5.6.1 Properties of PCM Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-716.5.6.2 User Administration for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73



Contents


hp3hp5shTOC.fm

6.5.6.2.1 Editing a User for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-736.5.6.2.2 Exporting a PCM User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74

6.5.6.3 Destination Number Identification for External Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-756.5.6.3.1 Creating a New Extension Number Entry for External Calls . . . . . . . . . . 6-756.5.6.3.2 Deleting an Extension Number Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76

6.5.7 GetAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-776.5.7.1 Parameters for Call Data Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-776.5.7.2 Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80

6.5.7.2.1 Creating a New Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-816.5.7.2.2 Editing a Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-826.5.7.2.3 Deleting a Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-836.5.7.2.4 Exporting a Carrier List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83

6.5.7.3 Automatic Path Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-846.5.7.3.1 Importing Outdial Rule Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84

6.5.7.3.2 Editing Outdial Rule Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-846.6 HiPath Trace Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-866.6.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-866.6.2 Starting and Ending the Trace Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-876.6.3 Trace Monitor Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-886.6.4 Print Setup for the Trace Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-906.6.5 General Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91

6.6.5.1 Opening/Closing a Trace Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-916.6.5.2 Printing the Contents of a Trace Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-916.6.5.3 Deleting the Trace Window Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-916.6.5.4 Freezing the Trace Window Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92

6.6.5.5 Arranging the Trace Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-926.6.6 Exporting Trace Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

6.7 Saving and Restoring the Current System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-946.7.1 Restoring Data for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94

6.8 Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000 RSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96

7 Startup HiPath 3000 as a Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17.3 Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.3.1 Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.3.2 Procedure for Installation and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27.4 Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47.4.1 Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47.4.2 Procedure for Installation and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

7.5 Starting HiPath 3300 as a Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.5.1 Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.5.2 Procedure for Installation and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

8 Expanding, Upgrading of HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1



hp3hp5shTOC.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Contents

8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18.2 Expanding HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.2.1 Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28.2.2 Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.2.3 ECR with HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 (not for U.S. and Canada). . . 8-58.2.3.1 ECR Control, Display, and Connecting Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68.2.3.2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98.2.3.3 Installation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98.2.3.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

8.2.3.4.1 Installing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128.2.3.5 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries and EPSU2-R. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

8.2.3.5.1 Connect Fan (if needed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-178.2.4 Connecting Special Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

8.2.4.1 Entrance Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

8.2.4.1.1 Information on Third-Party Entrance Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-218.2.4.2 Connecting Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-238.3 Upgrading HiPath 3000 to HW V1.2 and SW V4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

8.3.1 Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-258.3.2 Hardware Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

9 Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19.2 optiPoint 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9.2.1 optiPoint 500 Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59.2.1.1 optiPoint 500 entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59.2.1.2 optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69.2.1.3 optiPoint 500 basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79.2.1.4 optiPoint 500 standard / optiPoint 500 standard SL (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . 9-89.2.1.5 optiPoint 500 advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99.2.1.6 Connection Requirements for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119.2.1.7 Connecting the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129.2.1.8 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-139.2.1.9 USB 1.1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9.2.2 optiPoint 500 Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-159.2.2.1 optiPoint key module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-159.2.2.2 optiPoint BLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

9.2.2.3 Programming Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-179.2.2.4 Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-189.2.3 optiPoint 500 adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

9.2.3.1 optiPoint analog adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-209.2.3.2 optiPoint ISDN adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-219.2.3.3 optiPoint phone adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-229.2.3.4 optiPoint acoustic adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-249.2.3.5 optiPoint recorder adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-279.2.3.6 Possible optiPoint 500 Adapter Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28



Contents


hp3hp5shTOC.fm

9.2.3.7 Comparison of optiset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters . . . . . . . . . . . 9-299.2.4 Maximum Configurations for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-On Devices and

Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-309.2.5 Accessories and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

9.2.5.1 Local Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-329.2.5.2 Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-349.2.5.3 Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

9.3 optiPoint 600 office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-389.4 optiLog 4me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-419.5 optiset E privacy module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-429.6 IP Telephony (Voice over IP (VoIP)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

9.6.1 optiPoint 410 (V4.0 SMR-6 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-439.6.1.1 optiPoint 410 Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

9.6.1.1.1 optiPoint 410 entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

9.6.1.1.2 optiPoint 410 economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-469.6.1.1.3 optiPoint 410 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-489.6.1.1.4 Connection and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-509.6.1.1.5 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

9.6.1.2 optiPoint 410 Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-529.6.1.2.1 optiPoint SLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-529.6.1.2.2 optiPoint 410 display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-539.6.1.2.3 Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

9.6.1.3 Use of optiPoint 500 Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-559.6.2 optiClient 130 V4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-569.6.3 HiPath AP 1100, HiPath AP 1140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

9.6.4 HG1500 V3.0: Determining the Number of HG1500 Boards Required . . . . . . . . 9-609.6.4.1 Applications of the HG1500 Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

9.6.4.1.1 IP Payload Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-629.6.4.1.2 Gateway Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-639.6.4.1.3 ISDN Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63

9.6.4.2 Determining the Number of HG1500 V3.0 Boards Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-649.6.4.3 Notes on B Channel Distribution in the Case of IP Networking . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

9.7 Attendant Console Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-689.7.1 optiPoint Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-689.7.2 optiClient Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

9.8 HiPath Cordless Office Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-729.8.1 Gigaset active Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-729.8.2 Gigaset 3000 Comfort Feature Handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-739.8.3 Gigaset 3000 Micro Feature Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-749.8.4 Gigaset 4000 Comfort Feature Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-769.8.5 Gigaset 4000 Micro Feature Handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-779.8.6 Logging On Mobile Telephones to the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79

9.8.6.1 Open the Login Window in HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-799.8.6.2 Log On the Mobile Telephone (for Gigaset 3000 Comfort, 3000 Micro) . . . . 9-80



hp3hp5shTOC.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Contents

9.8.6.3 Log On the Mobile Telephone (for Gigaset 4000 Comfort, 4000 Micro). . . . 9-819.8.6.4 Check the Login Status of the Mobile Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-829.8.6.5 Replace, Lock, and Log Off a Mobile Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82

9.9 Analog Telephones for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83

9.10 ISDN Terminals for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-849.10.1 General S0 Wiring (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85

9.10.1.1 Specific S0 Wiring Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86

10 HiPath Cordless Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-210.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-310.4 Technical Data for Base Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-410.5 Power-Related Capacity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-610.6 Multi-SLC and System-Wide Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

10.7 Planning Notes for Networked HiPath 3000 Systems Featuring Network-WideRoaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

11 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-111.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-111.2 Service and Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11.2.1 Backing Up the Customer Database (CDB Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-311.2.1.1 Customer Data Backup Without HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager . . . 11-3

11.2.1.1.1 Automatic Customer Data Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-311.2.1.1.2 Manual Customer Data Backup with HiPath 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

11.2.1.2 Customer Data Backup with HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager

(V4.0 SMR-7 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-611.2.1.3 CDB Treatment When Replacing Central HiPath 3000 Hardware . . . . . . . 11-611.2.2 Effects of Hardware Changes on Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

11.2.2.1 Inserting and Removing HiPath 3000 Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-811.2.2.2 Exchanging Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

11.2.3 Relocate/Transfer Application Processor Software (APS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1111.2.3.1 APS Replacement/Transfer for HiPath 3000 Systems Without HiPath

3000/5000 Software Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1111.2.3.1.1 Transferring an APS of HiPath 3000 by Replacing the MMC . . . . . . 11-1111.2.3.1.2 APS Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

11.2.3.2 APS Transfer for HiPath 3000 Systems With HiPath 3000/5000Software Manager (V4.0 SMR-7 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

11.2.4 Upgrading HiPath 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1611.2.5 Determining System Information and Installed Software Components

(HiPath Inventory Server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1711.2.5.1 Determining System Information with HiPath 3000/5000 Software

Manager (V4.0 SMR-7 or Later). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1811.2.6 Backing Up System Components (Backup Manager) (V4.0 SMR-7 or

Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20



Contents


hp3hp5shTOC.fm

11.2.7 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2211.3 Guided Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23

11.3.1 Diagnosis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2311.3.1.1 Recording HiPath 3000 Board Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23

11.3.1.1.1 Central Control Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2311.3.1.1.2 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2411.3.1.1.3 Peripheral Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24

11.3.1.2 Recording HiPath 3000 Trunk Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2611.3.1.3 Recording Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2711.3.1.4 Recording the Status of the HiPath 3000 V.24 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2811.3.1.5 Trace Options for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2911.3.1.6 HiPath Trace Monitor for HiPath 5000 RSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2911.3.1.7 HiPath 3000 Error History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3011.3.1.8 Testing Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30

11.3.1.9 Analyzing System-wide Use of Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3011.3.1.10 Event Viewer (Event Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3111.3.1.11 HiPath Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33

11.3.2 HiPath 3000 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3411.3.3 HiPath 5000 RSM Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42

11.4 Correcting errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5711.4.1 Automatic Error Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5711.4.2 Manual Error Correction Without HiPath 3000 Manager E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5711.4.3 Manual Error Correction With HiPath 3000 Manager E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58

11.5 Remote Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5911.5.1 HiPath 3000 Connection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-60

11.5.2 HiPath 5000 RSM Connection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6111.5.3 Remote System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61

11.5.3.1 Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 with HiPath 3000 Manager E . . . 11-6111.5.3.2 DTMF Remote Administration of HiPath 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-62

11.5.4 Remote Correction of System Software (APS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6211.5.5 Remote Error Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6311.5.6 Controlled Release of a Remote Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6411.5.7 Remote Administration and Access Using PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64

11.5.7.1 Remote System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6411.5.7.2 Remote Administration of Plus Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6411.5.7.3 Remote Error Signaling Using SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64

11.6 Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6511.6.1 Access Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-65

11.6.1.1 Logon With User Name and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6511.6.1.2 Pre-determined User Groups and Their Access Rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6811.6.1.3 System Access Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7011.6.1.4 Customer Data Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-71

11.6.2 Automatic Logging of Administration Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7211.6.2.1 Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72



hp3hp5shTOC.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Contents

11.6.2.1.1 Format Identification and Command Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7211.6.2.2 Issuing and Saving Log Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-75

12 IP Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-112.2 IP Network Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-212.2.1 General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-212.2.2 H.323 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-212.2.3 Voice Compression G.711, G.723.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-312.2.4 QoS - Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

12.3 Network Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

A System Programming Codes (Expert Mode Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

B Codes for Activating/Deactivating Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

C IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used with HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

C.1 HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.2 HiPath 5000 RSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3C.3 HiPath FM Managed Systems (at the moment not available for HiPath

3000/5000 V4.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5C.4 HG1500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6C.5 optiClient 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8C.6 optiPoint 400 / optiPoint 410 / optiPoint 420 / optiPoint 600 office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9C.7 HiPath AP 1100 / HiPath AP 1140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10C.8 Middleware for Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11C.9 Middleware for Media Streaming Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12

D Identifying System Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1D.1 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Boards Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2D.2 HiPath 3550 Boards Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4D.3 HiPath 3350 Boards Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6D.4 HiPath 3500 Boards Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8D.5 HiPath 3300 Boards Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9D.6 Workpoint clients, Key Modules and Adapter Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10D.7 Check Whether the Output of a Power Supply Unit is Sufficient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12D.8 Identifying the Primary System Power Requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W-1

Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Y-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-1



Contents


hp3hp5shTOC.fm



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Important information

Overview

1 Important information

Service Manual HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0: P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

1.1 Overview

Chapter Contents

This chapter discusses the topics listed in the table.

Topic

Important information, page 1-2

Structure of This Service Manual, page 1-2

Connection area, page 1-4 (Electrical environment, CE certificate ...)

Safety Information, page 1-5:– Safety Information: Dangers– Safety Information: Warnings– Safety information: Cautions– General information– Emergencies– Reporting Accidents– Safety Information for Australia

Privacy and Data Security, page 1-14 Information on the Intranet, page 1-15

Important Notices (for U.S. and Canada only), page 1-16

Safety, page 1-16– General Safety – Safety With Electricity – Reporting Accidents

About This Book, page 1-18 – Prerequisite Knowledge

– How to Use This Book – Related Information

FCC and Industry Canada Compliance, page 1-21– FCC Compliance– Industry Canada Compliance




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

1-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

inform.fm


1.2 Important information

1.2.1 Structure of This Service Manual

Content and Target Group

This Electronic Service Manual provides information about the different systems of HiPath3000/5000 from V4.0 on. The specifications contained therein only provide accompanying in-formation and do not replace training.

The information provided in this document contains merely general descriptions or character-

istics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or whichmay change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the re-spective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract.

Main Topics of This Manual

Chapter 2, System Data provides information on the current HiPath 3000/5000 versionand associated systems (characteristics, construction, system environment, capacity lim-its, technical data).

Chapter 3, Boards for HiPath 3000 describes all of the boards used for HiPath 3000. The

hardware information (such as connection cables and NT connections) is presented foreach board.

The actions necessary for the standard installation (part of a standard system) of the dif-ferent HiPath 3000 systems are described in Chapter 4, Installation HiPath 3000.

The procedures for the startup of the individual HiPath 3000/5000 components are de-scribed in Chapter 5, Startup HiPath 3000, Chapter 6, Startup and Administration Hi-Path 5000 RSM and Chapter 7, Startup HiPath 3000 as a Gateway.

Information on supplementary equipment and expansions and on the procedure for up-grading HiPath 3000 systems are part of Chapter 8, Expanding, Upgrading of HiPath

3000. Chapter 9, Workpoint Clients contains the description of the workpoint clients and adapt-

ers supported.

Basic information about the operation of the HiPath Cordless Office are part of Chapter10, HiPath Cordless Office.

Chapter 11, Service describes the optional service and maintenance tasks and providessupport for error detection and troubleshooting.

7WarningOnly authorized service personnel are permitted to work on the system.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Introductory information on the subject of IP can be found in Chapter 12, IP Fundamen-tals.

The following appendices contain lists with programming codes, IP protocols, port num-

bers: Appendix A, “System Programming Codes (Expert Mode Codes)”, Appendix B,“Codes for Activating/Deactivating Features” and Appendix C, “IP Protocols andPort Numbers Used with HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0”.

Appendix D, “Identifying System Power Requirement” provides information about theresource requirements of the boards and components of HiPath 3000 systems.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


1.2.2 Connection area

HiPath telecommunication systems are approved for connection to TN-S power supply sys-tems, but can also be connected to a TN-C-S power supply system in which the PEN conductor

is divided into a ground and a neutral wire. TN-S and TN-C-S systems are defined in the IEC364-3 standard.

This device complies with the EU guideline 1999/5/EEC as confirmed by theCE certificate.

This device has been manufactured in accordance with our certified envi-ronmental management system (ISO 14001). This process ensures that en-ergy consumption and the use of primary raw materials are kept to a mini-mum, thus reducing waste production.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




1.2.3 Safety Information

The following information is intended for authorized service personnel. Only authorized servicepersonnel are permitted to install and maintain the system.

Observe all safety regulations and read the warnings, cautions, and notes posted on the equip-ment. Familiarize yourself with emergency numbers.

Always consult a supervisor before starting work in conditions where the necessary safety pre-cautions do not appear to be in place (including in humid conditions or situations where thereis a risk of gas explosions).

Safety Symbols

This manual uses the following symbols to indicate potential hazards:

Additional Symbols Identifying Sources of Potential Hazard

These symbols are not generally used in this manual, but may appear on the equipment.

* electrostatically sensitive devices

7DangerThis symbol warns that a situation may cause death or serious injury.

7WarningThis symbol indicates hazard which may lead to serious injury.

7CautionThis symbol indicates a risk of damage to hardware or software.

>This symbol identifies useful information.

1 5 3 0 6 4 2Electricity Weight Heat Fire Chemicals ESD* Laser




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


1.2.3.1 Safety Information: Dangers

Grounding

Never operate systems that require a ground wire connection without a ground wire connected.Connect the system to the ground wire correctly before start up and connection of the stations.

Connecting an external battery pack, external batteries

Only use licensed battery packs and batteries.

HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300

Due to dangerous and accessible electrical circuits, only operate the HiPath 3500 and HiPath3300 systems if the housing is closed.

Dangerous voltages

Voltages above 30 Vac (alternating current) or 60 Vdc (direct current) are dangerous.

Damage

Replace the power cable immediately if it shows any signs of damage.

Replace any damaged safety equipment (covers, labels and protective cables) immediate-ly.

Accessories

Use only original accessories or components approved for the system. Failure to observe theseinstructions may damage the equipment or even violate safety and EMC regulations.

System Shut-Down During Maintenance Work

Procedures to be observed are described in the relevant chapters.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Working on Electrical Circuits

Work on low voltage electrical networks (100 to 240 Vac) must only be carried out by qual-ified personnel or authorized electrical engineers.

Do not work alone. Work with another person who knows the locations of the power-offswitches.

Never touch live wires that are not properly insulated.

Ensure that a machine cannot be powered on from another source or controlled from a dif-ferent circuit breaker or disconnecting switch.

Never assume that the power is turned off. Always test to ensure that a circuit does nothave power.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never install telephone wiring

during an electrical storm. Expect leakage current from the telecommunications network.

When performing work on an open system, ensure that it is never left unsupervised.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


1.2.3.2 Safety Information: Warnings

Replacing the Lithium Battery

There is a risk of explosion if a lithium battery is not correctly replaced. It must only be replacedby an identical battery or one recommended by the manufacturer.

Replacing the Batteries (DC Power Supply)

Procedures to be observed are described in the following chapters.

Protective Clothing and Equipment

Do not wear loose clothing; tie back your hair while working on machines.

Be sure to remove rings, watches, and other jewelry when working with electrical circuitsand components.

Wear eye protection when you are working in any conditions that might be hazardous toyour eyes.

Always wear a hard hat where there is a risk of injury from falling objects.

General Safety

The surface of a mirror is conductive. Do not touch powered circuits with a mirror. To do socan cause personal injury and machine damage.

Disconnect all power before working near power supplies unless otherwise instructed by amaintenance procedure.

Do not attempt to lift objects that you think are too heavy for you; use a hand truck orget help.

Never look directly at a laser beam.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




1.2.3.3 Safety information: Cautions

Voltage Checks and Measurements

Check the nominal voltage set for the equipment (operating instructions and type plate). High voltages capable of causing shock are used in this equipment. Be extremely careful

when measuring high voltages and when servicing cards, panels, and boards while thesystem is powered on.

Damage

Only use tools and equipment which are in perfect condition. Do use equipment with visibledamage.

Protecting Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD)

To protect electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD):

Wear a wristband before carrying out any work on PC boards and modules. Connect thealligator clip at the end of the electrostatic wristband wire to a grounded object.

Transport PC boards only in electrostatic packaging.

Always place PC boards on a grounded surface before working on them.

Only use grounded soldering irons.

Laying Cables

Lay cables so as to prevent any risk of them being damaged or causing accidents, such as trip-ping.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


1.2.3.4 General information

Connecting Lines

All cables and lines leaving a system cabinet must be shielded between the connectionpoint in the cabinet and, at the very least, the point at which they leave the cabinet. Use aclip and pressure screw to contact all braided shields to the cabinet outlet. This also appliesto continuously connected service equipment

Connect all cables to the specified connection points only.

Location of Safety Equipment

When the installation or maintenance is completed, replace all safety equipment in the correctlocation.

Checking Tools

Check your tools regularly and only use those which are in perfect working order.

Closing the Housing Cover

After maintenance and testing work has been completed, close all housing covers.

Condensation

If equipment is brought from a cold environment into the operating premises, condensation may

form on it. Wait until the temperature of the equipment has adjusted to the ambient temperatureand is completely dry before starting it up.

Wall Mounting

Some walls (such as plasterboard walls) have a reduced load-bearing capacity. Before startingwall mounting, check the load-bearing capacity of the walls.

Fire Protection and EMC Requirements

To ensure the legal fire protection and EMC requirements, operate the HiPath systems only

when closed. You may open the system only briefly for assembly and maintenance work.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Flammable Materials

Do not store combustible gases or flammable materials in cabinets near the equipment in-stallation site.

Do not store documents, descriptions, operating instructions, and similar flammable mate-rials in the cabinet.

Workplace Hazards

Ensure that the workplace is well lit.

A neat workplace helps reduce the risk of accidents.

Battery Disposal

Batteries are also included with the telephones and the equipment.Do not dispose of old or defective batteries along with normalhousehold refuse. Instead, drop them off at special sites intendedfor battery disposal. Observe country-specific regulations.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


1.2.3.5 Emergencies

Actions in Emergencies

Remain calm in the event of an accident. Use caution if an accident occurs. Disconnect the power before touching the victim.

If you do not know how to disconnect the power, use a nonconducting object, such as awooden rod, to push or pull the victim away from electrical contact.

First Aid

Be familiar with first aid for electrical shock. This includes resuscitation methods, heartbeatrestoration, and burn treatment.

Administer resuscitation if the person is not breathing. If you are trained and certified, administer cardiac compression if the heart is not beating.

Calling for Help

Call an ambulance or doctor immediately and provide the following information in a calm andlogical manner:

Where did the accident happen?

What happened?

What type of injuries were sustained?

Be prepared to assist the emergency services with any supplementary information theymay require.

1.2.3.6 Reporting Accidents

Report to your manager all accidents, near accidents, and possible hazards to ensure theircauses are resolved as soon as possible.

Report any electric shock, no matter how small.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




1.2.3.7 Safety Information for Australia

Music on Hold and paging devices must be connected to the HiPath 3000 via an ACA ap-proved Line Isolation Unit.

HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 must be installed near the mains socket-outlet, which is pow-ering the system. The mains socket shall be readily accessible. Integrity of the main socketearth must be assured.

The HiPath 3000/5000 communications servers must only be installed and maintained byservice personnel.

HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 must be earthed with a separate bonding earth, if the sys-tems are powered by a UPS.

CE (customer equipment) does not continue to support emergency dialing after loss ofmains power, if battery back up and power fail switchover to emergency analogue phonesis not available.

HiPath 3000/5000 shall always be programmed to allow the dialling of emergency numbers(example 000).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


1.2.4 Privacy and Data Security

Handling Personal Data

This telephone system uses and processes personal data (as in call detail recording, telephonedisplays and customer data records).

In Germany, the processing and use of such data is subject to various regulations, includingthose of the Federal Data Protection Law (Bundesdatenschutzgesetz, BDSG). Observe all ap-plicable laws in other countries.

The objective of privacy legislation is to prevent infringements of an individual’s right to privacybased on the use or misuse of personal data.

By protecting data against misuse during all stages of processing, privacy legislation also pro-tects the material interests of the individual and of third parties.

Guidelines Applicable to Siemens AG Employees

Employees of Siemens AG are bound to safeguard trade secrets and personal data under theterms of the company’s work rules.

It is imperative to observe the following rules to ensure that the statutory provisions relating toservice (on-site or remote) are strictly followed. This safeguards the interests of the customerand offers added personal protection.

Guidelines Governing the Handling of Data

A conscientious and responsible approach helps protect data and ensure privacy:

Ensure that only authorized persons have access to customer data.

Use the password features of the system with no exceptions. Never give passwords to anunauthorized person orally or in writing.

Ensure that no unauthorized person can ever process (store, modify, transmit, disable ordelete) or use customer data.

Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to data media (such as backup dis-kettes or log printouts. This applies to service calls as well as storage and transport.

Ensure that data media that are no longer needed are completely destroyed and that doc-uments are not stored or left in places which are accessible to the public.

Work closely with your customer contact; this promotes trust and reduces yourworkload.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




1.2.5 Information on the Intranet

Up-to-minute information on important topics is available on the Siemens intranet. Here is a se-lection:

Table 1-1 Information on the intranet

Content Languages URL

Product OverviewProduct descriptions

GermanEnglish

http://opus1.mchh.siemens.de:8080/ TopNet

Electronic Documentation on ComESY ProductsSelection and download of the follow-ing:

Operating manuals Administrator documentation Service documentation Sales documentation

GermanEnglishFrenchItalian

DutchPortugueseSpanish

https://netinfo2.icn.siemens.de/ edoku3/search_de.htm

List of “Frequently Asked Ques-tions FAQ)” in the VD portalQuestions and answers for HiPathcustomer scenarios: keyword“Solutions_Products_Services”

German http://vd-infochannel.icn.siemens.de/ cfdocs/faq/start.cfm

Knowledge Management for Oper-

ational Support and ServicesKMOSSPlatform for the provision of serviceinformation (successor to the Ser-vice Information System, SIS): Tips & Tricks Service information sorted ac-

cording to products

English https://kmoss.icn.siemens.de/livelink/

livelink.exe

TAC AdvisorTechnical Assistance Center for en-terprise and network partners: Downloads Software Maintenance Releases

(SMR) Configuration notes and alerts

English http://tac.fld.rolm.com/

Setting up tracing for the FeatureServerConfiguration notes and procedures

GermanEnglish

https://kmoss.icn.siemens.de/livelink/ livelink.exe/view/INF-02-000326



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Important Notices (for U.S. and Canada only)

– Attach a DO NOT OPERATE tag to the wall box-switch.

Never assume that the power is turned off. Always test to ensure that a circuit does nothave power.

Do not work alone. Work with another person who knows the locations of the power-offswitches.

Isolate or insulate yourself from exposed circuits.

Follow the instructions in the manual carefully, especially when working with circuits thatare powered. Disconnect power when instructed to do so in the procedures.

Disconnect all power before working near power supplies unless otherwise instructed by amaintenance procedure.

Disconnect all power before installing changes in machine circuits unless otherwise in-

structed by a maintenance procedure. High voltages capable of causing shock are used in this equipment. Be extremely careful

when measuring high voltages and when servicing cards, panels, and boards while thesystem is powered on.

Be sure to remove rings, watches, and other jewelry when working with electrical circuitsand components.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never install telephone wiringduring an electrical storm.

Never install a telephone jack where it can get wet unless the jack is specifically designedfor wet conditions.

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has beendisconnected at the network interface.

Avoid using a telephone (other than the cordless type) during an electrical storm due to theremote risk of shock from lightning.

1.3.1.2.2 Equipment Room

Look for hazards in your area and eliminate them. Examples are moist floors, ungroundedpower extension cables, power surges, and missing safety grounds.

Rubber electrostatic mats will not protect you from electrical shock. Do not use them forthis purpose. Stand on suitable rubber mats to insulate you from grounds such as metalfloor strips and machine frames.

Use only tools and testers suitable for the job, approved by Siemens ® Communications. Donot use worn or broken tools or testers; inspect them regularly.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


Set controls on testers correctly and use approved probe leads and accessories intendedfor that tester.

The surface of a mirror is conductive. Do not touch powered circuits with a mirror. To do so

can cause personal injury and machine damage. Do not store combustible gases or flammable materials in cabinets near the site.

1.3.1.2.3 Emergencies

Ensure you are familiar with the site emergency procedures of the location where you areperforming installation or maintenance.

Be familiar with first aid for electrical shock. This includes resuscitation methods, heartbeatrestoration, and burn treatment.

Use caution if an accident occurs. Disconnect the power before touching the victim. If you do not know how to disconnect the power, use a nonconductive object, such as a

wooden rod, to push or pull the victim away from electrical contact.

Administer resuscitation if the person is not breathing.

If you are trained and certified, administer cardiac compression if the heart is not beating.

Call a rescue group, an ambulance, or a hospital immediately.

1.3.1.3 Reporting Accidents

Report to your manager all accidents, near accidents, and possible hazards to ensure theircauses are resolved as soon as possible.

Report any electric shock, no matter how small.

1.3.2 About This Book

This manual provides overview information and instructions for installing, testing, and servicingthe HiPath 3000/5000™ communications server (CS) Version 4.0, models HiPath 3750™, Hi-Path 3550™, HiPath 3350™, HiPath 3700™, HiPath 3500™, HiPath 3300™ and HiPath 5000

RSM™

.Note: Except as indicated, the abbreviation “U.S.” also refers to Canada in indications on prod-uct availability and procedures in this book (such as “for U.S. only”); the term “Listed” indicates“Certified” in Canada.

The overview information includes a general description of each model, functional and physicaldescriptions of system hardware, and a summary of system software.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




The service information includes information for maintaining the HiPath 3000/5000 CS, includ-ing removing, replacing, verifying, and troubleshooting system hardware components and pe-ripheral equipment. System database recovery and manual trunk testing information are alsoincluded. The service information is written for Siemens-trained personnel who service and

maintain the HiPath 3000/5000 systems.

1.3.2.1 Prerequisite Knowledge

Persons installing or servicing an HiPath 3000/5000 communications server system must havebasic telephony and trunking knowledge and experience.

Safety Symbols

This manual uses the following symbols to indicate potential hazards:

Additional Symbols Identifying Sources of Potential Hazard

These symbols are not generally used in this manual, but may appear on the equipment.

* electrostatically sensitive devices

7DangerThis symbol warns that a situation may cause death or serious injury.

7WarningThis symbol indicates hazard which may lead to serious injury.

7CautionThis symbol indicates a risk of damage to hardware or software.

>This symbol identifies useful information.

1 5 3 0 6 4 2Electricity Weight Heat Fire Chemicals ESD* Laser




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


1.3.2.2 How to Use This Book

This manual is organized as follows:

Chapter 1, Important information provides safety information, general information about thisbook and HiPath 3000/5000, and FCC and Industry Canada statements.

Chapter 2, System Data contains information about design and system data for each of theHiPath 3000/5000 system models.

Chapter 3, Boards for HiPath 3000 provides an overview of all boards and components usedin the HiPath 3000 systems, then presents drawings and details of the boards.

Chapter 4, Installation HiPath 3000 provides the procedures for unpacking and installing theHiPath 3000 systems.

Chapter 5, Startup HiPath 3000, Chapter 6, Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 RSM

and Chapter 7, Startup HiPath 3000 as a Gateway contain information on how to start up asystem, including supplying power, entering data and performing a quick check of the system.

Chapter 8, Expanding, Upgrading of HiPath 3000 contains information on expanding and up-grading the HiPath 3000/5000 systems.

Chapter 9, Workpoint Clients contains the description of the workpoint clients and adapterssupported.

Chapter 10, HiPath Cordless Office provides system-specific cordless telephone informationfor the systems.

Chapter 11, Service provides information for troubleshooting and clearing faults, and for per-forming service and maintenance.

Chapter 12, IP Fundamentals contains information on IP network requirements and networkanalysis.

The following appendices contain lists with programming codes, IP protocols, port numbers:Appendix A, “System Programming Codes (Expert Mode Codes)”, Appendix B, “Codesfor Activating/Deactivating Features” and Appendix C, “IP Protocols and Port NumbersUsed with HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0”.

Appendix D, “Identifying System Power Requirement” provides information about the re-

source requirements of the boards and components of HiPath 3000 systems.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




1.3.2.3 Related Information

Related publications include the following manuals and guides:

HiPath 3000/5000 System Description, G281-0670-01

Basic Documentation CD, G281-0658-01

HiPath 3000/5000 Manager TC System Administration and User Manual, G281-0659-01

HiPath 3000/5000 optiClient Attendant Installation and User Manual, G281-0661-01

HiPath 3000/5000 optiset E optiPoint Attendant User Manual, G281-0660-01

HiPath 3000/5000 optiset E Telephones—User Manual, G281-0668-01

HiPath 3000/5000 optiset E Telephones—basic, G281-0662-01

HiPath 3000/5000 optiset E Telephones—entry, G281-0665-01 HiPath 3000/5000 optiset E Telephones—standard, advance plus/comfort, advance con-

ference/conference, G281-0669-01

HiPath 3000/5000 optiset E memory Operating Instructions, G281-0667-01

HiPath 3000/5000 Analog Telephone Operating Instructions, G281-0664-01

1.3.3 FCC and Industry Canada Compliance

This section describes the requirements for compliance with Federal Communications Com-

mission (FCC) Rules and Industry Canada Standard for the following Siemens system(s):

HiPath 3000 communications server (CS), HiPath 3750

HiPath 3000 CS, HiPath 3550





HiPath 5000 RSM CS




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


1.3.3.1 FCC Compliance

Service and Repairs

If you experience problems with the HiPath 3000/5000 CS, call Siemens at 1-800-406-7656 forservice and repairs.

If you experience problems with any Siemens system discussed in this section, call Siemensat 1-800-835-7656 for service and repairs.

The telephone company can ask you to disconnect the equipment from the network until theproblem is corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.

1.3.3.1.1 FCC Rules, Part 15

Each Siemens system discussed in this section,except the HiPath 3350,

has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference whenthe equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, andcan radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-tion manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equip-ment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will berequired to correct the interference at his own expense.

The HiPath 3350 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital de-vice, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential instal-lation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not in-stalled and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particularinstallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try tocorrect the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiveris connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


Newly Established Network Area and Exchange Codes

The off-net routing feature, also known as the least-cost routing (LCR) software feature, whichallows user access to the public switched network, must be reconfigured to recognize newly

established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed in service.Failure to reconfigure the customer premises equipment to recognize the new codes as theyare established restricts the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access tothe network and to these codes.

Hearing Aid Compatibility

Telephones for emergency use and telephones installed in common areas such as lobbies,hospital rooms, elevators, and hotel rooms must have handsets that are compatible with mag-netically coupled hearing aids. Persons who are not in common areas also must be providedwith hearing-aid compatible handsets, if needed.

For the hearing impaired, all Siemens digital telephones manufactured after August 16, 1989,are hearing aid compatible and comply with FCC Rules, Part 68, Section 68.316.

Preprogrammed Dialer Features

When you program emergency numbers or make test calls to emergency numbers using Sie-mens products with preprogrammed dialer features, stay on the line and briefly explain to thedispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up. Perform these activities in off-peak hours,such as early morning or late evening.

Connecting Off-Premises Station Facilities

Customers who intend to connect off-premises station (OPS) facilities must inform the tele-phone company of the OPS class for which the equipment is registered and the connection de-sired.

Direct Inward Dialing Answer Supervision

Customers operating any Siemens system discussed in this section without providing properanswer supervision are in violation of Part 68 of the FCC rules.

Each Siemens system discussed in this section returns proper answer supervision to thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN) when DID calls are:

– Answered by the called station

– Answered by the attendant

– Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer

Each Siemens system discussed in this section returns proper answer supervision on allDID calls forwarded to the PSTN. Permissible exceptions are when:



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




– A call is unanswered

– A busy tone is received

– A reorder tone is received

Equal Access Requirements

Call aggregators such as hotels, hospitals, airports, colleges and universities, and so on mustprovide the end user equal access to the carriers of the user’s choice. The current equal accesscodes (also known as carrier access codes [CACs]) are 10xxx and 101xxxx, and 800/888 and950, where xxx or xxxx represents the carrier identification code.

To select the carrier of choice for a call, the user dials the equal access code before dialing thecalled party number. Equal access is also obtained by dialing the 800/888 or 950 number of thecarrier of choice.

Each Siemens system discussed in this section is capable of providing user access to interstateproviders of operator services through the use of equal access codes. Modifications by aggre-gators to alter these capabilities are a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumer ServicesImprovement Act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules.

Electrical Safety Advisory

While each Siemens system discussed in this section is fully compliant with FCC Rules andRegulations, it is recommended that an alternating current (ac) surge arrestor of the form andcapability suitable for the model of the system purchased be installed in the ac outlet to which

the system is connected. Consult with your Siemens representative or distributor to determinethe surge protector requirements for your system.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


Facility Interface Information for the HiPath 3750 and the HiPath 3700

The following tables list facility interfaces, manufacturer’s network interface port designations,RENs or service codes, and network jacks.

This table lists the network trunk interfaces for loop-start and ground-start services.

This table lists the station interfaces for analog private line (PL) services.

This table lists the network digital trunk interfaces for digital services.

Facility Interface Manufacturer’s Network Inter-face Port Designation

REN Network Jacks

02LS2 TMGL8 1.2B RJ21X

02GS2 TMGL8 1.2B RJ21X

02RV2-T TMDID8 0.0 RJ21X

Analog PL FacilityInterface

Manufacturer’s Network Inter-face Port Designation

Service Code Network Jacks

OL13B SLA16 (OPS) 9.0F RJ21X

OL13B SLA24N (OPS) 9.0F RJ21X

TL11M TIEL4 9.0F RJ2EX

TL11E TIEL4 9.0F RJ2FX

TL12M TIEL4 9.0F RJ2GX

TL12E TIEL4 9.0F RJ2HX

TL31M TIEL4 9.0F RJ2EX

TL31E TIEL4 9.0F RJ2FX

TL31M TIEL4 9.0F RJ2GX

TL31E TIEL4 9.0F RJ2HX

Digital Facility In-terface



04DU9-BN TMST1 6.0P Refer to note04DU9-DN TMST1 6.0P Refer to note

04DU9-1KN TMST1 6.0P Refer to note

04DU9-1SN TMST1 6.0P Refer to note

Note: Always use this product with network channel terminating equipment that specifies the jack to use.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


Facility Interface Information for the HiPath 3550






REN Network Jacks



Analog PL Facility

Interface

Manufacturer’s Network Inter-

face Port Designation


OL13B 8SLA (OPS) 9.0 F RJ21X

OL13B 4SLA (OPS) 9.0 F RJ2GX

OL13B SLA24N (OPS) 9.0 F RJ21X




02IS5 TMQ4 board 6.0 Y RJ4904DU9-BN TST1 6.0 P Refer to note

04DU9-DN TST1 6.0 P Refer to note

04DU9-1KN TST1 6.0 P Refer to note

04DU9-1SN TST1 6.0 P Refer to note

Note: Always use this product with network channel terminating equipment that specifies the jack to use.



inform.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Facility Interface Information for the HiPath 3350






REN Network Jacks



Analog PL Facility

Interface

Manufacturer’s Network Inter-

face Port Designation


OL13B 8SLA (OPS) 9.0 F RJ21X

OL13B 4SLA (OPS) 9.0 F RJ2GX




02IS5 TMQ4 board 6.0 Y RJ49




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inform.fm


1.3.3.2 Industry Canada Compliance

The following paragraphs describe requirements for and present information based on the In-dustry Canada standards.

1.3.3.2.1 REN

The REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number ofterminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface mayconsist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENsof all the devices does not exceed five.

1.3.3.2.2 Equipment Attachment Limitations

The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the

equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety re-quirements as described in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement docu-ments. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfac-tion.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected tothe facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installedusing an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliancewith these conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the

supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunc-tions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect theequipment.

Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the pow-er utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected to-gether. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

7DANGERUsers should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contactthe appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

Introduction to HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0

2.2 Introduction to HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0

HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 is the combined follow-up version for the two product lines HiPath 3000and HiPath 5000 RSM in Version 3.0.

The systems contained in V4.0 can be implemented in the following scenarios:

HiPath 3000,its communication systems can be operated as standalone systems or as networked sys-tems (see Figure 2-1). Central administration is not possible in a network consisting of Hi-Path 3000 systems.

HiPath 5000 RSM,consists of a central administration unit (Real-Time Services Manager RSM) and a gate-way (HiPath 3000). An IP network comprising HiPath 5000 RSM and HiPath 3000 systemscan be created to form a “single system image” that can be centrally administered via the

Real-Time Services Manager RSM (= multi-node system, see Figure 2-2).

Figure 2-1 HiPath 3000 as Networked Systems

optiPoint400 ...optiClient 130

HiPath 3000

optiClientAttendant

HiPath 3000

PSTN

IP Network

HiPath 3000

HiPath Cordless

Office

optiPoint 500 ...optiset E ...

optiPoint600 office

HiPath 3000



sysdat.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


System Data


Figure 2-2 HiPath 5000 RSM Multi-Node System

optiPoint 400 ...

HiPath 5000 RSM

optiClient 130

HiPath 3000

optiClientAttendant

HiPath 3750

PSTN

IP Network

HiPath 3500

Real-Time Services ManagerRSM with: Central database Central administration Central call detail recording Feature Server Personal Call Manager PCM etc.

Central provision of applications(possibly installed on separate

servers), e.g.: HiPath Xpressions HiPath ProCenter Office SimplyPhone HiPath Fault Management etc.

HiPath CordlessOffice

optiPoint 500 ...optiset E ...

optiPoint 600 office



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm


Major advantages of the HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 are

The IP network comprising HiPath 5000 RSM with HiPath 3000 systems can form a “singlesystem image” that can be centrally administered via a shared server (= Real-Time Servic-

es Manager RSM) and supports the use of central applications. The IP networking protocol CorNet-N considerably expands the HiPath 5000 RSM range

of features. This makes the complete palette of HiPath 3000 telecommunications features,including the PC-based optiClient Attendant, available on the HiPath 5000 RSM as well.

Together with HiPath 3000 systems, HiPath 5000 RSM can form a 2000-station network,where up to 64 systems can be networked with one another. A HiPath 3000 system cansupport max. 500 stations.

By mixing the HiPath 3000 systems with HiPath 5000 RSM, you can use all the advantagesof the IP world without losing the features and interfaces of traditional communications sys-

tems.



sysdat.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


System Data

HiPath 3000

2.3 HiPath 3000

2.3.1 Introduction

Electrical environment

HiPath 3000 is intended for use in dwellings, businesses, and industry. When the system isoperated in an industrial environment, additional measures may be necessary for ensuring im-munity from electromagnetic radiation (refer to Section 2.9.4).

HiPath 3000 systems

This Service manual contains information on all HiPath 3000 systems. Information on market-ing individual models in different countries can be obtained at the responsible locations.

Systems for free-standing installation (HiPath 3750 only) and wall mounting

– HiPath 3750

– HiPath 3550

– HiPath 3350

Systems for installation in 19’’ cabinets

– HiPath 3700

– HiPath 3500

– HiPath 3300

Refer to HiPath 3000 for information on the capacity limits of the different Table 2-6 systems.

>For HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 or later, HiPath 3250 and HiPath 3150 systems will bemarketed as part of the HiPath 500 system family. The new product names will beHiPath 540 and HiPath 520.HiPath 500 installation and administration instructions will provide information in full.



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

HiPath 3000

2.3.2 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3000 Systems

2.3.2.1 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3750

Three Configurations

Depending on the requirements, HiPath 3750 can be used as:

a one-cabinet system (BC)

a two-cabinet system (BC + EC1)

A three-cabinet system (GB + EB1 + EB2)

Design

The HiPath 3750 uses “8-slot” cabinets, where expansion cabinet 1 (EC1) and expansion cab-inet 2 (EC2) are identical in design.

The BC has seven slots available for peripheral boards and each expansion cabinet has 8 slots.The UPSM power supply (in all cabinets) and the CPCPR central board (only in the BC) havefixed positions.

Up to two cabinets can be stacked.

A main distribution frame unit (MDFU/MDFU-E) is needed to complete the communication sys-tem.



sysdat.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


System Data

HiPath 3000

Dimensions

Figure 2-3 HiPath 3750 Dimensions

Cable duct

Depth of the MDFU or MDFU-E: 126 mmdepth of the system cabinet: 390mm

EB1

GBEB2

MDFU

MDFU-E

MDFU

MDFU

ca.328 mm

c a . 3

7 0 m m

ca.410 mm

c a . 9 8

0 m m

c a

. 6 7 0 m m



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

HiPath 3000


Design

The housing intended for wall mounting (Figure 2-4) HiPath 3550 contains one shelf with sixslot levels. The slot levels (shown in Figure 4-56), numbered in ascending order from the at-tachment side, have the following assignments:

Slot levels 1-3: peripheral boards (two slots per level).

Slot level 4: CBCC control board only.

Slot level 5: SIPAC slot (for HiPath 3750 boards).

Slot level 6: optional boards (up to 5 modules)

The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack.

The connecting cables to the peripherals (telephones, trunk connections etc.) can be connect-ed directly. Use an external MDFU in certain situations (CMI).

Dimensions


460 mm Mounting sur-face

450 mm

200 mm



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

HiPath 3000


Three Configurations

HiPath 3700Depending on the requirements, can be used as: a one-cabinet system (BC)

a two-cabinet system (BC + EC1)

a three-cabinet system (BC + EC1 + EC2), only when the 19’’ cabinets are next to one an-other and are accessible from the back.

A special mounting set enables installation in 19’’ cabinets.

Design

The HiPath 3700 uses “8-slot” cabinets. The BC has seven slots and the expansion cabinethas eight slots available for peripheral boards. The UPSM power supply (in all cabinets) andthe CPCPR central board (only in the BC) have fixed positions.

Dimensions


Depth of the system cabinet:ca. 390 mm

Necessary height units per box for 19“cabinet assembly: 11(one height unit corresponds to ap-prox. 1,7’’ = 43 mm)

EB1

GB

ca.410 mm

c a . 9

8 0 m m

EB2



sysdat.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


System Data

HiPath 3000


Design

The housing intended for use with 19’ cabinets (Figure 2-7) HiPath 3500 contains four slot lev-els with the following assignments (represented in Figure 4-64):

Slot levels 1-3: slide-in shelves for peripheral boards (2 boards can be plugged in on eachlevel)

Slot level 4: slide-in shelf for CBRC control board



Connection to the periphery (terminals, trunk connections etc.) is set up via MW8 sockets found

in module front cover.

Dimensions


440 mm

155 mm

380 mm

Necessary height units for 19“ cabinet assembly: 4(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’ = 43 mm)



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

HiPath 3000


Design

The housing intended for use with 19’ cabinets (Figure 2-8)HiPath 3300 contains three slotswith the following assignments (represented in Figure 4-65):

Slot level 1: slide-in shelves for two peripheral boards

Slot level 2: slide-in shelf for CBRC control board



Connection to the periphery (terminals, trunk connections etc.) is set up via MW8 sockets foundin module front cover.

Dimensions


440 mm

88 mm

380 mm

Necessary height units for 19“ cabinet assembly: 2(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’ = 43 mm)



sysdat.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


System Data

HiPath 3000

2.3.3 System Environment of the HiPath 3000 Systems

2.3.3.1 System Environment HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700

Table 2-1 Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700

Subscriber Line Modules Central Boards and Options Trunk Boards

ROW U.S. ROW U.S. ROW U.S.

IVML8 CBCPR HXGM3

IVML24 CMS STMD8 TMDID8

SLA8N CR8N TIEL

SLA16N IMODN TML8W TMGL8SLA24N LIM TMOM TMST1

SLC16 MMC TMS2

SLC16N UPSM TMAMF1

1 for Brazil, India, Malaysia, Singapore and ATEA countries only

SLMO8 TMCAS2

2 for selected countries only

SLMO24 GEE8

STMD8 MPPI

PDM1

PFT1/PFT4

REAL



sysdat.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


System Data

HiPath 3000

2.3.3.3 System Environment HiPath 3350

Table 2-3 Boards for HiPath 3350

HiPath 3350



IVMP8 CBCC HXGS3

IVMS8 CMA STLS2

CMS STLS4

SLU8 CUP TLA2 TMGL4

STLS2 IMODN TLA4 TMQ4

STLS4 LIM TLA8

4SLA MMC

8SLA PSUP

16SLA UPSC-D

ALUM4

ANI41


EXM

GEE12 EXMNA

GEE16

GEE50

UAM

MPPI

OPAL

PDM1

STBG4

2

2 for France only

STRB

V24/1



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

HiPath 3000



HiPath 3500



IVMS8R CBRC HXGR3

SLU8R CMA STLS4R

STLS4R CMS TS2R TMGL4R

8SLAR CUCR TLA4R TST1

IMODN

LIM

MMC

UPSC-DR

ANI4R1


EXMR

MPPI

OPALR

PDM1

STRBR

UAMR



sysdat.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


System Data

HiPath 3000



HiPath 3300



IVMP8R CBRC HXGR3

IVMS8R CMA STLS4R

SLU8R CMS TLA4R TMGL4R

STLS4R CUPR

8SLAR IMODN

LIM

MMC

UPSC-DR

ANI4R1


EXMR

MPPI

OPALR

PDM1

STRBR

UAMR



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

HiPath 5000 RSM

2.4 HiPath 5000 RSM

HiPath 5000 RSM consists of

a central administration unit (Real-Time Services Manager RSM) and a gateway (HiPath 3000).

Among others, this combination supports

the telecommunication features of a line-switched system.

up to 500 stations per node in an IP network consisting of up to 64 nodes and thus a totalconfiguration with up to 2000 stations.

the formation of a “single system image” that allows the central administration of all asso-ciated nodes.

the use of central applications by all stations in the IP network.

the use of trunks and tie trunks (interfaces and protocols).

increased security and reliability by supporting the H.235 security protocol and Quality ofService QoS (DiffServ, 802.1D).

Figure 2-9 HiPath 5000 RSM

PSTN(analog or

digitaltelecommunica-tions network)

HiPath 5000 RSM

optiClient Attendant optiClient 130

AP 1100

optiPoint 400standard 3.0

IP

HiPath 3000

TDM



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

System-Related Capacity Limits HiPath 3000/5000

4 Up to 61 of the 192 stations can be TDM stations (4xa/b + 1xUP0/E + 7xBS/32xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the centralboard + 3xSLU8R or 3x88SLAR).

5 Up to 41 of the 96 stations can be TDM stations (4xa/b + 5xUP0/E + 3xBS/16xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the centralboard + 1x16SLA).

6 Up to 33 of the 96 stations can be TDM stations (4xa/b + 5xUP0/E + 3xBS/16xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central

board + 1xSLU8R or 1x88SLAR).7 These are administrative capacity limits.8 Due to the power consumption of HG1500, a UPSC-D must be used.9 Due to the power consumption of HG1500, a UPSC-DR must be used.10 If the total number of UP0/E stations, analog stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than 72,

an external EPSU2 power supply unit must be used.11 4xa/b + 1xUP0/E + 7xBS/32xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central board + 5xSLU8R or 5x8SLAR.12 4xa/b + 5xUP0/E + 3xBS/16xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central board + 2x16SLA.13 4xa/b + 5xUP0/E + 3xBS/16xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central board + 2xSLU8R or 2x8SLAR.14 Testing using the project planning tool is not required for configurations of up to 384 analog stations, no other station types,

and 90 lines. Testing using the project planning tool is mandatory for configurations which include UCD/ACD, more thanone SLC16/SLC16N, or groups of more than 10 stations (Intranet: http://intranet.mch4.siemens.de/syseng/perfeng/tools/ hpt/index_en.htm).

15 4xa/b at the central board + 5x88SLAR.16 4xa/b at the central board + 2x16SLA.17 4xa/b at the central board + 2x8SLAR.18 8xUP0/E at the central board + 5xSLU8 + 1xSLMO24.19 8xUP0/E at the central board + 5xSLU8R.20 8xUP0/E at the central board + 2xSLU8.21 8xUP0/E at the central board + 2xSLU8R.22 The total number of UP0/E stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is limited to 384.23 If the total number of UP0/E stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than 24, a UPSC-D/

UPSC-DR must be used.24 Due to the 5V power supply unit, one SLC16/SLC16N and a maximum of 2 HG1500 V3.0 boards can be used.25 64 HiPath Cordless Office stations at the SLC16/SLC16N or 32 HiPath Cordless Office stations at the central board.26 Two HXGS3 or HXGR3 can be used with HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300 (however, without PDM1).



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

Interface-to-Interface Ranges

2.7 Interface-to-Interface Ranges

Telephone Interface-to-Interface Ranges

Trunk and CorNet-N Ranges

The table below provides the maximum cable lengths for direct trunk and CorNet-N wiring. Thevalues apply to ideal conditions, which means there can be no joints etc. The real conditions

must be measured on-site.

Table 2-8 Telephone Interface-to-Interface Ranges (with J-Y (ST) 2x2x0,6, 0.6 mm diam-eter)

Telephone Interfaces Range in m Loop Resistance in Ohms

ISDN-S0 point-to-point < 600 156

ISDN S0 extended bus connection < 400 104

ISDN S0 bus connection < 120 21

ISDN-S0 wall outlet to terminal < 10 –

Analog users < 2000 520UP0/E exchange to host (primary tele-phone)

< 1000 230

UP0/E host to client (primary telephone tosecondary telephone)

< 100 23

Table 2-9 Cable Lengths for Direct Trunk and CorNet-N Wiring

Interface Cable Diameter Attenuationper km

Max. CableLength

S0 ICCS cableJ-2Y(ST)Y4x2x0,51 LG ICCS Data5

0.51 mm 7.5 dBat 96 kHz

800 m

Installation cableJ-2Y(ST)Y ≥ 10x2x0,6 ST III BD

0.6 mm 6.0 dBat 96 kHz

1000 m

S2M

A-2Y0F(L)2Y ≥ 10x2x0,6 (full PE in-sulation, filled)

0.6 mm 17 dBat 1 MHz

350 m



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm

Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000

2.9 Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000

2.9.1 CE Compliance (not for U.S.)

The systems conform to the following guidelines and standards:

2.9.2 U.S. and Canadian Regulatory Compliance

2.9.3 SAFETY International

IEC 60950, third edition 1999 + correction January 2000 modified

Guideline Standard

R&TTE Directive 99/5/EEC EN 60950-1: 2001 (Safety) EN61000-6-2 (EMC Immunity Industrial) EN55024 (EMC Immunity Residential) ETS 300 329 (DECT Emission/Immunity) TBR 06, ETS 301489-1/6 (DECT Air Interface)

Table 2-11 U.S. and Canadian Regulatory Compliance

Category HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350

Electrical compliance UL 60950CSA C22.2

No. 60950-00

UL 60950CSA C22.2

No. 60950-00

FCC Part 68 registration AY3USA-33046-MF-EAY3USA-33047-KF-E

AY3USA–25214–MF–EAY3USA–25215–KF–E

Industry CanadaCS–03 certification

267 9147A 267 8782A

Ringer equivalency number (REN) 1.2 0.4



sysdat.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


System Data


2.9.4 Environmental Conditions

Operating Conditions (Electrical)

Operating limitsRoom temperature: +5 ... +40 °C (41 ... 104 °F)Absolute humidity: 2 ... 25 g H2O/m3

Relative humidity: 5 ... 80 %

System ventilation is by convection. Forced-air ventilation is required when HG1500 V3.0is used with HiPath 3550 und HiPath 3350.

Operating Conditions (mechanical)

The systems are intended for stationary use.

7CautionAvoid exposing the system to direct sunlight and heaters (excessive heat may dam-age the system).

Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used. Systems cov-ered with condensation must not, under any circumstances, be used.



System Data

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


sysdat.fm




boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Boards for HiPath 3000

Overview

3 Boards for HiPath 3000

3.1 Overview

Functional Overview of all Boards and Components Used

7 WARNINGThe system must be powered down and de-energized before removing or inserting all boards in the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 and beforeremoving or inserting the central boards of the HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700.

Table 3-1 HiPath 3000 – Functional Overview of All Boards and Components Used(Sheet 1 of 7)

Board orComponent

Part Number Model

Central Boards

CBCC S30810-Q2935-A201 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

CBCP S30810-Q2935-B201 HiPath 3350 (for Deutsche Telekom AGonly)

CBRC S30810-K2935-Z HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

CBCPR S30810-Q2936-X HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700CMA S30807-Q6931-X /HiPath 3350/HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

CMS S30807-Q6928-X HiPath 3000

CR8N S30810-Q2513-X100 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

CUC S30777-Q750-X HiPath 3550

CUCR S30777-Q750-Z HiPath 3500

CUP S30777-Q751-X HiPath 3350

CUPR S30777-Q751-Z HiPath 3300

IMODN S30807-Q6932-X100 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350/ HiPath 3700/HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

LIM S30807-Q6930-X HiPath 3000

MMC S30122-X7424-X HiPath 3000

PSUP S30122-K5658-M HiPath 3350

UPSC-D S30122-K5660-M300 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Overview

Peripheral BoardsCaution: The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300 peripheral boardsmust be firmly inserted into their slots; otherwise contact problems can cause board failure.

HXGM3 S30810-Q2942-X HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

HXGR3 S30810-K2943-Z HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

HXGS3 S30810-Q2943-X HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

IVML8 S30122-X7380-X100 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

IVML24 S30122-X7380-X HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

IVMP8 S30122-Q7379-X100 HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)

IVMP8R S30122-K7379-Z100 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)

IVMS8 S30122-Q7379-X HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

IVMS8R S30122-K7379-Z HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

SLA8N S30810-Q2929-X200 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700(not for U.S.)

SLA16N S30810-Q2929-X100 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700

SLA24N S30810-Q2929-X HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700

SLC16 S30810-Q2922-X HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700(not for U.S.)

SLC16N S30810-Q2193-X100 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700(not for U.S.)

SLMO8 S30810-Q2901-X100 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (not for U.S.)

SLMO24 S30810-Q2901-X HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700

SLU8 S30817-Q922-A301 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

SLU8R S30817-K922-Z301 HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

STLS2 S30817-Q924-B313 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)STLS4 S30817-Q924-A313 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

STLS4R S30817-K924-Z313 HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

STMD8 S30810-Q2558-X200 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

TIEL S30810-Q2520-X HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

TLA2 S30817-Q923-Bxxx HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)


Board or

Component

Part Number Model



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Overview

7DANGER (for U.S. Only)To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning, the following boardsrequire secondary protection when their wiring leaves the building wherethe main distribution frame is housed:

SLA16 SLA16N SLA24N TMDID8

TMGL8 TIEL4* TMST1** TST1**

*If not connected to facility provider terminal equipment.**When this module is connected to the public network, secondary protec-tion must be provided by the CSU.


Board or

Component

Part Number Model




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Overview

Options

ALUM4 S30817-Q935-A HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

ANI4 S30807-Q6917-A103 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (for selectedcountries only)

ANI4R S30807-Q6917-Z103 HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300 (for selectedcountries only)

EXM S30817-Q902-B401 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

EXMNA S30817-Q6923-X HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (for U.S. only)

EXMR S30122-K7403-Z HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

GEE8 S30817-Q664-xxxx HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (not for U.S.)

GEE12 S30817-Q951-Axxx HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)



HOPE board S30122-Q7078-XS30122-Q7079-X

HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (for U.S. only)

MPPI S30122-K5380-X200 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)

MPPI S30122-K7275-B HiPath 3000 (not for U.S.)

OPAL C39195-A7001-B130 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

OPALR C39195-A7001-B142 HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

PDM1 PDM1

S30807-Q5692-X100 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350/HiPath 3500/ HiPath 3300

PFT1/PFT4 S30777-Q539-XS30777-Q540-X

HiPath 3750 (not for U.S.)

REAL S30807-Q5913-X HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700STBG4 S30817-Q934-A HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (France only)

STRB S30817-Q932-A HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

STRBR S30817-Q932-Z HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

UAM S30122-X7217-X HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)

UAMR S30122-X7402-Z HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)


Board or

Component

Part Number Model

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Overview

V24/1 S30807-Q6916-X100 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)

For U.S. Only: Other Field-Replaceable Units for All Models

RS-232 cable – HiPath 3000

Basic cabinet S30777-U757-X103 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

Expansion cabinet S30777-U708-X103 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

Backplane basiccabinet

S30777-Q757-X HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

Backplane expan-sion cabinet S30777-Q708-X100 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

Cabinet S30777-U711-A103 HiPath 3550




MDF cables S30267-Z320-A4 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350/HiPath 3500/ HiPath 3300

MDF cables S30267-Z321-A4 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

Inter-cabinet cable S30267-Z178-A13 HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700

Cable TST1 toCSU

S30269-27256-A HiPath 3750

Seismic anchor kit S30777-D41-X HiPath 3750

Wall mount kit S30777-D40-X HiPath 3750

Power supply cord C39195-Z7001-C19 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

ALUM4 adaptercable

C39195-A7001-B105 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

Ribbon cable ANI4 to TMGL4

C39195-A7001-B87-1 HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

Cable ANI4R toTMGL4R

C39195-A7001-C69 HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300

Cable TST1 toCSU

S30122-K7031-X HiPath 3550


Board or

Component

Part Number Model




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Overview

Model Overview of all Boards and Components Used

Table 3-2 HiPath 3000 – Model Overview of all Boards and Components Used (Sheet 1of 13)

Board orComponent

Part Number Function

HiPath 3750 / HiPath 3700

CBCPR S30810-Q2936-X Central board

CMS S30807-Q6928-X Central board

CR8N S30810-Q2513-X100 Central board

GEE8 S30817-Q664-xxxx Option (not for U.S.)

HXGM3 S30810-Q2942-X Peripheral boardIMODN S30807-Q6932-X100 Central board

IVML8 S30122-X7380-X100 Peripheral board

IVML24 S30122-X7380-X Peripheral board

LIM S30807-Q6930-X Central board

MMC S30122-X7424-X Central board

MPPI S30122-K7275-B Option (not for U.S.)

PDM1 S30807-Q5692-X100 Option

PFT1/PFT4 S30777-Q539-XS30777-Q540-X

Option (not for U.S.)

REAL S30807-Q5913-X Option

SLA8N S30810-Q2929-X200 Peripheral board (not for U.S.)

SLA16N S30810-Q2929-X100 Peripheral board

SLA24N S30810-Q2929-X Peripheral board

SLC16 S30810-Q2922-X Peripheral board (not for U.S.)

SLC16N S30810-Q2193-X100 Peripheral board (not for U.S.)

SLMO8 S30810-Q2901-X100 Peripheral board (not for U.S.)SLMO24 S30810-Q2901-X Peripheral board

STMD8 S30810-Q2558-X200 Peripheral board

TIEL S30810-Q2520-X Peripheral board

TMAMF S30810-Q2587-A200 Peripheral board (for selected countries only)

TMCAS S30810-Q2938-X Peripheral board (for selected countries only)

TMDID S30810-Q2507-X Peripheral board (for U.S. only)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Overview

For U.S. Only: Other Field-Replaceable Units for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700

RS-232 cable – Cable

Basic cabinet S30777-U757-X103 Cabinet

Expansion cabinet S30777-U708-X103 Cabinet

Backplane basiccabinet

S30777-Q757-X Backplane

Backplane expan-sion cabinet

S30777-Q708-X100 Backplane

Inter-cabinet cable S30267-Z178-A13 Cable

Cable TST1 to CSU S30269-27256-A Cable

Seismic anchor kit S30777-D41-X Anchors

Wall mount kit S30777-D40-X Bracket

7DANGER (for U.S. Only)To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning, the followingboards require secondary protection when their wiring leaves the build-

ing where the main distribution frame is housed: SLA16 SLA16N SLA24N TMDID8

TMGL8 TIEL4* TMST1**

*If not connected to facility provider terminal equipment.**When this module is connected to the public network, secondary pro-tection must be provided by the CSU.


Board or

Component




boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Overview

HiPath 3550Caution: The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 peripheral boardsmust be firmly inserted into their slots; otherwise contact problems can cause board failure.

ALUM4 S30817-Q935-A Option

ANI4 S30807-Q6917-A103 Option (for selected countries only)

CBCC S30810-Q2935-A201 Central board

CMA S30807-Q6931-X Central board


CUC S30777-Q750-X Central board

EXM S30817-Q902-B401 Option (not for U.S.)

EXMNA S30817-Q6923-X Option (for U.S. Only)

GEE12 S30817-Q951-Axxx Option (not for U.S.)




Option (for U.S. only)

HXGS3 S30810-Q2943-X Peripheral board

IMODN S30807-Q6932-X100 Central board

IVMS8 S30122-Q7379-X Peripheral board



MPPI S30122-K5380-X200S30122-K7275-B


OPAL C39195-A7001-B130 Cable


SLA8N S30810-Q2929-X200 Peripheral board (not for U.S.)

SLA16N S30810-Q2929-X100 Peripheral board

SLA24N S30810-Q2929-X Peripheral board

SLC16 S30810-Q2922-X Peripheral board (not for U.S.)

SLC16N S30810-Q2193-X100 Peripheral board (not for U.S.)


Board or

Component


http://-/?-

http://-/?-



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Overview

For U.S. Only: Other Field-Replaceable Units for HiPath 3550


Cabinet S30777-U711-A103 Cabinet

MDF cables S30267-Z320-A4 Cable


Power supply cord C39195-Z7001-C19 Cord

ALUM4 adapter ca-

ble

C39195-A7001-B105 Cable

Ribbon cable ANI4 to TMGL4

C39195-A7001-B87-1 Cable

Cable TST1 to CSU S30122-K7031-X Cable

7DANGER (for U.S. Only)

To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning, the following Hi-Path 3550 boards require secondary protection when their wiring leavesthe building where the main distribution frame is housed:

CBCC SLU8 8SLA SLA16N

SLA24N STLS4 TST1*

*When this module is connected to the public network, secondary pro-tection must be provided by the CSU.


Board or

Component





P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Overview

HiPath 3350Caution: The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 peripheral boardsmust be firmly inserted into their slots; otherwise contact problems can cause board failure.

ALUM4 S30817-Q935-A Option

ANI4 S30807-Q6917-A103 Option (for selected countries only)

CBCC S30810-Q2935-A201 Central board

CBCP S30810-Q2935-B201 Central board (for Deutsche Telekom AGonly)

CMA S30807-Q6931-X Central board


CUP S30777-Q751-X Central board

EXM S30817-Q902-B401 Option (not for U.S.)

EXMNA S30817-Q6923-X Option (for U.S. only)





Option (for U.S. only)

HXGS3 S30810-Q2943-X Peripheral board

IMODN S30807-Q6932-X100 Central board

IVMP8 S30122-Q7379-X100 Peripheral board (not for U.S.)

IVMS8 S30122-Q7379-X Peripheral board (not for U.S.)



MPPI S30122-K5380-X200S30122-K7275-B



OPAL C39195-A7001-B130 Cable

PSUP S30122-K5658-M Central board

SLU8 S30817-Q922-A301 Peripheral board


Board or

Component


http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Overview

7DANGER (for U.S. Only)To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning, the following Hi-Path 3350 boards require secondary protection when their wiring leavesthe building where the main distribution frame is housed: CBCC SLU8 8SLA STLS4


Board or

Component





P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Overview

For U.S. Only: Other Field-Replaceable Units for HiPath 3500


Cabinet S30777-U711-A903 Cabinet


Cable ANI4R toTMGL4R

C39195-A7001-C69 Cable


Board or

Component




boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

Diagram of CBCC Board (S30810-Q2935-A201)

Figure 3-1 CBCC Interface (S30810-Q2935-A201)

1

X14

To backplane (CUC)

8 x UP0/E 4 x a/b

MPPI or EXM

X8 options busTo V.24moduleV24/1

X5

X7

X650 2 50 226

1

1 8X3

X1150 2

2 x S0

CMA

X13

1

CMS

1

X17

IMODN

X15 1 X161

X12

LIM

MMC

Reset/reloadswitch

RUN LED

1 10X4

1 8X2

1 8X1

LAN connector, 8-pole RJ45 jack

V.24 interface,9-pin SUB-D plug(service PC or application)

X9

1

X20

X19

MPPI

X27

Batt.

X18



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

CBCC and CBRC Contact Assignments

Table 3-3 CBCC - X1 to X4 Contact Assignments

Pin Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Connector X4

UP0/E a/b MPPI or EXM

1 UP0/E port 1b UP0/E port 5b a/b port 1a GND

2 UP0/E port 1a UP0/E port 5a a/b port 1b Not assigned

3 UP0/E port 2b UP0/E port 6b a/b port 2a Not assigned

4 UP0/E port 2a UP0/E port 6a a/b port 2b EXMCLK(512 kHz data cycle)

5 UP0/E port 3b UP0/E port 7b a/b port 3a EXMDIR

(8 kHz frame cycle)6 UP0/E port 3a UP0/E port 7a a/b port 3b EXMRES

(high-active reset)

7 UP0/E port 4b UP0/E port 8b a/b port 4a EXMD(data line)

8 UP0/E port 4a UP0/E port 8a a/b port 4b EXMDET(detect signal)

9 – – – +5 V

10 – – – Not assigned

Table 3-4 CBRC - X1 and X3 Contact Assignments

Pin Connector X1 Connector X3

UP0/E a/b

14 UP0/E port 1a a/b port 1a

15 UP0/E port 1b a/b port 1b


25 UP0/E port 2b a/b port 2b34 UP0/E port 3a a/b port 3a




54 UP0/E port 5a –

55 UP0/E port 5b –




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Central Boards







Table 3-5 CBCC and CBRC - X9 Contact AssignmentsPin Connector X9

S0

11 S0 port 1, transmit +

12 S0 port 1, receive +

13 S0 port 1, receive –

14 S0 port 1, transmit –





Table 3-4 CBRC - X1 and X3 Contact Assignments


UP0/E

a/b



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

CBCP Contact Assignments

Table 3-9 CBCP - X1 to X4 Contact Assignments

Pin Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Connector X4

UP0/E a/b MPPI or EXM

1 UP0/E port 1b UP0/E port 5b a/b port 1a GND

2 UP0/E port 1a UP0/E port 5a a/b port 1b Not assigned

3 UP0/E port 2b UP0/E port 6b a/b port 2a Not assigned

4 UP0/E port 2a UP0/E port 6a a/b port 2b EXMCLK(512 kHz data cycle)

5 UP0/E port 3b UP0/E port 7b a/b port 3a EXMDIR

(8 kHz frame cycle)6 UP0/E port 3a UP0/E port 7a a/b port 3b EXMRES

(High-active reset)

7 UP0/E port 4b UP0/E port 8b a/b port 4a EXMD(data line)

8 UP0/E port 4a UP0/E port 8a a/b port 4b EXMDET(detect signal)

9 – – – +5 V

10 – – – Not assigned

Table 3-10 CBCP - X9 Contact Assignments

Pin Connector X9

S0




14 S0 port 1, transmit –21 S0 port 2, transmit +






boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

Diagram of the CBCPR Board

Figure 3-4 CBCPR Board (S30810-Q2936-X)

1

X13

CMA

X14

CMS

X17

IMODN

X16

X15

X20 1

1

X19MPPI

X12

1

X18

LIM

MMC

RUN LED

Reset/reloadswitch

LAN connector,8-pole RJ45 jack

V.24 interface,9-pin SUB-Dplug (service PC orapplication)

1

1

1

1

X27Batt.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

3.2.4 CMA

Introduction

The Clock Module ADPCM CMA (S30807-Q6931-X) is an optional subboard for the CBCC andCBRC central control boards. The CMA module is needed for special HiPath Cordless Office

configurations.All clock module small (CMS) functions are available when you insert a CMA module.

Please refer to page 3-38 for recommendations on CMA module implementation.

7Caution

Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the CMA subboard.The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard, so youshould always mount them (see Figure 3-5).Otherwise you may damage the board.

Figure 3-5 CMA with Spacing Bolts

Spacing bolts

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

3.2.8 CUP and CUPR

The backplane comes in two versions:

CUP (Connection Unit Point) S30777-Q751-X (Figure 3-10) - for use in HiPath 3350 (wallhousing)

CUPR (Connection Unit Point Rack) S30777-Q751-Z (Figure 3-11) - for use in HiPath 3300(19-inch housing)

CUP Connector Designations and Slot Assignments (S30777-Q751-X)

CUPR Connector Designations and Slot Assignments (S30777-Q751-Z)

Figure 3-10 CUP Backplane (S30777-Q751-X)

Figure 3-11 CUPR Backplane (S30777-Q751-Z)

Slot 4 (X20) Slot 5 (X30)PSU/UPS (X1)

CBCC

Peripheral board

CUP

Slot 2 (8 x UP0/E) Slot 1 (2 x S0) Slot 3 (4 x a/b)

Slot 4 (X20) Slot 5 (X30)PSU/UPS (X1)

CBRC

Peripheral board

CUPR

Slot 2 (8 x UP0/E) Slot 1 (2 x S0) Slot 3 (4 x a/b)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Central Boards

3.2.11 MMC

Introduction

The multimedia card (MMC) is a plug-in memory card for the central control boards and con-tains the CDB backup and the country-specific and release-specific application processor soft-ware (APS).

Please note that the MMC may only be replaced by a multimedia card released by SiemensAG. Cards that have not been released may have a different internal structure, which affectstemporal access and some features (for example CDB backup and APS transfer).

Table 3-19 Multimedia Card Models and Applications

MMC Part Number Country Application in HiPath 3000

H i P a t h 3 7 5 0

H i P a t h 3 5 5 0

H i P a t h 3 3 5 0

H i P a t h 3 3 5 0

w i t h C B C C

H i P a t h 3 7 0 0

H i P a t h 3 5 0 0

H i P a t h 3 3 0 0

H i P a t h 3 3 0 0

w i t h C B R C

HiPath 3000 Version 3.0

MMC16(16 MB)

S30122-X7424-X(= empty basic MMC)

World X X X X X X X X

P30370-P1031-A816 X X

P30370-P1032-A816 X X X XP30370-P1033-A816 X X

HiPath 3000 Version 4.0

MMC16(16 MB)

S30122-X7424-X(= empty basic MMC)


P50038-P1009-A816 X X

P50038-P1010-A816 X X X X

P50038-P1011-A816 X X

MMC64(64 MB)

S30122-X8002-X10(= empty basic MMC)


P50038-P1010-A864 X X X X X X

P50038-P1011-A864 X X



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

3.2.12 PSUP

Introduction

The power supply PSUP S30122-K5658-M (Figure 3-15) is used in HiPath 3350 (wall housing).The device plugs into a special slot and is secured by screws. It connects to the power outletusing a modular power cord.

A monitoring LED indicates the presence of the 5 V output voltage.

Technical Specifications

Nominal voltage range: 100 Vac - 240 Vac

Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz

Ring generator: 75 Vac, 20/25/50 Hz Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V

Power consumption: 70 W

PSUP Interfaces (S30122-K5658-M)

7CautionSystem voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the powercord.

Figure 3-15 PSUP Interface (S30122-K5658-M)

X1

Power plug

To CUP

1

50

Slide switch for setting ring frequencyfor following country settings: 25 Hz = Germany + international 50 Hz = France 20 Hz = USA

25 Hz50 Hz20 Hz




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Central Boards

3.2.13 UPSC-D

Introduction

The board UPSC-D S30122-K5660-M300 (Figure 3-16) is used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath3350 (wall housing).

This module supports power supply and battery management functions. No other componentsare required if it is operated as an AC power supply. To maintain short-term battery emergencyoperation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power supply functions, you mustalso connect a battery pack.

If the power supplied by the UPSC-D is insufficient, an external EPSU2 power supply can beinstalled to provide additional power. To do this, connect the DC port on the EPSU2 to the spe-cial –48 Vdc input on the UPSC-D. The UPSC-D’s internal 48 V output is deactivated when the

external power supply is connected.

Licensed Battery Pack

S30122-K5928-X (48 V (4 x 12 V)/1,2 Ah battery pack)This is the only battery pack released for connection to UPSC-D.

7WarningThe UPSC-D power supply unit is only released for permanent AC power supply.Permanent operation at a direct-current system is not allowed.

A DC power supply unit is only connected to bridge an AC power failure (emergencybattery operation).If a 48-V direct-current system is being used instead of a battery pack for DC powersupply, connection must be performed as for a battery pack. The 48-V direct-currentsystem must not exceed the limit of 60 V in operating mode, during loading, andwhen an error occurs. The direct-current system must not be connected to theUPSC-D if this cannot be guaranteed.

7DangerDo not use 24 V batteries (S30122-K5403-X) in conjunction with UPSC-D as an ex-plosive gas (hydrogen + oxygen) escapes when the battery is overloaded.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

Technical Specifications

Nominal voltage range: 100 Vac - 240 Vac


Ring generator: 75 Vac, 20/25/50 Hz

Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V

Battery charger: 4 x 12 V (40.8 V-55.2 V)

Power consumption: 180 W

Bridging timesTable 3-20 lists the maximum possible bridging times (battery operation in case of powerfailure) with battery pack S30122-K5928-X (48 V/1,2 Ah), depending on the system.

Table 3-20 UPSC-D - Bridging Times with Battery Pack S30122-K5928-X (48 V/ 1,2 Ah)

System Power supply Load levels Maximumbridging time

HiPath 3350 UPSC-D Normal output load = 5 V/3 A;–48 V/0,5 A; ringing approx. 2 VA

19 min

HiPath 3550 UPSC-D Normal output load 100% = 5 V/8 A;–48 V/1,1 A; ringing approx. 4 VA

6 min

HiPath 3550 UPSC-D Normal output load 60% = 5 V/4.8 A;–48 V/0,66 A; ringing approx. 2 VA

15 min

HiPath 3550 UPSC-D withEPSU2

Normal output load 100% = 5 V/8 A;–48 V/2,5 A (external via EPSU2);ringing approx. 4 VA

17 min

Measurement conditions: All measurements were performed at a room temperature of approximately 23 °C

(73,4 °F). The batteries were fully charged when the measurement was started.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

3.2.14 UPSC-DR

Introduction

The board UPSC-DR S30122-K7373-M900 (Figure 3-20) is used in HiPath 3500 and HiPath3300 (19-inch housing).

This module supports power supply and battery management functions. No other componentsare required if it is operated as an AC power supply. To maintain short-term battery emergencyoperation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power supply functions, you mustalso connect a battery pack (see Section 8.2.3).

If the power supplied by the UPSC-DR is insufficient, an external EPSU2-R power supply canbe installed to provide additional power. To do this, connect the DC port on the EPSU2-R to thespecial –48 Vdc input on the UPSC-DR. The UPSC-DR’s internal 48 V output is deactivatedwhen the external power supply is connected.

7WarningThe UPSC-DR power supply unit is only released for permanent AC power supply.Permanent operation at a direct-current system is not allowed.

A DC power supply unit is only connected to bridge an AC power failure (emergencybattery operation).If a 48-V direct-current system is being used instead of a battery pack for DC powersupply, connection must be performed as for a battery pack. The 48-V direct-currentsystem must not exceed the limit of 60 V in operating mode, during loading, andwhen an error occurs. The direct-current system must not be connected to theUPSC-DR if this cannot be guaranteed!

7DANGERThe UPSC-DR board is not insulated.

Consequently, a system using a UPSC-DR may only be operated with a closedhousing.Before opening the housing, make sure that the system is de-energized as follows: by disconnecting the battery voltage and line voltage at any connected ECR

(see Section 8.2.3.1, ECR Control, Display, and Connecting Elements). by disconnecting the line cord attached to any connected batteries (installed in

the ECR) (see Section 8.2.3.4, Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries). by disconnecting the line cord attached to any connected EPSU2-R (installed in

the ECR) (see Section 8.2.3.5, Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteriesand EPSU2-R).

by disconnecting the power plug.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

Diagram of UPSC-DR


(73,4 °F). The batteries were fully charged when the measurement was started.

Figure 3-20 UPSC-DR (S30122-K7373-M900)

Table 3-21 UPSC-DR - Bridging Times with four Batteries V39113-W5123-E891 (4 x12 V/7 Ah Batteries)

System Power supply Load levels Maximum

bridging time

LED, yellow

LED, green




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Central Boards

Connectors

Figure 3-23 UPSC-DR - Connectors

Power plugConnector for batteries andEPSU2-R (installed in the ECR)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Central Boards

Indicator and Switch

An LED lights up to indicate that the UPSM is in operation. The UPSM must be replaced whendefective (LED does not light up).

Part Numbers UPSM: S30122-K5950-S100 (Figure 3-24), S30122-K5950-A100 (Figure 3-25), S30122-

K5959-S121 (for RSA only)

Battery pack 4 x 12 V / 7 Ah: S30122-K5950-Y200(The connecting cable for the UPSM is part of the battery pack.)

Battery cabinet BSG 48/38: S30122-K5950-F300 (page 3-68)

– Battery cable for BSG 48/38: S30122-X5950-F310(one battery cable necessary for each system box (UPSM) to be connected)

– Battery 12 V / 38 Ah: S30122-X5950-F320(four batteries necessary for each BSG 48/38)

Specifications

Nominal voltage range: 100 VAC - 240 VAC


Max. input current consumption: 5.4 A - 2.7 A

>For U.S. only:The UPSM can be installed in the following cabinets: Basic cabinet Expansion cabinet 1: S30777-U709-X Expansion cabinet 2: S30777-U709-X100The UPSM can also be installed on new backplanes with re-oriented Champ con-nectors. The battery back-up function of the UPSM is not used in the U.S.

7CautionWhen mounting the UPSM on the cabinet frame, be careful to prevent screws fromfalling into the power supply unit through the ring generator opening. If a screw fallsinside the UPSM, remove the screw before starting up the unit.

7CautionThe switches for deactivating the secondary operating voltage (system supply volt-age) must be set to “Off” on all UPSMs during maintenance work that requires thesystem to be de-energized (e.g. central board replacement).



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Central Boards

Max. power consumption: around 430 W

Output voltage (battery charging voltage): 42.5 - 55.2 VDC

Output current (battery charge current): 0.8 A(sufficient for battery set rating) = 7 Ah)

Bridging timesTable 3-22 lists the maximum possible bridging times (battery operation in case of powerfailure) with battery pack S30122-K5950-Y200 (48 V/7 Ah).

The battery recharging time is approx. 8.5 h.

Specifications of the Modular Ring Generator

Rated output voltages: 75 Vact (60 Veff in UPSM model for RSA)

Output frequencies: 20 / 25 / 50 Hz

Output power

– continuous: 4.0 VA

– peak: 8.0 VA (3 minutes load/ 15 minutes pause)

Table 3-22 UPSM - Bridging Times with Battery Pack S30122-K5950-Y200 (48 V/ 7 Ah)

System Power supply Load levels Maximumbridging time

HiPath 3750HiPath 3700

UPSM 100% nominal load 1 h


UPSM 60% nominal load 1 h 40 min


(71,6 °F). The cut-off voltage is 1.7 V per cell. The batteries were new and fully charged when measurement started.

≥



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Board Versions

Eight simultaneous Voice-over-IP connections are possible per DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

Table 3-23 HXGM3 Board Versions

Board Part Number Services DSPs B channelsDSP channels

HXGM3 S30810-Q2942-X Voice and Data 2 16



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Interfaces/Connections

The HXGM3 board provides the following connections:

X10: 9-pin Sub-D connector for V.24 interface

Backplane: The LAN adapter connector C39228-A7195-A10 (see Figure 3-30) is inserteddirectly on the backplane connector SU Xx8 or SU Xx9 for a LAN connection. The LAN ca-ble is connected to the RJ45 socket of the adapter.

For U.S. only: The LAN connection is made using a special adapter cable (CHAMP in ac-cordance with RJ45) (see Figure 3-31).

Both LAN interfaces allow access to Standard Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) with 10 Mbps or100 Mbps with automatic configuration. Manual configuration is also possible.

Figure 3-29 HXGM3 Interfaces

LED H0 (red)LED H1 (green)

V.24 interface X10

LAN connectionsvia LAN adapterconnector:

LAN 2 (SU Xx8)

LAN 1 (SU Xx9)

Backplane

HGA slot 2

HGA slot 0 HGA slot 1




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

LED Statuses and Their Meanings

V.24interface

The V.24 cable C30267-Z355-A25 is used for connecting the service PC.

The following settings must be chosen for a terminal or PC connected to the V.24 interface:

Table 3-25 HXGM3 LED Concept

LED Meaning

H1(Green)On Board is active, but there are no active calls

Flashing At least one call is activated

H0 (Red)On Error

Flashing Start (after a restart)

Transmission rate 19,200

Data bits 8

Parity bit None

Stop bits 1

Data flow control None

It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC.

Table 3-26 HXGM3 V.24 interface X10 Assignments

Pin Signal I/O Remark

1

2 RXD I Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)

3 TXD O

4 DTR O

5 0 V Ground

6 DSR I Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)7 RTS O

8 CTS I Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)

9



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.2 HXGS3 and HXGR3 (V4.0 SMR-4 or Later)

Introduction

HXGS3 and HXGR3 are VoIP gateway boards (VoIP - Voice over IP), which provide the func-tionality of HG1500 Version 3.0 in HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350 (HXGS3) and HiPath 3500, HiPath3300 (HXGR3):

Connection of a local LAN to the HiPath 3000 and connection with external LANs via theISDN and DSL interfaces of HiPath 3000.

Support for the conventional functions of an ISDN and DSL router with the additional func-tionality of a media gateway for the transfer of voice, fax and data.

Forwarding of calls between IP-supported networks (LAN, Intranet, Internet) and circuit-switched networks (ISDN, PSTN).

With HG1500 V3.0 or later, a HTML-supported tool is used instead of HiPath 3000 Manager Ifor configuration. This web-based management (WBM) allows administration of HG1500 with-out special software.

Information about the calculation of the required HG1500 V3.0 boards can be found in Section9.6.4.

>Up to three boards can be used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500. To support thismaximum configuration, slot 10 (board in HiPath 3750 format) must remain free.A maximum of one board is permitted in HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300.When using an HXGS3 in HiPath 3350, power supply unit PSUP must be replacedwith UPSC-D. It is not possible to operate an HXGS3 or HXGR3 and an LIM module simultaneously

in one system.Refer to the HG1500 V3.0 Installation Manual and the HG1500 V3.0 ConfigurationManual for information on the startup and configuration.

7WarningWhen using an HXGS3 board in a HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350, fan kit C39165-A7021-D3 must be installed for thermal reasons (see page 3-83).

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Board Versions

Eight simultaneous Voice-over-IP connections are possible per DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

Extension modules

The HXGS3 and HXGR3 boards each have two HGA (HiPath Gateway Accelerator) slots,which can be used to connect extension modules.

Table 3-29 HXGS3/HXGR3 Board Versions

Board Part Number Services DSPs B channelsDSP channels

HXGS3 S30810-Q2943-X Voice and Data 1 8

HXGR3 S30810-K2943-Z Voice and Data 1 8

>If extension module PDM1 is used, the number of DSP channels for boards HXGS3and HXGR3 can be expanded by eight in each case.

Table 3-30 HXGS3/HXGR3 Extension Modules

Extensionmodule

Part Number Function Notes

PDM1

(PMC DSPmodules)

S30807-Q5692-

X100

Used for expansion by eight addi-

tional DSP channels.

Maximum of one

PDM1 module possi-ble.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Interfaces/connections

The HXGS3 and HXGR3 boards provide the following connections:

X1: 50-pin connector (edge connector) to the system

X2: 8-pin RJ45 socket for LAN interface 1

X3: 8-pin RJ45 socket for LAN interface 2

Both LAN interfaces allow access to Standard Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) with 10 Mbps or100 Mbps with automatic configuration. Manual configuration is also possible.

X4: 9-pin Sub-D connector for V.24 interface

Figure 3-34 HXGS3/HXGR3 Interfaces

HGA slot 1 HGA slot 0

V.24 interface X4

LAN connections:LAN 1 (X2)

LAN 2 (X3)toCUC/ CUCR /

CUP/ CUPR

50

X1

2




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

V.24interface

The V.24 cable C30267-Z355-A25 is used for connecting the service PC.

The following settings must be chosen for a terminal or PC connected to the V.24 interface:

Transmission rate 19.200

data bits 8

Parity bit None

Stop bits 1

Data flow control None

It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC.

Table 3-32 HXGS3/HXGR3 V.24 Interface X10 AssignmentsPin Signal I/O Remark

1

2 RXD I Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)

3 TXD O

4 DTR O

5 0 V Ground

6 DSR I Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)

7 RTS O

8 CTS I Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)

9



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Installing the Fan Kit for HXGS3 in HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350

When installing and connecting the fan kit, proceed as follows:

7

Warning

If an HXGS3 board is used in a HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350, one fan kit C39165-A7021-D3 must be installed for thermal reasons.

Step Activity

1. Disconnect system from power supply.WarningSystem voltage can only be switched off by taking out the power plug. Switch offthe battery voltage first for an uninterruptible power supply.

2. Open the system.AttentionOnly hold the housing cover on the outside.The shielding plate on the inside of the cover may have sharp edges which cancause cuts (see Section 4.3.3.4, Remove System Housing Cover).

3. Place fan kit [A] on the system shelf [B] as shown in Figure 3-35.

4. Push the two supplied securing clips over positions [C] illustrated in Figure 3-36 to attach the fan kit to the shelf.

5. Insert the connector of the fan kit cable into the port provided for it on an HXGS3board as illustrated in Figure 3-37.

6. Close the system.AttentionOnly hold the housing cover on the outside.

7. Start the system by plugging in the power plug. In the case of an uninterruptiblepower supply, the battery must then be switched on.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Figure 3-36 HXGS3 Securing Clips for Fan Kit

Figure 3-37 HXGS3 Connection of the Fan Kit

[C]

[D]




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.3 IVML8 and IVML24

Introduction

The IVML8 and IVML24 (integrated voice mail large) boards allow you to use the HiPath Xpres-sions Compact integrated voice mail functionality in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 V1.2 or later.Music on hold can be used beginning with V4.0 SMR-7.

In addition, the boards have an Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface which can be used for HiPathXpressions Compact administration (fast APS transfer, backup and restore activities).

For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact, startup and administration, see themanual for the product (refer to Section 1.2.5, Information on the Intranet: Electronic Documen-tation on Com ESY Products).

Packing Protection Covering

You must remove the red packing protection covering (cardboard block), shown in the followingpicture, before starting up the board.

If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time, for example, for servicing, you mustreattach the packing protection covering.

>A maximum of one IVML8 or IVML24 is permitted for each HiPath 3750 and HiPath3700. This board may only be inserted into the slot beside the power supply in thebasic cabinet or in the expansion cabinets. Furthermore, the ferrite bead (C39022-Z7000-C7) included with the board must be mounted on the CABLU of the board that

is inserted to the immediate left of the IVML8 or IVML24.The rules provided under “Distribution of the PCM Segments” on page 4-74 for pop-ulation with boards must be observed to ensure the non-blocking operation of thesystem.

Figure 3-38 IVML8 and IVML24 - Packing Protection Covering



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Switches and LEDs

Lockout Switch Settings

Up = free (default)

Down = locked: existing connections remain active, new connections are locked.

– The yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectivelylocked.

– The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered (via lockout switch or soft-ware) but at least one call is still active.

To reset the board to the default state, activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s ofboard startup.

Figure 3-39 IVML8 and IVML24 (S30122-X7380-X100/-X)

LED (green)

LED (yellow)

Lockout switch(setting = free, default)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Table 3-33 IVML8 and IVML24 - LED Statuses

YellowLED

GreenLED

Meaning Action

During Boot Phase and Initialization

Off Off 1 Boot procedure (lasts approx. 8 - 12 s)

On On 2 LED test (lasts approx. 10 s)

On Off 3 Lockout switch state signaling by yellowLED (lasts approx. 5 s): blocked = On free = Off

Possibly check if boardwas deactivated usingHiPath 3000 Manager Eor lockout switch.

Off

Flashing(500/

500 ms)

Off 4 Hard disk test, start of the application (de-pending on hard disk status, lasts approx.3 - 8 minutes)

Off On 5a Standby mode after successful boot

On Off 5b Board is blocked or there is a board error Check if board was de-activated using HiPath3000 Manager E or lock-out switch.

During Operation

Off On Idle (no call)Off Flashing

(500/ 500 ms)

At least one active port (call)

Flashing(500/

500 ms)

Flashing(500/

500 ms)

Lockout switch activated during a call

On Off Board locked or board error occurred Check whether theboard was deactivated

with HiPath 3000 Man-ager E or lockout switch.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.4 IVMP8 and IVMP8R (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

The following boards are used for the integrated Voice Mail functionality of HiPath XpressionsCompact in V1.2 and later:

IVMP8 (Integrated Voice Mail Point) S30122-Q7379-X100 - for HiPath 3350 (wall housing)

IVMP8R (Integrated Voice Mail Point Rack) S30122-K7379-Z100 - for HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing)

Music on hold can be used beginning with V4.0 SMR-7.

In addition, the boards have an Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface which can be used for HiPathXpressions Compact administration (fast APS transfer, backup and restore activities).



You must remove the red packing protection covering (cardboard block), shown in the following

picture, before starting up the board.


>Only one IVMP8 or IVMP8R may be installed per system.Slot 5 can only be used for the IVMP8 board in the HiPath 3350 (wall housing).

Figure 3-41 IVMP8 and IVMP8R - Packing Protection Covering



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Switches and LEDs

Lockout Switch Settings

Pressed = free (default)

Not pressed = locked: existing connections remain active, new connections are locked.

– The yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectivelylocked.

– The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered (via lockout switch or soft-ware) but at least one call is still active.

To reset the board to the default state, activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s ofboard startup.

Figure 3-42 IVMP8 and IVMP8R (S30122-Q7379-X100/-K7379-Z100)

2

50

X1 = con-nection toCUP/ CUPR

Lockout switch

LED (green)LED (yellow)

X210

2

X410

2

X3 = LANconnector,8-pole RJ45 jack

X3

X1




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3

The Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface is accessed via the 8-pole RJ45 jack X3. The signals areoutput simultaneously at the printed circuit connector X2.

Table 3-35 IVMP8 and IVMP8R - Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 (LAN Connector)

RJ45 Jack X3Pin

Signal Description Printed Circuit Connector X2Pin

1 Tx + Transmit + 1

2 Tx – Transmit – 3

3 Rx + Receive + 7

4 – Not used

5 – Not used

6 Rx – Receive – 9

7 – Not used

8 – Not used



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Table 3-36 IVMP8 and IVMP8R - LED Statuses

YellowLED

GreenLED

Meaning Action






Off

Flashing(500/

500 ms)




During Operation


(500/ 500 ms)


Flashing(500/

500 ms)

Flashing(500/

500 ms)







P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.5 IVMS8 and IVMS8R

Introduction

The following boards are used for the integrated Voice Mail functionality of HiPath XpressionsCompact in V1.2 and later:

IVMS8 (Integrated Voice Mail Small) S30122-Q7379-X - for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350(wall housing)

IVMS8R (Integrated Voice Mail Small Rack) S30122-K7379-Z - for HiPath 3500 and HiPath3300 (19-inch housing)

Music on hold can be used beginning with V4.0 SMR-7.

In addition, the boards have an Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface which can be used for HiPath

Xpressions Compact administration (fast APS transfer, backup and restore activities).



You must remove the red packing protection covering (cardboard block), shown in the followingpicture, before starting up the board.


>Only one IVMS8 or IVMS8R may be installed per system.For thermal reasons, the IVMS8 board may only be used in slots 5, 7 and 9 (lowerslots) in the HiPath 3550 (wall housing).Slot 5 can only be used for the IVMS8 board in the HiPath 3350 (wall housing).

Figure 3-43 IVMS8 and IVMS8R - Packing Protection Covering




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Front View of IVMS8R

Figure 3-45 IVMS8R - Front View (S30122-K7379-Z)

X3 = LAN connector, 8-pole RJ45 jack

LED (yellow)

LED (green)Lockout switch



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3

The Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface is accessed via the 8-pole RJ45 jack X3. The signals areoutput simultaneously at the printed circuit connector X2.

Table 3-37 IVMS8 and IVMS8R - Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 (LAN Connector)

RJ45 Jack X3Pin

Signal Description Printed Circuit Connector X2Pin

1 Tx + Transmit + 1

2 Tx – Transmit – 3

3 Rx + Receive + 7

4 – Not used

5 – Not used

6 Rx – Receive – 9

7 – Not used

8 – Not used




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Table 3-38 IVMS8 and IVMS8R - LED Statuses

YellowLED

GreenLED

Meaning Action






Off

Flashing(500/

500 ms)




During Operation


(500/ 500 ms)


Flashing(500/

500 ms)

Flashing(500/

500 ms)






boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Cable and Connector Assignment (Backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, Patch Panel) (not for U.S.)

Table 3-40 SLA8N, SLA16N, and SLA24N - Cable 1 Assignment (SU Xx8) (not for U.S.)

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-WireSU Conn. SLA8N, SLA16N,

and SLA24NMDFU/

MDFU-E

PatchPanel,

MW8 PinNotes

BP: Xx8

1

1wht/blu 19 1a

Port 11a 4

blu/wht 39 1b 1b 5

2wht/ora 38 2a

Port 22a 4

ora/wht 48 2b 2b 5

3wht/grn 27 3a

Port 33a 4

grn/wht 47 3b 3b 5

4wht/brn 16 4a

Port 44a 4

brn/wht 46 4b 4b 5

5wht/gry 05 5a

Port 55a 4

gry/wht 45 5b 5b 5

2

6red/blu 14 6a

Port 66a 4

blu/red 44 6b 6b 5

7red/ora 23 7a

Port 77a 4

ora/red 43 7b 7b 5

8red/grn 32 8a

Port 88a 4

grn/red 42 8b 8b 5

9

red/brn 11 9a

Port 9

9a 4

notusedby

SLA8N

brn/red 31 9b 9b 5

10red/gry 02 10a

Port 1010a 4

gry/red 22 10b 10b 5

3

11blk/blu 13 11a

Port 1111a 4

blu/blk 33 11b 11b 5

12blk/ora 04 12a

Port 1212a 4

ora/blk 24 12b 12b 5

13blk/grn 15 13a

Port 1313a 4

grn/blk 35 13b 13b 5

14blk/brn 06 14a

Port 1414a 4

brn/blk 26 14b 14b 5

15blk/gry 17 15a

Port 1515a 4

gry/blk 37 15b 15b 5

4 16yel/blu 08 16a

Port 1616a 4

blu/yel 28 16b 16b 5




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Table 3-41 SLA8N, SLA16N, and SLA24N - Cable 2 Assignment (SU Xx9) (not for U.S.)

ColorGroup Pair a-Wire b-Wire

SU Conn.

SLA8N, SLA16N,and SLA24N MDFU/ MDFU-E

Patch

Panel,MW8 Pin

NotesBP: Xx9

1

1wht/blu

freeblu/wht

2wht/ora

freeora/wht

3wht/grn

freegrn/wht

4wht/brn

freebrn/wht

5 wht/gry freegry/wht

2

6red/blu

freeblu/red

7red/ora

freeora/red

8red/grn

freegrn/red

9red/brn 11 17a

Port 1717a 4

notused

bySLA8N,SLA16N

brn/red 31 17b 17b 5

10red/gry 02 18a

Port 1818a 4


3

11blk/blu 13 19a

Port 1919a 4


12blk/ora 04 20a

Port 2020a 4


13blk/grn 15 21a

Port 2121a 4


14blk/brn 06 22a

Port 2222a 4

brn/blk 26 22b 22b 515

blk/gry 17 23aPort 23

23a 4


4 16yel/blu 08 24a

Port 2424a 4




boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Cable and Connector Assignment (Backplane, MDF) (for U.S. only)

Table 3-42 SLA16N and SLA24N - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (for U.S. only)

# a-Wire b-WireSU Conn. Backplane SLA16N

and SLA24NChamp jack, MDF Notes

Xx8 Xx9

1wht/blu 19 1a

Port 11 1 a/Ring

blu/wht 39 1b 26 1 b/Tip

2wht/ora 38 2a

Port 22 2 a/Ring

ora/wht 48 2b 27 2 b/Tip

3wht/grn 27 3a

Port 33 3 a/Ring

grn/wht 47 3b 28 3 b/Tip

4wht/brn 16 4a

Port 44 4 a/Ring

brn/wht 46 4b 29 4 b/Tip

5wht/gry 05 5a

Port 55 5 a/Ring

gry/wht 45 5b 30 5 b/Tip

6red/blu 14 6a

Port 66 6 a/Ring

blu/red 44 6b 31 6 b/Tip

7red/ora 23 7a

Port 77 7 a/Ring

ora/red 43 7b 32 7 b/Tip

8red/grn 32 8a

Port 88 8 a/Ring

grn/red 42 8b 33 8 b/Tip

9red/brn 11 9a

Port 99 9 a/Ring

brn/red 31 9b 34 9 b/Tip

10red/gry 02 10a

Port 1010 10 a/Ring

gry/red 22 10b 35 10 b/Tip

11blk/blu 13 11a

Port 1111 11 a/Ring

blu/blk 33 11b 36 11 b/Tip

12blk/ora 04 12a

Port 1212 12 a/Ring

ora/blk 24 12b 37 12 b/Tip

13blk/grn 15 13a

Port 1313 13 a/Ring

grn/blk 35 13b 38 13 b/Tip

14blk/brn 06 14a

Port 1414 14 a/Ring

brn/blk 26 14b 39 14 b/Tip

15blk/gry 17 15a

Port 1515 15 a/Ring

gry/blk 37 15b 40 15 b/Tip

16yel/blu 08 16a

Port 1616 16 a/Ring

blu/yel 28 16b 41 16 b/Tip




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

17 red/brn 11 17a Port 17 9 9 a/Ring

notusedby

SLA16N


18red/gry 02 18a

Port 1810 10 a/Ring


19blk/blu 13 19a

Port 1911 11 a/Ring


20blk/ora 04 20a

Port 2012 12 a/Ring


21blk/grn 15 21a

Port 2113 13 a/Ring


22blk/brn 06 22a

Port 2214 14 a/Ring


23blk/gry 17 23a

Port 2315 15 a/Ring


24yel/blu 08 24a

Port 2416 16 a/Ring


Table 3-42 SLA16N and SLA24N - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (for U.S. only)

# a-Wire b-WireSU Conn. Backplane SLA16N

and SLA24NChamp jack, MDF Notes

Xx8 Xx9



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Technical Connection Conditions

Maximum supply current: Approximately 34 mA;Supply voltage: Approximately 40 Vdc

Ring voltage against negative supply voltage (a/b or tip/ring) for a maximum of two tele-phones

Range: see Section 2.7

Loop current detection > 10 mA

Ground button detection > 20 mA

The transmission method is selected country-specifically, based on the country code en-tered.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.7 SLC16 and SLC16N (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

The SLC16 (Subscriber Line Module Cordless) and SLC16N boards connect HiPath CordlessOffice base stations to

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 (max. four SLC16 or SLC16N per system).

HiPath 3550 (max. one SLC16 or SLC16N per system).

The new board SLC16N is an optimized version of SLC16. Both boards have the same scopeand are fully compatible from a technical perspective. SLC16 and SLC16N boards can be usedin mixed mode within a single system. SLC16N can be used in conjunction with special SMRsfor V1.2 and V3.0. Please refer to the respective sales release documentation for further de-tails.

Chapter 10 contains basic information on the new options available in HiPath 3000 Version 1.2or later for the use of HiPath Cordless Office.

Base stations must be clocked with a high degree of accuracy for HiPath Cordless Office. Installthe plug-in CMS module on the CBCPR board (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700) or the plug-inCMA or CMS module on the CBCC board (for HiPath 3550) to ensure clock accuracy (see Table10-1).

>For initial installation of the HiPath Cordless Office, the HiPath cordless system num-ber (DECT ID) must be ordered together with the SLC16/SLC16N board. Replace-ment boards are always delivered without a HiPath cordless system number.Installing the SLC16 or SLC16N and entering the HiPath cordless system numberreleases 16 mobile units for use (PIN numbers are assigned). These mobile unitscan then be logged on to the system. Any additional mobile units to be used mustfirst be released (see Section 9.8.6).



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Switches and LEDs

Figure 3-47 SLC16 (S30810-Q2922-X) (Not for U.S.)

Figure 3-48 SLC16N (S30810-Q2193-X100)

>

When you activate the lockout switch (SLC16 = flip the switch down;SLC16N = press the switch), all idle mobile telephones are locked. Active mobile

telephones are not locked until their release keys are pressed.Before unplugging the SLC16 or SLC16N board, always activate the lockout switchand wait until green LED stops flashing. This precaution ensures that none of themobile telephones are active.

H1 (green)

H2 (red)LED’s

Lockout switch S1up = in service(factory default)

Lockout switch(not pressed = in service(factory default)

LED (green)

LED (red)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Table 3-43 SLC16/SLC16N—LED Statuses (Not for U.S.)

Red LED Green LED Status Action

Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged incorrectly.Board is deactivated.

Check plug contacton board.

On Off Board is receiving power and board test inprogress.If status remains the same (board test un-successful), board is defective.

Replace board.

Loadware loading was not successfully

completed. Board is defective.

Replace board.

Error was detected on board. Board is deac-tivated (not applicable to errors detected bytest loops) orboard was deactivated using HiPath 3000Manager E.

Check whether boardwas deactivated byHiPath 3000 ManagerE. If not, replaceboard.

Flashing Off Loadware is being loaded.

Off On Loading was successfully completed andboard is OK.

Off Flashing At least one subscriber line is activated.

On On Board is disabled. Check whether theboard was deactivat-ed using the lockoutswitch.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Cable and Connector Assignment (Backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, Patch Panel) (not for U.S.)

Table 3-44 SLC16/SLC16N - Cable Assignment (not for U.S.)

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-WireSU Conn. SLC16

SLC16NMDFU/

MDFU-E

PatchPanel,

MW8 PinNote

BP: Xx8

1

1wht/blu 19 1a

Access 11a 4 BS 1:

UP0/E port 1blu/wht 39 1b 1b 5

2wht/ora 38 2a

Access 22a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xora/wht 48 2b 2b 5

3wht/grn 27 3a

Access 33a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xgrn/wht 47 3b 3b 5

4wht/brn 16 4a

Access 44a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xbrn/wht 46 4b 4b 5

5wht/gry 05 5a

Access 55a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xgry/wht 45 5b 5b 5

2

6red/blu 14 6a

Access 66a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xblu/red 44 6b 6b 5

7red/ora 23 7a

Access 77a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xora/red 43 7b 7b 5

8red/grn 32 8a

Access 88a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xgrn/red 42 8b 8b 5

9red/brn 11 9a

Access 99a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xbrn/red 31 9b 9b 5

10red/gry 02 10a

Access 1010a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xgry/red 22 10b 10b 5

3

11blk/blu 13 11a


UP0/E port xblu/blk 33 11b 11b 5

12blk/ora 04 12a


UP0/E port xora/blk 24 12b 12b 5

13blk/grn 15 13a


UP0/E port xgrn/blk 35 13b 13b 5

14

blk/brn 06 14a

Access 14

14a 4 BS x:

UP0/E port xbrn/blk 26 14b 14b 5

15blk/gry 17 15a


UP0/E port xgry/blk 37 15b 15b 5

4 16yel/blu 08 16a


UP0/E port xblu/yel 28 16b 16b 5




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

SLC16 and SLC16N System Configuration

For information on the maximum possible system configuration of HiPath Cordless Office withthe SLC16 and SLC16N boards see Table 10-1.

SLC16 and SLC16N Board Distribution in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Cabinets

You can install up to four SLC16 or SLC16N boards in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. Pleasenote the following when distributing the boards in the individual cabinets:

Basic cabinet (GB)Up to two SLC16 or SLC16N can be installed in the basic cabinet. Sixteen BS3/1s or eight8 BS2/2s and BS3/3 can also be connected.

Expansion cabinets EB1 and EB2The four SLC16 or SLC16N can be installed in a single expansion cabinet. And up to Six-

teen BS3/1 or eight 8 BS2/2 and BS3/3 can be connected per SLC16 or SLC16N.To avoid overloading the power supply when operating four SLC16 or SLC16N in a singleexpansion cabinet, you must not install any other peripheral boards in this cabinet.

>To guarantee uninterrupted operation of HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700, the SLC16or SLC16N should not be installed with a second SLC16 or SLC16N, an SLMO24 ora TS2 on a PCM segment. This condition must always be observed.For information on PCM segment distribution, see page 4-74.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Supplying Power to Base Stations

Power is supplied to the base stations primarily via the internal PSU in the system in question.

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700The internal system power supply unit provides sufficient power to the configurations men-tioned in Table 3-45.For distances of up to 1000 m (at 2x0.6 mm) between the SLC16 or SLC16N and basestation, the BS2/2 and BS3/3 must each be connected via two UP0/E interfaces. Only oneUP0/E interface is required for BS3/1 base stations.

Table 3-45 HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 - Maximum Number of SLA24N and SLMO24User Groups (Depending on the Number of Base Stations Connected atSLC16 or SLC16N (Not for U.S.)

HiPath 3750

HiPath 3700

Number of

SLC16SLC16N

Number of base stations Number of

SLA24NSLMO24

BS3/1BS4

connected via1xUP0/E

BS2/2BS3/3BS4

connected via2xUP0/E

BC 0 0 0 7

1 16 8 5

2 32 16 3

Expansion cabinet 0 0 0 8

1 16 8 6

2 32 16 4

3 48 24 2

4 64 32 0




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

HiPath 3550Subject to certain prerequisites, the system-internal PSU UPSC-D provides sufficient pow-er for the operation of sixteen BS3/1s (one UP0/E each) or eight BS2/2s and BS3/3s (twoUP0/E each). These prerequisites depend on the

– Line length and line type between SLC16 or SLC16N and base station.The following specifications are based on line lengths of up to 1000 m and a line type2x0.6 mm per UP0/E.

– Number and type of corded telephones connected to the system.Table 3-46 through Table 3-48 show which telephone configurations work without ad-dition power supply.

Table 3-46 HiPath 3550 - Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on theNumber of BS3/1s at SLC16 or SLC16N

Number of BS3/1sconnected via 1xUP0/E

toSLC16 or SLC16N

Maximum Number of Corded Telephones

Analog Telephones

0 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50

optiset E and optiPoint 500 Telephones

1 66 61 57 53 48 44

2 63 59 54 50 46 41

3 60 56 52 47 43 39

4 58 53 49 45 40 36

5 55 51 47 42 38 33

6 53 48 44 40 35 317 50 46 41 37 33 28

8 47 43 39 34 30 26

9 45 40 36 32 27 23

10 42 38 33 29 25 20

11 40 35 31 27 22 18

12 37 33 28 24 20 15

13 34 30 26 21 17 13

14 32 27 23 19 14 10

13 29 25 20 16 12 7

16 27 22 18 13 9 5



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Number of BS2/2sat

SLC16 or SLC16N


Analog Telephones

0 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50


1 63 59 54 50 46 41

2 58 53 49 45 40 36

3 53 48 44 40 35 31

4 47 43 39 34 30 26

5 42 38 33 29 25 20

6 37 33 28 24 20 15

7 32 27 23 19 14 10

8 27 22 18 13 9 5


Number of BS3/3sconnected via 2xUP0/E

toSLC16 or SLC16N


Analog Telephones

0 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50


1 64 60 56 51 47 422 60 56 52 47 43 39

3 57 52 48 43 39 35

4 53 48 44 40 35 31

5 49 44 40 36 31 27

6 45 40 36 32 27 23

7 41 37 32 28 23 19

8 37 33 28 24 20 15




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Options for Supplying Power to the Base Stations

Each base station must be connected to the SLC16 or SLC16N via the main distribution frame(MDFU or MDFU-E).Always route the UP0/E interfaces on the SLC16 or SLC16N via a splitting strip to ensure thatsurges due to lightning will be arrested. To do so, insert the polarized surge protectors (sup-plied) in the plugging locations on the splitting strip.

The following options are available for supplying power to the base stations:

Power supply via one UP0/E interface (page 3-115)

Power supply via two UP0/E interfaces (page 3-116)

Power supply via three UP0/E interfaces (page 3-117), for BS3/3 only

If the power supplied by the UPSC-D (HiPath 3550) is insufficient, additional power can be sup-plied by installing the external power supply EPSU2 (page 3-117).

Signal propagation times differ due to the varying distances between the base stations, the sys-tem, and the connecting cables used (refer to the HiPath Cordless Office service manual). TheSLC16 and SLC16N automatically equalizes these propagation times.

>For information on connecting the base stations, refer to the HiPath Cordless Office

service manual.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Base Station Power Supply Via One UP0/E Interface

Connect the base station to a free interface on the SLC16 or SLC16N as shown in Figure 3-49.Be careful not to exceed the maximum connecting cable lengths (1000 m for 2x0.6 mm).

Figure 3-49 Base Station Power Supply Via One UP0/E Interface

ab

1

Cablu

MDFU / MDFU-E

1

2UP0/E

BS3/1 for in-doors

Splittingstrip

HiPath 3750,HiPath 3550,HiPath 3700

SLC16 /SLC16N




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Base Station Power Supply Via Two UP0/E Interfaces

Connect the base station to two free interfaces on the SLC16 or SLC16N as shown in Figure3-50. Be careful not to exceed the maximum connecting cable lengths (1000 m for 2x0.6 mm).

Using two UP0/E interfaces increases the traffic capacity in BS2/2 and BS3/3 base stations.

Figure 3-50 Base Station Power Supply Via Two UP0/E Interfaces

ab

1

Cablu

MDFU / MDFU-E

2

3

45

UP0/E1

UP0/E2

BS2/2 or BS3/3 for indoors

Splittingstrip


SLC16 /SLC16N



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

BS3/3 Power Supply via Three UP0/E Interfaces

Connect the BS3/3 base station to three free interfaces on the SLC16 or SLC16N as shown inFigure 3-51. Be careful not to exceed the maximum connecting cable lengths (1000 m for

2x0.6 mm).Using three UP0/E interfaces increases the traffic capacity in the BS3/3 base station.

Additional UPSC-D Power Supply Via EPSU2

If the power supplied by UPSC-D (HiPath 3550) is insufficient, additional power can be suppliedby the external power supply EPSU2. To do this, connect the DC port on the EPSU2 to the spe-cial DC input on the UPSC-D.

As described on the preceding pages, the base stations are to be connected to one (BS3/1) ortwo (BS2/2 and BS3/3) or three (BS3/3) free UP0/E interfaces on the SLC16 or SLC16N.

If you need an additional external power supply for the 19-inch housing in HiPath 3550 or Hi-Path 3350, you should use the EPSU2-R power supply. This is installed in the ECR expansioncabinet rack (not for U.S. and Canada) (see Section 8.2.3).

Section 10.5, Power-Related Capacity Limits shows which telephone configurations managewithout an additional power supply and which configurations require an additional one.

Figure 3-51 BS3/3 Power Supply Via Three UP0/E Interfaces

ab

1

CABLU

MDFU / MDFU-E

2

3

45

UP0/E1

UP0/E2

UP0/E3

BS3/3 for in-doors

Splittingstrip


76

SLC16 /SLC16N




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

EPSU2 External Power Supply

The EPSU2 AC/DC converter is an external power supply unit for use when the UPSC-D is un-able to provide sufficient power for the base stations and telephones at the HiPath 3550.

The external power supply EPSU2 comes in two versions:

S30122-K7221-X1 - This version is always supplied with four built-in batteries. These bat-teries guarantee approx. 30 minutes of bridging time in the event of line voltage failure.

S30122-K7221-X2 - This version is supplied without batteries. To use this model’s uninter-ruptible power supply function, four batteries must be ordered separately and installed.

>The new EPSU2 model S30122-K7221-X2 is designed to replace S30122-K7221-X1.Differences between the two models are indicated at the appropriate point in the

following description.

Figure 3-52 EPSU2 - Indicators and Ports

Housing cover

AC port for 100 – 240 V AC

DC port for UPSC-DNote polarity.

Fixing screwsLED 1

LED 2

Battery fuse



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

EPSU2 Technical Specifications

Table 3-49 EPSU2 - Explanation of Indicators and Ports

LED 1(DC Port)

LED 2(AC Port)

Explanation

On On DC output and AC input voltages are OK.

Off On No DC voltage at output(rectifier short-circuited).

On Off No AC voltage at input(power outage, circuit-breaker panel receiving battery power).

Off Off No AC input voltage (power outage) and batteries are empty, orthe battery fuse is defective or was removed (by turning to theleft).

Ports Explanation

Battery fuse Melting fuse 5 x 20 mm, 2.5 A/slow-blowing

AC port (input) IEC 320/16 (protective grounding power cable/IEC)

DC port (output) Screw terminal connections for insulated lines (0.5 – 2.5 mm2),56 V/140 W EPSU2 S30122-K7221-X1 = 2-wire power cable to UPSC-D,

pre-installed, soldered ends, note polarity. EPSU2 S30122-K7221-X2 = 2-wire power cable to UPSC-D,

with Phoenix terminal block.

Table 3-50 EPSU2 - Technical Specifications

EPSU2S30122-K7221-X1

EPSU2S30122-K7221-X2

Scope of delivery AC/DC converter EPSU2with 4 UPS batteries loaded

Operating instructions AC connecting cable (pro-

tective grounding plug, IEC-320 socket) DC cable to UPSC-D (2 m)

AC/DC converter EPSU2without batteries

Operating instructions AC connecting cable (pro-

tective grounding plug, IEC-320 socket) DC cable to UPSC-D (2 m)

AC power cable C39195-Z7001-C17 Euro angled C39195-Z7001-C20 GBR angled

AC power 100 - 240 Vac

Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Installation Notes

The EPSU2 AC/DC converter is designed for installation indoors only.

The unit is suitable only for mounting on the wall (vertically, with AC port on bottom).

Always install the units in a dry, dust-free area where there is no danger of vibrations.

Always make sure there is sufficient air circulation around the units. Do not block the ven-tilation holes.

When selecting the location, keep in mind the necessary lengths of the following cables:– AC cable (protective grounding plug, IEC 320 socket)– DC cable to UPSC-D

Mounting the EPSU2 on the Wall

Step Action

1. Drill two holes for anchors (5 mm in diameter) in the wall, as shown in Figure 3-53.Depending on the wall materials, you may have to use a different kind of attach-ment, such as wooden screws for wooden walls.

2. Insert the anchors and insert two screws (3.5 mm in diameter), leaving 5 mm projecting from the wall.

3. Mount the EPSU2 onto the screws and tighten them all the way.

Figure 3-53 EPSU2 - Holes for Mounting on the Wall

115 mm 102 mm 33 mm

317 mm




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.8 SLMO8 (Not for U.S.) and SLMO24

Introduction

The SLMO8 and SLMO24 boards (subscriber line module cost optimized UP0/E) provide either8 or 24 ports for connecting optiset E and optiPoint 500 Telephones to HiPath 3750, HiPath3550 and HiPath 3700.

SLMO8 is not currently supported in the U.S.

Switches and LEDs

Figure 3-54 SLMO8 and SLMO24 (S30810-Q2901-X100 / S30810-Q2901-X)

H1 (green)

H2 (red)LEDs




boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Table 3-51 SLMO8 and SLMO24—LED Statuses


Off Off Board not receiving power or not properlyseated.Board is deactivated.


On Off Board is receiving power or board test inprogress.If status remains the same (board testunsuccessful), board is defective.

Replace board.

Loadware loading not successfully


Replace board.

Error detected on board. Board is deactivat-ed (not applicable to errors detected by testloops) or board was deactivated using Hi-Path 3000 Manager E.

Check whether boardwas deactivated usingHiPath 3000 ManagerE. If not, replaceboard.

Flashing Off Loadware being loaded.

Off On Loading successfully completed and boardis OK (idle).

Off Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activat-ed.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Cable and Connector Assignment (Backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, Patch Panel) (Not for U.S.)

Table 3-52 SLMO8 and SLMO24 - Cable 1 Assignment (SU Xx8) (Not for U.S.)

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-WireSU Conn. SLMO8,

SLMO24MDFU/

MDFU-E

PatchPanel,

MW8 PinNotes

BP: Xx8

1

1wht/blu 19 1a

Access 11a 4

blu/wht 39 1b 1b 5

2wht/ora 38 2a

Access 22a 4

ora/wht 48 2b 2b 5

3wht/grn 27 3a

Access 33a 4

grn/wht 47 3b 3b 5

4wht/brn 16 4a

Access 44a 4

brn/wht 46 4b 4b 5

5wht/gry 05 5a

Access 55a 4

gry/wht 45 5b 5b 5

2

6red/blu 14 6a

Access 66a 4

blu/red 44 6b 6b 5

7red/ora 23 7a

Access 77a 4

ora/red 43 7b 7b 5

8red/grn 32 8a

Access 88a 4

grn/red 42 8b 8b 5

9

red/brn 11 9a

Access 9

9a 4

notused

bySLMO8

brn/red 31 9b 9b 5

10red/gry 02 10a

Access 1010a 4


3

11blk/blu 13 11a

Access 1111a 4


12blk/ora 04 12a

Access 1212a 4


13blk/grn 15 13a

Access 1313a 4


14blk/brn 06 14a

Access 1414a 4


15blk/gry 17 15a

Access 1515a 4


4 16yel/blu 08 16a

Access 1616a 4




boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Table 3-53 SLMO8 and SLMO24 - Cable 2 Assignment (SU Xx9) (Not for U.S.)

ColorGroup Pair a-Wire b-Wire

SU Conn.

SLMO8,SLMO24 MDFU/ MDFU-E

Patch

Panel,MW8 Pin

NotesBP: Xx9

1

1wht/blu

freeblu/wht

2wht/ora

freeora/wht

3wht/grn

freegrn/wht

4wht/brn

freebrn/wht

5 wht/gry freegry/wht

2

6red/blu

freeblu/red

7red/ora

freeora/red

8red/grn

freegrn/red

9red/brn 11 17a

Access 1717a 4

notusedby

SLMO8

brn/red 31 17b 17b 5

10red/gry 02 18a

Access 1818a 4


3

11blk/blu 13 19a

Access 1919a 4


12blk/ora 04 20a

Access 2020a 4


13blk/grn 15 21a

Access 2121a 4


14blk/brn 06 22a

Access 2222a 4


15blk/gry 17 23a

Access 2323a 4


4 16yel/blu 08 24a

Access 2424a 4





P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Table 3-54 SLMO24 - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (for U.S. only)

# a-Wire b-WireSU Conn. Backplane

SLMO24 Champ jack, MDF NotesXx8 Xx9

1wht/blu 19 1a

Port 11 1 a/Ring


2wht/ora 38 2a

Port 22 2 a/Ring


3wht/grn 27 3a

Port 33 3 a/Ring


4wht/brn 16 4a

Port 44 4 a/Ring


5wht/gry 05 5a

Port 55 5 a/Ring


6red/blu 14 6a

Port 66 6 a/Ring


7red/ora 23 7a

Port 77 7 a/Ring


8red/grn 32 8a

Port 88 8 a/Ring


9red/brn 11 9a

Port 99 9 a/Ring


10red/gry 02 10a

Port 1010 10 a/Ring


11blk/blu 13 11a

Port 1111 11 a/Ring


12blk/ora 04 12a

Port 1212 12 a/Ring


13blk/grn 15 13a

Port 1313 13 a/Ring


14blk/brn 06 14a

Port 1414 14 a/Ring


15blk/gry 17 15a

Port 1515 15 a/Ring


16yel/blu 08 16a

Port 1616 16 a/Ring




boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

17 red/brn 11 17a Port 17 9 9 a/Ringbrn/red 31 17b 34 9 b/Tip

18red/gry 02 18a

Port 1810 10 a/Ring


19blk/blu 13 19a

Port 1911 11 a/Ring


20blk/ora 04 20a

Port 2012 12 a/Ring


21blk/grn 15 21a

Port 2113 13 a/Ring


22blk/brn 06 22a

Port 2214 14 a/Ring


23blk/gry 17 23a

Port 2315 15 a/Ring


24yel/blu 08 24a

Port 2416 16 a/Ring


Table 3-54 SLMO24 - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (for U.S. only)


SLMO24 Champ jack, MDF NotesXx8 Xx9



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Note: Pinouts shown are at the board itself. The supplied main distribution frame cable (MDFcable) reverses the signal order before the MDF.

Table 3-56 SLU8 Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)

Pin X2 (UPo/E

ports 1 to 4) X3 (UP0/E

ports 5 to 8)

1 R1 R5

2 T1 T5

3 R2 R6

4 T2 T6

5 R3 R7

6 T3 T7

7 R4 R8

8 T4 T8




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.10 SLU8R

Introduction

The SLU8R (subscriber line UP0 /E rack) board provides eight ports for the connection of optisetE and optiPoint 500 Telephones to HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing).

Interfaces

Figure 3-56 SLU8R Interfaces(S30817-K922-Z301)

Table 3-57 SLU8R Contact Assignment

MW8 Jack X2, Pin UP0/E Ports 1-4 MW8 Jack X2, Pin UP0/E Ports 5-8

1 14 Tip / a 1 5 54 Tip / a 5

15 Ring / b 1 55 Ring / b 5

2 24 Tip / a 2 6 64 Tip / a 6

25 Ring / b 2 65 Ring / b 6

3 34 Tip / a 3 7 74 Tip / a 735 Ring / b 3 75 Ring / b 7

4 44 Tip / a 4 8 84 Tip / a 8

45 Ring / b 4 85 Ring / b 8

UP0/E ports1–8(8-pole MW8 jacks)

X1

50

2

ToCUPRCUCR

X2

11

88

UP0/E1

UP0/E8



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.11 STLS2 (Not for U.S.) and STLS4

Introduction

The STLS4 board for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing) has 4 S0 ports that can op-erate as trunk interfaces or as subscriber line interfaces (see page 3-133).

The STLS2 is an underequipped variant with two S0 ports. It is not currently supported in theU.S.

Interfaces

>

The STLS2 or STLS4 does not supply terminals with power; power must be suppliedlocally using an optiset E local power supply or a bus power supply unit.

Figure 3-57 STLS2 (Not for U.S.) and STLS4 Interfaces (S30817-Q924-B313 / -A313)

Not withSTLS2

X1

50

2

X2

1

2

34

S0 portsMW6

ToCUP/ CUC

2 = SX +3 = SR +4 = SR -5 = SX -

SX = Signal transmitSR = Signal receive

Port example

STLS2 (not for U.S.) or STLS4

6 5 4 3 2 1

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)

Note: The STLS4 Module serves the trunk side in Europe, so the transmit and receive signalsmust be reversed before the first device on the S0 bus. In contrast, the optiset E ISDN adapteruses a straight-through connection because it is always a station-only device. See Figure 3-59on Page 3-134 for details.

The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply. Refer to Section 9.10.1 for infor-mation on setting up an S0 bus.

The system assigns the MSN only after the S0 port is configured on the Euro-bus (not for U.S.)

and can be read out via the administration (Manager T: code 20 4 3 S0 bus MSN).

Table 3-58 STLS4 Module Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)

Pin Port Assignment Pin Port Assignment

2

1

Signal transmit 2

3

Signal transmit

3 Signal receive 3 Signal receive


5 Signal transmit 5 Signal transmit

2

2

Signal transmit 2

4

Signal transmit



5 Signal transmit 5 Signal transmit



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Connecting ISDN Terminals to HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (for U.S. Only)

S0 Bus With MW8 Jack

Connecting S01 to S04: Connect the provided, silver-satin connector cord to each port on the STLS4 Module. Con-

nect the other end to a surface-mounted MW jack, reversing the transmit and receive wiresas shown in Figure 3-59 on Page 3-134.

Contact is always established using the center pins of MW jacks. Figure 3-58 shows thepin assignments for jacks of different sizes.

The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply. Refer to Section 9.10.1 forinformation on setting up an S0 bus.

Plug the ISDN terminal (connecting cord) into the MW jack. Connecting an ISDN S0 tele-phone requires a local power supply (e.g. manufactured by Sedlbauer); see Figure 9-18.

Pin Assignment of MW Jacks

Figure 3-58 MWxx Jack Pin Assignment (for U.S. Only)

8-pin MW8 6-pin MW6

4-pin MW4 SX = signal transmitSR = signal receive

With MW cables, contact is always es-tablished in the center of the connec-tor.

7

SR

6 58 4 3 2 1

SX SX SR SR

6 5 4 3 2 1

SX SX SR

SR

4 3 2 1

SX SX SR



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Connecting ISDN (S0) interfaces (Not for U.S.)

You can use the MW jacks on the STLS boards to connect from one to four ISDN S0 busses.The interfaces on the STLS boards are freely configurable. The following configurations are

supported: DSS1 trunk point-to-point

DSS1 trunk point-to-multipoint

EURO-bus

CorNet-N secondary (only HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300)

Using Manager T, you can also set up configurations for networking and dedicated lines

Use the S0 interface S01 for connection to the public telecommunications network (ISDN trunk).

You can also connect S0 interfaces S02 to S04 to the ISDN trunk or to ISDN terminals (ISDNtelephone, Fax Group 4, PC, dialing aid) via an S0 bus.

The connection (networking) to HiPath 3000 and HiPath 4000 (CorNet-N) can also be set upvia S0 interfaces S01 to S04.

S0 connection options:

Point-to-point (PP) (default)

Point-to-multipoint (PMP)

Connecting an ISDN Trunk (Not for U.S.)

Plug one end of the connecting cord provided into jacks S01 to S04 and the other end into theNT (network termination).

Networking connection (HiPath 4000 CorNet-N) (Not for U.S.)

Plug one end of the connecting cord provided into jacks S01 to S04 and connect the other endto the HiPath 4000 port.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Connecting ISDN Terminals (Not for U.S.)

Depending on the system, you can set up a maximum of four internal S0 busses (S01 to S04).A maximum of eight ISDN terminals can be addressed on each S0 bus.

(Not for U.S.) The MSN is first assigned by the system when the S0 port is configured on theEuro-bus and can be read out by system administration (Manager T: Code 20 4 3 > S0 busMSN).

When you set up an S0 bus, it is assigned an MSN. This MSN is the first free station number inthe system. The S0 station is immediately available under this MSN, without an outgoing sei-zure.

Setting Up an S0 bus With A MW Jack (Not for U.S.)

ISDN terminals cannot be connected directly to the MW jack on the STLS using the cables sup-plied. You must first install a jack with cross-connected cables (see Figure 3-61 on Page 3-137).

>Not for U.S.: If no MSN is entered in the terminal, a default MSN is automatically as-signed after you change the S0 port to Euro-bus in system administration.

Figure 3-60 Pin Assignment of MW Jacks

Pin assignment of jacks:8-pin MW8 6-pin MW6

4-pin MW4 SX = signal transmitSR = signal receive

With MW cables, contact is always es-tablished in the center of the connec-tor.

7

SR

6 58 4 3 2 1

SX SX SR SR

6 5 4 3 2 1

SX SX SR

SR

4 3 2 1

SX SX SR



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Figure 3-61 Wiring and Ranges for S0 Bus Jacks (Not for U.S.)

Additionalpowersupply

The connecting cord of theISDN terminal must not belonger than 10 m.

To use the STLS board for an in-ternal S0 bus, you must crossthe SR and SX wires before thefirst device jack.

TAE con-

nector

230 V AC

MW8 through-jack

(MW8=8-pin)SR.1 Receive 5

SX.1 Transmit 3SX.2 Transmit 6

SR.2 Receive 4

1st MW8 jack (MW8 = 8-pin)

2nd to 8th MW8 jacks(MW8 = 8-pin)

100 ohms/0.25 W

Terminating resistor in last jack

SystemS

01 to S

04

*

Twisted-pair

8 17 6 5 4 3 2

* = Not crossed with TA S0

8 17 6 5 4 3 2

8 17 6 5 4 3 2

6

45

3

Maximum ranges:

System 31 2 8

Short bus: 150 m (492 ft.)

Long bus: 150 m (492 ft.) 20 m (66 ft.)

,,,

SX SR SXSR




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.12 STLS4R

Introduction

The STLS4R (subscriber and trunk line S0 rack) board provides four S0 basic accesses for Hi-Path 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing). These are operated either as external trunk in-terfaces in TE (terminal equipment) mode or as internal S0 buses (bus PMP) in NT (networkterminator) mode with cross-connected RX-TX lines.

Interfaces

>The STLS4R does not supply terminals with power; power must be supplied locallyusing an optiset E local power supply or a bus power supply unit.

Figure 3-62 STLS4R Interfaces (S30817-K924-Z313)

X1

50

2

X2 STLS4R

4 S0 ports(MW8 (RJ49) jacks) To

CUPRCUCR

8 . . . 13 = SX +4 = SR +5 = SR –6 = SX –SX = Signal transmitSR = Signal receive

11

48

S0-Port 1

S0 port 4



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Table 3-59 STLS4R Contact Assignments

MW8 (RJ49) Jack X2, Pin S0

Ports 1-4

1 13 S0 port 1 transmit+

14 S0 port 1 receive+

15 S0 port 1 receive–

16 S0 port 1 transmit–




26 S0 port 2 transmit–3 33 S0 port 3 transmit+








>Refer to page 3-133 for information on connecting ISDN lines and telephones.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


LED H300 (see Figure 3-63): Reference clock display (clock is generated if this feature hasbeen configured using HiPath 3000 Manager E.)

– On: Reference clock for clock generator is generated.

– Off: No reference clock

LEDs H301 to H308 (see Figure 3-63)

Table 3-60 STMD8— LED Statuses (H301 to H308)

LED Status(on/off)

Meaning Action

During the Boot Phase and Initialization

Flickering(50/50 ms)

Board test not successful Replace board

Flashing(100/100 ms)

Board not configured Inspect visually; remove and re-seat board if required.Replace board if flashing contin-ues.

On Loading in progress


Code could not be loaded Replace board

Off Board loadedFlashing(500/500 ms)

Board loaded, but not yet activat-ed

During Operation

On ISDN layer 2 activated


Dependability test (loopbacktest) in progress


Board is out of service (e.g.S300/x “closed”)

Check whether the board was de-activated using HiPath 3000 Man-

ager E or lockout switch.Off ISDN layer 2 not activated




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

S0 trunk Connection (Not for U.S.)

>Table 2-9 lists examples of maximum line lengths for connecting trunks.

Figure 3-64 S0 Trunk Connection (Not for U.S.) (Example for HiPath 3750)

Figure 3-65 S0 Connection to NT (Not for U.S.)

>Not for U.S.: When starting up S0 ports during operation with PABXs, it is importantto ensure that the NT switch is in the POINT-TO-POINT position.

MDFU cable

(Cablu)

HiPath 3750

STMD8 MDFU orMDFU-E

NT

Public network

NT (network termination):the connection depends on thecountry-specific NT

S0 basic

access 1

S0 basic

access 2

1 T X

1 T X

1 R X

1 R X

......

MDFU or MDFU-E

STMD8




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

S0 Networking (Not for U.S.)

>For examples of the maximum cable lengths for direct CorNet-N networking, refer to

Table 2-9.

Figure 3-66 S0 Networking Options (Not for U.S.) (Examples for HiPath 3750)

HiPath 3750

STMD8 MDFU orMDFU-E

HiPath 3000 orHiPath 4000

MDFU cable (Cablu)

STMD8

S0 networking in a plant without NT

MDFU orMDFU-E

4

S0

HiPath 3750

STMD8MDFUorMDFU-E


STMD8

S0 networking in a plant with NT

2 MDFUorMDFU-E

NT NT

Fixed line (cabling must be approvedby NT suppliers)

MDFU cable (Cablu)

HiPath 3750

STMD8MDFUorMDFU-E


STMD8

S0 networking using leased lines

MDFUorMDFU-E

NT NT

Fixed lines using a public network (NT con-nection in accordance with Figure 3-65)

MDFU cable (Cablu)



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

S0 Bus for Connecting ISDN Telephones (Not for U.S.)

Figure 3-67 S0 bus to the STMD8 via the MDFU or MDFU-E (Not for U.S.)

Figure 3-68 Jack Pin Assignments

Max.10 m(32 ft.)

Max.10 m(32 ft.)

Max.10 m(32 ft.)

S0 bus

ISDN terminal

HiPath 3750

STMD8 MDFU orMDFU-E

MDFU cable(Cablu)

The maximum permitted S0 buslength between the MDFU and thelast wall socket is 150 m (490 ft.).

Universal wall socketUAE 8/8 (8)AP: L30460-X951-XUP: L30460-X952-X

Combination socket UAE 2 x 8 (8)L30460-X958-X

Terminating resistors 2x100 ohms,V39230-Z4101-F

Maximum of 8 terminals

ISDN terminal

ISDN terminal

Assignment of MW Jack Pins:8-pin MW8 6-pin MW6

4-pin MW4Always establish contact on the centerfour pins.

SR = signal receiveSX = signal transmit

7

SR

6 58 4 3 2 1

SX SX SR SR

6 5 4 3 2 1

SX SX SR

SR

4 3 2 1

SX SX SR



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Table 3-61 STMD8 - Cable and Connector Assignment (Not for U.S.)

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-WireSU Conn.

STMD8MDFU/

MDFU-E

S0 Patch Panel, MW8 Pin

BP: Xx8Subscriber

LineTrunk

Connection

1

1wht/blu 19 1Ea

Basicaccess 1

1a 3 4

blu/wht 39 1Eb 1b 6 5

2wht/ora 38 1Sa 2a 4 3

ora/wht 48 1Sb 2b 5 6

3wht/grn 27 2Ea

Basicaccess 2

3a 3 4

grn/wht 47 2Eb 3b 6 5

4wht/brn 16 2Sa 4a 4 3

brn/wht 46 2Sb 4b 5 6

5wht/gry 05 3Ea

Basicaccess 3

5a 3 4

gry/wht 45 3Eb 5b 6 5

2

6red/blu 14 3Sa 6a 4 3

blu/red 44 3Sb 6b 5 6

7red/ora 23 4Ea

Basicaccess 4

7a 3 4

ora/red 43 4Eb 7b 6 5

8red/grn 32 4Sa 8a 4 3

grn/red 42 4Sb 8b 5 6

9

red/brn 11 5Ea

Basicaccess 5

9a 3 4

brn/red 31 5Eb 9b 6 5

10red/gry 02 5Sa 10a 4 3

gry/red 22 5Sb 10b 5 6

3

11blk/blu 13 6Ea

Basicaccess 6

11a 3 4

blu/blk 33 6Eb 11b 6 5

12blk/ora 04 6Sa 12a 4 3

ora/blk 24 6Sb 12b 5 6

13blk/grn 15 7Ea

Basicaccess 7

13a 3 4

grn/blk 35 7Eb 13b 6 5

14blk/brn 06 7Sa 14a 4 3

brn/blk 26 7Sb 14b 5 6

15blk/gry 17 8Ea

Basicaccess 8

15a 3 4

gry/blk 37 8Eb 15b 6 5

4 16yel/blu 08 8Sa 16a 4 3

blu/yel 28 8Sb 16b 5 6



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Connecting ISDN Terminals to HiPath 3750 (for U.S. Only)

S0 Bus With MW Jack

To connect ISDN terminals, you must change the signal order so that the transmit wires are onthe inside and the receive wires are on the outside, as shown in Figure 3-70 on Page 3-149.

To do so, jumper the four wires on the provided line cord to the pins for the STMD8 ports on themain distribution frame (MDF).

The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply. Refer to Section 9.10.1 for infor-mation on setting up an S0 bus.

S0 Bus Wiring From STMD8 Port on MDF or From optiset E ISDN adapter (for U.S. Only)

Figure 3-70 S0 Bus Wiring From STMD8 Port or ISDN adapter (for U.S. Only)

MW8 Jack 2(8-pin)

MW8 Jack 1(8-pin)

STMD8 port onMDF (port 1 shown)

MW8 Jack 1(8-pin)

MW8 = Cross the wires fromthe STMD8 port as shown(not required in S0 bus fromISDN adapter).

0ABCDEF

MNOGHIPQRSTUV

↵←→↑↓

1234567890

ABCDEFMNOJKLGHI

PQRSTUVWXYZ

ISDN adapterin optiset Etelephone

MW8 Jacks 2 to 7(8-pin)

261

27

2

Contact is always estab-lished using the center

pins

Last MW8 Jack(8-pin)

SR

SX

SX

SR

123456

12345678

12345678

12345678

12345678

12345678

SX

SX

SR

SR

.

.

.

100 Ω /0.25 W

Terminating resis-tors in the last jack




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.14 TIEL

Introduction

The TIEL board (tie line E & M) provides four analog tie trunk circuits for E&M signaling for Hi-Path 3750 and HiPath 3700. The circuits can be configured for one- or two-way operation. Theyconvert incoming analog signals into PCM (pulse-code modulation) signals and convert outgo-ing PCM signals into analog signals for tie-trunk traffic.

Speech Paths

The speech paths can be set to four-wire or two-wire mode. Four-wire connections should beused for high transmission quality on analog networks (this description deals only with four-wiremode).

The advantage of separate speech paths for the incoming and outgoing directions is that thestability (echo) of a connection is not adversely affected. In addition, repeaters in the transmis-sion equipment compensate for attenuation loss on the line.

E&M Signaling Paths

The E&M signaling paths carry the signals that control connection setup and cleardown. Vari-ous interfaces can be selected, depending on the requirements of the remote system or trans-mission equipment. These interface types have different numbers of wires and different poten-tials.

Starting Up a Tie Trunk

Before you can start up a tie trunk, you must determine the type of interface supported by thetwo systems. Type 2 is preferable because it virtually excludes problems with longitudinal volt-ages.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Characteristics of the Interface Types

E&M interface type 1 (Figure 3-72)

The interface in the transmission equipment does not require negative power feeding. Thistype uses only two signal wires; the communication system and transmission equipmentare non-floating, so they are not protected from longitudinal voltage.

E&M interface type 1A (Figure 3-73)

Same as type 1, but without a 0 V rest potential on the M-wire.

E&M interface type 1B or 5 (Figure 3-74)

The interfaces in both the transmission equipment and the communication system requirenegative power feeding. This type uses only two signal wires. The two M-wires are con-nected to 0 V potential only, meaning that no special measures are required to prevent

short-circuit currents in the event of ground leakage. The communication system andtransmission equipment are non-floating, so they are not protected from longitudinal volt-age.

E&M interface type 2 (Figure 3-75)

The interfaces in both the transmission equipment and the communication system requirenegative power feeding. This type uses four signal wires. The M-contacts are floating, sothere is no non-floating link between the communication system and transmission equip-ment.

E&M interface type 3

This type uses four signal wires. The M-signal has GND or Vbattery (- 48 V) for direct TIEL-to-TIEL connection (without converter).

> Interface type 2 is recommended; it provides the best longitudinal voltage pro-tection.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Interface Specifications

Characteristics of the Signaling Protocols

Connecting two switching units via a tie trunk requires a protocol supported by both systems.HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 supports:

Immediate start protocolNo seizure acknowledgment; with answer signal. This is the most widely used protocol in-ternationally.

Wink signal protocol

Proceed-to-send signal by means of wink signal; with answer signal. This protocol is thesame as immediate start with the addition of a proceed-to-send signal. It is most useful forconnecting systems that are not immediately ready for digit input.

Delay signal protocol

Dialing delay time by means of delay signal; with answer signal. This protocol permits thetransmission of dialing information to be delayed until the receiving exchange is ready. Itdiffers from the wink signal protocol only in that the remote system returns a backward sig-nal immediately after seizure even if it is not ready for digit input.

Transmit path

Four-wire transmit level -3.5 dBrFour-wire receive level -3.5 dBr

Characteristic impedance 600 ohms

Frequency range 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, +/- 1 dB

Dielectric strength of speech wires against ground 1 kV surge, 1.2/50 µs and 10/700 µs

Signaling

Type of E&M interface (programmable) 1, 1A, 1B, 2, 3, 5

Protocols

To ANSI/EIA/TIA-464-A, configurable Immediate startWink signalDelay signal

Signaling method DP or DTMF



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Switches and LEDs

Figure 3-71 TIEL (S30810-Q2520-X)

S4032 3

1

5 6

4

S4042 3

1

5 6

4

Lockout switches:S1/1 to 4:Up = in serviceDown = out of service

S1/5 to 8 = factorytesting

S1 / 1:S1 / 8

H0H1H2H3

S1032 3

1

5 6

4S104

2 3

1

5 6

4

S304

2 3

1

5 6

4

v S204

2 3

1

5 6

4

S102

2 3

1

S202

2 3

1

S302

2 3

1

S402

2 3

1

S203

2 3

1

5 6

4

S303

2 3

1

5 6

4

DIP-FIX switches(factory default):

LEDs




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

DIP-FIX Switch Positions

Table 3-63 TIEL—Functions of the DIP-FIX Switches

Function Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Circuit 4

Switch Position Switch Position Switch Position Switch Position

Type 1(Figure 3-72)

S103

S102

1-24-61-2

S203

S202

1-24-61-2

S303

S302

1-24-61-2

S403

S402

1-24-61-2

Type 1A(Figure 3-73)

S103

S102

1-34-61-2

S203

S202

1-34-61-2

S303

S302

1-34-61-2

S403

S402

1-34-61-2

Type 1B or 5

(Figure 3-74)

S103

S102

1-3

4-51-2

S203

S202

1-3

4-51-2

S303

S302

1-3

4-51-2

S403

S402

1-3

4-51-2

Type 2(Figure 3-75

andFigure 3-76)(factory default)

S103S102

Open1-2

S203S202

Open1-2

S303S302

Open1-2

S403S402

Open1-2

Type 3 S103

S102

1-24-61-3

S203

S202

1-24-61-3

S303

S302

1-24-61-3

S403

S402

1-24-61-3

2-wire speechlines

S104 1-34-6

S204 1-34-6

S304 1-34-6

S404 1-34-6

4-wire speechlines

(factory default)

S104 1-24-5

S204 1-24-5

S304 1-24-5

S404 1-24-5



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Signal Wire Connection

E&M Interface Type 1 (Not for U.S.)

>The following maximum ranges (without converter) must be taken into account:

4-wire speech: 8 km (5 miles) with 0.6 mm diameter (22 AWG) wire 2-wire speech: 6 km (3.75 miles) with 0.6 mm diameter (22 AWG) wire

Figure 3-72 E&M Interface Type 1 (Not for U.S.)

E

1E

1M

2 3

1

5 6

4

2 3

1

CCT 1: S103

CCT 2: S203CCT 3: S303CCT 4: S403

E- 48 V

1E

1M

TIELRemote system or transmis-

sion equipment with TIEL

- 48 V

S102

S202S302S402

2 3

1

5 6

4

2 3

1

CCT 1: S103

CCT 2: S203CCT 3: S303CCT 4: S403

S102

S202S302S402

System A System B

1ka1kb1ga1gb

1ga1gb1ka1kb

(Refer To Table 3-65)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

E&M Interface Type 1A (Not for U.S.)

Figure 3-73 E&M Interface Type 1A (Not for U.S.)

2 3

1

5 6

4

2 3

1

CCT 1: S103CCT 2: S203CCT 3: S303CCT 4: S403

E- 48 VE

M

TIEL

- 48 V

S102S202S302S402

EE

M

Remote system or transmis-sion equipment with TIEL

2 3

1

5 6

4

2 3

1


S102S202S302S402



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

E&M Interface Type 1B or 5 (Not for U.S.)

Figure 3-74 E&M Interface Type 1B or 5 (Not for U.S.)

2 3

1

5 6

4

2 3

1


E- 48 VE

M

TIEL

S102S202S302S402

EE

M

Remote system or transmis-sion equipment with TIEL

2 3

1

5 6

4

2 3

1


S102S202S302S402

- 48 V




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

E&M Interface Type 2 (Not for U.S.)

Figure 3-75 E&M Interface Type 2 (Not for U.S.)

SB

EE

SG

M

2 3

1

5 6

4

2 3

1


E- 48 VE

SG

M

SB

TIELRemote system or transmis-

sion equipment with TIEL

S102S202S302S402

2 3

1

5 6

4

2 3

1


S102S202S302S402

- 48 V



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

E&M Interface Type 2 Circuit Diagram, MDFU or MDFU-E Numbering (Not for U.S.)

Figure 3-76 E&M Interface Type 2 Circuit Diagram, MDFU or MDFU-E Numbering (Not forU.S.)

1

4

5

6

2

3

a2

b2

a1

b1

2

2 3

1

5 6

4

S104

- 48 V

E

SG

M

SB

TIELCircuit 1, E&M interface type 24 speech wires

Splitting strip in MDFU/MDFU-E

CCT 1 CCT 2 CCT 3 CCT 4 Notes

1T 5T 9T 13TOutgoingspeech

1R 5R 9R 13R

2T 6T 10T 14T

Incomingspeech2R 6R 10R 14R

3T 7T 11T 15TIncomingsignaling

3R 7R 11R 15R

4T 8T 12T 16TOutgoingsignaling

4R 8R 12R 16R

- 48 V

27

PTC

k101

S103

1

4

3

S102 1

2.4 k

150 120

Optocoupler

S104

S104

5

2

6

3




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Table 3-64 TIEL—LED Statuses

LED status(on/off)

Meaning Action



Board test not successful Replace board.


Board not configured Inspect visually; if necessary, remove/ insert board.If status continues, replace board.

On Loading operation in progress


Code could not be loaded Replace board.

Off Board loaded


Board loaded but not yet activated

During Operation

On Circuit seized

Flashing in ring

cadence

Circuit in ringing state


Dependability test (loopback test)in progress

Flashing (500/ 500 ms)

Circuit out of service (e.g. S1/x in“on” position)

Check whether the circuit was deacti-vated with HiPath 3000 Manager E orlockout switch.

Off Circuit is idle, no seizure



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


>Assignment must be coordinated with the remote system.

Table 3-65 TIEL - Cable Assignment (Not for U.S.)

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-Wire

SUConnector TIEL

MDFU/ MDFU-E

PatchPanel,

MW8 PinNotes

BP: Xx8

1

1

wht/blu 19 1ka

Port1

1a 5 Ring Transmitwith 4-wirespeech

Transmit +receive with2-wirespeech

blu/wht 39 1kb 1b 4 Tip

2wht/ora 38 1ga 2a 6 Ring Receive with 4-

wire speechora/wht 48 1gb 2b 3 Tip

3

wht/grn 27 1E 3a 1 Ear

Signal wires

grn/wht 47 1SG 3b 2Systemground

4

wht/brn 16 1M 4a 7 Mouth

brn/wht 46 1SB 4b 8 Systembattery

5

wht/gry 05 2ka

Port2

5a 5 Ring Transmitwith 4-wirespeech

Transmit +receive with2-wirespeech

gry/wht 45 2kb 5b 4 Tip

2

6red/blu 14 2ga 6a 6 Ring Receive with 4-

wire speechblu/red 44 2gb 6b 3 Tip

7red/ora 23 2E 7a 1 Ear

Signal wires

ora/red 43 2SG 7b 2Systemground

8

red/grn 32 2M 8a 7 Mouth

grn/red 42 2SB 8b 8Systembattery



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Table 3-66 TIEL - Assignment (SU Xx8) (for U.S. only)

# a-Wire b-Wire

SU Conn.Backplane TIEL Champ jack, MDF Notes

Xx8

1

wht/blu 19 1Ra

Port 1

1 Ring Transmit for 4-wirespeech

Transmit + receive for2-wire speech

blu/wht 39 1Rb 26 Tip

2wht/ora 38 1Sa 2 Ring 1

Receive for 4-wire speechora/wht 48 1Sb 27 Tip 1

3wht/grn 27 2Ra 3 E

Signal wiresgrn/wht 47 2Rb 28 System ground

4wht/brn 16 2Sa 4 M

brn/wht 46 2Sb 29 System battery

5

wht/gry 05 3Ra

Port 2



gry/wht 45 3Rb 30 Tip

6red/blu 14 3Sa 6 Ring 1

Receive for 4-wire speechblu/red 44 3Sb 31 Tip 1

7red/ora 23 4Ra 7 E

Signal wiresora/red 43 4Rb 32 System ground

8red/grn 32 4Sa 8 M

grn/red 42 4Sb 33 System battery

9

red/brn 11 5Ra

Port 3



brn/red 31 5Rb 34 Tip

10red/gry 02 5Sa 10 Ring 1

Receive for 4-wire speechgry/red 22 5Sb 35 Tip 1

11blk/blu 13 6Ra 11 E

Signal wiresblu/blk 33 6Rb 36 System ground

12blk/ora 04 6Sa 12 M

ora/blk 24 6Sb 37 System battery




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

13

blk/grn 15 7Ra

Port 4



grn/blk 35 7Rb 38 Tip

14blk/brn 06 7Sa 14 Ring 1

Receive for 4-wire speechbrn/blk 26 7Sb 39 Tip 1

15blk/gry 17 8Ra 15 E

Signal wiresgry/blk 37 8Rb 40 System ground

16yel/blu 08 8Sa 16 M

blu/yel 28 8Sb 41 System batteryNo other wires used.

Table 3-66 TIEL - Assignment (SU Xx8) (for U.S. only)

# a-Wire b-Wire

SU Conn.Backplane TIEL Champ jack, MDF Notes

Xx8



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.15 TLA2 and TLA4 and TLA8 (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

The loop start boards TLA2, TLA4, and TLA8 connect 2, 4, or 8 analog trunks using DP andDTMF signalling in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350.

Interfaces

Figure 3-77 TLA2 and TLA4 Interfaces (S30817-Q923-Bxxx/Axxx) (Not for U.S.)

Table 3-67 TLA2 and TLA4—Contact Assignments (Not for U.S.)

Contact Connector X2 Connector X4

1 a trunk 1 GND for GEE50 FKR, otherwise free

2 b trunk 1 b trunk 1

3 a trunk 2 a trunk 1


5 a trunk 3 a trunk 2

6 b trunk 3 b trunk 37 a trunk 4 a trunk 3


9 a trunk 4

10 Call charging module assignment (GMZ)

for TLA2 trunks 1 and 2 only

X1

50

2

TLA2/4

X4

X2

1

10

1

8

1

8

toCUP/ CUC

LS ports1–4 to CO

(CO 3, 4

not forTLA2)

to GEEmodule

X3 (free)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

The loop start board TLA8 connects 8 analog trunks using DP and DTMF signalling in HiPath3550 and HiPath 3350.

Figure 3-78 TLA8 Interfaces (S30817-Q926-A301) (Not for U.S.)

Table 3-68 TLA8—Contact Assignments (Not for U.S.)

Contact Conn. X3 Conn. X2 Conn. X4 Conn. X5

1 GND a trunk1 a trunk5 GND

2 b trunk 1 b trunk 1 b trunk 5 b trunk 5

3 a trunk 1 a trunk 2 a trunk 6 a trunk 5


5 a trunk 2 a trunk 3 a trunk 7 a trunk 6


7 a trunk 3 a trunk 4 a trunk 8 a trunk 78 b trunk 4 b trunk 4 b trunk 8 b trunk 8

9 a trunk 4 – – a trunk 8

10 GMZ 1 – – GMZ 2

GMZ= Call charging module assignmentGND=GND for GEE50 FKR, otherwise free

X1

50

2

TLA8

X3

1

10

X2

1

8

X4

1

8

X5

1

10

toCUP/ CUC

LS ports1–4 to CO

To GEEmodule

to GEEmodule

LS ports

5–8 to CO



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.16 TLA4R

Introduction

The TLA4R (Trunk Line Analog Rack) board provides four ports for the analog trunk connection(DP and DTMF signaling methods) on HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19’’ housing). There arealso two ALUM power failure transfers.

The transmission and function-oriented characteristics of the TLA4R are completely identicalto those of the TLA boards that are used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350, except for

the two ALUMs, which are only on the TLA4R.

the call metering receiving equipment interface, which is only on the TLA boards.

Interfaces

Figure 3-79 TLA4R Interfaces (S30817-Q923-Zxxx)

Table 3-69 TLA4R Contact Assignments

MW8 socket X5, pin Trunk connections 1-4

1 14 a trunk 1

15 b trunk 1

2 24 a trunk 2

25 b trunk 2

3 34 a trunk 3

35 b trunk 3

8 MW8sockets

X1

50

2

toCUPRCUCR

X5

11

88

Trunk 1::

Trunk 4

ALUM1 + 2

21:

18




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

4 44 a trunk 4

45 b trunk 4

MW8 socket X5, pin ALUM 1 + 2

5 54 TB1 ALUM1: Stn-card connection

55 TA1

6 64 TB2 ALUM2: Stn-card connection

65 TA2

7 74 BE1 ALUM1: Analog telephone connection

75 AE1

8 84 BE2 ALUM2: Analog telephone connection85 AE2

Table 3-69 TLA4R Contact Assignments



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.17 TMAMF (for selected countries only)

Introduction

The TMAMF (Trunk Module Analog for Multifrequency Code Signaling) board contains eighttrunks for analog direct inward dialing. The system supports MFC-R2 signaling (default setting),MFC-R2 with caller ID, tone dialing, and dial pulsing. It is not possible to use DTMF and MFC-R2 (with or without caller ID) simultaneously.

There are two versions of this board:

S30810-Q2587-A200 for use in HiPath 3700 and HiPath 3750.

S30810-Q2587-A400 for use in HiPath 3550.

Switches and LEDs

Figure 3-80 TMAMF (S30810-Q2587-Axxx)

H0 (green)::::H7

Lockout switch S501(factory default)

On0::7

LEDs

H100 (yellow)

Subminiature D connector forDSP diagnosis




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Notes on DSP Diagnosis

You can use the trace function built into the TMAMF module to diagnose malfunctions or obtainmore precise error analysis. After you run the trace, the subminiature D connector provides in-

formation about MFC-R2 signaling. To activate the trace function, you must connect a PC witha terminal emulation program (such as Microsoft HyperTerminal).

Terminal Configuration:

Bits per second = 19,200

Data bits = 8

Stop bit = 1

Parity = none

Flow control = none

Pin Assignments of the Diagnostic Cable

Figure 3-81 Pin Assignments of the TMAMF Diagnostic Cable

PC: RS-232 interface

1

TMAMF: Subminiature D connector

2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9

12345

6789

1235

1325



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


LED H100 (see Figure 3-80): signal processor status

LEDs H0 to H7 (see Figure 3-80): trunk status

Table 3-70 TMAMF—LED Statuses (H100)

LED Status(On/Off)

Meaning Action

During Startup and Initialization

Off –


The DSP (digital signal processor) iswaiting for DID digits

On The DSP is being reset

During Operation

Off The DSP is idle


Error: the DSP has not yet receivedthe DID digits.

Replace board.

On The MFC-R2 filter is on

Table 3-71 TMAMF—LED Statuses (H0 to H7)

LED Status

(On/Off)

Meaning Action

During Operation

Off The trunk is idle; no seizure

On The trunk was seized


Trunk out of service (e.g. S1/x“closed”)

Check whether the trunk wasdeactivated using HiPath 3000Manager E or the lockoutswitch.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Cable and Connector Assignment (Backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, Patch Panel)

Table 3-72 TMAMF - Cable Assignment

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-Wire SU Connector TMAMF MDFU/ MDFU-E

Patch Panel,MW8 Pin

NotesBP: Xx8

1

1wht/blu 19 1a

Port 11a 4

blu/wht 39 1b 1b 5

2wht/ora 38 2a

Port 22a 4

ora/wht 48 2b 2b 5

3wht/grn 27 3a

Port 33a 4

grn/wht 47 3b 3b 5

4wht/brn 16 4a

Port 44a 4

brn/wht 46 4b 4b 5

5wht/gry 05 5a

Port 55a 4

gry/wht 45 5b 5b 5

2

6red/blu 14 6a

Port 66a 4

blu/red 44 6b 6b 5

7red/ora 23 7a

Port 77a 4

ora/red 43 7b 7b 5

8red/grn 32 8a

Port 88a 4

grn/red 42 8b 8b 5

9red/brn 11

freebrn/red 31

10red/gry 02

freegry/red 22

3

11blk/blu 13

freeblu/blk 33

12blk/ora 04

freeora/blk 24

13blk/grn 15

freegrn/blk 35

14 blk/brn 06 freebrn/blk 26

15blk/gry 17

freegry/blk 37

4 16yel/blu 08

freeblu/yel 28



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.18 TMCAS (for selected countries only)

Introduction

For V1.0 and later, TMCAS (Trunk Module Channel Associated Signaling) boards can be usedin HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700, and HiPath 3550 to support the country-specific CAS protocol.

The board converts Euro-ISDN protocol on an S2M link into Channel Associated Signaling(CAS) protocol. The board functions only in connection with a TMS2 (HiPath 3750, HiPath3700) or TS2 (HiPath 3550). There is no direct connection between the TMCAS board and thesystem’s central control. The TMS2/TS2 handles all signaling and data traffic.

Switches and Display

Figure 3-82 TMCAS (S30810-Q2938-X)

Off= default

S1

S2

S3

Lockout switch(Setting = unlocked, factory de-

fault)

Display

25-pin SUB-D socket:V24 interface for connecting the

service PC with ECGM tool

3 2 1

Switch S4

1

Jumper

H1

X10Battery




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Administration of the CAS Protocol Converter

Use the ECGM tool to administer the CAS protocol converter. For information on installing thesoftware on the service PC and on the required settings, see page 3-181.

You can use the C39195-Z7267-C13 cable for the connection between socket X10 and the ser-vice PC.

Switches S4-1 to S4-4 for Setting the Impedance

To guarantee proper functioning of the TMCAS, both the S2M side of the TMCAS and the TMS2 (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700) or TS2 (HiPath 3550) board must have the same impedance se-lected.

Switches S4-5 to S4-8

Impedance on the CAS Side Switch settings

S4-1 S4-2120 ohms (default) Off Off

100 ohms On Off

75 ohms Off On

No function On On

Impedance on the S2M Side Switch

S4-3 S4-4

120 ohms (default) Off Off

100 ohms On Off75 ohms Off On

No function On On

Switch Function

S4-5 Reserved

S4-6 Flash memory: only for laboratory purposes (the flash memory is erasedwhen switch is “On”).

S4-7 Reserved

S4-8 Battery: Select the “On” switch position to make the connection to the pro-cessor’s real time clock only after the protocol converter has been config-ured.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Jumpers S2 and S3 for GND Connection

You can set the GND connection (signal ground) of the receiving (Rx) and transmitting (Tx)lines on the CAS side here.

Recommendations for the GND connection:

symmetric line (120 ohms)Ground the cable’s shield on the side of the connected device (NT, MUX, modem).

coaxial line (75 ohms)Do not ground the shield on both ends of the cable.

– Tx: Ground the cable’s shield on the TMCAS side.

– Rx: Ground the cable’s shield on the side of the connected device (NT, MUX, modem).

GND connection Jumper setting

no signal ground (default) S2 = 1 - 2, S3 = 1 - 2

signal ground on receive lines (Rx) on the CAS side S2 = 2 - 3

signal ground on the transmit lines (Tx) on the CAS side S3 = 2 - 3




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Seven-Segment Display H1

The board statuses listed in the following table are displayed on H1.

Table 3-73 TMCAS - Seven-Segment Display H1

Display Meaning

Waiting for the TMCAS software download

TMCAS software download start

TMCAS software download

Writing the TMCAS software/extender software into the flash memory

Loading the TMCAS software/extender software from the flash memory

Waiting for ECGM command (10 s)

Calculating the checksum

No TMCAS software in the flash memory, waiting for reload

Flash memory erased (changing display)

TMCAS board active

TMCAS board active, boot process completed



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

TMCAS in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700

A maximum of four TMCAS boards can be used in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. Becauseof the power supply, a maximum of two TMCAS are possible for one cabinet. Because the

board does not need a PCM highway, there are no restrictions concerning the 64 time-divisionmultiplex channels per PCM segment. However, you must always insert the TMCAS immedi-ately to the left of the accompanying TMS2. Figure 3-83 presents an example of a TMCAS inthe HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 cabinet.

page 3-179 has information on the assignments for the two C39195-A9700-B512 / -B514 TM-CAS cables.

Figure 3-83 TMCAS in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Backplane View of the “8-Slot” BasicCabinet

Table 3-74 TMS2-TMCAS C39195-A9700-B510 Connecting Cable Assignment

SU Connector Xx9, pin Function

6 Receive a-wire

26 Receive b-wire

2 Transmit a-wire22 Transmit b-wire

33 +5 V for board detection

35 +5 V (reserved)

4 GND

X70 X50CBCPR

X10X60 X20X30X40X80

X88

X89

X68

X69

X28

X29

X78

X79

X38

X39

UPSMX90

X58

X59

TMS2-TMCAS connecting cable:C39195-A9700-B510, length = 0.2 m

TMCAS cable:C39195-A9700-B512/-

B514, length = 10 m

TM

S2

TM

CAS

X48

X49

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

TMCAS in HiPath 3550

TMCAS can be used only in slot 10 of the wall housing.

page 3-179 has information on the assignments for the two C39195-A9700-B512 / -B514 TM-CAS cables.

Figure 3-84 TMCAS in HiPath 3550

Table 3-75 TS2-TMCAS C39195-A9700-B511 Connecting Cable Assignment

TS2Wieland terminal X2,

pin

Function TMCASSU connector X9,

pin

1, 2, 3 – –

4 +5 V for board detection 33

5 Receive a-wire 66 Receive b-wire 26

7 Transmit a-wire 2

8 Transmit b-wire 22

TS2

TMCAS

X2

X8, X9

TMCAS

TS2X2 X8

X9

PSU/ USV

TMCAS cable:C39195-A9700-B512/-B514, length= 10 m

TS2-TMCAS con-necting cable:C39195-A9700-

B511, length =0.57 m

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Assignments for the Two TMCAS Cables for HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700, and HiPath 3550

You can use one of the two following cables to connect Network Terminator NT, MultiplexerMUX, or modem to the TMCAS board:

symmetric line (120 ohms)

coaxial line (75 ohms)

Table 3-76 C39195-A9700-B512 TMCAS Cable Assignment

SU connector Xx8, pin Function Color code

2 Receive a-wire grn

22 Receive b-wire blk

6 Transmit a-wire red

26 Transmit b-wire blk

Table 3-77 C39195-A9700-B514 TMCAS Cable Assignment

SU connector Xx8, pin Function Wire

2 Receive a-wire BNC shield, cable 1

22 Receive b-wire BNC signal, cable 1

6 Transmit a-wire BNC shield, cable 2

26 Transmit b-wire BNC signal, cable 2




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Procedure for Retrofitting a TMCAS Board

Step Action

1. Disconnect system from power supply and open system.2. Insert TMS2 (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700) or TS2 (HiPath 3550).

3. HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700: Insert TMCAS next to the TMS2, on the left. HiPath 3550 (wall housing): Insert TMCAS in slot 10.

4. Plug in TMS2/TS2-TMCAS connecting cable.

5. Connect the NT to the system using the TMCAS cable.

6. Close the system and connect it to the power supply.

7. After the system has booted, both boards are entered in the system’s database

(TMS2 or TS2 and TMCAS).8. If necessary, configure with HiPath 3000 Manager E.

Possible problems: TMCAS not entered in HiPath 3000 Manager E

The TMCAS is displayed automatically after the generation/regeneration of the databasein a system with a correctly inserted and connected TMCAS-TMS2 / TS2 combination.

Missing electrical connection between TMS2/TS2 and TMCASNo TMCAS entry in the database. If a correctly configured database (with TMCAS insert-ed off-line) is then loaded into the system using generation/regeneration, the TMCASconfigured in HiPath 3000 Manager E appears only in the SW configuration.

Incompatible board configurationThere is a correctly inserted TMCAS-TMS2/TS2 combination in the system. If there is adifferent board entered in HiPath 3000 Manager E immediately to the left of the TMS2 (Hi-Path 3750 and HiPath 3700) HiPath 3000 Manager E or in the HiPath 3550’s large slot,the generation is rejected.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Install ECGM Tool and Configure CAS Protocol Converter

This section contains information on installing the ECGM tool on the service PC and for config-uring the CAS protocol converter on the TMCAS board.

The ECGM tool supports the following actions:

Extender, database and software download

CAS protocol configuration

Database programming

Trace capability

Procedure

Step Action1. Create directory c:\ecginst on the service PC.

2. Set up the connection to the download server (the responsible ITSC can provide youwith information) and copy the following files into the directory c:\ecginst: e1v0xx.exe (for example, e140ah.exe) Ee1v0yy.exe (for example, Ee140am.exe) Ecgm_vzz.exe (for example, Ecgm_4aa.exe)Explanation of the variables: v = software version xx = country version of a file

yy = file version for channels zz = file version for maintenance

3. Execute .exe files. This will extract the following files, for example: Ecgm.cab (WinZip file) Setup.lst (LST file) Setup.exe (EXE file) 4brazil.iam (IAM file) Ecg_edb4.ein (EIN file) 4brazil.eam (EAM file) E140ah.sin (SIN file) E140ah.pnm (PNM file) X140pai.pnm (PNM file) X130aq.pnm (PNM file)

4. Execute Setup.exe file. This will create the directory ecgm and extract various files.

5. Copy vbrazil.iyy (for example, 4brazil.iam ) to the directory ecgm .

6. Execute file ecgm.exe.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

7. Make the following settings in the ECGM tool: File/Options menu: select the service PC’s COM interface (for example,

COM1) File/Install Software menu: Select file E1v0xx.pnm (for example,

E140ah.pnm ) from the directory ecginst. File/Install Edb menu: Select file Ecg_edbv.ein (for example,

Ecg_edb4.ein) from the directory ecginst. File/Update Site menu:

– Under ECG SOFTWARE, select loadware file E1v0xx.pnm .– Under “ECG EDB”, select file vbrazil.iyy.– Under “FILE NAME”, select file extension .db for protocolling TMCAS

events.– Enter the customer name under “ECG NAME”.

8. Close the ECGM tool and then restart (ecgm.exe).

9. Enter the COM interface under “COMM” and the customer name in the Settings/ECG Name menu. All other windows are updated automatically.

10. Channel configurationDefine the channel parameters in the View/Database menu (reserve unused chan-nels with “Out of Service”): Protocol Signaling method (incoming and outgoing) Clock master (always central office)

Operator number (corresponds to the number of the attendant console of the Hi-Path 3000)

11. Software downloadIf the seven-segment display H1 on the TMCAS displays “H”, it is necessary to down-load the extender software (Download/Extender menu). Otherwise, continue withthe next step.

12. Start the software/database download using the Download/Software and Da-

tabase menu. This procedure takes approximately 8 minutes.The download is complete when the configured channels display the “Idle” status.The seven-segment display H1 on the TMCAS shows “A” (= active).

Step Action



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.19 TMDID8 (for U.S. Only)

Introduction

The TMDID8 board (trunk module direct inward dialing) provides direct inward dialing from thecentral office (CO) to the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.

The TMDID8 Module has eight trunk circuits that connect to analog trunks. The circuits convertincoming analog signals into pulse-code modulation (PCM) for processing by the digital HiPath3750 or HiPath 3700 system.

The circuits can be set up for immediate start or wink start.

Switches and LEDs

Figure 3-85 TMDID8 Switches and Indicators (for U.S. Only)

T4 T3 T2 T1

H1

H2

H 3 H4 H 5

H 6 H7 H 8

T8 T7 T6 T5

S4 S3Trunk 7

Trunk 8

Trunk 5

Trunk 6

S2 S1Trunk 3

Trunk 4

Trunk 1

Trunk 2

A

G

A

G

A

G

A

G




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Switches

Adjust switches S1 to S4 to compensate for trunk loop resistance.


Table 3-78 Trunk Conditions for Setting TMDID8 Switches (for U.S. Only)

Trunk Loop < 1800 Ohms:Open Switches

Loop > 1800 Ohms:Close Switches

1 S1A, S1B, S1C, S1D S1A, S1B, S1C, S1D

2 S1E, S1F, S1G, S1H S1E, S1F, S1G, S1H




6 S3E, S3F, S3G, S3H S3E, S3F, S3G, S3H7 S4A, S4B, S4C, S4D S4A, S4B, S4C, S4D


Table 3-79 TMDID8—LED Statuses (for U.S. Only)

Status of LEDs 1–8 Meaning

Off Channel is idle, ready to use

On Channel is seized

Flashing Channel is deactivated

Winking System software test in progress



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Table 3-80 TMDID8 - Assignment (SU Xx8) (for U.S. only)


TMDID8 Champ jack, MDF NotesXx8

1wht/blu 19 1a

Port 11 1 a/Ring


2wht/ora 38 2a

Port 22 2 a/Ring


3wht/grn 27 3a

Port 33 3 a/Ring


4

wht/brn 16 4a

Port 4

4 4 a/Ring


5wht/gry 05 5a

Port 55 5 a/Ring


6red/blu 14 6a

Port 66 6 a/Ring


7red/ora 23 7a

Port 77 7 a/Ring


8red/grn 32 8a

Port 88 8 a/Ring


No other wires used.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Interface Assignments


Table 3-81 TMGL4 Module Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)

Pin Connector X2 Port

1 R trunk 1 1

2 T trunk 1

3 R trunk 2 2

4 T trunk 2

5 R trunk 3 3

6 T trunk 3

7 R trunk 4 4

8 T trunk 4



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Table 3-82 TMGL4R Module Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)

Port X3 Pin(To GEE)

X4 Pin(To trunks 1-4)

X5 Pin(To ANI4R)

Signal

1 3 12 3 Ring, trunk 1

2 13 2 Tip, trunk 1


4 23 4 Tip, trunk 2


6 33 6 Tip, trunk 3

4 9 42 9 Ring, trunk 48 43 8 Tip, trunk 4

– 10 – 10 Call charging module as-signment (GMZ)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.22 TMGL8 (for U.S. Only)

Introduction

A central office trunk module (TMGL8) connects up to eight analog ground-start or loop-starttrunks to the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.

Use HiPath 3000 Manager E to select ground start or loop start. Ground start is the default.

Switches and LEDs

Switches

The TMGL8 Module has an eight-path microswitch under a flip-up cover. For each channel: ON (right): Channel is enabled.

OFF (left): Channel is disabled; no new seizures are permitted.

Figure 3-88 TMGL8 Module (S30810-Q2703-X) (for U.S. Only)

H1...

.

H8

LEDs

Switches 1

8

On



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards



Table 3-83 TMGL8—LED Statuses (for U.S. Only)

Status of LEDs 1–8 Meaning

Off Channel is idle, ready to use

On Channel is seized

Flashing Channel is deactivated

Winking System software test in progress

Table 3-84 TMGL8 - Assignment (SU Xx8) (for U.S. only)


TMGL8 Champ jack, MDF NotesXx8

1wht/blu 19 1a

Port 11 1 a/Ring


2wht/ora 38 2a

Port 22 2 a/Ring


3wht/grn 27 3a

Port 33 3 a/Ring


4wht/brn 16 4a

Port 44 4 a/Ring


5wht/gry 05 5a

Port 55 5 a/Ring


6red/blu 14 6a

Port 66 6 a/Ring


7red/ora 23 7a

Port 77 7 a/Ring


8

red/grn 32 8a

Port 8

8 8 a/Ring


No other wires used.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.23 TML8W (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

A TML8W (trunk module loop start world) board connects up to eight analog trunks for HiPath3750 and HiPath 3700 using the loop-start protocol.

The jumpers on the TML8W must be adjusted for call detail recording with a GEE8 subboard.

Jumpers on TML8W

Figure 3-89 TML8W (S30817-Q626-Axxx/Bxxx) (Not for U.S.)

>For Austria only: If a ÜFS trunk is connected to the TML8W, remove the jumpers(W300 to W650) to activate silent reversal.If silent reversal is inactive, users in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 would hear abusy signal following backward release instead of being released.

W

6 5 0

W

6 0 0

: W

3 0 0

H100 (green)

H101 (red)

Lockout switch S100

(factory tests)

On1:

:8

LEDs

Jumpers

W703

W709

W803

W809

W700

W706

W806

W800

Jumpers(On specificboard vari-ants only)

:

Jumpers

(Circuit)

Insert-

ed

Call Detail

Recording(GEE8)

W700 (1)W703 (2)W706 (3)W709 (4)W800 (5)W803 (6)W806 (7)W809 (8)

Yes 16 kHz/50 Hz

No 12 kHz

W650 (8)W600 (7)W550 (6)W500 (5)W450 (4)W400 (3)W350 (2)W300 (1)

Yes Withoutsilent

reversal

No Withsilent

reversal

Factory default = All jumpers in-serted



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Table 3-85 TML8W—LED Statuses (Not for U.S.)




On Off Board is receiving power and board test inprogress.If status remains the same (board testunsuccessful), board is defective.

Replace board.



Replace board.

Error was detected on board. Board is deacti-vated (not applicable to errors detected bytest loops) orboard was deactivated using HiPath 3000Manager E.


Flashing Off Loadware is being loaded.

Off On Loading was successfully completed andboard is OK (idle state).

Off Flashing At least one circuit is activated.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Table 3-86 TML8W - Cable Assignment (Not for U.S.)

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-WireSU Connector

TML8WMDFU/

MDFU-EPatch Panel,

MW8 PinNotes

BP: Xx8

1

1wht/blu 19 1a

Port 11a 4

blu/wht 39 1b 1b 5

2wht/ora 38 2a

Port 22a 4

ora/wht 48 2b 2b 5

3wht/grn 27 3a

Port 33a 4

grn/wht 47 3b 3b 5

4wht/brn 16 4a

Port 44a 4

brn/wht 46 4b 4b 55

wht/gry 05 5aPort 5

5a 4

gry/wht 45 5b 5b 5

2

6red/blu 14 6a

Port 66a 4

blu/red 44 6b 6b 5

7red/ora 23 7a

Port 77a 4

ora/red 43 7b 7b 5

8red/grn 32 8a

Port 88a 4

grn/red 42 8b 8b 5

9

red/brn 11

freebrn/red 31

10red/gry 02

freegry/red 22

3

11blk/blu 13

freeblu/blk 33

12blk/ora 04

freeora/blk 24

13blk/grn 15

freegrn/blk 35

14 blk/brn 06 freebrn/blk 26

15blk/gry 17

freegry/blk 37

4 16yel/blu 08

freeblu/yel 28



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.24 TMOM (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

The TMOM board (trunk module outgoing multipurpose) provides interfaces for connecting ra-dio paging equipment (PSE) to HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.

Application Information

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 may be equipped with a maximum of one TMOM.

Enhanced radio paging equipment can also be connected.

Switch Functions (Figure 3-90)

Lockout switch S1

– On (down): Board locked

– Off (up): Normal mode

DIP-FIX switches S2, S3 for a/b port changeover for split, incoming, and outgoing trafficwith an 8-wire connection in accordance with ESPA 4.4.3.

– 2-wire (factory default): S2 in position 1-3, S3 in position 1-3

– 4-wire: S2 in position 1-2, S3 in position 1-2

DIP-FIX switch S4 for potential changeover for KX1 to KX16 relay contacts and indicators1 to 4 (not supported).

– Position 1-2: Internal earth terminator (0 V)

– Position 1-3: External potential (from MDFU, factory default)

DIP-FIX switches S5 to S8 for activating indicators 1-4 (not supported)

DIP-FIX switches S9, S10 for potential connection for relay contactsKX1 to KX16 and indicators 1 to 4 (not supported)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

Switches on TMOM

Figure 3-90 TMOM (S30810-Q2535-X) (Not for U.S.)

>The relays shown in Figure 3-90 are not supported.

Relay:

LED H1

DIP-FIX switches:KX1

KX6

KX11

KX15

KX5

KX2

KX12KX16 KX8

KX4

KX7

KX3

KX10

KX14

KX9

KX13

K1P

132

S8

132

S7

132

S6

1

3

2S5

1 32

K1DC

S31

32

S2

K1MK1V

K1I

K1UE

7

2

S10

1

8

7

2S9

1

8

S1

132

S4




boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

PSE Interface

The following standards have be implemented for single-call and enhanced radio paging equip-ment:

ESPA 4.4.3

ESPA 4.4.5 (6-wire)

a, b, c, d interface

Figure 3-91 shows a simplified representation of the PSE interface with all signals. The type ofsignalling depends on the PSE type.

A1/B1: Outgoing and bidirectional traffic, loop current = 14 to 60 mA

A2/B2: Incoming traffic, loop current = 14 to 60 mA

C1: Busy signal with a/b/c connection:Loop current with low impedance = 390 W, loop current = 14 to 60 mALoop current with high impedance = Approx. 8.7 kW, loop current = 3 to 7 mA

D1: Busy signal with a, b, or c connection. Potential = - 48 V.This can be used as a return line for the c-wire.

E1H/E1L: Busy signal with ESPA connection.

M1H/M1L: Busy signal with ESPA connection.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

TMOM—PSE Interface

Figure 3-91 TMOM—PSE Interface (Not for U.S.)

A1 (ring) 1 a

B1 (tip) 1 bA2 (ring) 5 a

B2 (tip) 5 b

C1 2 a

D1 2 b

M1H 4 b

- 48 V

0VK

- 48 V

M1L 4 a

E1H 3 b

0VK

0VK

0VK

t

PSE

E1L 3 a

0VK

- 48 V



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Table 3-87 TMOM—LED Statuses (Not for U.S.)

LED State(On/Off)

Meaning Action



Board test unsuccessful Replace board


Board not configured Visual inspection, plug board in or outif required.Replace board if flashingcontinues.

On Loading operation in progressFlashing(100/100 ms)

Code could not be loaded Replace board

Off Board loaded


Board loaded but not yetactivated

During Operation

On Board seized

Flashing in ringcadence Board in ringing state


Dependability test (loopback test)in progress


Board out of service (e.g. S1 is indown position)

Check whether the board was deacti-vated using HiPath 3000 Manager Eor lockout switch.

Off Board in idle state, no seizure




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Table 3-88 TMOM - Cable Assignment (Not for U.S.)

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-WireSU Connector

TMOMMDFU/

MDFU-EPatch Panel,

MW8 PinNotes

BP: Xx8

1

1wht/blu 19 1a A1 1a

TMOM to PSEinterface

(seeFigure 3-91)

blu/wht 39 1b B1 1b

2wht/ora 38 2a C1 2a

ora/wht 48 2b D1 2b

3wht/grn 27 3a E1L 3a

grn/wht 47 3b E1H 3b

4wht/brn 16 4a M1L 4a

brn/wht 46 4b M1H 4b5

wht/gry 05 5a A2 5a

gry/wht 45 5b B2 5b

2

6red/blu 14 6a

–

Relaycontacts

(notsupported)

blu/red 44 6b

7red/ora 23 7a

–ora/red 43 7b

8red/grn 32 8a

–grn/red 42 8b

9

red/brn 11 9a

–brn/red 31 9b

10red/gry 02 10a

–gry/red 22 10b

3

11blk/blu 13 11a

–blu/blk 33 11b

12blk/ora 04 12a

–ora/blk 24 12b

13blk/grn 15 13a

–grn/blk 35 13b

14 blk/brn 06 14a –brn/blk 26 14b

15blk/gry 17 15a

–gry/blk 37 15b

4 16yel/blu 08 16a

–blu/yel 28 16b



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.25 TMQ4 (for U.S. Only)

Introduction

An ISDN BRI trunk module (TMQ4) connects up to four digital trunks to the HiPath 3550 andHiPath 3350.

The TMQ4 Module provides basic rate interface (BRI) ISDN via a U2B1Q interface. The inter-face supports the following central office protocols:

AT&T 5Ess NI-1

AT&T 5ESS Custom

Nortel DMS100 NI-1

Siemens EWSD NI-1

Interfaces

Figure 3-92 TMQ4 Module Interfaces (for U.S. Only)

X1

50

2

TMQ4 Module

To

CUP/ CUCTo trunks

1

8 X2




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards



Table 3-89 TMQ4 Module Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)

Pin Connector X2 Port Pin Connector X2 Port

1 R trunk 11

5 R trunk 33

2 T trunk 1 6 T trunk 3

3 R trunk 22

7 R trunk 44

4 T trunk 2 8 T trunk 4




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Table 3-90 TMST1—LED Statuses (for U.S. Only)

Red LED Green LED State Action



On Off Board is receiving power and board test inprogress.Board is defective if status remainsunchanged (board test unsuccessful).

Replace board.



Replace board.

Error detected on board. Board isdeactivated (does not applyto errors detected by test loops) / board was deactivated usingHiPath 3000 Manager E.



Off On Loading operation was successfullycompleted and board is functional (idlestate).

Off Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit isactivated.

On On Board error Replace board.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

TMST1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) (for U.S. Only), Assignment

Figure 3-94 TMST1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) C39228-A7195-A12 (for U.S.Only)

Table 3-91 TMST1 Adapter—Cable Assignment (for U.S. Only)

MW8 (RJ48C) SIPAC 1 SU jack SU Connector Backplane TMST1

Xx9

1 C2 22 Receive ring

2 E2 2 Receive tip

3 – – –

4 C6 26 Transmit ring

5 E6 6 Transmit tip

6 – – –

7 – – –

8 – – –

SIPAC 1SU jack(Xx9 back-plane)

MW8 (RJ48C) jack(to the CSU ornetworkedsystem)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.27 TMS2 (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

The TMS2 board (trunk module S2M) provides 30 B-channels (ISDN voice channels) for HiPath3750 and HiPath 3700. These channels can be used fro the following:

S2M Trunk Connection

S2M Networking

To support country-specific CAS protocols, you can use the Euro-ISDN–CAS-Gateway ECG.The ECG cabinet is a protocol converter that converts the Euro-ISDN protocol into the ChannelAssociated Signaling CAS protocol. Refer to the installation instructions, which are providedwith each ECG cabinet, for information on the connection and power supply.For HiPath 3000 V1.0 and later, you can also use the new TMCAS board to support country-

specific CAS protocols.

Switches and LEDs

Figure 3-95 TMS2 (S30810-Q2915-X) (Not for U.S.)

LEDs H1 (red)H2 (green)H3 (red)

Jumpers(setting = symm.line 120 ohms,factory default) 1

2

3

S1

X301

Lockout switch S1

up = in service(factory default)

123

X300

X302

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Jumper Settings

The X300 or X302 jumpers are used to set the TMS2 interface for the connection of this inter-face to NT1. The following can be set:

Symmetrical line (120 ohms)Use only pre-formed cables S30267-Z57-Axxx to guarantee problem-free operation(length = 6 m (not available in BRD), 10 m or 20 m).

Coaxial line (75 ohms)

SU Connector Assignments (Backplane) and Cable Color Codes

Table 3-92 TMS2—Jumper Settings (Not for U.S.)

TMS2Interface

JumperX300

JumperX301

JumperX302

120 ohms =

factory default

2 - 3 2 - 3 2 - 3

75 ohms 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2

Table 3-93 TMS2—SU connector assignments and cable color codes

SU ConnectorXx8/Xx91

Pin

1 SU connector Xx8B is used in board status 4 and lower, whereas SU connector Xx9 is used in board sta-tus 5 and higher.

Function Cable S30267-Z57-AxxxColor Code

Up to and Includ-ing Status 6

Status 7and Later

2 a (T) wire, receive grn wht/blu

22 b (R) wire, receive blk blu/wht

6 a (T) wire, transmit red wht/ora

26 b (R) wire, transmit blk ora/wht

>Note that the SU connector Xx9 was used in the old TMS2M board.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

LED Statuses and their Meanings

H1 (red) and H2 (green) LEDs

H3 LED (see Figure 3-95): Reference clock display (clock is generated if this feature hasbeen configured using HiPath 3000 Manager E.)

– On: Reference clock for clock generator is generated.

– Off: No reference clock

Table 3-94 TMS2—LED Statuses (Not for U.S.)

RedLED

GreenLED

State Action

Off Off Board not receiving power or not pluggedin correctly.Board is deactivated.


On Off Board is receiving power and board test inprogress.Board is defective if status remainsunchanged (board test unsuccessful).

Replace board.

Loadware loading was not successfullycompleted. Board is defective.

Replace board.

Error detected on board. Board isdeactivated (does not apply to errorsdetected by test loops). Board wasdeactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.



Off On Loading operation was successfully

completed and board is functional (idlestate).

Off Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit isactivated.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards


Table 2-9 lists examples of the maximum cable lengths for connecting trunks.

Observe the following when connecting NTs using the S30267-Z57-Axxx cable:

Keep the cable from the NT to HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 as short as possible to ensure

proper operation.

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 must always be grounded (whether the line used by the net-work provider is copper or optical fiber). (See 1 TR 211 item 2.4, Protective Measures andGrounding.). The diameter of the earth conductor must be at least 2.5 mm2. Grounding thesystem using sheath wires is not sufficient. For operating reasons, keep the ground con-nection from the NT to the system as short as possible.

Power feedingThe NT must be fed over the –48 V (max. 10 W, observe the power requirements of theNTs) of the UPSM (see Figure 3-97).The voltage is fed out on backplane connector X06 (pins 17 + 37 = –48 V). Use the suppliedCablu to connect the system with the MDFU. This places the voltage on pair no. 15 (= –48V) of the splitting strip.The delivery does not include a Cablu if the REAL board has been ordered or is alreadybeing used (the necessary Cablu is included in the delivery of the “ALUM using REAL” fea-ture).

Figure 3-96 S2M Trunk Connection (Not for U.S.)

7CautionIn order to guarantee successful operation, you must ensure that the NT isgrounded on the network provider side.

S30267-Z57-Axxx cable

6 m (not Germany), 10 m and 20 m

HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700

TMS2 NT

Public network




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

S2M—NT Connection

Figure 3-97 Supplying NTs Via S2M

Figure 3-98 S2M—NT Connection (Not for U.S.)

UPSM

MDFU

0 V- 48 V

Earth

TMS2

Pair no. 15

- 48 VX06

NT

HiPath 3750,HiPath 3700

Cablu

NT 1

PE

a

ba

b

Shield

Receive di-rection

Transmit di-rection

BA

CKPLANE

TMS2

HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 (NT 2)

Earth connection,min. 2,5 mm2

Feeding, see Figure 3-97

Backplane, connection to– Xx8– Xx9 (from board state 5)

Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx– Length: 6 (not in Germany), 10 and 20 m– Color code (see Table 3-93)The wires in a wire pair may be interchanged.

Networktermination:the connectiondepends onthe country-specific NT.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

S2M Connection to Deutsche Telekom NT (for Germany only)

Figure 3-99 S2M - NT Connection Deutsche Telekom (for Germany only)

PE

NT 1

– (- 48 V)s UBatt

+ (0 V)

asb S2M

a

a UK2

ssb S2M

ba UK2

sb

Receive

Transmit

FPE– (- 48 V)s UBatt

+ (0 V)

asb S2M

a

sb S2M

4321

8765

109

NTPMGF NTPMKU

Shield

Receive di-rection

Transmit di-

rection

BACKPL

ANE

TMS2

HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 (NT 2)

4321

876

109

5

1211

16151413

Earth connection,min. 2,5 mm2

Feeding

Feeding, see Figure 3-97

Backplane, connection to– Xx8– Xx9 (from board state 5)

Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx– Length: 6 (not in Germany), 10 and 20 m– Color code (see Table 3-93)The wires in a wire pair may be interchanged.

s = Shield




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

S2M Networking

For examples of the maximum cable lengths for direct CorNet-N networking, refer to Table 2-9.

Figure 3-100 S2M Networking Options (Not for U.S.)


TMS2

HiPath 3000

Cable S30267-Z58-A50 (5 m) (not in Germany)TMS2

S2M networking in site without NT

4


TMS2


TMS2

S2M networking in site with NT

NT NTFixed connection(cabling must be approved

by NT supplier)


TMS2 TMS2

S2M networking using leased lines

NT NT

Fixed connection via public network (NTconnection according to Figure 3-98)


TMS2

HiPath 4000

Cable S30267-Z59-A45 (4.5 m)(Extendable with HiPath 4000-specific cable)

4

Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx6 m (not in Germany), 10 m and 20 m

Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx6 m (not in Germany), 10 m and 20 m




boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.28 TST1 (for U.S. Only)

Introduction

The Digital T1/PRI trunk module (TST1) connects the communications server to primary rateinterface (PRI) ISDN via a T1 interface. There are two versions of this board:

S30810-Q2919-X - for use in the HiPath 3550 (wall housing)

S30810-K2919-Z - for use in the HiPath 3500 (19-inch housing)

The TST1 can also connect to the following:

SF

ESF

The TST1 can be installed in: Rel.2.2 hardware and Rel.2.2 software: Slot 7 or Slot 9.

Rel.1.0 loadware and Rel.2.2 software: Slot 6 only.

Rather than connecting to a main distribution frame (MDF), the TST1 connects to a channelservice unit (CSU). The CSU supplies the required secondary protection.

Interfaces

Figure 3-101 TST1 Interfaces (for U.S. Only)

X1

50

1

toCUCCUCR

TST1To trunk X2

1

8




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Table 3-95 TST1 Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)

Pin X2 Pin X2

1 receive ring 5 transmit tip

2 receive tip 6 not connected

3 not connected 7 not connected

4 transmit ring 8 not connected



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

3.3.29 TS2 and TS2R (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

The board contains a four-wire interface with S2M code for connection to the public telecommu-nications network or private networks.

Up to thirty trunk calls can be conducted simultaneously via the S2M interface. The total trans-mission speed including signaling and synchronization is 2048 Mbit/s.

There are two versions of this board:

TS2 (trunk module S2M) S30810-Q2913-X100 (Figure 3-102) - for use in the HiPath 3550(wall housing)

TS2R (trunk module S2M rack) S30810-K2913-Z100 (Figure 3-103) - for use in the HiPath

3500 (19-inch housing)Board usage is subject to the following restrictions:

Only one TS2/TS2R board allowed (primary multiplex access)

For slot 7 or 9 only

To support country-specific CAS protocols, you can use the Euro-ISDN–CAS-Gateway ECG.The ECG cabinet is a protocol converter that converts the Euro-ISDN protocol into the ChannelAssociated Signaling CAS protocol. Refer to the installation instructions, which are providedwith each ECG cabinet, for information on the connection and power supply.For HiPath 3000 V1.0 and later, you can also use the new TMCAS board to support country-specific CAS protocols.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

TS2 Interfaces

TS2R Interfaces

Figure 3-102 TS2 Interfaces (S30810-Q2913-X100)

Figure 3-103 TS2R Interfaces (S30810-K2913-Z100)

X1

50

2

X2

8

1

To

CUC

TS2S

2M interface:

Wieland termi-nal (symm. line)

X51

MW8 (RJ48C) jack (MW line)

X1

50

2

To

CUCR

TS2R

X51

S2M interface:

MW8 (RJ48C) jack (MW line)



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Network Interfaces

The TS2 board is connected to the network transfer point (NT1) via the symmetrical line (120ohms, four-wire twisted-pair cable) at X2 or via a MW line at X5.

Note: use the connection kits listed on page 3-219 for NT connections in Spain and Portugal.

Symmetrical Line (120 ohms)

The maximum cable length (approx. 130 m) depends on the quality of the cable used and itssignal attenuation. Use shielded cables only to guarantee proper operation.

Connect the cable to the X2 using an 8-pin Wieland terminal (TS2 only).

MW Line (MW8 Jack (RJ48C))

The shielded 8-pole MW8 (RJ48C) jack X5 is provided for connecting MW lines. The maximumcable length (approx. 100 m) depends on the quality of the cable used and its signal attenua-tion.

Table 3-96 Contact Assignments for X2 Connector

Pin X2 (TS2 only)

1 –48 V (NT1 feeding), max. 15 W2 0 V (NT1 feeding)

3 GND

4 Board ID for TMCAS

5 Transmit a-wire

6 Transmit b-wire

7 Receive a-wire

8 Receive b-wire

Table 3-97 Contact Assignments for the MW8 (RJ48C) jack X5

Pin X5 Pin X5

1 Receive b-wire 6 free

2 Receive a-wire 7 free3 free 8 free

4 Transmit b-wire 11 GND

5 Transmit a-wire 12 GND

An additional line must be provided from pins 1 and 2 on the X2 connector to NT1for NT1 feeding.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards


Keep the cable from the NT to HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3500 as short as possible to ensure prop-er operation.

NT1 Power Supply

TS2 boardThe NT1 supply voltage of –48 V can be tapped from the X2 connector (see Table 3-96).There is a power limit of < 15 W for this voltage, which the system feeds over the CUC.

TS2R boardThe NT1 power supply must come from an S30122-X7321-X (S30122-X7321-X100 withUPS operation) optiset E local power supply.

Figure 3-104 S2M Trunk Connection

7Caution

There should be absolutely no ground connection between the HiPath 3550 wallhousing and the NT. Do not connect the shield of the connecting cable you are usingeither on the HiPath 3550 side or on the NT side.If the System HiPath 3550 is separately grounded (such as with the HiPath 3500 19’’housing), you may make a connection between HiPath 3550 and NT.


TS2/TS2R NT1

Public network



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

Cable Set for NT Connections (Spain and Portugal Only)

Connection kit contents and part numbers:

TS2 connection kit for Spain and Portugal: F50035-E2-X63,

containing the following:– Interface converter: S30122-X7357-X

– Cable 1 = Patch cable MW8 (RJ48C), 10 m: C39195-Z7208-A100

– Cable 2 (2 units) = coaxial adapter cable, 30 cm: S30267-Z354-A3

TS2 upgrade kit for Portugal: L30252-U600-A190,containing the following:

– Cable 3 (2 units) = Mini-coaxial cable, 10 cm: S30267-Z353-A1

Figure 3-105 S2M - NT Connections for Spain and Portugal

Cable 1


NT

Public

network

Interfaceconverter Cable 2

Portugal

Cable 3

Cable 1


NT

Publicnetwork

Interfaceconverter Cable 2

Spain (and in certain cases Portugal)

TS2/TS2R

TS2/TS2R




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

3.3.30 4SLA (Not for U.S.), 8SLA, (for All Countries) and 16SLA (Not forU.S.)

IntroductionThe 4SLA, 8SLA, and 16SLA (subscriber line analog) modules connect HiPath 3550 and Hi-Path 3350 to analog telephones and supplementary equipment (such as group 3 fax machinesand entrance telephone adapters) via analog interfaces.

The 8SLA is supported in the U.S.; the 4SLA and 16SLA are not.

Interfaces

Figure 3-106 4SLA and 8SLA Interfaces (S30810-Q2923-X200 / -X100)

ToCUPCUC

Analog ports1 to 4Stns. 1 to 4

Analog ports5 to 8Stns. 5 to 8(not with 4SLA)

X1

50

2

X2

X3

4SLA and 8SLA

1

8

1

8

Note: 4SLA not for U.S.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards



Table 3-98 4SLA and 8SLA Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.)

Pin X2 (Analog Ports 1 to 4) X3 (Analog Ports 5 to 8)

1 a 1 a 5

2 b 1 b 5

3 a 2 a 6

4 b 2 b 6

5 a 3 a 7

6 b 3 b 7

7 a 4 a 8

8 b 4 b 8

Table 3-99 4SLA/8SLA Contact Assignments, 8SLA Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)

Pin X2 (Ports 1-4) X3 (Ports 5-8)

1 R1 R5

2 T1 T5

3 R2 R6

4 T2 T65 R3 R7

6 T3 T7

7 R4 R8

8 T4 T8




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Peripheral Boards

The operating mode (short or long line with the appropriate flash times) can be set up for eachsubscriber line interface with HiPath 3000 Manager E (the menu Settings: Set up station –>Station –> Parameters –> Flags).

Figure 3-107 16SLA Interfaces (S30810-Q2923-X) (Not for U.S.)

Table 3-100 16SLA Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.)

Pin X2

(Analog Ports1 to 4)

X3


X4


X5

(Analog Ports

13 to 16)

1 a 1 a 5 a 9 a 13

2 b 1 b 5 b 9 b 13

3 a 2 a 6 a 1 a 14

4 b 2 b 6 b 10 b 14

5 a 3 a 7 a 11 a 15

6 b 3 b 7 b 11 b 15

7 a 4 a 8 a 12 a 168 b 4 b 8 b 12 b 16



X1

50

2

X2

X3

16SLA

1

8

1

8

X4

X5

1

8

1

8



ToCUPCUC



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

SLA Module Specifications

Maximum supply current: Approximately 34 mA

Maximum supply voltage: Approximately 40 Vdc

Ring voltage against negative supply voltage (tip wire/RING):Two telephones maximum

Range, see Section 2.7

Loop current detection: > 10 mA

Ground button detection: > 20 mA

The transmission method can be configured country-specifically (by entering the countrycode).



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Peripheral Boards

SLA Module Specifications

Maximum supply current: approximately 34 mA

Maximum supply voltage: approximately 40 Vdc

Ring voltage against negative supply voltage (tip wire/RING): two telephones maximum

Range, see Section 2.7

Loop current detection > 10 mA

Ground button detection > 20 mA

The transmission method can be configured country-specifically (by entering the countrycode).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4 Options

3.4.1 ALUM4

Introduction

In the event that HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 experiences a voltage drop, voltage dip or unre-coverable system errors, the ALUM module can transfer up to four analog trunks directly to fouranalog telephones, bypassing the system.

The ALUM4 Module provides power failure transfer for MSI ground-start or loop-start trunks,but ground-start trunks require a physical ground-actuator button.

When the system is deactivated or when an error occurs, the trunks are connected directly tothe telephones. When normal operation resumes, the trunks are again routed through the sys-

tem.

Only analog telephones can be used for the transfer, and they must use the same signalingmethod as the trunk; otherwise, dialing is not possible.

ALUM4 Module Function

Figure 3-109 ALUM4 Function

From analog

To analog

X3

X4

System

X6 KX-X relay interface

116

CO trunks

stations

To analogtrunk board

To central boardor analog sub-scriber board

Pins 1-8

Pins 9-16



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

Interfaces

ALUM Module Interface Assignments

Figure 3-110 ALUM4 Interfaces (S30817-Q935-A)

>Split the cable from X6 and connect half to the analog trunk board and half to the CBanalog ports or analog subscriber boards.

Table 3-102 ALUM4 Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.)

Pin Connector X3 Connector X4 Connector X6

1 R1 from trunk 1a AE1 to Stn. 1a AT1 to TLA a

2 T1 from trunk 1b BE1 to Stn. 1b BT1 to TLA b




6 T3 from trunk 3b BE3 to Stn. 3b BT3 to TLA b7 R4 from trunk 4a AE4 to Stn. 4a AT4 to TLA a


9 – – TA1 to SLA* a

10 – – TB1 to SLA* b


ALUM module

To OPAL

To next option

X1

X2

X3

X4

From

Totelephone

1

8

1

8

X6 116trunk




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

Note: Pinouts shown are at the board itself. The supplied main distribution frame cable (MDFcable) reverses the signal order for X3 and X4 before the MDF.






* = or to free analog port

Table 3-103 ALUM4 Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)

Pin X3(to MDF)

X4(to MDF)

Y-Cable from X6 toTMGL4

Y-Cable from X6 toAnalog Ports1

1 To the analog station ports on the CBPC (recommended) or to four consecutive ports on an 8SLA.

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1 R from trunk 1 R to station 1 1 T to TMGL4 port 1 9 T to analog port 1

2 T from trunk 1 T to station 1 2 R to TMGL4 port 1 10 R to analog port 1




6 T from trunk 3 T to station 3 6 R to TMGL4 port 3 14 R to analog port 37 R from trunk 4 R to station 4 7 T to TMGL4 port 4 15 T to analog port 4


Table 3-102 ALUM4 Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.)

Pin Connector X3 Connector X4 Connector X6



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

ALUM4 Module Block Diagram

Figure 3-111 ALUM4 Circuit in Power Failure Mode

To analog phone via X4

Subscr. board

Trunk board

BT1 (T1)

AT1 (R1)

TA1 (R1)

TB1 (T1)

Relay

Relay

To trunk via X3

ALUM

R1 T1

K2-BK1-B

AE1 BE1

K1-C K2-C

Connector X6





P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4.2 ANI4 (for selected countries only)

Introduction

The ANI4 (automatic number identification) module is responsible for receiving station numbersusing the CPFSK method, demodulating them, and forwarding them to the HiPath 3550 or Hi-Path 3350. With V4.0 SMR-7 or later, the station name is analyzed in addition to the call numberand shown on the telephone display.

Each ANI4 module can serve four trunks. It contains the external trunk board hardware inter-faces (TMGL4) as well as a trunk and options bus interface. It connects to the trunk board(TMGL4), to the trunks, and to the options bus interface, providing the connection between thetrunks and the trunk board by means of the system.

Interfaces on the ANI4 Module


On the ANI4 board two LEDs are implemented that show the status of trunk channel 1.

After system startup the green LED is on and the red LED is off. This signalizes that the layer1 firmware has started correctly.

If ANI4 is recognized properly by the system, the green LED is reset (after all system softwareinitialization), and the bottom line of the display on the optiset E or optiPoint 500 phones ap-pears. This means that the ANI4 has received system software activation for all four channels.

Figure 3-112 ANI4 Interface (S30807-Q6917-Axxx) (for selected countries only)

To OPAL, or previous option

Module side

TMGL4X1

X2

X3 *)

X4CO Trunk ANI4

2/14/36/58/710/9

1

8

*) Pins: Component side/solder side

(green) (red)

LED’s



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

Table 3-104 ANI4 - LED Statuses for Trunk Channel 1 (for selected countries only)

LED Meaning Action

Green LED - Firmware Condition

Off No caller ID signals on the line. Call service provider andask if feature is available.

Line is not connected to trunk channel 1. Connect line to trunk chan-nel 1 .

The incoming signal is lower than –36 dBm (as de-fined in Bellcore SR3004 for the lowest caller ID sig-nal (space - signal)): the Mitel chip shows no reaction.

Call service provider andask if feature is available.If so, the signal that appearson the customer side is too

low (not Bellcore conform).This must be corrected bythe service provider.

The LED or the micro controller is defective. Replace ANI4 board.

The system has not yet started. Start up system.

On(but

glowingweakly)

The Mitel chip is interpreting the signal on the line asa FSK carrier signal. However, this could mean thatthere is noise or speech on the line, too. The firmwareis in the state of recognition.

–

On(for ap-prox.1 s)

A valid caller ID signal (correct channel seizure/mark- bit sequence + valid message byte) on the line is be-ing recognized at the moment. If no message is dis-played on the optiset E or optiPoint 500 phones, therecould be too much noise on the line, which meansthat some bits from the signal are changed to the oth-er logical condition. The firmware builds the check-sum for the received caller ID message bytes andcompares this checksum with the one received.

–

Red LED - Checksum Status

On The received caller ID signal has a checksum error.The LED is reset after the next correct caller ID mes-sage is received.

If the red LED is on after ev-ery call: the FSK signal isprovided, but is not Bellcoreconform on the customerside. This must be correctedby the service provider.

Off Checksum is OK. –




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

ANI4 Module Contact Assignments

Table 3-105 ANI4 Pin Assignments (for selected countries only)

Pin Connector X3Component Side

Connector X3Solder Side

Connector X4

1 -- Not assigned Tip, trunk 1

2 Ring, trunk 1 -- Ring, trunk 1

3 -- Tip, trunk 1 Tip, trunk 2


5 -- Tip, trunk 2 Tip, trunk 3


7 -- Tip, trunk 3 Tip, trunk 48 Ring, trunk 4 -- Ring, trunk 4

9 -- Tip, trunk 4 –

10 Not used -- –



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

ANI4 Installation Instructions

Follow the steps below to install ANI4 in the HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 system.

1. Disconnect the trunks from the TMGL4 board (Figure 3-113, fig. 1).

2. Unplug the system from the power supply.

3. Install the ANI4 board in the system.

4. Connect the OPAL adapter cable to the ANI4 board.5. Use the ribbon cable supplied with the board to connect the ANI4 to the TMGL4, making

sure that the color markings (Pin 1) at both ends of the cable are facing up (Figure 3-113,fig. 2).

6. Connect the trunk slip-on connectors to the ANI4 board (Figure 3-113, fig. 3).

7. Restart the system by reconnecting the power plug.

7 CautionRemove the trunk slip-on connectors from the TMGL4 board before starting to workon the system.Be sure to reinstall the ANI4 and TMGL4 boards in their slots before reconnectingthe trunks.

Figure 3-113 ANI4 - Installation Steps (for selected countries only)

Fig. 2 Fig. 3Fig. 1

Pin 1

Pin 1




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4.3 ANI4R (for selected countries only)

Introduction

The ANI4R (automatic number identification rack) module is responsible for receiving stationnumbers using the CPFSK method, demodulating them, and forwarding them to the HiPath3500 or HiPath 3300. With V4.0 SMR-7 or later, the station name is analyzed in addition to thecall number and shown on the telephone display.

Each ANI4R module can serve four trunks. It contains the external trunk board hardware inter-faces (TMGL4R) and the options bus interface.

If ANI4R is installed as option 1 or 2, TMGL4R board must be inserted in slot 4, 6 or 8 (Slots 6and 8 not available with HiPath 3300).

Interfaces on the ANI4R Module

Figure 3-114 ANI4R Interface (S30807-Q6917-Z103) (for selected countries only)

To OPALR, or previous option

Module side

TMGL4RX1

X2

X3 (10-pole MW10 jack)

ANI4R

1

10



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

ANI4R Module Contact Assignments

Table 3-106 ANI4R Pin Assignments (for selected countries only)

X3 Pin Signal X3 Pin Signal

1 – 6 Tip, trunk 3

2 Tip, trunk 1 7 Ring, trunk 3

3 Ring, trunk 1 8 Tip, trunk 4

4 Tip, trunk 2 9 Ring, trunk 4

5 Ring, trunk 2 10 Call charging module assign-ment (GMZ)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4.4 Announcement and Music Modules

Introduction

The HiPath 3000 systems use different modules or boards for playing announcements and mu-sic on hold. For details on connecting these boards, refer to the manufacturer’s installation in-structions.

Overview

7CautionPlace the central control board on a flat surface before inserting a subboard. Other-wise you may damage the board.

>

With V4.0 SMR-7 or later, music on hold is also possible with the following HiPathXpressions Compact boards: IVML8 and IVML24 (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700) IVMP8 and IVMP8R (Not for U.S.) (HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300) IVMS8 and IVMS8R (HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300)

Table 3-107 Announcement and Music Modules

Board Part Number Notes

EXM S30817-Q902-B401 Used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing),

see Figure 3-115. Connected via cable to X4 connector on CBCC and

CBCP.

EXMR S30122-K7403-Z Used in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch hous-ing).

Board installed directly on CBRC (X19 and X20). Connected via cable to Cinch jack on the front panel

(see Figure 3-116).

MPPI(not for

U.S.)

S30122-K7275-B Used in all HiPath 3000 systems Board installed directly on the central control board

(X19 and X20).MPPI(not forU.S.)

S30122-K5380-X200 Used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing). Connected via cable to X4 connector on CBCC/CBCP.

UAM(not forU.S.)

S30122-X7217-X Used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing). Connected to OPAL and analog interface (for the an-

nouncement function)



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

Notes on Querying Optional Boards

You can query HiPath 3000 Manager E on the presence of optional boards. The presence ofMPPI or UAM (HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 only) is displayed as “Option 5”. The ALUM4 mod-ule cannot be displayed.

Slot for EXM

Connection of EXMR

UAMR(not forU.S.)

S30122-X7402-Z Used in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch hous-ing).

Connected to OPALR and analog interface (for the an-nouncement function).

Figure 3-115 EXM Slot for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (Not for U.S.)

Figure 3-116 EXMR Connection to HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300

Table 3-107 Announcement and Music Modules

Board Part Number Notes

Cable duct

Slot for EXM module

Front panelof the system

Cinch jack

X1

X2

Cable C39195-Z7001-C79

EXMR(component side)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4.5 EXMNA (for U.S. Only)

Introduction

The EXMNA (external music on hold) module provides a connection for external music on holdin HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350.

The EXMNA connects to the CBCC and CBCP board (connector X4) by means of a ribbon ca-ble.

Ribbon cable connected = External music

Ribbon cable not connected = Internal music

Expert mode code 22 11 allows you to choose between music on, music off, ring tone, or musicon unscreened transfer. If the EXMNA module is connected, you must select Music on using

Manager T or HiPath 3000 Manager E. The module is operational as soon as it is plugged in.

Interfaces

Figure 3-117 EXMNA Interfaces (S30807-Q6923-X) (for U.S. Only)

Figure 3-118 EXMNA Slot for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (for U.S. Only)

Ribboncable toCB

To externalmusic source

1

10

X1

X2

EXMNA

Cable duct

Slot for EXMNA module



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

Table 3-108 EXMNA Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only)


1 GND Input

2 Not assigned Input

3 Not assigned Not assigned

4 EXMCL Not assigned

5 EXMDIR –

6 HRES –

7 EXMD –

8 EXMDET –9 +5 V –

10 Not assigned –




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4.6 GEE8 (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

In HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700, the GEE8 module (12/16 kHz) can be plugged into theTML8W board to record call charge pulses. Interfaces X10 and X11 connect to the board.

Switch for Setting the Level per Circuit

On = – 24 dBm

Off = – 10 dBm

Switch on GEE8

Figure 3-119 GEE8 (S30817-Q664-xxxx) (Not for U.S.)

X10 X11On 1 8



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

3.4.7 GEE12, GEE16, and GEE50 (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

Each of the modules listed below supports four call-metering receiving units for recording andpreprocessing call charge pulses in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350.

The call charge detection channel is looped in the trunk and then routed to the TLA

Interfaces

Table 3-109 GEE12, GEE16, and GEE50 Modules (Not for U.S.)

Module Frequency Remarks

GEE 12 12 kHz also for Silent Reversal

GEE 16 16 kHz

GEE 50 50 Hz

Figure 3-120 GEE12, GEE16, and GEE50 Interfaces (S30817-Q951-Axxx)

GEE module

To OPAL

To next option

X1

X4

1

10X3

1

8

to TLAX5

1 10

to COLS X2




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

Contact Assignments

Table 3-110 GEE12, GEE16, and GEE50 Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.)

Pin Connector X3 Conn. X4 Connector X5

1 a GND * CO 1 (AL1) 0V

2 b CO 1 (BN 1) CO 1 (BL1) 0V

3 a CO 1 (AN 1) CO 2 (AL2) RTS

4 b CO 2 (BN 2) CO 2 (BL2) CTS

5 a CO 2 (AN 2) CO 3 (AL3) RXD

6 b CO 3 (BN 3) CO 3 (BL3) TXD

7 a CO 3 (AN 3) CO 4 (AL4) 0V

8 b CO 4 (BN 4) CO 4 (BL4) +5V

9 a CO 4 (AN 4) – 0V

10 Call charging module assignment – +5V

* for GEE 50 in France; otherwise free



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

3.4.8 HOPE Board

Introduction

The HOPE (Hicom Office PhoneMail Entry) board provides Hicom Office PhoneMail Entryvoicemail system functions.

Caution: The HOPE board does not identify itself to the system and is therefore not visible inthe HiPath 3000 Manager E card map. When expanding a system (such as HiPath 3350 andHiPath 3550), ensure that a free slot is indeed available.

Interfaces

Board Components

The following list describes the purpose of the components on the HOPE board: The LED status indicator signals the state of the Hicom Office PhoneMail system

The software load/diagnostic button is for software loads (for example, loading a language)

The digital station connector connects the HOPE board to the corresponding digital ports,using a modular cable

The on/off switch turns Office PhoneMail on and off

Figure 3-121 HOPE Board (S30122-Q7078-X; S30122-Q7079-X—in U.S.)

LED status indicatorSoftware load/diagnostic button

Digital station connector

ON/off switch(Off—towards LEDOn—towards slot)

PCMCIA slot

Card ejector




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

The PCMCIA slot is for Office PhoneMail software cards (for example, language cards)

The card ejector ejects the software cards from the PMCIA slot

Installation, Servicing, and Connectivity (for U.S. Only)

For information on installing, connecting, and servicing the HOPE board, refer to the manualInstallation and System Administration Guide, Hicom Office PhoneMail Entry part numberG281-0561-00. This book is shipped with every Hicom Office PhoneMail Entry unit.



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

3.4.9 OPAL and OPALR

Introduction

The adapter cable for connecting the central board to the first optional board comes in two ver-sions:

OPAL (option adapter cable long) C39195-A7001-B130 (Figure 3-122) - for use in HiPath3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing).

OPALR (option adapter cable long rack) C39195-A7001-B142 (Figure 3-123) - for use inHiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing).

OPAL Interfaces

Figure 3-122 OPAL (C39195-A7001-B130)

To CBCC or CBCP interface

To option board

Ribbon cablefolded and secured




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

OPALR Interface

Figure 3-123 OPALR (C39195-A7001-B142)

To CBRC interface

To option board



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

3.4.10 PFT1 and PFT4 (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

In the event of a power failure or system error in HiPath 3750, up to

1 analog trunk with a PFT1 (trunk failure transfer) board

4 analog trunks with a PFT4 board

can be transferred (ALUM) to designated analog telephones (Figure 3-124). When using an an-alog telephone for outgoing calls, you may need to adapt its signaling method to match the sig-naling method of the connected trunk..

Trunk Failure Transfer Using PFT1 or PFT4

Figure 3-124 Trunk Failure Transfer Using PFT1/PFT4 (Not for U.S.)

RELAY

TMB

TMA

SMA

SMB

Trunk cir-cuit

SLA board

(optional)

Analog tel.

SLBSLA

ba

TRUNK

PFT




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

Installation Location of the PFT1 or PFT4 Board (MDFU or MDFU-E)

Wire PFT1 or PFT4 into the MDFU or MDFU-E. The boards require -48 V. For the assignmentsof both boards, see Figure 3-126.

Figure 3-125 Installation Location of PFT1 and PFT4 (MDFU or MDFU-E) (Not for U.S.)

2 x PFT1or

1 x PFT4

System side Line network



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

PFT1 and PFT4 Board Assignment

Figure 3-126 PFT1 (S30777-Q539-X) and PFT4 (S30777-Q540-X) Board Assignment (Notfor U.S.)

X3 X4

X1 X2

10

1

10

SMB

A

SLASLB

SMA

TMBTMA

B

1

10

SMB

A

SLASLB

SMA

TMBTMA

B

1

SMB

A

SLASLB

SMA

TMBTMA

B

10

1

SMB

A

SLASLB

SMA

TMBTMA

B

PFT- 48V

X1

10

1

SMB

A

SLASLB

SMA

TMBTMA

B

PFT- 48V

TMA, TMB = Trunk circuitA, B = a, b (Telephone company)SMA, SMB = SLA boardSLA, SLB = Analog telephone

PFT1

PFT4




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4.11 REAL

Functions

The tasks of the REAL (S30807-Q5913-X) board in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 are dividedinto two functional areas (see Figure 3-128):

Relay

Four individual, controllable relays (K1 to K4) are available for special connections. The re-lays are energized by the CBCPR board via the REAL socket X05 connecting cable. Theswitch contacts for all relays are floating and protected by surge protectors.

In addition, a –48 V line fused using a PTC resistor is routed to the main distribution frameand can be used there for external applications (max. 80 mA).–48 V lines are provided at pins 17 and 37 (SU connector X06) for external applications

with higher power requirements. These lines have a load capacity of max. 15 W.

Trunk failure transfer

This function is provided by two relays (K5, K6) with two switch contacts each. In the eventof a power failure or a system restart or reload, an analog trunk is transferred from the sys-tem to an analog telephone. The system monitors the line’s loop current to avoid discon-necting any trunk calls in progress when the power is restored.

In normal mode, the relays are activated:

– The trunk is connected to the line trunk module.

– The subscriber line is connected to the SLA16 subscriber line module.

In the event of a power failure or during a restart or reload (low potential of trunk failuretransfer signal from CBCPR), the relays are deactivated:

– As a result, the signals to the line trunk module and subscriber line module are splitand the trunk is connected directly to the subscriber line. (This is the way you must wirethe connections as well).

If the power supply voltage returns after an interruption and a trunk call is in progress, ac-tivation of the trunk failure transfer relay is prevented (by optocoupler).



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

Relay Specifications

The electrical characteristics of the relays are as follows:

Operating voltage: 12 Vdc

Trunk failure transfer power consumption: 40 mA at 12 V nominal voltage

Power consumption per relay: 20 mA at 12 V nominal voltage

Trunk failure transfer contact load: 60 mA at -60 V nominal voltage

Maximum trunk failure transfer contact load with atmospheric influence: 8 A

Contact load for relays K1 to K4: 1 A at 250 V AC

Maximum current drain at -48 VF: 80 mA

Installation of the REAL Board (Backplane)

The REAL board is connected to the backplane (basic cabinet only) via a ribbon cable (X05)and to the main distribution frame or the patch panel via an SU cable connector (X06, Figure3-127).

Figure 3-127 Installation Location of the REAL Board

X05

X80PSUI

X06

X7007

REAL withconnectingcable




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

Relay Contacts of the REAL Board

Figure 3-128 Relay Contacts (De-Energized) and MDFU Interfaces

MDFU MDFUREALREAL X06 X06

NC4

S4

NO4

NC3

NC2

NC1

4a16

4b46

27

48

3a

2b

PFTASa/b = Line trunk modulePFTALa/b = TrunkPFTTLa/b = Subscriber line (telephone)PFTTSa/b = Subscr. line mod. (SLA16)

NC = Normally closed contactS = Switch contactNO = Normally open contact

32

43

23

44

8a

7b

7a

6b

10a

9b

10b11a

11b

31

2213

33

0211 9a

35

12b

13b

14b

15

24

06

26

14a

04

42

14 6a

8b

13a

GND

45

05

5b

5a

S2

NO2

– 48 V, max.80 mA

S1

NO1

S3

NO3

RelayK1

RelayK2

RelayK3

Relay

K4

RelayK5

Relay

K5

Relay

K6

RelayK6

PFTASa

PFTASb

PFTALb

PFTALa

PFTTLb

PFTTLa

PFTTSb

PFTTSa

Currentsensor

Power supply for external applications(maximum 15 W): –48 V is available atbackplane pins 17 + 37 (GND = pins 27 + 48)if no REAL is used.

15a17

15b37– 48 V, max.15 W X06 MDFU

12a



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

Cable and Connector Assignment (Backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, Patch Panel)

Table 3-111 REAL - Cable and Connector Assignment

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-Wire SU Connector REAL MDFU/ MDFU-E

S0 Patch Panel

BP: X06 MW8

1

1wht/blu 19 1a

blu/wht 39 1b

2wht/ora 38 2a

ora/wht 48 GND 2b

3wht/grn 27 GND 3a

grn/wht 47 3b

4wht/brn 16 – 48 V (80 mA max.) 4a

brn/wht 46 – 48 V (80 mA max.) 4b

5wht/gry 05 PFTTSa 5a 4 Subs. line

module(SLA)gry/wht 45 PFTTSb 5b 5

2

6red/blu 14 PFTTLa 6a 4 Subsc. line

(telephone)blu/red 44 PFTTLb 6b 5

7red/ora 23 PFTALa 7a 4

Trunkora/red 43 PFTALb 7b 5

8red/grn 32 PFTASa 8a 4 Trunk

modulegrn/red 42 PFTASb 8b 5

9 red/brn 11 NC1 9a 3brn/red 31 NO1 9b 2

10red/gry 02 S1 10a 1

gry/red 22 S2 10b 3

3

11blk/blu 13 NC2 11a 2

blu/blk 33 NO2 11b 1

12blk/ora 04 NC3 12a 3

ora/blk 24 NO3 12b 2

13blk/grn 15 S3 13a 1

grn/blk 35 S4 13b 3

14 blk/brn 06 NC4 14a 2brn/blk 26 NO4 14b 1

15blk/gry 17 – 48 V (15 W max.) 15a

gry/blk 37 – 48 V (15 W max.) 15b

4 16yel/blu 08 16a

blu/yel 28 16b




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4.12 STBG4 (For France Only)

Introduction

This current limiting board is for connecting loop start trunks in France (HiPath 3550 and HiPath3350). It includes the current limiting components and surge protection elements required bylaw.

No options bus lines are needed.

The slot X3 wiring is polarized.

The STBG4 channel is looped between TLA and the trunk.

Interfaces

Figure 3-129 STBG4 interfaces (S30817-Q934-A)

Table 3-112 STBG4 Contact Assignments

Contact Connector X3 Connector X4

1 Not assigned AL 1

2 BL 1 BL 1

3 AN 1 AL 2

4 BL 2 BL 25 AN 2 AL 3

6 BL 3 BL 3

7 AN 3 AL 4

8 BL 4 BL 4

9 AN 4 –

10 Not assigned –

CB side

Board side

STBG4

TLA

Trunk

MDF

X1

X2

X3

X4

1

101

8



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

3.4.13 STRB and STRBR

Introduction

This option comes in two versions:

STRB (control relay board) S30817-Q932-A (Figure 3-130) - for the use in HiPath 3550 andHiPath 3350 (wall housing)

STRBR (control relay board rack) S30817-Q932-Z (Figure 3-131) - for the use in HiPath3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing)

Actuators are relays that can be energized from any station by means of a code (such as a dooropener). Sensors (such as thermostats or motion detectors) can detect a change of status inthe connected equipment and activate a feature or dial a station number stored in the system.The STRB or STRBR has four double-pole, double-throw relays as shown in Figure 3-132 on

Page 3-257.

The board has a total of 4 outputs (in the form of 2 floating switch contacts each) for externallyactivating an electrically isolated normally open (NO) contact. It also has 4 control inputs in theform of optocouplers. A diode is required to isolate the contact from the external power supply.

Application

You can route the +12 V signal for power failure alert to the control input of the optocoupler forconnector X4 or X6. Route the signal through a normally open (NO) contact that is electricallyisolated from the external device, then program the alert type.

For safety, the control voltage for the optocoupler is electrically isolated from the system’s other

partial voltages.For the manual relay on/off function and door opener, you must enter the desired switching time(expert mode code 26 2).

7CautionCDBase data is stored on the board. When replacing the board, be sure to store theCDBase data elsewhere. If a used board is used, old data may still be present on theboard.Only factory technicians should use the Reset options procedure (code 29-3-3 in ex-

pert mode). Using the procedure during operation returns all options to their factorydefaults, and they must be reset before they can accept data again from the centralboard.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

STRB Interfaces

STRBR Interfaces

Control Relay Connection Values

Figure 3-130 STRB Interfaces (S30817-Q932-M)

Figure 3-131 STRBR Interfaces (S30817-Q932-Z)

7AttentionThe STRB or STRBR interface is a SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage Circuit) inter-face, as defined by IEC 60950.Do not connect any circuits whose voltages exceed the following limit values:Maximum of 30 VAC (42 Vpeak) or 60 VDC.

STRB

To OPAL, or previous option

To next option

X3

X4

MDF

1

8

1

8

X5 X618 18

X1

X2

To OPALR, or previous option

To next option

STRBR

X1

X2

8-pole MW8 jacks

11:

18

21:28

31:

3841:

48

X3



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

STRB and STRBR Board Relay and Sensor Functions

Figure 3-132 STRB and STRBR Board Relay and Sensor Functions

STRB or STRBRK1.21

K1.22

K1.23

K1.11

K1.12

K1.13

+12 V +12 VI

OPTKP1

Short the wires toactivate the sensor.

To system

Relay

Sensor




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

STRB Contact Assignment

Table 3-113 STRB Contact Assignment

Connector Pin Signal Name Function

X3

1 K 4.21 Relay contact (common)

2 K 4.22 Relay contact (NO)

3 K 4.23 Relay contact (NC)






X4

1 K 2.23 Relay contact (NC)2 K 1.21 Relay contact (common)



5 +12VI +12 V control voltage optocoupler

6 OPTKP 2 Control input optocoupler 2

7 +12VI +12 V control voltage optocoupler


X5









X6


2 +12VI +12V control voltage optocoupler


4 +12VI +12V control voltage optocoupler





Note for U.S. only: Pinouts shown are at the board itself. The supplied main distribution frame cable(MDF cable) reverses the signals from pins:– 1 and 2 – 3 and 4 – 5 and 6 – 7 and 8



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

STRBR Contact Assignment

Table 3-114 STRBR Contact Assignment

X3, Pin Signal Name Function

11 ACT4-2M Relay contact K203 (common) 2

12 ACT4-2B Relay contact K203 (NO) 2

13 ACT4-2A Relay contact K203 (NC) 2




17 P12VI +12 V optocoupler 4

18 SENSE4 Control input optocoupler 4







27 P12VI + 12 V optocoupler 3


31 ACT2-2M Relay contact K201 (common) 232 ACT2-2B Relay contact K201 (NO) 2








42 ACT1-2B Relay contact K200 (NO) 243 ACT1-2A Relay contact K200 (NC) 2









P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4.14 V24/1(Not for U.S.)

Introduction

The V24/1 module can be installed in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 and provides a serial V.24interface for connecting a PC, printer or applications (such as Uniform Call Distribution).

Interfaces

Figure 3-133 V24 Interface (S30807-Q6916-X100)

Figure 3-134 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - V.24 connection

1 26

25-pin sub-D socket

To CBCC/CBCP (X7) via ribbon cable

X2

Component side shown



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

Connector Assignment

Figure 3-135 V.24 (RS-232) Contact Assignments, HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350

Table 3-115 Pin Assignments of the V.24 Sockets

Connector X2 Signal I/O2 TxD_B O

3 RxD_B I

4 RTS_B O

5 CTS_B I

6 DSR_B I

20 DTR_B O

7 0V -

No other pins in connector X2 are used.

TxD

RxD

RTS

CTS

DSR

DTR

Vcc

GND

TxD

RxD

RTS

CTS

DSR

DTR

GND

To CBX7: Edge connector25-pin

TTL / RS-232Level-converter andelectrical isolation

X2: Sub-D-socket25-pin sockets




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


boards.fm

Options

3.4.15 V.24 Adapter

The V.24 adapter is required as an adapter between the 25-pin connector on the cable(C39195-Z7267-C13) and a 9-pole jack for connection to the V.24 interface on all HiPath 3000

V1.2 (or later) systems.

V.24 Adapter Assignment

Table 3-116 V.24 Adapter Assignment (C39334-Z7080-C2)

9-Pole Jack Signal 25-Pin Connector

Pin Pin

1 DCD 8

2 RxD 33 TxD 2

4 DTR 20

5 GND 7

6 DSR 6

7 RTS 4

8 CTS 5

9 RI 22



boards.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Options

3.4.16 V.24 Cable

The V.24 cable is used for connecting a service PC to the V.24 interface on all HiPath 3000 V1.2systems (or later).

V.24 Cable Assignment

Figure 3-136 V.24 Cable Assignment (C30267-Z355-A25)

9-pole jack

DCD

RxD

TxD

DTRDSR

RTS

CTS

GND

RI

1

2

3

46

7

8

5

9Shield

Data Carrier Detect

Receive Data

Transmit Data

Data Terminal ReadyData Send Ready

Request To Send

Clear To Send

Ground

Ring Indicator

DCD

RxD

TxD

DTRDSR

RTS

CTS

GND

RI

1

2

3

46

7

8

5

9

9-pole jack



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Installation HiPath 3000

Overview

4 Installation HiPath 3000

4.1 Overview

Chapter Contents


Topic

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Installation, page 4-2

Installation Prerequisites, page 4-2

Installation Procedure, page 4-3

HiPath 3750 Installation, page 4-5 HiPath 3700 Installation (19-Inch Cabinet), page 4-46

Loading the System Software and Inserting Subboards on the Central Control Board,page 4-69

Configuration Notes, page 4-70

Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4-79

Make Trunk Connections, page 4-79

Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-80

HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Installation, page 4-81 Installation Prerequisites, page 4-81

Installation Procedure, page 4-82

HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Installation, page 4-83

HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Installation (19-Inch Housing), page 4-105




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Installation

4.2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Installation

4.2.1 Installation Prerequisites

Tools and help needed

The following are needed for installing the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 system:

Tools:

– Hex or open-end wrench, 8 mm

– Diagonal cutting pliers, telephone pliers, wire stripper, flat-nosed pliers

– Slotted screwdrivers, from 2 to 8 mm

– Phillips or cross-point screwdrivers, sizes 1 and 2

– TORX screwdriver

– Wire stripper (for example from Krone)

– Electric drill, hammer

– Level, tape measure Help:

– Manager T or HiPath 3000 Manager E

– Digital-multimeter for testing ground connections and partial voltages

– Telephone test set for analog interfaces

– Not for U.S.: ISDN tester (such as K3000 or Aurora)

– For U.S. only: AuroraDuet, AuroraExpert, AuroraRemote or similar, ISDN protocol analyzer(for PRI)

– For U.S. only: Punch-down tool suitable for the block used (such as 66 block)

7WarningThe system may be installed by authorized service personnel only.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.2 Installation Procedure

Table 4-1 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - System Installation Procedure

Step Installation Activity

HiPath 3750 Installation HiPath 3700 Installation (19-Inch Cabi-net)

1. Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-6(usually predetermined)

Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-47(predetermined by the 19-inch cabinet)

2. Unpacking the Components, page 4-8 Unpacking the Components, page 4-47

3. Mounting the Main Distribution Frame(MDFU or MDFU-E) (Not for U.S.), page

4-9

Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19-Inch Cabinet, page 4-48

4. Setting up the System Cabinets(page 4-10):

Removing the Cabinet Covers Single Cabinet

Two cabinets (stacked)

Two cabinets (side by side)

Three cabinets (only as shown)

Mount the stabilizer feet (for stacked system cabinets)

Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19-InchCabinet, page 4-52

5. Grounding the System, page 4-26Checking the Protective Grounding, page4-31

Grounding the System, page 4-53Checking the Protective Grounding, page4-55

6. Connecting the Cables to the Backplane,page 4-32

Connecting the Cable to the Backplane,page 4-56

7. Laying the Line Network and SettingJumpers on the MDFU or MDFU-E, page

4-41

Connecting the Line Network to the PatchPanel, page 4-68

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


8. Loading the System Software and Inserting Subboards on the Central Control Board,page 4-69

9. Configuration Notes, page 4-70 (already completed)

10. Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4-79

11. Make Trunk Connections, page 4-79

12. Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-80

Table 4-1 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - System Installation Procedure

Step Installation Activity

HiPath 3750 Installation HiPath 3700 Installation (19-Inch Cabi-net)



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.3 HiPath 3750 Installation

This section contains information on the installation of the HiPath 3750 communication system.This chapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system. Refer to Sec-

tion 8.2 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions.

Information on

the possible equipment of central boards with optional plug-in boards

board configuration

final visual inspection

applies to both HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 and is described starting in Section 4.2.5.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.3.1.1 AC Power (for U.S. Only)

One ac power source is required for each cabinet. The ac power source must meet the require-ments specified in Table 4-2.

AC Power Outlet Requirements (for U.S. Only)

Must have a UL Listed or CSA Certified transient surge protector between the outlet andthe system. Up to two cabinets can be connected to the surge protector. Under no circum-stances should any HiPath 3750 system or combination of systems be connected directlyto a wall outlet.

Must not be located more than 8 feet (2.4 m) from the system

Must provide fused 120 Vac (single-phase) power at 50 to 60 Hz capable of delivering 20amperes

Should have a warning attached to the circuit breaker that controls it to prevent accidentalremoval of power

Should be on a dedicated circuit with an isolated ground

Do not connect the power until the system is properly grounded as described in Section 4.2.4.5on Page 4-53. Refer to Section 5.2.2 for more information about connecting the power supply.

Table 4-2 AC Power Requirements (for U.S. Only)

Normal Input Voltage Frequency ReceptacleConfigurationsMinimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

120 Vac/60 Hz 110 Vac 130 Vac 47 Hz 63 Hz NEMA 5-15, 2-pole, 3-wire,grounding

7

WARNING

Under no circumstances should any HiPath 3750 system or combination of HiPath3750 systems be connected directly to a wall outlet; use a UL Listed or CSA Certifiedtransient surge protector for every two cabinets.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.3.2 Unpacking the Components

Procedure

Step Activity

1. Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make surethat they are correct and complete.

2. Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to theappropriate departments or the shipper.

3. Dispose of the packing materials properly.

7Caution

Use only equipment and materials that are in perfect working order. Do not start upequipment with visible damage.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.3.3 Mounting the Main Distribution Frame (MDFU or MDFU-E) (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

The following are used as main distribution frames: MDFU-E, which is shipped with new systems (see Figure 4-24).

MDFU (one MDFU unit per system cabinet), which was used for Hicom 150 E OfficePro inRelease 2.0 and earlier (see Figure 4-23).

Installation Notes

The MDFU or MDFU-E should be installed in the direct vicinity of the system (note length ofconnecting cable) and at eye level. Mount it on the wall according to the instructions that camewith it. The bag attached to the cover contains a drill template and screws and wall anchors for

attaching the MDF to the wall.

Procedure for Mounting the MDF on the Wall

Step Activity

1. Use the template to drill holes.

2. Insert the wall anchors and screw in the screws, leaving 5 mm projecting.

3. Remove the housing cover. Attach the main distributor frame to the brackets and re-move the packing protection covering.

4. Tighten the screws through the holes.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.3.4 Setting up the System Cabinets

Introduction

Outside U.S., the cabinets are already equipped with the boards needed for the customer’sspecific requirements. In the U.S., you may need to install the boards.

4.2.3.4.1 Overview

System Configurations

The following setup options are possible for system cabinets:

7DangerBe sure to ground the system properly before starting it up and connecting the sta-tions.

7WARNINGA fully equipped HiPath 3750 cabinet weighs 22 kg (48.46 lb.). We recommend liftingcabinets only before they are equipped. Do not attempt to lift objects that you thinkare too heavy for you; use a hand truck or get assistance.

System

One cabinet on a horizontal surface

One cabinet on a wall (for U.S. only)

Two cabinets stacked on a horizontal surface

Two cabinets stacked on a wall (for U.S. only)

Two cabinets side-by-side on a horizontal surface

Three cabinets on a horizontal surface (two stacked)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.3.4.2 Removing the Cabinet Covers

How the Covers Are Secured

The front cabinet cover (for board servicing) and the rear cabinet cover (for cable servicing) areeach secured by two snap fasteners.

You can remove the upper and lower grills in both covers. This facilitates routing the cables tothe MDF.

To replace a cover, position the snap fasteners in the two guides and press down on the coveruntil it snaps into place.

Procedure (Figure 4-1)

Mounting the Cover

Step Activity

1. Insert a slotted screwdriver (with the blade vertical) into a recess (1).

2. Carefully swing the handle of the screwdriver toward the center of the cabinet (2)until the fastener snaps out and the cover loosens.

3. Then insert the screwdriver in the second recess (3), loosen its snap fastener. Youcan then remove the cover.

Figure 4-1 HiPath 3750 - Removing the Front and Rear Covers

Cabinet

(1)

(2)

(3)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.3.4.3 Setting Up a One-Cabinet System

Procedure

Mounting a One-Cabinet System on the Wall (for U.S. Only)

You can mount a one-cabinet system on the wall using the wall-mount kit.

Wall-Mount Kit

7

WARNING

An empty HiPath 3750 cabinet weighs 32 lb. (14.53 kg). Mount the cabinets beforeequipping them with boards and do not attempt to lift objects that you think are tooheavy for you; get help.

Step Activity

1. Remove the front and rear cabinet covers.

2. Place the system cabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and

stable.U.S. only: For wall mounting, refer to information below.

Figure 4-2 HiPath 3750 Wall-Mount Kit (for U.S. Only)

Keyed holes

Latching assembly

Latch

Wall-mounting bracket Swing-Out assembly



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Procedure (Figure 4-3 on Page 4-14)

You can invert the bracket to have the cabinet swing out in the opposite direction.

7

WARNING

An empty HiPath 3750 cabinet weighs 32 lb. (14.53 kg). Mount the cabinets beforeequipping them with boards and do not attempt to lift objects that you think are tooheavy for you; get help.

Step Activity

1. Install a plywood backboard at least 0.75 in. (19.05 mm) thick.

2. Use the wall-mounting bracket as a template to drill three holes in the backboard.Use the keyed holes in the top of the bracket and the round hole in the bottom of thebracket.

3. Install the screws in the top two holes, tightening them until 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) is pro-truding.

4. Bolt the swing-out assembly on the wall-mounting bracket to the back of the cabinet.

5. Close the swing-out assembly and hang the bracket and cabinet on the top screws.

6. Swing the cabinet open and tighten the top screws completely.

7. Insert and fully tighten the bottom screw in the round hole.

8. Bolt the latching assembly to the opposite edge of the cabinet.

7WARNINGDo not fasten power cords to building surfaces when mounting cabinets on the wall.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Wall Mounting (One-Cabinet System)

Figure 4-3 Wall Mounting for a One-Cabinet System (for U.S. Only)



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.3.4.4 Setting Up a Stacked Two-Cabinet System

Procedure

For U.S. Only

Step Activity


2. Mount the stabilizer feet (not for U.S.) on the basic cabinet (BC). Place the basiccabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and stable.

3. Place the expansion cabinet (EC1) on the basic cabinet. Make sure that the EC1feet slide into the depressions in the top of the BC.

4. If mounting the system on the floor or on a table, attach the two cabinets using thefour connecting plates each held by two screws with washers (Figure 4-4 on Page

4-16). Be sure to fasten all four of the adjoining corners. Make sure that theconnecting plates are mounted in the correct direction (inside the cabinets andpointing inward).

5. For U.S. only: If mounting the system on the wall, refer to page 4-17.

7DANGERThe connecting plates must be installed to ensure proper grounding for systemsmounted on a floor or other horizontal surface.

>You can install seismic anchors for greater stability, as is required in some installa-tions. Refer to Section 4.2.3.4.7 on Page 4-24 for more information and take notethat the bolts and inserts included in the seismic anchor kit are suitable for concretefloors; bolts for other surfaces must be supplied separately.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Installing a Stacked Two-Cabinet System

Laying the Connecting Cables

To lay the connecting cables between the two cabinets, you can cut out the pre-stamped re-cesses in the bottom of EC1 and the top of the BC with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers andbreak them out with a pair of flat-nosed pliers.

Figure 4-4 HiPath 3750 - Installing a Two-Cabinet System (Stacked)

7CautionBe careful when breaking out the recesses. Remove any sharp edges and corners.

Inside thecabinet

BC

EC1

BC

EC1

Washers

EC1

BC

Front Back



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Mounting Two Cabinets Stacked on the Wall (for U.S. Only)

You can mount two cabinets stacked on the wall using the wall-mount kit.

Wall-Mount Kit

7 DANGERThe second cabinet also requires an earth ground as described on page 4-29. Donot fasten wall-mounted cabinets with the connecting plates, as this will interfere withthe earth ground.

Figure 4-5 HiPath 3750 Wall-Mount Kit (for U.S. Only)

7 WARNINGAn empty HiPath 3750 cabinet weighs 32 lb. (14.53 kg). Mount the cabinets beforeequipping them with boards and do not attempt to lift objects that you think are tooheavy for you; get help.

Keyed holes

Latching assembly

Latch

Wall-mounting bracket Swing-Out assembly




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm



You can invert the brackets to have the cabinets swing out in the opposite direction.

Step Activity

1. Install a plywood backboard at least 0.75 in. (19.05 mm) thick.2. Use a wall-mounting bracket as a template to drill three holes in the backboard for

each cabinet. Use the keyed holes in the top of the bracket and the round hole inthe bottom of the bracket.

3. Install the screws in the top two holes for each bracket, tightening them until 0.25 in.(6.35 mm) is protruding.

4. Bolt the swing-out assembly on the wall-mounting bracket to the back of each cab-inet.

5. Close the swing-out assembly and hang each bracket and cabinet on the top

screws.6. Swing each cabinet open and tighten the top screws completely.

7. Insert and fully tighten the bottom screws in the round holes.

8. Bolt the latching assembly to the opposite edge of each cabinet.

7WARNINGDo not fasten power cords to building surfaces when mounting cabinets on the wall.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Wall Mounting (Stacked Two-cabinet System)


To lay the connecting cables between the two cabinets, you can cut out the pre-stamped re-cesses in the bottom of EC1 and the top of the BC with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers andbreak them out with a pair of flat-nosed pliers.

Figure 4-6 Wall Mounting for a Stacked Two-Cabinet System (for U.S. Only)

7WARNINGBe careful when breaking out the recesses. Remove any sharp edges and corners.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Procedure: Mounting the Stabilizer Feet (Not for U.S.)

Mounting the Stabilizer Feet

7

Caution

Always mount the stabilizer feet on stacked, surface-mounted system cabinets toensure stability (Figure 4-7).

Step Activity

1. Place the stabilizer feet beneath the right and left outer edges of the cabinets. Insertthe cabinet feet into the two holes in the stabilizer feet (1).

2. Attach the stabilizer feet to the metal housing of the cabinet (2) by inserting twoscrews per foot into the pre-drilled holes in the housing.

3. Continue installing the system.

Figure 4-7 HiPath 3750 - Mounting the Stabilizer Feet (Three-Cabinet System Shown)

>For U.S. only: You can install seismic anchors for greater stability, as is required insome installations. Refer to Section 4.2.3.4.7 on Page 4-24 for more information andnote that the bolts and inserts included in the seismic anchor kit are suitable for con-crete floors; bolts for other surfaces must be supplied separately.

(1) (1)

(2)(2)

(2)



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.3.4.5 Setting Up a Two-Cabinet System Side by Side

Procedure

Installing a Two-Cabinet System

Step Activity


2. Place the system cabinets side by side in the installation site and make sure thatthey are level and stable. Correct any differences in height.

3. If mounting the system on the floor or on a table, attach the two cabinets using fourconnecting plates each held by two screws with washers (Figure 4-8). Be sure tofasten all four of the adjoining corners.Make sure that the connecting plates are mounted in the correct direction (inside thecabinets and pointing inward).

7DANGER (for U.S. Only)The connecting plates must be installed to ensure proper grounding for systemsmounted on a floor or other horizontal surface.

Figure 4-8 HiPath 3750—Installing a Two-Cabinet System (Side by Side)

BC EC1

Inside the cabinet

Washers

BC EC1

BC EC1

Back

Front




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm



To lay the connecting cables between the cabinets, first remove the lower grills in the rear cov-ers.

4.2.3.4.6 Setting Up a Stacked Three-Cabinet System

Procedure

7CautionOnly two cabinets may be stacked vertically. When setting up a three-cabinet systemplace EC2 next to the BC.

Step Activity


2. Mount one stabilizer foot (not for U.S.) on the basic cabinet and one on the expan-sion cabinet (EC2). Place EC2 next to the BC in the installation site and make surethat it is level and stable. Correct any differences in height.

3. Place expansion cabinet EC1 on the basic cabinet. Insert the feet of EC1 into thedepressions in the top of the BC.

4. Attach the three cabinets using four connecting plates, each held by two screws withwashers (Figure 4-9).

Make sure that the connecting plates are mounted in the correct direction (inside thecabinet and pointing inward).

7DANGER (for U.S. Only)The connecting plates must be installed to ensure proper grounding for systemsmounted on a floor or other horizontal surface.

>For U.S. only: You can install seismic anchors for greater stability, as is required insome installations. Refer to Section 4.2.3.4.7 on Page 4-24 for more information andnote that the bolts and inserts included in the seismic anchor kit are suitable for con-

crete floors; bolts for other surfaces must be supplied separately.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Installing a Three-Cabinet System


To lay the cables between the BC and EC2, remove the lower grills in the two rear covers. To lay the connecting cables between the BC and EC1, cut out the pre-stamped recesses

in the bottom of EC1 and top of the BC with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers and break themout with a pair of flat-nosed pliers.

Figure 4-9 HiPath 3750—Installing a Three-Cabinet System (Stacked)

>A three-cabinet system cannot be mounted on a wall.

7WARNINGBe careful when breaking out the recesses. Remove any sharp edges and cor-ners.

BC

EC1

EC2

BC

EC1

Inside thecabinet

Washers

EC2

BC

EC1

EC2

Back

Front

Washers

EC1

BC




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.3.4.7 Installing the Seismic Anchors (for U.S. Only)

Seismic anchors can be used for additional stability if desired by the customer or required bycode.


The anchor for the back of the cabinets is wider to provide space for cables.

Seismic Anchoring

>Local building codes may require the use of seismic anchors in critical locations,such as hospitals. The HiPath 3750 seismic anchor kit includes bolts and insertssuitable for concrete floors. Consult the site planner for code requirements, or if thecustomer wishes to install the seismic anchors on another type of floor.

Step Activity

1. Hook the anchor into the center holes in the lower grill on each cabinet, front andback.

2. Bolt the anchor to the floor using the holes provided.

Figure 4-10 HiPath 3750 Seismic Anchors

Front Back



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Seismic Anchors for Multiple Cabinets

Figure 4-11 Seismic Anchoring for Multiple Cabinets (Front View)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.3.5 Grounding the System

4.2.3.5.1 Not for U.S.: Grounding the System

Protective Grounding Options

If one or two surface-mounted expansion cabinets are used in addition to the base cabinet, themetal connecting plates must be installed to properly ground the expansion cabinets.

The illustrations starting with Figure 4-13 show different grounding options.

Note on Possible Ground Loops

7DANGERThe HiPath 3750 system and the MDFU or MDFU-E must be grounded by a sepa-rate protective ground conductor (minimum cross-section: 2.5 mm2) as shown in Fig-ure 4-12. Make sure that the ground conductor is securely installed and strain-re-lieved.Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock.

7DANGERIf your personnel are not qualified to work on the low-voltage network (230 Vac), youmust hire a licensed electrician to install the ground using option 1b (Figure 4-14).

> To avoid ground loops from remotely operated devices (V.24 system peripherals),the devices should be connected to the same low-voltage network (sub-distributionboard) if possible.If the building floor plan does not permit this, you may need a line driver to isolatethe external devices if any malfunctions occur.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Grounding the System and Main Distribution Frame (Not for U.S.)

Figure 4-12 HiPath 3750 - Grounding the System and Main Distribution Frame

To second and third MDFU(if present)

Potential equalization bus (shown)

But not:

- Central heating system- Drain channels- Ground conductor for antenna system

HiPath 3750, BC

Grounding screw (metal back-plane, lower center)

MDFU or MDFU-E

Any color, except for yellow orgreen to avoid confusionMin. cross-section = 2.5 mm2

Green with yellow stripeMinimum cross-section = 2.5 mm2

Attach to grill using cable ties




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Protective Grounding Option 1a (Not for U.S.)

Protective Grounding Option 1b (Not for U.S.)

Figure 4-13 HiPath 3750 - Protective Grounding Option 1a

Figure 4-14 HiPath 3750—Protective Grounding Option 1b

green with yellow stripe

Potential equalization bus (shown)

HiPath 3750

green with yellow stripe

HiPath 3750

L1 N PE

230 Vac

Wall outlet (or similar)

Grounding outlet



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.3.5.2 For U.S. Only: Grounding the System

Grounding the System Cabinets

The system cabinets are grounded by their power cord, but an earth ground is also required.Choose an earth ground with less than 2 ohms of resistance, such as:

Master ground busbar

Ground field

Copper ground rod

Run an earth ground conductor from the earth ground to the cabinet frame ground located inthe center of the backplane. The minimum cross-section required is 14 AWG.

Figure 4-15 on Page 4-30 shows the earth ground connections for the basic cabinet (BC). If

expansion cabinets are added to surface-mounted systems, the metal connecting plates bondthem to the basic cabinet. If two cabinets are mounted on the wall, the second cabinet requiresan earth ground as well. Do not use the metal connecting plates on wall-mounted systems.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Earth Ground (for U.S. Only)

Grounding the Main Distribution Frame (for U.S. Only)

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for grounding the main distribution frame.

Figure 4-15 Basic Cabinet Earth Ground (for U.S. Only)

Recommended: 14 AWG solid or stranded copperwire conductor not exceeding 126 feet in length;bare, or green with one or more yellow stripes

Groundlug

Master ground busbar

Earth ground

20A

Fuse boxfacility

120 Vac, 60 HzNeutral ground

Note: Single-point ground (SPG) configuration shown

AC outlet

Power cord/plugHiPath 3750

7DANGERThis wire installation must be completed by a qualified electrician andmust comply with the national and local electrical Codes.

(Located in the electrical servicepanel providing power to the HiPath3750 system



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.3.6 Checking the Protective Grounding

Procedure

Perform the tests in the table below to ensure that the system is properly grounded before star-tup

Step Activity Target

1. Check the ohmic resistance of the ground connection tothe system:Perform measurement between the PE (protective earth)on a socket in the internal installation (at the system’s in-stallation site) and HiPath 3750.

Prerequisites: HiPath 3750 is not yet connected to the low-voltage

network via the power cable. The system’s separate protective grounding is con-

nected.

< 10 ohms

2. Check the ohmic resistance between the individual sys-tem parts (basic cabinet, expansion cabinets, main distri-bution frame).

Prerequisite:HiPath 3750 is not yet connected to the low-voltage net-work via the power cable.

< 1 ohms




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.3.7 Connecting the Cables to the Backplane

4.2.3.7.1 Backplanes of the “8-Slot” Cabinets

Backplane of the “8-Slot” Basic Cabinet

>All cables that leave the cabinet must be attached to the ventilation grill of the metal

back panel using cable ties.

>The “8-slot” basic cabinet has seven slots, while the expansion cabinets each haveeight slots for peripheral boards.

Figure 4-16 HiPath 3750 - Backplane of the “8-Slot” Basic Cabinet

X70 X50CBCPR

X10X60 X20X30X40

REAL(BConly)

X5

X7

X80

X6

X13

X14

X88

X89

X68

X69

X48

X49

X58

X59

X28

X29

X11

X12

X78

X79

X38

X39

UPSM

X90

EC2

EC1



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Backplane of the “8-Slot” Expansion Cabinets

Connector Assignments on the “8-Slot” Backplane

Figure 4-17 HiPath 3750 - Backplane of the “8-Slot” Expansion Cabinets

Table 4-3 Connector Assignments on the “8-Slot Backplane

Connector Cabinet Function

X7 BC V.24/RS-232 (no electrical isolation) via 25-pin socket:Connection for printer, Plus products, and other devices.

X5 BC Cable connector to REAL

X6 BC MDFU-to-REAL connection via SU connector

X11 BC Cable connector to EC1: X13


X13 BCEC1EC2

Cable connector to EC2: X13Cable connector to BC: X11Cable connector to BC: X13

X14 BCEC1EC2


X28 - X88 All 1 SU connector each (16 TW) to MDFU/MDFU-E

X70 X50

–

X10X60 X20X30X40X80

X13

X14

X88

X89

X68

X69

X48

X49

X58

X59

X28

X29

X78

X79

X38

X39

UPSM

X100

X98

X99

X90

BC

n o t u s e d

notused




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Connecting Cables Between the “8-Slot” Basic and Expansion Cabinets

If installing a multi-cabinet system, you must also connect the cables between the BC and ECs.

Connecting Cables for a Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System (see Table 4-3)

X98 EC1EC2

1 SU connector each (16 TW) to MDFU/MDFU-E

X29 - X89 All 1 SU connector each (8 TW) to MDFU/MDFU-E (not for S2M, T1)

X99 EC1EC2

1 SU connector each (8 TW) to MDFU/MDFU-E (not for S2M, T1)

If Then

Two-cabinetsystem

Connect BC to EC1 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)(see Figure 4-18)

Three-cabinetsystem

Connect BC to EC1 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13) Connect BC to EC2 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)(see Figure 4-19)

Figure 4-18 Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connecting Cables between BC and EC1



EC1

BC

X13X14

X11

X12X13X14

Cabinet part numbers BC = S30777-U757-X,

S30777-U757-X103 (forU.S. only)

EC1 = S30777-U708-X100,S30777-U708-X103 (forU.S. only)

Backplane part numbers BC = S30777-Q757-X EC1 = S30777-Q708-X100

Connecting cable partnumbers Connect BC to EC1 =

S30267-Z178-A13



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Connecting Cables for a Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System (see Table 4-3)

The cables between the basic cabinet and the expansion cabinets are connected in a star con-figuration.

Terminating Resistors in “8-Slot” Cabinets

BC: Between slots CBCPR + 2 and 3 + 4 and 8 + UPSM

EC1: Between slots 11 + 12 and 13 + 14 and 15 + 16 and 17 + UPSM


Figure 4-19 Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connecting Cables between BC, EC1 andEC2

X13


S30777-U757-X103 (for U.S. only) EC1, EC2 = S30777-U708-X100,

S30777-U708-X103 (for U.S. only)

Backplane part numbers BC = S30777-Q757-X EC1, EC2 = S30777-Q708-X100

Connecting cable part numbers Connect BC to EC1, BC to EC2 =

EC1

BC X11X12X13X14

EC2

X13X14

X14




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.3.7.2 Connection Between the MDFU or MDFU-E and Backplane

Introduction

Set up the connection between the main distribution frame and the system using CABLUs (pre-fabricated cabling units) with the following characteristics:

System side: SIPAC 1 SU connector(s)

Cable: 16 x 2 x 0.4

Main distribution frame side:

– Not for U.S.: Different distribution strips or carriers (Figure 4-22)

– For U.S. only: 50-pin Champ jack

Not for U.S.: You can use up to nine CABLUs per MDFU (Figure 4-23) and 21 CABLUs perMDFU-E (Figure 4-24), each with a 16 TW terminal strip or a 25 TW terminal strip (9 x 30 mm).

Use open-end cables for special applications in which the prefabricated CABLUs cannot beused.

CABLUs for the Slots Containing Peripheral Boards (Figure 4-40) (Not for U.S.)

If Then

Slot

withSLMO81,SLMO24,SLA8N1,SLA16N1

orSLA24N

Route 16 TW to the MDFU or MDFU-E via SU_Xx8 and 8 TW via SU_Xx9,

using a standard cable (with 16 TW) for each connection. Connect both ca-bles (= 1 CABLU with SU connectors labeled 8 and 9) to the same jumperstrip (25 TW).Order numbers for CABLUs with 25 DA jumper strips: S30269-Z100-A14: 3 m in length, short stripped length for MDFU-E

slots 11-21 (see Figure 4-24) S30269-Z100-A24: 3 m in length, long stripped length for MDFU-E

slots 1-10 (see Figure 4-24)Note: If replacing an old system, you can use existing standard CABLUswith splitting strips for 16 TW. If an SLMO24 board is used, you must lay anadditional CABLU (SU Xx9) to the MDFU or MDFU-E.

Slot withTMS2

S2M connections are not set up via the MDFU or MDFU-E.A direct connection is set up to the NT or networked system via the back-plane connector SU Xx9 and a special cable (see Section 3.3.27, TMS2(Not for U.S.)).

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




CABLUs for the Slots Containing Peripheral Boards (Figure 4-40) (for U.S. Only)

Slot with anyother peripheral

board

Route 16 TW to the MDFU or MDFU-E via SU_Xx8 using a CABLU.Order numbers for CABLUs with 16 DA jumper strips: S30269-Z100-A11: 3 m in length, short stripped length for MDFU-E

slots 11-21 (see Figure 4-24) S30269-Z100-A21: 3 m in length, long stripped length for MDFU-E

slots 1-10 (see Figure 4-24)

Slotwith

REAL

16 TW are routed to (and manually laid at) the MDFU or MDFU-E viaSU X6 (backplane) using an open-end cable.Order numbers for open-end cables: S30267-Z192-A60: 6 m in length S30267-Z192-A100: 10 m in length S30267-Z192-A200: 20 m in length

1 A CABLU with 16 DA is also sufficient for these boards. A CABLU with 24 DA is recommended to simplify station config-uration expansion (e.g. by replacing the SLMO8 by an SLMO24).

If Then

Slot with24-port

peripheral board

Route 16 TW to the main distribution frame via SU_Xx8 and 8 TW viaSU_Xx9, using standard CABLU S30267-Z365-A30 (SU connectors are la-beled 8 and 9.). Both cables are connected to the same 50-pin Champ jack.

Slot with max.16-port

peripheral board

Route 16 TW to the main distribution frame via SU_Xx8 using standard CA-BLU S30267-Z366-A30.

Slot withTMST1

T1 connections (see Section 3.3.26, TMST1 (for U.S. Only)) are not set upvia the main distribution frame.An adapter (1 SU connector - 8-pole MW8 (RJ48C) jack, Figure 4-20) isconnected directly to the SU Xx9 backplane connector. You can use a spe-cial cable to create a direct connection to the CSU or networked system.

If Then




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


TMST1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) (for U.S. Only)

Figure 4-20 TMST1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) C39228-A7195-A12 (for U.S.Only)


MW8 (RJ48C) jack(to the CSU ornetworkedsystem)



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Stripping the Open-End Cable (Not for U.S.)

Figure 4-21 Stripping the Open-End Cable (Not for U.S.)

Connect thewires

View from above(SVP plug. locations)

View from below

Cable with film sheath: No. 6 (conductive copper tape) 1.5 windings. Groundwire shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape (1).

250 ± 5

Stripped length

Velcro tape (19 mm wide)Trunk group fastener

(1)

Stripped length = 600 ± 5 mm

Stripped length = 910 ± 5 mm forMDFU-E slots 1 to 10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Color Codes for the Open-End Cable (Not for U.S.)

Table 4-4 Color Codes for the Open-End Cable (Not for U.S.)

ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-Wire ColorGroup

Pair a-Wire b-Wire

1 1 wht/blu 3 11 blk/blu

blu/wht blu/blk

2 wht/ora 12 blk/ora

ora/wht ora/blk

3 wht/grn 13 blk/grn

grn/wht grn/blk

4 wht/brn 14 blk/brnbrn/wht brn/blk

5 wht/gry 15 blk/gry

gry/wht gry/blk

2 6 red/blu 4 16 yel/blu

blu/red blu/yel

7 red/ora

ora/red

8 red/grn

grn/red

9 red/brn

brn/red

10 red/grn

grn/red



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.3.8 Laying the Line Network and Setting Jumpers on the MDFU or MDFU-E

Jumpers, External Line Network (Not for U.S.)

Most main distribution frames do not have an external side. You must jumper them to the in-coming line network (see jumpering duct, Figure 4-23 = MDFU, Figure 4-24 = MDFU-E). Usea standard wiring tool for laying the cable wires.

Surge Protector (Not for U.S.)

To divert surges caused by lightning, insert surge protectors on

lines that leave the system buildings (outside stations)

lines > 500 m long.

Connect the polarized surge protectors to the plugging locations on the splitting strip describedabove (see Figure 4-21).

7

Danger

Connect the system to protective ground before connecting the stations.

>If you jumper stations on the MDFU or MDFU-E (for example, with an ICCS network)without first entering the relocate code, when you reconnect them the stations affect-ed will go into operation with the data of the stations originally installed.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Splitting and Jumper Strips (Not for U.S.)

Figure 4-22 Assignments (Numbering) of the Splitting/Jumper Strips, view from above (Notfor U.S.)

a

ab

Cable 2 (SU Xx9)

1Ea 1Sa1Eb 1Sb

a

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1612 13 14 15

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

Splitting strip for 16 TW (C39334-A166-A1)

Jumper strip for 25 TW (C39334-A166-A3)

231917 21 25

S0 bus 1 ... S0 bus 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1612 13 14 15

Cable 1 (SU Xx8) No. 25not used

CABLUS30269-Z100-A14:

E = ReceiveS = Transmit

b

b



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Layout and Dimensions of the MDFU (Not for U.S.)

Figure 4-23 MDFU—Layout and Dimensions (367.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm) (Not for U.S.)

2 x PFT1or

1 x PFT4

9 slots (9 x 30 mm)

Special built-in comps.


328.8 mm

3 6 7 . 0

m m

1

2

3

6

4

5

Jumper

channel

9

7

8




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Layout and Dimensions of the MDFU-E (Not for U.S.)

Figure 4-24 MDFU-E—Layout and Dimensions (669.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm) (Not for U.S.)


1

2

3

6

4

5Jumperchannel

The MDFU-E is delivered with most systems.

19

20

21

21 slots (9 x 30 mm)

328.8 mm

6 6 9 . 0 m m

Special built-in comps.

2 x PFT1or

1 x PFT4



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Connecting Network Facilities (for U.S. Only)

Connecting to the Point of Demarcation (for U.S. Only)

Most main distribution frames (MDFs) are designed with a network demarcation block. Youmust cross-connect the MDF to the incoming trunks. Use a standard wiring tool for laying thecable wires.

Connecting to T1, PRI, or CorNet (for U.S. Only)

Secondary Protection (for U.S. Only)

7

DANGER

Ground the system properly before connecting the stations.

7 CautionThe TMST1 Module can be installed only in conjunction with a Listed channel ser-vice unit (CSU).

7DANGERTo protect against surge voltage caused by lightning, use secondary protection forthe following HiPath 3750 boards when their wiring leaves the building where themain distribution frame is housed: SLA16 SLA16N SLA24N TMDID8 TMGL8 TIEL4 (if not connected to facility provider terminal equipment) TMST1 (When this module is connected to the public network, secondary pro-

tection must be provided by the CSU.)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.4 HiPath 3700 Installation (19-Inch Cabinet)

Overview

This section contains information on the installation of the HiPath 3700 communication systemin a 19-inch cabinet. This chapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basicsystem. Refer to Section 8.2 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions.

Information on

the possible equipment of central boards with optional plug-in boards

board configuration

final visual inspection

applies to both HiPath 3700 and HiPath 3750 and is described starting in Section 4.2.5.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.4.1 Selecting the Installation Site

The installation site is generally determined by the existing 19-inch cabinet.

The environmental conditions specified in the system data chapter should also be taken intoconsideration in this case (Section 2.9.4).

You will find information on the design and dimensions of HiPath 3700 in Section 2.3.2.4.


One ac power source is required for each cabinet. The ac power source must meet the require-ments specified in Table 4-5.


Procedure




Step Activity

1. Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make surethat they are correct and complete.


3. Dispose of the packing materials properly.

7CautionUse only equipment and materials that are in perfect working order. Do not start up

equipment with visible damage.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.4.3 Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19-Inch Cabinet

Introduction

You can install up to three system cabinets in a 19-inch cabinet. Each cabinet must be mountedseparately.

It is possible to extend the HiPath 3700 to a three cabinet system only if the 19” cabinets arenext to one another and accessible from the back.

The cabinets are already equipped with the boards needed for the customer’s specific require-ments.

4.2.4.3.1 Removing the Cabinet Covers

How the Covers Are Secured

The front cabinet cover (for board servicing) and the rear cabinet cover (for cable servicing) areeach secured by two snap fasteners.

You can remove the upper and lower grills in both covers. This facilitates routing the cables tothe patch panel.

To replace a cover, position the snap fasteners in the two guides and press down on the coveruntil it snaps into place.

7DangerBe sure to ground the system properly before starting it up and connecting the sta-tions.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Procedure (Figure 4-25)

Mounting the Cover

Step Activity

1. Insert a slotted screwdriver (with the blade vertical) into a recess (1).2. Carefully swing the handle of the screwdriver toward the center of the cabinet (2)

until the fastener snaps out and the cover loosens.

3. Then insert the screwdriver in the second recess (3), loosen its snap fastener. Youcan then remove the cover.

Figure 4-25 HiPath 3700 - Removing the Front and Rear Covers

7WarningThe front and rear covers on all system cabinets must be closed before the systemis started up in a 19-inch cabinet.To replace a cover, position the snap fasteners in the two guides and press down on

the cover until it snaps into place.

Cabinet

(1)

(2)

(3)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.4.3.2 Mounting the System Cabinet with Angle Brackets

An assembly kit (C39165-A7027-D5) with eight angle brackets is provided for installing the 19-inch cabinet.

Procedure

7WarningNever attempt to lift a system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet without assistance.

Step Activity

1. Attach a right-handed and a left-handed support brackets (A in Figure 4-26) to the19-inch cabinet using two screws per bracket.

2. Remove the front and rear system cabinet covers.3. Remove both side pieces of the system cabinet.

4. Attach the two angle brackets (B in Figure 4-26) to the front of the system cabinetusing two screws per bracket.

5. Attach the four angle brackets (C in Figure 4-26) to the rear of the system cabinetfor base and cover support.

6. Lift the system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet and sit the cabinet on the two supportbrackets (A). Slide the cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet until the front edge of the sys-tem cabinet is flush with the front of the 19-inch frame.

7. Attach the system cabinet to the angle bracket (B) in the 19-inch cabinet frame usingtwo screws per bracket.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Installation in the 19-Inch Cabinet


To lay the connecting cables between the system cabinets and patch panels, you can cut outthe pre-stamped recesses in the bottom of the system cabinet with a pair of diagonal cuttingpliers and break them out with a pair of flat-nosed pliers.

Figure 4-26 HiPath 3700 - Installation in the 19-Inch Cabinet

7CautionBe careful when breaking out the recesses. Remove any sharp edges and corners.

A

B

C




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.4.4 Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet

The customer-specific communication network and HiPath 3700 are connected via patch pan-els. Patch panels are installed beneath the system cabinets in the 19-inch cabinet (upward ther-

mal radiation).

Installation Procedure

Install the patch panel immediately under the system box (A in Figure 4-27) and attach it to theleft and right of the 19-inch frame using two screws (B) on each side.

Mounting the Patch Panel

Figure 4-27 HiPath 3700 - Mounting the Patch Panel

A

B



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05





Protective Grounding Options and Inspection

Preliminary Inspection of the 19-Inch Cabinet:

Is the 19-inch cabinet groundedby a separate protectiveground conductor (green/yel-low)?

The 19-inch cabinet must be grounded by a sepa-rate protective ground conductor (green/yellow).DangerIf your personnel are not qualified to work on thelow-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a li-censed electrician to install the ground.

Does the 19-inch cabinet havea potential equalization bus atwhich the HiPath 3700 can begrounded as shown in Figure 4-28?

A potential equalization bus must be installed inthe 19-inch cabinet and connected to the groundwire.DangerIf your personnel are not qualified to work on thelow-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a li-censed electrician to install the ground.

If you answer “Yes” to both questions, the system (system cabinets, patch panels) may be

grounded as described below.

7DangerEach HiPath 3700 system cabinet and each patch panel (S30807-K6143-X) must begrounded as shown in Figure 4-28 by a separate protective ground conductor (min-imum cross-section = 2.5 mm2). Make sure that the ground conductor is securely in-stalled and strain-relieved.Please note:The 19-inch cabinet’s potential equalization bus may only be used if it is groundedby a separate protective ground conductor.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock.

NO

YES

NO

YES




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Grounding the System Cabinets and Patch Panels

Figure 4-28 HiPath 3700 - Grounding the Systems and Patch Panel in a 19-Inch Cabinet

To other patch panels S30807-K6143-X (if present)(A protective ground conductoris not required for the S0 patch

panel S30807-K6143-X.)

Potential equalization bus,e.g. in the 19-inch cabinet

HiPath 3700, BC

Patch panelS30807-K6143-X

Any color, except for green or yellow toavoid confusionMin. cross-section = 2.5 mm2

HiPath 3700, EC1 (if present)

HiPath 3700, EC2 (if present)

Attach to the grill usingcable ties

Green with yellow stripeMin. cross-section = 2,5 mm2



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Note on Possible Ground Loops

4.2.4.6 Checking the Protective Grounding

Procedure

Perform the tests in the table below to ensure that the system is properly grounded before star-tup.

>To avoid ground loops from remotely operated devices (V.24 system peripherals),

the devices should be connected to the same low-voltage network (sub-distributionboard) if possible.If the building floor plan does not permit this, you may need a line driver to isolatethe external devices if any malfunctions occur.

Step Activity Target

1. Check the ohmic resistance of the ground connection tothe 19-inch cabinet:Perform measurement between the PE (protective earth)on a socket in the internal installation (at the system’s in-stallation site) and HiPath 3700.

Prerequisites: No device in the 19-inch cabinet is connected to the

low-voltage network via the power cable. The system’s separate protective groundings (basic

cabinet, expansion cabinet, patch panel) and the 19-inch cabinet are connected.

< 10 ohms

2. Check the ohmic resistance between the individual sys-tem parts (basic cabinet, expansion cabinets, patch pan-el).

Prerequisite:HiPath 3700 is not yet connected to the low-voltage net-

work via the power cable.

< 1 ohm




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.4.7 Connecting the Cable to the Backplane

4.2.4.7.1 Backplanes of the “8-Slot” Cabinets

Backplane of the “8-Slot” Basic Cabinet

>All cables that leave the cabinet must be attached to the ventilation grill of the metal

back panel using cable ties.

>The “8-slot” basic cabinet has seven slots, while the expansion cabinets each haveeight slots for peripheral boards.

Figure 4-29 HiPath 3700 - Backplane of the “8-Slot” Basic Cabinet

X70 X50CBCPR

X10X60 X20X30X40

REAL(BConly)

X5

X7

X80

X6

X13

X14

X88

X89

X68

X69

X48

X49

X58

X59

X28

X29

X11

X12

X78

X79

X38

X39

UPSM

X90

EC2

EC1



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Backplane of the “8-Slot” Expansion Cabinets

Connector Assignment in the “8-Slot” Backplane

Figure 4-30 HiPath 3700 - Backplane of the “8-Slot” Exp. Cabinet



X7 BC V.24/RS-232 (no electrical isolation) via 25-pin socket:Connection for printer, Plus products, and other devices.

X5 BC Cable connector to REAL

X6 BC S0-patch-panel-to-REAL connection via SU connector



X13 BCEC1EC2


X14 BCEC1EC2


X28 - X88 All 1 SU connector each (16 TW) to the patch panel

X70 X50

–

X10X60 X20X30X40X80

X13

X14

X88

X89

X68

X69

X48

X49

X58

X59

X28

X29

X78

X79

X38

X39

UPSM

X100

X98

X99

X90

BC

n o t u s e d

notused




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Connecting Cables Between the “8-Slot” Basic and Expansion Cabinets

If installing a multi-cabinet system, you must also connect the cables between the BC and ECs.

Connecting Cables for a Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System (See Table 4-6)

X98 EC1EC2

1 SU connector each (16 TW) to the patch panel

X29 - X89 All 1 SU connector each (8 TW) to the patch panel (not for S2M, T1)

X99 EC1EC2

1 SU connector each (8 TW) to the patch panel (not for S2M, T1)

If Then

Two-cabinetsystem

Connect BC to EC1 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)(see Figure 4-31)

Three-cabinetsystem

Connect BC to EC1 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13) Connect BC to EC2 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)(see Figure 4-32)

Figure 4-31 Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connecting Cables between BC and EC1



EC1

BC

X13X14

X11

X12X13X14


S30777-U757-X103 (forU.S. only)

EC1 = S30777-U708-X100,S30777-U708-X103 (forU.S. only)

Backplane part numbers BC = S30777-Q757-X EC1 = S30777-Q708-X100

Connecting cable partnumbers For connecting BC to EC1 =

S30267-Z178-A13



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Connecting Cables for a Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System (see Table 4-6)

The cables between the basic cabinet and the expansion cabinets are connected in a star con-figuration.

Terminating Resistors in “8-Slot” Cabinets

BC: Between slots CBCPR + 2 and 3 + 4 and 8 + UPSM



Figure 4-32 Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connecting Cables between BC, EC1 andEC2

X13


S30777-U757-X103 (for U.S. only) EC1, EC2 = S30777-U708-X100,

S30777-U708-X103 (for U.S. only)

Backplane part numbers BC = S30777-Q757-X EC1, EC2 = S30777-Q708-X100

Connecting cable part numbers Connect BC to EC1, BC to EC2 =

S30267-Z178-A13

EC1

BC X11X12X13X14

EC2

X13X14

X14




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.4.7.2 Connecting the Patch Panel and Backplane (in the 19-Inch Cabinet)

Introduction

Set up the connection between the patch panel and system using CABLUs (prefabricated ca-bling units) with the following characteristics:

System side: SIPAC 1 SU connector(s)

Cable: 16 x 2 x 0.4 (the standard cable length is 2 m.)

Patch panel side:

– Not for U.S.: Open-end cable (for STMD8) or SIVAPAC socket connectors (for all otherboards)

– For U.S. only: ---

CABLUs for the Slots Containing Peripheral Boards (Not for U.S.)

If Then

Slotwith

SLMO81,SLMO24,SLA8N1,

SLA16N1

orSLA24N

Route 16 TW to the patch panel via SU Xx8 and 8 TW via SU Xx9 using a stan-dard cable (with 16 TW) for each connection. Connect both cables (= 1 CABLUwith SU connectors labeled 8 and 9) to the same SIVAPAC socket connector (25TW).Order number for CABLU with 24 DA:

S30267-Z363-A20: 2 m in length

Slotwith

STMD8

You need a special S0 patch panel (C39104-Z7001-B3) for this. The 16 TW isrouted via (and manually laid at) SU Xx8 (backplane) using an open-end cable.Order numbers for open-end cables: S30267-Z192-A60: 6 m in length S30267-Z192-A100: 10 m in length S30267-Z192-A200: 20 m in length

Slot

withTMS2

S2M connections are not set up via a patch panel.

An adapter (SIPAC 1 SU connector - 8-pole MW8 (RJ48C) jack, Figure 4-38) isconnected directly to the SU Xx9 backplane connector. You can use a specialcable (see Section 3.3.27, TMS2 (Not for U.S.)) to create a direct connection tothe NT or networked system.

Slot withany otherperipheral

board

Route 16 TW to the patch panel (S30807-K6143-X) via SU Xx8 using a CABLU.Order number for CABLU with 16 DA: S30267-Z362-A20: 2 m in length



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




CABLUs for the Slots Containing Peripheral Boards (for U.S. Only)

Slotwith

REAL

Route the REAL board via an S0 patch panel (C39104-Z7001-B3). The 16 TWis routed to (and manually laid at) the S0 patch panel via SU X6 (backplane) us-

ing an open-end cable.Order numbers for open-end cable: S30267-Z192-A60: 6 m in length S30267-Z192-A100: 10 m in length S30267-Z192-A200: 20 m in length

1 A CABLU with 16 DA is also sufficient for these boards. A CABLU with 24 DA is recommended to simplify station configu-ration expansion (e.g. by replacing the SLMO8 by an SLMO24).

If ThenSlot with24-port

peripheral board

Route 16 TW to the patch panel via SU_Xx8 and 8 TW via SU_Xx9, usingstandard CABLU S30267-Z365-A30 (SU connectors are labeled 8 and 9.).Both cables are connected to the same 50-pin Champ jack.

Slot with max.16-port

peripheral board

Route 16 TW to the main distribution frame via SU_Xx8 using standard CA-BLU S30267-Z366-A30.

Slot withTMST1

T1 connections (see Section 3.3.26, TMST1 (for U.S. Only)) are not set upvia the main distribution frame.An adapter (1 SU connector - 8-pole MW8 (RJ48C) jack, Figure 4-20) isconnected directly to the SU Xx9 backplane connector. You can use a spe-cial cable to create a direct connection to the CSU or networked system.

If Then




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Structure of the Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X

Information on MW8 jack assignment on the front of the patch panel is provided in the boarddescriptions (in the “Cable and Connector Assignment” table) in Chapter 3.

Surge Protector

To divert surges caused by lightning, insert surge protectors on lines that leave the system buildings (outside stations)

lines > 500 m long.

Connect the polarized surge protectors to slots F1 – F8 provided on the patch panel (see Figure4-34).

>All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties.

Figure 4-33 Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X

SIVAPAC edge connector:ports for CABLU connec-tion to the backplane

Eight surge protector slots

Front panel with3 x 16 MW8 jacks

8 1

MW8 jack assignment:4 = a-wire5 = b-wire

Necessary height units for 19“ cabinet assembly: 1(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7“ = 43 mm)



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Figure 4-34 Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X Layout

PFT1

X9X10

X12X13

X14X15

F8F1

F2 F7F3 F5

F6F4

11

11

1 1

X12 / X14

X13 / X15

1 8765432

1 8765432

1 8765432a aaaaaaab bbbbbbb

X11

18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1534 36 38 40 42 44 46 48

33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47

X5 X1

SIVAPAC Edge Connectors: Connecting the CABLUs to the Backplane

Front Panel with 3 x 16 MW8 Jacks

Surge pro-tector slotsF1–F8

Options for connecting the external line network: Connection via the MW8 jacks on the front of the patch panels. Using jump-

er wire, bridges must be inserted between the terminal strips X12 and X14and between X13 and X15. The contact between the connector X5 and thefirst eight MW8 jacks is only set up when wire bridges are present.

Direct connector jumpering on the X12/X13 connector. Bridges are not nec-

essary in this case.

X9, X10, X11 andPFT1 not used inHiPath 3000.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Structure of the S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3

CABLUs must be manually connected to the S0 patch panel (Figure 4-36). You can use the Kro-ne wiring tool for this.

Refer to the following tables for information on the assignment of the MW8 jacks:

Table 3-61 for STMD8 board (not for U.S.) Table 3-111 for REAL board

>All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties.

Figure 4-35 S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3

... 7 5 3 123 21 19 17 ...

... 8 6 4 224 22 20 18 ...

3 x 8 MW8 jacks, numbering

8 1

:

PinMW8 jack assignment:

as a subscriber line as a trunk connection

3 Transmit + Receive +

4 Receive + Transmit +

5 Receive – Transmit –

6 Transmit – Receive –




inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Figure 4-36 Laying Wire Pairs at the S0 Patch Panel

8 7 6 3 2 1 4 5

Pin assignment of MW8 jacksTwist the wire pairs before laying them.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Stripping the Open-End Cable for the S0 Patch Panel

Figure 4-37 Stripping the Open-End Cable for the S0 Patch Panel

250 ± 5Stripped length

Velcro tape (19 mm wide)Trunk group fastener

(1)

Cable with film sheath: No. 6 (conductive copper tape) 1.5 windings. Ground wireshortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape (1).

Stripped length = 600 mm ± 5 mm

Color

Group

Pair a-Wire b-Wire Color

Group

Pair a-Wire b-Wire Color

Group

Pair a-Wire b-Wire

1 1 wht/blu 2 6 red/blu 3 11 blk/blu

blu/wht blu/red blu/blk

2 wht/ora 7 red/ora 12 blk/ora

ora/wht ora/red ora/blk

3 wht/grn 8 red/grn 13 blk/grn

grn/wht grn/red grn/blk

4 wht/brn 9 red/brn 14 blk/brn

brn/wht brn/red brn/blk

5 wht/gry 10 red/grn 15 blk/gry

gry/wht grn/red gry/blk

4 16 yel/blu

blu/yel



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




S2M /T1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C))

Figure 4-38 S2M /T1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) C39228-A7195-A12


MW8 (RJ48C) jack(to the NT,CSU or net-worked sys-tem)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.4.8 Connecting the Line Network to the Patch Panel

Telephones and trunks are connected directly to the MW8 jack on the front of the patch panel.Information on MW8 jack assignment on the front of the patch panel is provided in the boarddescriptions (in the “Cable and Connector Assignment” table) in Chapter 3.

7

Danger

Connect the system to protective ground before connecting the stations.

>If you jumper stations on the patch panel (for example, with an ICCS network) with-out first entering the relocate code, when you reconnect them the stations affectedwill go into operation with the data of the stations originally installed.

Figure 4-39 Layout of the Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X for Different Peripheral Boards

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

SLA16N / SLC16 / SLC16N SLA16N / SLC16 / SLC16N

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

SLA24N SLA16N / SLC16 / SLC16N

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

SLA16N / SLC16 / SLC16N SLA24N

Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks each



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.5 Loading the System Software and Inserting Subboards on theCentral Control Board

Outside the U.S., the cabinets are already equipped with the boards needed for the customer-specific requirements when the system is delivered.

In the U.S., you may need to install the boards.

The central boards are not always fully equipped when delivered. Optional plug-in boards arepackaged individually.

See Chapter 3 for information on slots for subboards on the central control boards.

7CautionAlways wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system (especially whenhandling boards). Connect the wristband to the slide-in shelf in the cabinet using thealligator clip.

7CautionPlace the central control board on a flat surface before inserting subboards (such asCMA, CMS, or IMODN).The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard, so youshould always mount them (see Figure 3-5).Otherwise you may damage the board.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.6 Configuration Notes

Introduction

Outside the U.S., the cabinets are already equipped with the boards needed for the customer-specific requirements when the system is delivered. In the U.S., you may need to install theboards.

Board Slots in “8-Slot” Cabinets

Nine board slots are available in each cabinet. The following boards are assigned permanentslots:

CBCPR central processor board -> slot 01 in the BC

UPSM power supply unit -> slot 09 in the BC, slot 18 in EC1, slot 27 in EC2.

Depending on their width, peripheral boards can be inserted in slots 02 to 08 in the BC, 10 to17 in EC1 and 19 to 26 in EC2 (the adhesive label beneath each slot identifies the slot) (seeFigure 4-40).



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Slots in “8-Slot” Basic and Expansion Cabinets

Figure 4-40 Slot Numbers and Widths in “8-Slot” BC, EC1, and EC2

Slot no.:

Slot width(mm):

Slot no.,EC1:

EC2:

Slot width(mm):

CBCPR

45

X10

02

30

X20

03

30

X30

04

30

X40

08

45

X80

UPSM

90

X90

05

30

X50

06

30

X60

07

30

X70

10

19

30

X10

11

20

30

X20

12

21

30

X30

13

22

30

X40

17

26

30

X80

UPSM

UPSM

90

X90

14

23

30

X50

15

24

30

X60

16

25

30

X70

Basic Cabinet BC

Expansion Cabinets EC1 and EC2




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Width of the Peripheral Boards

Peripheral boards are divided into

Wide boards requiring a slot 45 mm (1.75 in.) wide:

– TML8W with GEE8: Use a 45 mm slot for the TML8W even if you are not installing aGEE8 so that you can easily add a GEE8 later.

– TMDID8

Narrow boards requiring a slot 30 mm (1.2 in.) wide (= all other boards)

You can insert wide boards into a 30 mm (1.2 in.) slot, but if you do so, you can no longer usethe slot to its right.

Initializing the Boards

The first time the system starts up, the system software detects the boards in ascending order,starting with the lowest installation position. The system initializes subscriber line circuits andports the direction of the arrow (Figure 4-41).

The system activates all connected boards in the following situations:

The maximum configuration has not yet been reached. While sequentially scanning theslots for each board, the system software checks whether the maximum number of stationsor trunks has been exceeded. If it has, the board is not activated. The board LED showsthe board’s status.

At least one B channel on line trunk modules is available for the slot (only the availablenumber of B channels is activated).

7Caution

Always wear an antistatic wristband and observe the measures for protecting elec-trostatically sensitive devices.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Initialization of Subscriber Line Circuits and Ports

Recommended Configuration (for U.S Only)

To avoid B-channel blocking, install the TMST1 board only in the BC or in the first two slots ofthe ECs. HiPath 3000 Manager E observes this rule when performing off-line configuration.

Figure 4-41 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700—Initialization of Subscriber Line Circuits andPorts

CB

CPR

Basic cabinet

UPSM

Expansion cabinet 1

Expansion cabinet 2

UP

SM

UP

SM



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




The figures below show the PCM segments (64 time-division multiplex channels each) for thedifferent HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 system configurations.

PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System:

7CautionThe following rules for population with boards must be observed to ensure the error-free and non-blocking operation of the system: SLC16, SLC16N

– Maximum one SLC16 or SLC16N per PCM segment. The SLC16 orSLC16N should be configured alone on the PCM segment, where possible.

– Note the following information on the subject of multi-SLCs: “SLC16 andSLC16N Board Distribution in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Cabinets” onpage 3-110.

IVML8, IVML24 (see Section 3.3.3)– A maximum of one IVML8 or IVML24 per system.– IVML8 or IVML24 may only be inserted in the slot beside the power supply

in the basic cabinet or the expansion cabinets.

– No SLC16 or SLC16N may be inserted in the PCM segment of the IVML8/ IVML24.– No SLMO24 may be inserted in the PCM segment of the IVML24.– If a TMS2 is configured on the PCM segment of the IVML24, only a board

with a maximum of 8 ports may be inserted in the free slot. SLMO24

A maximum of two SLMO24s per PCM segment; the number of connected sta-tions (hosts (primary) and clients (secondary)) may not be more than 64.

Figure 4-42 PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System

CBCP

R

02

03

04

08

UPSM

05

06

07

“8-Slot” cabinets

BC




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System

PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System

Figure 4-43 PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System

Figure 4-44 PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System

CBCPR

02

03

04

08

UPSM

05

06

07


10

11

12

13

17

UPSM

14

15

16

BC EC1


CBCPR

02

03

04

08

UPSM

05

06

07

19

20

21

22

26

UPSM

23

24

25

BC EC2

10

11

12

13

17

UPSM

14

15

16

EC1



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Static traffic capacity

The static traffic capacity of the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 systems can be determined asfollows.

Table 4-8 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Static traffic capacity


Slots per PCM seg-ment

Static traffic capacityper PCM segment

Total static trafficcapacity of the

system

Single-cabinet system(see Figure 4-42)

02 + 03 64 Erlangs

192 Erlangs04 + 05 64 Erlangs

06 + 07 + 08 64 Erlangs

Two-cabinet system(see Figure 4-43)

02 + 03 64 Erlangs

448 Erlangs

04 + 05 64 Erlangs

06 + 07 + 08 64 Erlangs

10 + 11 64 Erlangs

12 + 13 64 Erlangs

14 + 15 64 Erlangs

16 + 17 64 Erlangs

Three-cabinet system(see Figure 4-44)

02 + 03 64 Erlangs

448 Erlangs

04 + 05 64 Erlangs

06 + 07 + 08 64 Erlangs

10 + 11 + 19 + 20 64 Erlangs

12 + 13 + 21 + 22 64 Erlangs

14 + 15 + 23 + 24 64 Erlangs

16 + 17 + 25 + 26 64 Erlangs




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.6.1 Inserting and Removing Boards

Introduction

Peripheral boards can be inserted and removed while the power is connected.Two levers are attached to the front corners of the boards for inserting and removing the boards.When closed, these levers engage with the board, locking it in place.

See Section 8.2.1 for information on how to add new peripheral boards.

Procedure for Inserting and Removing the Boards (Figure 4-45)

Locking and Unlocking Boards

Special Board Attachments

The power supply is screwed onto the grill of each cabinet.

The special REAL board is mounted on the metal back panel (basic cabinet only) and connect-ed to the backplane with a ribbon cable.

If Then

Unlocking theboard (1) Swing both plastic levers outward simultaneously. You can now pull the boardout of the system on its guide rails.

Lockingthe board (2)

Slide the board into the system using its guide rails. Insert the hooks on thelocking levers into the recesses in the shelf. Press down on both levers simul-taneously in the direction of the shelf until they snap into place.

Figure 4-45 Locking and Unlocking Boards

(2)

(2)

(1)

(1)



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.2.7 Connecting Workpoint Clients

Refer to Chapter 9 for details.

4.2.8 Make Trunk Connections

Refer to the following board descriptions for information:

STMD8 (S0 trunk connection (Not for U.S.))

TMS2 (Not for U.S.) (S2M trunk connection)

TMAMF (for selected countries only)

TML8W (Not for U.S.)

TIEL TMDID8 (for U.S. Only)

TMGL8 (for U.S. Only)

TMST1 (for U.S. Only)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.2.9 Performing a Visual Inspection

Introduction

Before starting up the system, you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware, cablesand the power supply. The procedure is shown in Table 4-9. The visual inspection must be per-formed while the system is disconnected from the power supply.

Visual Inspection Procedure

7DANGERBefore beginning work, make sure that the system is grounded and disconnectedfrom the power supply. For U.S. only: Use lockout/tagout (LOTO) procedures.Observe the measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices (see page 1-9).

Table 4-9 Visual Inspection Procedure

Step Activity Materials Action

1. Compare the slots for theexisting boards with the cardmap.

Card map Correct the board configu-ration and notify the salesdepartment.

2. Check all boards for properseating.

Refer to page 4-78Check the additional me-

chanical attachments forthe UPSM.

Reconnect and fasten theboards.

3. Check the local line voltage. Digital multimeter

>After finishing the visual inspection, you can begin starting up the HiPath 3750 or Hi-Path 3700 system as described in Section 5.2.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Installation

4.3 HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300Installation

4.3.1 Installation Prerequisites

Tools and help needed

The following are needed for installing the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath3300 systems:

Tools:– Diagonal cutting pliers, telephone pliers, wire stripper, flat-nosed pliers

– Slotted screwdrivers, from 2 to 8 mm (1/4 to 5/16 in.)

– Phillips or cross-point screwdrivers, sizes 1 and 2

– TORX screwdriver

– Electric drill

– Hammer

– Level

– Tape measure

Help:

– Manager T or HiPath 3000 Manager E

– Digital-multimeter for testing ground connections and partial voltages

– Telephone test set for analog interfaces

– Not for U.S.: ISDN tester (such as K3000 or Aurora)

– For U.S. only: Trend Communications auroraplus, or similar, ISDN protocol analyzer (forBRI)

– For U.S. only: AuroraDuet, AuroraExpert, AuroraRemote, or similar, ISDN protocol analyz-er (for PRI)

7WarningThe system may be installed by authorized service personnel only.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.2 Installation Procedure

Table 4-10 HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - System Installation

ProcedureStep Installation Activity

HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Installa-tion

HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Installa-tion (19-Inch Housing)

1. Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-83(usually predetermined)

Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-106(usually predetermined)

2. Unpacking the Components, page 4-85 Unpacking the Components, page 4-107

3. Mounting the Main Distribution Frame(HiPath 3550 only) (Not for U.S.), page 4-

86

Attaching a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300to the Wall (19-Inch Housing) (Not for

U.S.), page 4-1084. Remove System Housing Cover, page 4-

88Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in

a Cabinet, page 4-109

5. Attaching the System to the Wall, page 4-90

Grounding the System, page 4-111

6. Grounding the System and the ExternalMain Distribution Frame, page 4-91

Installing the Boards, page 4-112

7. Installing the Boards, page 4-93 Connecting Cables and the Line Network,page 4-113

8. Laying the Line Network and ConnectingCables, page 4-94

Configuration Notes, page 4-114

9. Attaching Ferrite, page 4-98 Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4-117

10. Configuration Notes, page 4-100 Make Trunk Connections, page 4-117

11. Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4-104

Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-117

12. Make Trunk Connections, page 4-104

13. Conducting a Visual Inspection, page 4-104



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.3.3 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Installation

This section contains information on the installation of the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350. Thischapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system. Refer to Section

8.2 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions.


Selecting a Site

The customer usually has a preferred installation site in mind.

Make sure that the customer’s site meets the following guidelines:

To guarantee sufficient system ventilation, keep the area surrounding the housing clear as

follows: allow 30 cm clearance on the left (for board replacement), and 10 cm clearance onthe right, top and bottom of the housing.

Do not expose the systems to direct sources of heat (such as sunlight and heaters).

Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments.

Avoid contact with chemicals.

Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op-eration. If condensation forms on a system, make sure the system has time to dry com-pletely before starting it up.

Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2.9.4.For U.S. Only

Ensure that the installation site is in the immediate vicinity of an electrical outlet

Allow space for a main distribution frame or other additional equipment

Install lightning and surge arrester equipment

Avoid standard carpeting, as it tends to produce electrostatic charges

Ensure that Siemens equipment is 40 in. (101.6 cm) from other electrical equipment. The

National Electrical Code (NEC) requires 36 in. (91.44 cm) of clearance in front of electricalequipment and 40 in. (101.6 cm) of clearance from other electrical service equipment.

Ensure that the equipment room for the system provides adequate space for installationand maintenance activities, including removing and replacing the cover. See Figure 4-46on Page 4-84 for space requirements on the sides of the system. We recommend using aplywood backboard at least 0.5 in. (127 mm) thick and measuring at least 4 ft. (122 cm) by4 ft. (122 cm).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Space Requirements (for U.S. Only)

For U.S. only: The system measures 18 by 17.7 inches (460 x 450 mm). It requires 18 in.(460 mm) of clearance on the left, and at least 8 in. (203 mm) of clearance on the top and right.

Allow 20 in. (508 mm) of clearance on the bottom (for cords). Observe also the NEC require-ments on page 4-83.

You will find information on the design and dimensions in the following sections:

HiPath 3550 Section 2.3.2.2


Figure 4-46 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Space Requirements (for U.S. Only)

8 in.

MDF

(203 mm)

Backboard 4 ft. by 4 ft.(122 cm by 122 cm)

20 in.(508 mm)

HiPath 3550or

HiPath 3350

Allow 18 in.(460 mm)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05





The ac power source must meet the requirements specified in Table 4-11.

AC Power Outlet Requirements (for U.S. Only)

Must not be located more than 6 feet (2 m) from the system

Must provide fused 120 Vac (single-phase) power at 60 Hz Should be on a dedicated circuit with an isolated ground

Should have a warning attached to the circuit breaker that controls it to prevent accidentalremoval of power

Recommended: Add a power surge protector between the outlet and the system


Procedure




Step Activity

1. Compare the components included in the delivery with the packing slip or customerreceipt to make sure that they are complete.


3. Dispose of the packing materials properly in accordance with local regulations.

7 DangerUse only equipment and materials that are in perfect working order. Do not start upequipment with visible damage.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.3.3 Mounting the Main Distribution Frame (HiPath 3550 only) (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

The main distribution frame unit (MDFU) (see Figure 4-47) is the main distribution frame used.

Installation Notes

The MDFU should be installed in the direct vicinity of the system (note length of connecting ca-ble) and at eye level. Mount it on the wall according to the instructions that came with it. Thebag attached to the cover contains a drill template and screws and wall anchors for attachingthe MDF to the wall.

The MDFU must be grounded. Refer to Section 4.3.3.6 for an explanation of the procedure.

Procedure for Mounting the MDFU on the Wall

Step Activity

1. Use the template to drill the holes.

2. Insert the wall anchors and screw in the screws, leaving 5 mm projecting.

3. Remove the housing cover and mount the MDFU-E on the brackets.

4. Tighten the screws through the holes.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




MDFU Layout and Dimensions (Not for U.S.)

Figure 4-47 MDFU Layout and Dimensions (367.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm) (Not for U.S.)

2 x PFT1or

1 x PFT4

9 slots (9 x 30 mm)

Spec. built-in comp.


328.8 mm

3 6 7 . 0

m m

1

2

3

6

4

5

Jumper

channel

9

7

8




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.3.4 Remove System Housing Cover

Procedure

7

Warning

To prevent injuries, you must observe the following notes for the removal and attach-ment of the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 housing cover.

Step Action

1. Loosen the two screwed plugs on the housing cover with a slotted screw driver. Holdthe housing cover so that it does not fall.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Mounting the housing cover

To close the system housing again, put the cover on and fasten it with the two screwed plugs.To avoid injuries, hold on to the outside of the housing cover only when mounting it.

2. Remove the housing cover.Warning

Hold the housing cover by its external sides only. The edges of the shielding on the inside of the cover may be sharp and can causeinjury.

Step Action




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.3.5 Attaching the System to the Wall

Attach the system to the wall as shown in Figure 4-48.

Attaching the HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 Housing to the Wall

Figure 4-48 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Wall Attachment

Figure 4-49 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Mounting Holes

PSU/

UPS

Cable

ductHous. back panelOblong holes forwall attachment

Attachment ofPSUUPSto the housingback panel

Hang systemand tighten screws

Minimum clearance for board replacement (for U.S.: 18 in.)

Not anattachmentpoint

30 cm



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.3.3.6 Grounding the System and the External Main Distribution Frame

Grounding the System (Not for U.S.)

Grounding the System (for U.S. and Canada Only)

The system power cord on the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 system is grounded, but the sys-tems also require an earth ground, as do all digital switching systems. The earth ground must

meet the requirements of the U.S. National Electrical Code or Canadian Electrical Code. Theearth ground must be connected between the lug provided on the HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350rear panel and the electrical service panel that supplies the HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 withpower, using wire no smaller than 14 AWG.

Grounding the External Main Distribution Frame

Not for U.S.

HiPath 3550: Shipments always include an MDFU (Germany only) and two grounding ca-bles. Use one of the cables to ground the MDFU. It is not necessary to ground the connec-

tion between the MDFU and HiPath 3550 (see Figure 4-50). HiPath 3350: This system type does not require an external main distribution frame. The

connecting cables to the peripherals are attached directly to the boards and routed to theoutside via a cable duct inside the housing.

Refer to Figure 4-50 when replacing a customer system using the existing external main distri-bution frame.

For U.S. Only

The customer supplies a main distribution frame (MDF) to complete the communications sys-tem. Mount and ground the MDF in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

>Because of their safety class, the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing) donot have to be grounded.If protective grounding is required in certain countries (for example in Finland, Nor-way, U.S.), the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 must be grounded by a separate pro-tective ground conductor via the ground connection marked “ ”.

7DangerAn external main distribution frame which requires grounding (if the existing groundconnection is marked “ ”), must be grounded by a separate ground wire (minimumcross section = 2.5 mm2).Failure to observe this requirement may cause irreversible damage to the system.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Grounding an External Main Distribution Frame

Figure 4-50 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Grounding an External Main Distribution Frame

HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350(grounding not required outside ofU.S.)

Potential equalization bus

but not:- Central heating system- Drain channels- Ground conductor for antenna system

Communication system to bereplaced

Groundingscrew

Main distribution frame beingreused

e.g. MDFU

Green with yellow stripeMin. cross section = 2.5 mm2

External main distribution frame(You must install proper grounding,if required)

OLD

SYSTEM

NEW

S

YSTEM



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.3.3.7 Installing the Boards

Outside the U.S., the cabinets are already equipped with the boards needed for the customer-specific requirements when the system is delivered.

In the U.S., you may need to install the boards.

Connecting to T1, PRI, or CorNet (for U.S. Only)

7CautionThe TST1 Module (HiPath 3550) can be installed only in conjunction with a Listedchannel service unit (CSU).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.3.8 Laying the Line Network and Connecting Cables

HiPath 3550 (Not for U.S.)

HiPath 3550 - MDFU Ports for Peripheral Boards in HiPath 3750 Format

If Then

SLA8NSLA16NSLA24NSLC16

SLC16NSLMO24

Route the 16 TW to the MDFU via SU_X8 and 8 TW via SU_X9 (see Figure 4-51), using a standard cable (with 16 TW) for each connection. Connect both ca-bles (1 CABLU with SU connectors labeled 8 and 9) to the same jumper strip(25 TW).

Slot withany other

peripheralboard

Without an external main distribution frame (MDFU):You can attach cables for the peripheral boards directly to the boards (see

Figure 4-53 for the slip-on connectors) and route them to the MDFU throughthe cable duct inside the housing.

With an external main distribution frame (MDFU):Use CABLU S30269-Z41-A30 (Figure 4-52) to connect the peripheralboards to the customer’s line network. As shown in Figure 4-53, you canconnect the eight-pin slip-on connectors to the boards directly. The line net-work connects directly to the jumper strip.

Figure 4-51 HiPath 3550 - Backplane Connection for a Peripheral Board in HiPath 3750Format

The two arrows on the left mark the con-nections for the cables coming from themain distribution frame (MDFU).



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - CABLU for Connection to the External Main DistributionFrame

Figure 4-52 Layout of CABLU S30269-Z41-A30 ( 3 m long)

6 slip-on connectors (4 TW each) for connection to the HiPath3550 and HiPath 3350 boards

Jumper strip (25 TW) for installation in the externalmain distribution frame




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


HiPath 3350 (Not for U.S.)

The integrated distribution frame in HiPath 3350 allows you to connect the cable network tothe trunk and the stations using screw connections on slip-on connectors that can be easily re-

moved for easy system connection and disconnectionThe peripheral boards and optional boards contain a distribution frame component in the formof edge connectors on the boards. The slip-on connectors for these edge connectors are sup-plied with the boards. You insert the wires into the screw connections on the slip-on connectors,tighten, and then slide the slip-on connectors onto the board edge connectors.

If you have an external main distribution frame (MDFU), use CABLU S30269-Z41-A30 (Fig-ure 4-52) to connect the peripheral boards to the customer’s line network. As shown in Figure4-53, you can connect the 8-pin slip-on connectors directly to the boards. The line network con-nects to the jumper strip.

Figure 4-53 Integrated Distribution Frame - Slip-on Connector Screw Connections

Plug connectionto the HiPath 3550or HiPath 3350system

Screw con-nections tothe network



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Connecting the Cabling (for U.S. Only)

If the boards are not already connected to the appropriate cables leaving the system, you needto connect them.

The TST1 Module (HiPath 3550) connects to a customer-supplied channel service unit(CSU) using the supplied cable. The CSU provides the required secondary protection.

Each port on the STLS4 Module connects to an S0 bus using the supplied, silver-satin con-nector cord and a surface-mounted RJ45X jack (a biscuit block). The surface-mountedRJ45X jack is not supplied.

The signals must be reversed in the RJ45X jack; see Figure 3-60 on Page 3-136.

The board in Slot 10 of HiPath 3550 connects using a special cable from the backplane tothe main distribution frame (MDF).

The remaining peripheral boards and options connect to a customer-supplied main distri-bution frame (MDF) or similar equipment using the supplied MDF cables (octopus cablesterminated in Amphenol connectors). You select the output pattern on the Amphenol con-nector by which slip-on connector you use on each board edge connector.

Note that the MDF cables reverse the order of the signals from the boards, so that R/T atthe board interface becomes T/R at the Amphenol connector.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.3.9 Attaching Ferrite

To keep within the interference limit required by EMC Class B, you must attach ferrite to thefollowing lines.

HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Power Cables (Wall Housing)

The wall housing’s power cable must be guided through the C39022-Z7000-C7 ferrite sleevethat is included in the accessory pack. Position the ferrite sleeve as shown in Figure 4-54 sothat you will be able to close the housing cover.

Figure 4-54 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Power Cable with Ferrite Sleeve

Ferrite sleeveC39022-Z7000-C7

40 + / – 5 mm min. 15 mm

Power cable



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Digital and Analog Trunks and Subscriber Lines of the HiPath 3550 (Wall Housing)

>With maximum system configuration, there are not enough ferrite sleeves in the ac-

cessory pack for all trunks and subscriber lines. In this case, you will need to orderadditional ferrite.

If Then

Trunk boardor subscrib-er line mod-ules in Hi-Path 3750

format

Guide both standard cables from SU_X8 and SU_X9 (see Figure 4-51) to theMDF through two ferrite sleeves (C39022-Z7000-C7) each. The ferrite shouldbe placed as far inside the housing as possible.

Trunk boardor subscrib-er line mod-

ules in“small” for-

mat

Guide the trunk and subscriber lines of all ports connected on a board througha ferrite sleeve twice, i.e. in a loop. The ferrite should be fixed in the cable ductas much as possible. If the number of lines makes this impossible, the ferrite canbe attached directly at the output of the cable duct.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.3.10 Configuration Notes

HiPath 3550: System Overview and Slots

>Restrictions for equipment with the IVMP8, IVMS8, TST1 and TS2 boards must be

observed.

Figure 4-55 HiPath 3550 - Wall Housing System Overview

Optional boards

12

34

56

PSUUPS

Cable

duct

Slot levels CUC



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Figure 4-56 HiPath 3550 - Slots in the Wall Housing

Figure 4-57 HiPath 3550 - Options Adapter Long (OPAL)

O p t .

O p t .

O p t .

O p t .

O p t .

S l o t 1 0

( H i P a t h 3 7 5 0 b d ) S

l o t 4

S l o t 8

S l o t 6

S l o t 5

S l o t 9

S l o t 7

V . 2 4

S l o t 2

S l o t 3

C B C C

OPAL

W a l l

To MDF

CUC: Connection Unit Com

Slot levels

1 2 3 4 5 6

The CBCC board is connected tothe optional board via a ribbon ca-ble (OPAL) (see adjacent figure).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm



Figure 4-58 HiPath 3350 - Wall Housing System Overview

Figure 4-59 HiPath 3350 - Slots in the Wall Housing

Optional boards

1

2 3

PSUUPS

Cableduct

Slot levels CUP

O p

t .

O p t .

O p t .

O p t .

O p t .

OPAL

S l o t 4

S l o t 5

S l o t 2

S l o t 3

C B C C

V . 2 4

CUP: Connection Unit Point

Slot levels

1 2 3

W a l l



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05





The HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 systems have the following static traffic capacities.


System Slots Static traffic capacity Total static traffic capacityof the system

HiPath 3550(see Figure 4-56)

2 / 3 (CBCC) 24 Erlangs

198 Erlangs

4 16 Erlangs

5 16 Erlangs

6 16 Erlangs

7 16 Erlangs

8 16 Erlangs9 30 Erlangs1

1 Use of a TS2 board results in a capacity of 30 Erlangs. A maximum of one TS2 per HiPath 3550 is possible, and the boardmay only be installed in slot 7 or 9, thus resulting in 30 Erlangs for slot 7 or 9.

10 64 Erlangs


2 / 3 (CBCC) 24 Erlangs

56 Erlangs4 16 Erlangs

5 16 Erlangs




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.3.11 Connecting Workpoint Clients

Refer to Chapter 9 for details.

4.3.3.12 Make Trunk Connections


STLS2 (Not for U.S.) and STLS4 (S0 trunk connection)

TS2 (Not for U.S.), HiPath 3550 only (S2M trunk connection)

TLA2 and TLA4 and TLA8 (Not for U.S.)

TMAMF (for selected countries only) , HiPath 3550 only

TMGL4 (for U.S. Only)

TMQ4 (for U.S. Only)

TST1 (for U.S. Only)

4.3.3.13 Conducting a Visual Inspection

Before starting up the system, you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware, cables,and power supply. Conduct the visual inspection only while the system is disconnected fromthe power supply.

7 CautionBefore beginning the work, make sure that the system is grounded and disconnect-ed from the power supply. For U.S. only: Use lockout/tagout (LOTO) procedures.Always wear an antistatic wristband and observe the measures for protecting elec-trostatically sensitive devices (see page 1-9).

Step Activity Materials Possible remedies

1. Compare the slots for theinstalled boards with the

card map.

Card map Correct the board con-figuration and notify

the sales department.2. Check the local line voltage. Digital multimeter

>After finishing the visual inspection, you can begin starting up the system as de-scribed in Section 5.3.



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.3.4 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Installation (19-Inch Housing)

This section contains information on the installation of the HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300. Thischapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system. Refer to Section

8.2 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions.

4.3.4.1 Installation Versions

The HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 construction is designed for the following three installations:

Wall mounting (with assembly kit 39165-A7027-D2)

Desk installation (assembly kit includes adhesive feet 39165-A7027-D2.)Stick the adhesive feet to the bottom of the housing.

Installation in the 19-inch cabinet (with assembly kit 39165-A7027-D1 for HiPath 3500, as-sembly kit 39165-A7027-D4 for HiPath 3300)

You can also install an expansion cabinet rack ECR (not for U.S. and Canada) in which you caninstall a battery pack (for uninterruptible power supply) and/or an additional external power sup-ply EPSU2-R (if the system’s internal power supply is not sufficient) (see Section 8.2.3).

7DangerThe HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems can only be operated with a closed hous-ing.The system must be powered down and de-energized as follows before the housingis opened: Disconnect the line cord on any connected battery pack (for UPSC-DR only). Disconnect the line cord on any connected EPSU2-R (for UPSC-DR only). Disconnect the power plug.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm



Selecting a Site

The customer usually has a preferred installation site in mind, for example an existing 19-inchcabinet.

Make sure that the customer’s site meets the following guidelines:

To guarantee sufficient system ventilation, allow a minimum of 10 cm clearance around thehousing.

Do not expose the systems to direct sources of heat (such as sunlight or heaters).

Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments.

Avoid contact with chemicals.

Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op-eration. If condensation forms on the system, make sure that the system has time to drycompletely before starting it up.

Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2.9.4.

You will find information on the design and dimensions in the following section:




The ac power source must meet the requirements specified in Table 4-13.






inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05





Procedure

Step Activity

1. Compare the components included in the delivery with the packing slip to makesure they are complete.

2. Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to theproper departments.

3. Dispose of the packing materials properly according to local regulations.

7Caution

Use only equipment and materials that are in perfect working order. Do not start upequipment with visible damage.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.4.4 Attaching a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 to the Wall (19-Inch Housing) (Notfor U.S.)

Procedure for Wall Mounting (Figure 4-60)

Wall Mounting

Step Activity

1. Drill a hole in the selected wall, insert a wall anchor and screw in the screws.

2. Screw the angle brackets (A) and (B) for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 onto thebase of the device.

3. Mount the system with the angle bracket (A) on the screws.

4. Drill a second hole in the wall for the lower angle bracket (B), insert a wall anchorand attach the angle bracket with a screw.

Figure 4-60 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Wall Mounting

A

B




inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.3.4.5 Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet

Procedure for 19-Inch Cabinets (Figure 4-61)

Step Activity

1. HiPath 3500 only: Attach the two angle brackets (A) to the 19-inch cabinet using twoscrews per bracket.

2. Attach the two angle brackets (B) to the left and right of the HiPath 3500 or HiPath3300 using two screws per bracket.

3. Slide the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 system into the 19-inch cabinet and attach itto the left and right of the 19-inch frame with screws.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Mounting the 19-Inch Cabinet

Figure 4-61 HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 - Mounting the 19-Inch Cabinet

HiPath 3300

BB

HiPath 3500

A

HiPath 3500



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05





Protective Grounding Options and Inspection

Preliminary Inspection of the 19-Inch Cabinet:

Is the 19-inch cabinet groundedby a separate protectiveground conductor (green/yel-low)?

The 19-inch cabinet must be grounded by a sepa-rate protective ground conductor (green/yellow).DangerIf your personnel are not qualified to work on thelow-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a li-censed electrician to install the ground.

Does the 19-inch cabinet havea potential equalization bus atwhich the HiPath 3500 or Hi-Path 3300 can be grounded?

A potential equalization bus must be installed inthe 19-inch cabinet and connected to the groundwire.DangerIf your personnel are not qualified to work on thelow-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a li-censed electrician to install the ground.

If you answer “Yes” to both questions, the HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems may be

grounded as described below.

NO

YES

NO

YES




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


Grounding the System

Proceed as follows to ground the HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems (see also diagram be-low).

4.3.4.7 Installing the Boards

The systems are already equipped with the boards needed for the customer’s specific require-ments.

Step Activity

1. Connect the grounding cable to the potential equalization bar on the 19-inch cabi-net.

2. Connect the grounding cable to the system’s ground connection with the groundingscrew supplied (point A).

3. Attach the grounding cable (strain relief) to the system (point B) with a cable tie.

Figure 4-62 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Grounding

7DangerThe HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 19-inch housing to be wall-mounted must begrounded by a separate protective ground conductor (such as a potential equaliza-tion bar). Make sure that the ground conductor is securely installed and strain-re-lieved.Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock.

Back of HiPath 3500or HiPath 3300

A

BGrounding cable

Potential equalization bar



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.3.4.8 Connecting Cables and the Line Network

Connecting Cable for the Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR (if present) (not for U.S. andCanada)

To meet EMC requirements, the braided shields on the connecting cable must be connected tothe housing on the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 side and on the ECR side.

Attaching to the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 side

A clip and a tooth lock washer are enclosed with the ECR mounting set. Use these and thehousing cover mounting screw to attach the braided shield to the HiPath 3500 or HiPath3300 housing (as shown in Figure 4-63). The tooth lock washer must be mounted betweenthe painted surface of the cover and the clip.

Attaching to the ECR side (see page 8-6)

Line Network

The connecting cords to the peripherals can be connected directly to the relevant MW8 jackson the front panel of the 19-inch housing.

Figure 4-63 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Connecting cable to ECR

Housing cover mounting screw

Clip

Tooth lock washer

Housing cover




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm


4.3.4.9 Configuration Notes


7CautionFor safety, operate HiPath 3500 only with the housing front closed. Always use dum-my panels (C39165-A7027-B115) to close slots that are not equipped with boards.

Figure 4-64 HiPath 3500 - Slot Levels in the 19-Inch Housing

>

Restrictions for equipment with the TS2R board must be observed.

Slotlevels:

5 (options)

4 (CBRC)

3 (peripheral boards

2 (peripheral boards

1 (peripheral boardsSlot 4 Slot 5

Slot 8 Slot 9

Slot 6 Slot 7

Slots 1-3



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05





7

Caution

For safety, operate HiPath 3300 only with the housing front closed. Always use dum-my panels (C39165-A7027-B115) to close slots that are not equipped with boards.

Figure 4-65 HiPath 3300 - Slot Levels in the 19-Inch Housing

Slotlevels:

3 (options)

2 (CBRC)

1 (peripheral boards)Slot 4 Slot 5

Slots 1-3




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm



The HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems have the following static traffic capacities.


System Slots Static traffic capacity Total static traffic capacityof the system


2 / 3 (CBRC) 24 Erlangs

134 Erlangs

4 16 Erlangs

5 16 Erlangs

6 16 Erlangs

7 16 Erlangs

8 16 Erlangs9 30 Erlangs1

1 Use of a TS2R board results in a capacity of 30 Erlangs. A maximum of one TS2R per HiPath 3500 is possible, and theboard may only be installed in slot 7 or 9, thus resulting in 30 Erlangs for slot 7 or 9.


2 / 3 (CBRC) 24 Erlangs

56 Erlangs4 16 Erlangs

5 16 Erlangs



inst_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4.3.4.10 Connecting Workpoint Clients

For information, see Chapter 9.

4.3.4.11 Make Trunk Connections


STLS4R (S0 trunk connection)

TS2R (Not for U.S.), HiPath 3500 only (S2M trunk connection)

TLA4R

TMGL4R (for U.S. only)

TST1 (for U.S. Only) HiPath 3500 only

4.3.4.12 Performing a Visual Inspection

Before starting up the system, you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware, cablesand the power supply. The visual inspection must be performed while the system is disconnect-ed from the power supply.

7CautionBefore beginning work, make sure that the system is grounded and disconnectedfrom the power supply. For U.S. only: Use lockout/tagout (LOTO) proceduresObserve the measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices (see page 1-9).

Step Activity Materials Action

1. Compare the slots for theexisting boards with thecard map.

Card map Correct the board con-figuration and notifythe sales department.

2. Check the local line voltage. Digital multimeter

>After finishing the visual inspection, you can begin starting up the system as de-scribed in Section 5.3.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


inst_h3.fm




start_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000

Overview

5 Startup HiPath 3000

5.1 Overview

Chapter Contents


Topic

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Startup, page 5-2

HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 Startup, page 5-10



Startup HiPath 3000

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h3.fm

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Startup

5.2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Startup

This section contains information on how to start up the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 commu-nication systems.

5.2.1 Startup Procedure

7WarningOnly authorized service personnel should start up the system.

Table 5-1 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Startup Procedure

Step Startup Activity (Remarks)

1. Supplying the System With Power, page 5-3 (Plugging in the power supply unit -> starting system boot)

2. Carrying Out a System Reload, page 5-6

3. Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type, page 5-6

4. Entering the System Number (Not for U.S.), page 5-8

5. Conducting Customer-Specific Programming, page 5-9

6. Carrying Out a System Check, page 5-9



start_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000


5.2.2 Supplying the System With Power

Procedure

RUN LED HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700

The CBCPR has a RUN LED that indicates the system status.

Step Activity

1. Verify the voltage and plug in the power supply cable for each cabinet

2. Watch the RUN LED on the CBCPR to observe the individual steps of the systemboot (Table 5-2).

Table 5-2 RUN LED - LED Status MeaningRUN LED Meaning

Off No power

On Reset switch pressed briefly

Off Reset switch held down more than 5 seconds (LED is extinguishedto acknowledge that a reload has begun)

On System boot

Off

for 0.1 s

Load operation: APS in SDRAM, loadware, and card data

Flashing0.5 s on/0.5 s off

Normal operating state (zero load)1

1 The flashing rhythm depends on the load. The higher the system load the slower the flashing rhythm.


MMC removed or defective

>

The HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 is ready when the date “1. JAN 00” and the time“00.00” appear in the display on the system telephone.



Startup HiPath 3000

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h3.fm


5.2.2.1 Assigning Station Numbers

The first time the system is initialized, the system determines its capacity and stores the resultin the CDB (customer database). After each system reset, the system accesses this data and

generates a continuous numbering plan.If the system detects changes to the board configuration during startup, the following occurs:

If Then

Missing or defectiveboard

No action.

Different board type Board is not activated.

Underequipped boardvariant

Board is activated with fewer ports. A gap remains in the database.

Over-equipped boardvariant Board is activated with the number of ports stored in the database.The additional ports are not activated.

New board in empty slot Board was the last one installed in accordance with the place-ment sequence:All boards are activated and the numbering plan continues with-out a gap.

Board was inserted ahead of another board in the placementsequence:Board is activated and appended to the last board in the num-bering plan.



start_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000


Procedure: reinitialization

Proceed as follows if measures to expand the system configuration require reinitialization of thenumbering plan:

Step Activity Description

1. Disconnect the system from thepower supply. Check that the sys-tem is de-energized. Expand as re-quired.

2. Connect system to power supply A continuous numbering plan is generated (aswas the case when the system was first initial-ized).Notes:

Changes to the extension numbers resultin changes to the individual, extension-specific data.

Only those ports provided for in accor-dance with the maximum configurationare activated if the maximum line configu-ration is exceeded (too many trunkboards).

A mixture of subscriber line circuits andtrunk lines on one STMD8 can result ingaps in line numbering. This is becauseall STMD8 ports are initially activated astrunks and are only subsequently recon-figured.



Startup HiPath 3000

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h3.fm


5.2.3 Carrying Out a System Reload

After supplying the system with power, you must carry out a system reload. This can be per-formed during the initial system boot.

Procedure

Press and hold the reset switch on the CBCPR for at least 5 seconds (RUN LED goes out). Ifyou do not hold the reset switch for a full 5 seconds, the system may reset rather than reloading,or may not reload properly.

5.2.4 Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting thePassword Type

Carry out the country initialization on the system telephone with internal station number 100(port 01). This process loads the country-specific language and features and ensures that the

system meets the country’s conditions for approval.In Germany, no country adaptation is required after a reload because the system boots with theGerman country code by default.

Subsequently the selection of the password type is required.

Input Procedure

>Since the system software no longer provides all languages, some systems no long-er start up on the customary local language after the country code is entered. Youmust now load the local language prior to country initialization, using HiPath 3000Manager E (see information on mutilingual text output in the HiPath 3000/5000 Fea-ture Description).After carrying out the country initialization, but before loading the required local lan-guage, the displays come up in German.

Table 5-3 Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type

Step Entry Explanation

1. *95 Start system administration2. 31994 Default user name

3. 31994 Default password

4. XXXXX A new password is requested (max. 15 digits).

5. XXXXX Confirmation of the password entered in 4 is requested.

6. 29-5 Country initialization



start_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000


Entering the country code starts the system. Any data that has already been stored, such assystem speed-dialing destinations and classes of service, is deleted or reset to the default val-ue.

7. X Selection of password type is requested:1 = Variable password2 = Fixed password

8. XX Country code is requested (see Table A-3 on page A-25).The system subsequently boots up with the country-specificdefault information.

Notes: On step 4 and step 5: If a new password is issued, both steps are omitted when calling

the system again. On step 6: No country adjustment is necessary for Germany because the system starts

up with German codes. On step 7: When selecting the fixed password, the default password (31994) overwrites

the new password entered under step 4.

>After you enter a country code, the default data is guaranteed to load correctly onlyif the system software has been officially released for that country.





start_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000


5.2.6 Conducting Customer-Specific Programming

You can program the system using one of the following tools:

Manager T (programming telephone, see Appendix A) HiPath 3000 Manager E (PC tool)

Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.

5.2.7 Carrying Out a System Check

Checking the Telephones

Check the time and date display on each optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephone. If a displaydoes not appear, the telephone or the link may be defective. Check if either the terminal orthe link is defective. Replace the terminal or fix the link.

Carry out the telephone test described in Section 11.3.1.8 on all telephones.

Checking for Proper System Booting

Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning properly.

>Changes to the system (such as key programming) that were made using Hi-Path 3000 Manager E during an offline programming session will be lost whenthe database is loaded.When you program the system offline, the assignments of trunk and subscriberports depend on the order in which the boards are inserted. Usually, the boardsare inserted from the lowest slot to the highest.



Startup HiPath 3000

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h3.fm

HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 Startup

5.3 HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 Startup

This section contains information on how to start up the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500and HiPath 3300 communication systems.

5.3.1 Startup Procedure

7WarningOnly authorized service personnel should start up the system.

7CautionFor safety, operate HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 only with the housing front closed.Always use dummy panels (C39165-A7027-B115) to close slots that are notequipped with boards.

Table 5-5 Startup Procedure

Step Activity (Remarks)

1. Supplying the System With Power, page 5-11 (Starting system boot).




5. Conducting Customer-Specific Programming, page 5-17

6. Carrying Out a System Check, page 5-17



start_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000


5.3.2 Supplying the System With Power

Procedure

Run-LED HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300

The central board has a RUN LED that indicates the system status.

Step Activity

1. Plugging in the power supply unit.

2. Watch the RUN LED on the CBCPR to observe the individual steps of the systemboot (Table 5-6).

Table 5-6 RUN LED - LED Status MeaningRUN LED Meaning

Off No power

On Reset switch pressed briefly

Off Reset switch held down more than 5 seconds (LED is extinguishedto acknowledge that a reload has begun)

On System boot

Off

for 0.1 s

Load operation: APS in SDRAM, loadware, and card data


Normal operating state (zero load)1

1 The flashing rhythm depends on the load. The higher the system load the slower the flashing rhythm.



>

The system is ready when the date “1. JAN 00” and the time “00.00” appear in thedisplay on the system telephone.



Startup HiPath 3000

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h3.fm


5.3.2.1 Assigning Station Numbers

The first time the system is initialized, the system determines its capacity and stores the resultin the CDB (customer database). After each system reset, the system accesses this data and

generates a continuous numbering plan.If the system detects changes to the board configuration during startup, the following occurs:

If Then

Missing or defectiveboard

No action.

Different board type Board is not activated.

Underequipped boardvariant

Board is activated with fewer ports. A gap remains in the database.

Over-equipped boardvariant Board is activated with the number of ports stored in the database.The additional ports are not activated.

New board in emptyslot

Board was the last one installed in accordance with the place-ment sequence:All boards are activated and the numbering plan continues with-out a gap.

Board was inserted ahead of another board in the placement se-quence:Board is activated and appended to the last board in the number-ing plan.



start_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000


Procedure: reinitialization

Proceed as follows if measures to expand the system configuration require reinitialization of thenumbering plan:

Step Activity Description

1. Disconnect the systemfrom the power supply.Check that the system isde-energized. Expand asrequired.

2. Connect system to powersupply

A continuous numbering plan is generated (as was thecase when the system was first initialized).Notes:

Changes to the extension numbers result in chang-es to the individual, extension-specific data. Only those ports provided for in accordance with

the maximum configuration are activated if the max-imum line configuration is exceeded (too manytrunk boards).

A mixture of subscriber line circuits and trunk lineson one S0 board can result in gaps in line number-ing. This is because all board ports are initially acti-vated as trunks and are only subsequently reconfig-ured.

S0 station: If stations are connected to an S0 board(S0 bus), their station numbers result from the MSNprogrammed in the telephone, regardless of theconnection.If no MSN is programmed on a telephone or if noMSN can be programmed, the system uses a de-fault MSN. The default MSN can be administeredby S0 port (HiPath 3000 Manager E).

The system does not assign the MSN until the S0 port is configured on the “Euro-Bus”; the MSN can

be read out via administration.



Startup HiPath 3000

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h3.fm


5.3.3 Carrying Out a System Reload

After supplying the system with power, you must carry out a system reload. This can be per-formed during the initial system boot.

Procedure

Press and hold the reset switch on the central board for at least 5 seconds.If you do not hold the reset switch for a full 5 seconds, the system may reset rather than reload-ing, or may not reload properly.

5.3.4 Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting thePassword Type

Carry out the country initialization on the system telephone with the internal station number 100 (HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500) or 11 for (HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300) (port 01). This process

loads the country-specific language and features and ensures that the system meets the coun-try’s conditions for approval.In Germany, no country initialization is required following a reload because the system bootswith the German country code by default.

Subsequently the selection of the password type is required.

Input Procedure

>Since the system software no longer provides all languages, some systems no long-er start up on the customary local language after the country code is entered. Youmust now load the local language prior to country initialization, using HiPath 3000Manager E (see information on mutilingual text output in the HiPath 3000/5000 Fea-ture Description).After carrying out the country initialization, but before loading the required local lan-guage, the displays come up in German.


Step Entry Explanation1. *95 Start system administration

2. 31994 Default user name

3. 31994 Default password






start_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000


Note

Entering the country code initiates a hard reset. Any data that has already been stored, suchas system speed-dialing destinations and classes of service, is deleted or reset to its defaultvalue.


8. XX Country code is requested (see Table A-3 on page A-25).The system subsequently boots up with the country-specificdefault information.

Notes: On step 4 and step 5: If a new password is issued, both steps are omitted when calling




>After you enter a country code, the default data is guaranteed to load correctly only

if the system software has been officially released for that country.HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 have not been introducedin some of the countries listed in Table A-3. The correct loading of the default datais not guaranteed for those countries.





Startup HiPath 3000

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h3.fm


5.3.5 Entering the System Number (Not for U.S.)

Introduction

Corresponding to the configuration, the system station number must be entered (without theDID number or attendant code) on the system telephone that is assigned 100 as its internalstation number for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 and 11 in the case of HiPath 3350 and HiPath3300.

The system station number is determined by the network or service provider.

Depending on configuration, system station numbers should not be entered for point-to-multipoint operation or for tie trunks to HiPath 4000, for example.

Example

Port number: 98008

National number: 2302 (prefix without 0)

International number: 49 (country code)

Station number type: International

Input Procedure

Table 5-8 Entering the system number

Step Input Description

1. *95 System administration code

2. Service User name (identification)

3. XXXXX Enter password

4. Watch the display.Scroll until “ISDN parameters” and “System stn. number”appear.Confirm your selection.Or:Expert mode: Enter the code 20 2 1 to 4.

5. Follow the user prompting on the display.



start_h3.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000


5.3.6 Conducting Customer-Specific Programming

You can program the system using one of the following tools:

Manager T (programming telephone, refer to Appendix A) HiPath 3000 Manager E (PC tool)

Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.

5.3.7 Carrying Out a System Check

Checking the Telephones

Check the time and date display on each optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephone. If a displaydoes not appear, the telephone or the link may be defective. Check if either the terminal orthe link is defective. Replace the terminal or fix the link.

Carry out the telephone test described in Section 11.3.1.8 on all telephones.

Checking for Proper System Booting

Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning properly.

>Changes to the system (such as key programming) made using HiPath 3000Manager E during an offline programming session will be lost when the data-base is loaded.When you program the system offline, the assignments of trunk and subscriberports depend on the order in which the boards are inserted. Usually, the boardsare inserted from the lowest slot to the highest.



Startup HiPath 3000

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h3.fm




start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 RSM

Overview

6 Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 RSM

6.1 Overview

Chapter Contents


Topic

Introduction, page 6-3

Prerequisites for the installation, page 6-5

Starting Up HiPath 5000 RSM, page 6-7

Preparing the Installation, page 6-7 Integrating the HiPath 5000 RSM server in the LAN, page 6-7

Installing HiPath 5000 RSM Components, page 6-8

Installing the TAPI Service Provider, page 6-24

Licensing, page 6-33

Windows Settings, page 6-44

Administering HiPath 5000 RSM, page 6-46

HiPath Server Administration, page 6-46

Starting, Logging in, Ending HiPath Server Administration, page 6-47 Error and Event Notification Procedures, page 6-48

User Administration, page 6-49

Administering General Settings, page 6-55

PCM Management, page 6-70

GetAccount, page 6-77

HiPath Trace Monitor, page 6-86

General, page 6-86

Starting and Ending the Trace Monitor, page 6-87 Trace Monitor Screen Layout, page 6-88

Print Setup for the Trace Monitor, page 6-90

General Functions, page 6-91

Exporting Trace Windows, page 6-93




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm

Overview

Saving and Restoring the Current System Configuration, page 6-94

Restoring Data for PCM, page 6-94

Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000 RSM, page 6-96

Topic



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Introduction

6.2 Introduction

HiPath 5000 RSM

consists of

a central administration unit (Real-Time Services Manager RSM) and

a gateway (HiPath 3000).

Among others, this combination supports

the telecommunication features of a line-switched system.

up to 500 stations per node in an IP network consisting of up to 64 nodes and thus a totalconfiguration with up to 2000 stations.

the formation of a “single system image” that allows the central administration of all asso-ciated nodes.

the use of central applications by all stations in the IP network.

the use of trunks and tie trunks (interfaces and protocols).

increased security and reliability by supporting the H.235 security protocol and Quality ofService QoS (DiffServ, 802.1D).

Figure 6-1 HiPath 5000 RSM

PSTN(analog or


HiPath 5000 RSM

optiClient Attendant optiClient 130

AP 1100

optiPoint 400standard 3.0

IP

HiPath 3000

TDM




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm

Introduction

Media Streaming (not for U.S.)

Media Streaming provides an IP-based solution for recorded announcement, voicemail and faxmessaging services. By implementing the HG1500 LAN board in the HiPath 3000 V4.0, Media

Streaming is possible without BRI station and analog interface boards.The Media Extension Bridge (MEB) Service Provider, based on the Microsoft TAPI © standardserves as the interface between the application and the HG1500 board. This media streaminginterface allows up to 10 channels for FAX in Unified Messaging and for recorded announce-ments in HPCO. Resources can be freely divided between FAX mode and recorded announce-ments.

GetAccount

The call data records generated during HiPath 3000/5000 operation can be copied to a text filefor further processing using the GetAccount program.

>The WinAccount software for evaluating call data records is no longer used in HiPath3000/5000 V4.0.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Prerequisites for the installation

6.3 Prerequisites for the installation

To use HiPath 5000 RSM, the following minimum requirements must be met:

Hardware / Software

Licenses

Licenses are required for additional trunks and CTI features in conjunction with theHG1500 boards. Information on licensing can be found in Section 6.4.5.

RAM Requirements of the HiPath 5000 RSM Server

The following diagram can be used to determine the required RAM expansion (RAM space) ofthe HiPath 5000 RSM server depending on:

the number of nodes (HiPath 3000 systems) in the HiPath 3000/5000 network and

the applications installed on the server.

Furthermore, an additional RAM space must be considered for the TAPI service provider:154 KB per monitored line. For example, 154 MB are required for 1000 lines.

Table 6-1 HW/SW minimum requirements for HiPath 5000 RSM

Component Description

PC Intel Pentium III with 1000 MHz, PS/2 mouse and keyboard

RAM requirements: see page 6-5

Hard disk 9 GB hard disk space needed (two partitions)

Drives 3.5’’ floppy disk drive

CD-ROM drive

Network card e. g. Etherlink III/16 PCI

Modem 28800 Bd (Hayes compatible) or ISDN card

Monitor 17" color monitor with 800x600 resolution

Operating system Windows 2000 Server license with SP 2; Internet InformationServer

Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 SP2 or later

Backup medium(optional)

Medium and software (e.g. streamer or CD RW drive)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm

Prerequisites for the installation

Figure 6-2 RAM Space of the HiPath 5000 RSM server

recommended RAM space

HiPath 5000 RSM (base package)

HiPath 5000 RSM + HiPath FM

HiPath 5000 RSM + HPCO

HiPath 5000 RSM + HiPath FM + HPCO

HiPath 5000 RSM + HPCO + Media Streaming (not for U.S.)

HiPath 5000 RSM + HiPath FM + HPCO + Media Streaming (not forU.S.)

minimum RAM space for

MByte

Number of nodes in the HiPath 3000/5000 network

Max. 16 nodes when using HPCO

Note: The HiPath 5000 RSM (base package) RAM expansion provides for an additionalRAM requirement of 20 monitored lines per node for the TAPI service provider.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Starting Up HiPath 5000 RSM

6.4 Starting Up HiPath 5000 RSM

6.4.1 Preparing the Installation

To ensure successful installation, you should check the points listed in the table below before installing the HiPath 5000 RSM software.

6.4.2 Integrating the HiPath 5000 RSM server in the LAN

You must consult the LAN administrator before making the settings referred to below. Ideally,the LAN administrator should be involved in the startup procedure, or the required data shouldbe made available in writing.

The settings are made under Control Panel - Network - Protocols.

Adapt the IP address.

Adapt the subnet mask, gateway.

Adapt the DNS entries, WINS entries.

Once the data has been customized, a reboot is required.

Test the LAN connection with a “ping” to another computer

Table 6-2 HiPath 5000 RSM - Preparing the Installation


Hard disk partitioning The server PC hard disk should be divided into two NTFS par-titions. The main partition C should have a capacity of at least4 GB and should be reserved for the operating system and theHiPath 5000 RSM software.

For safety reasons, partitioning with the format FAT 16/32 is notpermitted.

Hardware Make sure that no unnecessary hardware is connected to theserver PC; sound boards may need to be removed.

Access privileges To install HiPath 5000 RSM, you must log onto Windows 2000Server with administrator rights or, if necessary, log on as the2000 Server domain administrator.

LAN integration Check to ensure that the server PC has been correctly integrat-ed in the customer LAN.

Miscellaneous All applications running in the background must be closed priorto software installation.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


Integrate the HiPath 5000 RSM in the Windows domain under Control Panel - Network -Identification (a domain administrator account is required here!)

6.4.3 Installing HiPath 5000 RSM Components

6.4.3.1 Installation Routine – Overview

Please refer to the following description to familiarize yourself with the general installation rou-tine before beginning the actual installation.

Step 1. Installing the HiPath 5000 RSM system

The installation program enables both linear installation of a HiPath 5000 RSM system includ-ing middleware and components for system administration/analysis and the post installation of

individual software components and tools. The table below describes the components to be in-stalled.

The HiPath 5000 RSM server can be installed in Custom or Complete mode. Specific compo-nents can be excluded from setup in Custom mode.

Information concerning a Complete setup can be found on page 6-11.

Information concerning a Custom setup can be found on page 6-12.

Information on how to perform an update can be found in Section 6.4.3.6.

The following software components are installed in a typical initial installation process:

Component Server PC Client PC

TAPI Service Provider including CMD, CCMC and CSP(basic package component), telephony interface betweenthe PABX and the applications.

Yes –

Administration Yes No

GetAccount - service that provides a text file containing Hi-Path 3000 call data records.

Yes No

Personal Call Manager (basic package component),

browser-based application for setting up and administeringpersonal call forwarding operations

Yes, optional Network share

Trace Monitor (basic package component), analysis tool Yes, optional Yes

MSDE SQL database server including service pack (basicpackage component)

Yes No



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Step 2: Licensing

External CTI features and additional IP trunks are licensed via the TAPI 170 service providerand/or the MEB service provider (not for U.S.). The HiPath 5000 RSM server must also be li-

censed.

For information on the licensing of individual features and trunks, see Section 6.4.5.

General installation sequence (server PC)

1. Start the installation after logging in as administrator,

2. HiPath 5000 RSM CD 1 and basic setup procedure,

Installation of all server applications including TAPI 170 SP and MSDE including ServicePack 1

3. Verifying shared resources,

4. Setting system parameters,

5. Sharing of directories for client access,

6. Basic Configuration of HiPath 5000 RSM server

Feature Server as a basic package component; databaseserver which controls HiPath 3000/5000 application ac-

cess to the gateway

Yes No

HiPath 3000 Manager C (Client-Setup) Yes, optional No

HiPath 3000 Manager E, HiPath 3000 Manager I Yes No

Update which brings all components of the basic packageup-to-date while leaving all existing data untouched

– –

Component Server PC Client PC




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.4.3.2 Starting the Installation

1. Insert the installation CD.

The installation program is started via the autorun function. Alternatively you can initiateSetup via Windows Explorer under

<CD-ROM drive letter>:\setup.exe.

2. Select the language you require for the Setup browser. German and English versions arecurrently available.

The Setup browser starts running. You can install the HiPath 3000 Manager C customeradministration tool via the Install Client Software entry.

The Important Information entry contains the latest installation descriptions and notes.

3. Click Install/Update Server to install the HiPath 5000 RSM server.

6.4.3.2.1 Installing the HiPath 5000 RSM Server

1. Click the entry Install server components for GetAccount and Personal Call Manager.

The Setup Wizard starts running.

2. Click Next and confirm the license agreements in the subsequent dialog. Then click Next.

3. Select a language version for the HiPath 5000 RSM applications.

Language selection mainly applies to the Personal Call Manager client application; the ad-ministration user interface is currently available in German and English.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4. Then click Next.

The Setup Type mask appears.

You can choose between a Complete setup and Custom setup in the Setup Type mask.

Complete Setup

If the Complete option is selected, all available program features and components are installedand default path information is adopted.

1. Click Install.

The installation procedure starts.

2. Confirm these messages with OK.

>It takes approx. 15 minutes to install the database engine for the first time.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


Custom Setup

By selecting Custom setup, you can choose which HiPath 5000 RSM components or featuresare to be installed.

Press the mask’s Help button for explanatory information on the various setup options.

The Space function provides an overview of the drives available on the server PC and their ca-pacity. Drives which do not have enough disk space are highlighted.

1. Select the relevant components and features.

2. Click Next followed by Install.

This activates the installation process with the settings you made. The HiPath TAPI 170Service Provider and the CCMC, CMD and CSP components are installed at a later stageof setup.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.3.2.2 Installing the TAPI Service Provider

Next, the installation of the HiPath TAPI 170 Service Provider and the other components namedin the following takes place.

For further information, please refer to the Online Help for the TAPI 170 Service Provider.

Installing the CCMC

The CCMC is installed without any further user interaction. To configure it, open the CCMC in

the Control Panel and use the Online Help.

Installing the CMD

The CMD is installed without any further user interaction. To configure it, open the CMD in theControl Panel and use the Online Help.

Installing the CSTA Service Provider (CSP)

The CSP is installed without any further user interaction. To configure it, open the CMD in theControl Panel and use the Online Help.

The database server starts after the copy operation. The backup directory is then specified.

>If HiPath ProCenter Office is to be installed, press Yes to confirm the correspondingmessage which asks you to activate the ACD functionality.To configure HPCO, open Telephone and Modem Options in the Control Panel(after basic server configuration).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.4.3.2.3 Creating Backup Directories and Jobs

The backup directory for automatic data backup is created automatically. The services forGetAccount and PCM are then started.

1. Adopt the default settings where applicable. This directory is created on initial installation.

2. Backup jobs are saved on the SQL server after confirmation with OK.

Press Browse... to select a different backup directory from the default directory.

HiPath 5000 RSM installation is now complete and you are prompted to restart the PC.

6.4.3.3 Installing Individual Components

HiPath TAPI 170, HiPath TAPI for Media Streaming (not for U.S.), the HiPath 5000 RSM serverand HiPath 3000 Manager E (incl. deployment tool) and HiPath 3000 Manager I administrationtools can be individually installed. The procedures for installing HiPath TAPI 170 separately aredescribed in Section 6.4.4.

1. Display Setup and click Install/Update Server.

2. Click the entry Installation of Individual Components.

3. Choose the relevant component.Now restart the server.

>The SQL Server Agent must be active for performing backup jobs. The start typemust be set to automatic for the service. This is automatically configured during thesetup operation.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.3.4 Basic Configuration of HiPath 5000 RSM Server

Prerequisite for adding other nodes (HiPath 3000) to a HiPath 3000/5000 network is the suc-cessful installation (see Chapter 4, Installation HiPath 3000) and startup (see Chapter 5,

Startup HiPath 3000) of these systems (nodes).

6.4.3.4.1 Importing Basic Server Configuration

1. Activate HiPath 3000 Manager E.

2. Activate Transfer HiPath 5000 RSM Server via the File - HiPath 5000 RSM - Transfer - Hi-

Path 5000 RSM Server menu or via the appropriate button in the toolbar.3. Specify the server you have just installed via the Find button and load the basic configura-

tion by clicking the Server -> Manager button.

4. Click OK.

>The menu item File - HiPath 5000 RSM - New - HiPath 5000 RSM Server isused only to create a CDB memory generated offline .




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.4.3.4.2 Adding Individual Nodes

1. To add nodes, activate HiPath 3000 in the File - HiPath 5000 RSM - New menu. The fol-lowing window is displayed:

2. Select load from system and load the CDB by entering the IP address from the HiPath3000.

Then click Add Node in the next window.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




3. Finally, rewrite the HiPath 3000 Manager E data to the HiPath 5000 RSM server and resetthe HG1500 boards.

> Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for additional information about the pro-cedure.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.4.3.5 Checking Installation

6.4.3.5.1 Checking Web Sharing for PCM Directory

Proceed as described below to perform a check or manually enable web sharing. Basically, websharing is automatically enabled for of the PCM folder during the installation process.

1. Right-click the _scriptlibrary folder underC:\inetpub\wwwroot\hmcapcm in Windows Explorer.

2. Select Properties in the context menu; and then select the Web Sharing tab.

3. The following settings must be configured:

Area Setting

Share on Default Web SiteOption Share this folder

Aliases _ScriptLibrary



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.3.5.2 Checking or Manually Configuring DCOM Component Properties

The configuration steps described below are performed automatically during the installationprocess and are only described here for checking purposes.

1. To open the DCOM configuration properties, click Start, Run, enter dcomcnfg as the inputparameter and then click OK.

The Distributed COM Configuration Properties mask appears.

2. Check the default under Default Access Permissions / Edit Default... in the Default Se-curity tab to see whether the user Everyone is configured with Allow Access privileges.

3. Check the default under Default Launch Permissions / Edit Default... to see whether theuser Everyone is configured with Allow Launch privileges.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


4. Check the following settings in the Default Properties tab (see mask below):

5. Applications tab: select the PCMMgr.clsMgr application and activate Properties. Adoptthe settings shown in the following masks for Location, Security and Identity.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




"Location" tab

"Security" tab




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


"Identity" tab

6. The computer must be rebooted after changing the DCOM settings.

6.4.3.5.3 Checking services1. Select Start, Settings, Control Panel, Administrative Tools to open the Services man-

agement console.

The following services must be started:

Service

Call Accounting

PCM Telephony Service

MSSQL Server

SQL Server Agent

Feature Server Provider

Telephony (TAPI)



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.3.6 Updating HiPath 5000 RSM Components

In general, all basic package components are brought up-to-date in the course of an update.Depending on the version installed, an update may uninstall the component completely and

then re-install it. Separate updates are available for server and client applications.Please read the latest information in the file readme.rtf on the installation CD (CD1) before up-dating the software components installed.

1. Insert installation CD (CD1).

The installation program is started via the autorun function. Alternatively, you can start thesetup from Windows Explorer by selectingCD-ROM drive letter\setup.exe.

2. Select the language you require for the Setup browser.

3. Click Install/Update Server; then click Server Update.

4. Follow the on-screen user prompts.

Restart the PC once the update procedure is complete.

>The WinAccount software for evaluating call data records is no longer used in HiPath3000/5000 V4.0.Before starting an update call data records must be evaluated by WinAccount, be-cause WinAccount is uninstalled with an update.Refer to the WinAccount user manual for information about the procedure

>All active applications must be closed down before an update. Close the databaseserver via the Task Manager and use the Services Control Manager to exit the te-lephony services and Feature Server.

7The TAPI Service Provider configuration (configuration and lines) (refer to the TAPI170 Service Provider Help) and the CDB associated with the connected systems (re-fer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help) should be saved for security reasons.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.4.4 Installing the TAPI Service Provider

6.4.4.1 Installing the HiPath TAPI 170 Service Provider

The numbers for extensions, trunks and switching ports can be set up directly after installationof the TAPI service provider. Please refer to the Installation and Administration Manual HiPathTAPI 170 for further information on using and configuring the TAPI service provider.

1. Insert the installation CD and run Setup.

2. Choose the language version for the installation browser and then click Install/UpdateServer.

3. Click the entry Installation of individual components and then click HiPath TAPI 170.

The relevant files are copied.

Alternatively, you can start the TSP manually under Control Panel - Telephone and Mo-dem Functions, tab Advanced Options under HiPath TAPI 120/ 170 2.2 SP.

4. Choose the relevant settings as specified in the table below.

No further settings are required at this stage. The IP address is copied from the server PCautomatically.

5. Confirm the subsequent system message to enable the ACD service if the Call Center ap-plication HPCO is connected.

The TAPI service provider is now installed. For further information, please refer to the On-line Help for the TAPI 170 Service Provider.

>This section describes the separate installation of the TAPI Service Provider. During

complete server installation, the TAPI 170 service provider is automatically installedmaking a separate installation unnecessary. On the other hand, the use of MediaStreaming 1.0 (not for U.S.) means that the MEB service provider (not for U.S.) mustbe separately installed.

Parameter Description

System Select HiPath 5000 or HiPath 3000

CSTA link For connection to a HG1500 board, you must choose TCP/IP here andenter the IP address of the HG1500 board in the relevant input fields.The IP port number for CSTA is set to 7001 by default and does not needto be changed



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.4.2 Connecting Media Streaming (Not for U.S.)

6.4.4.2.1 Installing the MEB Service Provider (Not for U.S.)

To enable IP-based routing of voice mail, fax and recorded announcements over the LAN net-work (Media Streaming), the relevant TAPI driver, namely the MEB Service Provider, must beinstalled.

1. Insert the Installation CD and run Setup.

2. Click the entry Installation of individual components, and then HiPath TAPI driver forMedia Streaming.

The installation procedure starts. Follow the instructions on the screen and accept the de-fault settings for the installation directory and program group. The following programs arealso installed during installation of the MEB:

3. Click on Finish to complete the installation.

Program Description

DebugSpy Trace tool for monitoring MEB actions.

AnsweringMachine Answering machine that can be used for test purposes (answeringand playing) after MEB configuration. The following test optionsare offered: Testing the trunks for correct installation. Dialing of a number configured by the MEB Service Provider

for digit analysis (test text is also stored as part of the instal-lation).

Note:Stop HLB-Fax-APL and IP-APL before you use the answering ma-chine. Both services must be restarted for continued operation ofthe system.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.4.4.2.2 Configuring the MEB Service Provider (Not for U.S.)

The Media Extension Bridge Service Provider implements IP-based services such as voicemail, fax and recorded announcements (Media Streaming) within the HiPath 3000/5000 sys-

tem, working either in a networked system or as a standalone solution. At the same time, it al-lows the HiPath communication server to be networked with the PABX via TCP/IP. In additionto the basic functions as a service provider and interface, settings can also be made in relationto digit analysis, fax routing and the licensing of extra lines (trunks). Parallel mode is also avail-able with TAPI 3rd Party for ISDN trunks.

Calling the MEB Service Provider

1. Open the Windows Control Panel with Start / Settings.

2. Click on the Telephone and Modem Options icon and then on the Extended Options tab.

3. Double-click on the Media Extension Bridge Service Provider entry in the selection win-dow.

Starting/ending the MEB Service Provider

1. Open the Service Manager window under Start - Settings - Control Panel - Services.

2. Right click on the MEB Service Provider entry and select the relevant function to start/ close the service from the context menu.

>After new parameters, call lists, lines, etc. have been configured, the MEB ServiceProvider, and then the IP-APL, must be restarted in the PCO/NBCS monitor.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Settings for Digit Analysis

The digit analysis for forwarding the call to the IP-APL can be carried out by the MEB serviceby means of the station number length or a stored station number list, or a combination of both

procedures; in the latter case one condition (procedure) must be met. The customer’s number-ing plan must be taken into account in both procedures.

Function Description

Procedure Station number length: if this option is set, digit analysis takes place on thebasis of the station number length entered here; a call is redirected if thelength of the station number of the call ID matches the station number lengthspecified here; all extension ranges of the IP-APL must be of the same lengthas configured here; reduced to a common denominator, this means for exam-ple:Station number length = 5, Tie code (=50) + DID number (= 101)




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


Procedure Station number list: if this option is set, digit analysis is performed using thenumbers of the station number list entered here.

The Add, Modify and Delete buttons allow you to enter new station numbersor to modify or delete existing ones. To delete several station numbers atonce, you can use the mouse and/or keyboard to select several entries.When entering new station numbers, please note that only numbers of thesame length can be entered for From - To, e.g. 5010 - 5025; but not 510 -5105. Overlapping within a station number band is checked and interceptedby the service provider.Make sure that the tie line access codes entered in HiPath 3000 Manager Imatch the numbers entered in the MEB SP.Combination of both proceduresThe two digit analysis procedures can also be combined: If the incoming sta-tion number has not yet reached the station number length, the entries in thestation number list are checked up to the corresponding entry and forwardedto the IP-APL.




start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Making the Fax Settings

You can set non-standard fax routing and logging settings in the Fax Settings tab.

The dialog shown and the entries described indicate the default settings/values after the MEBService Provider has been installed.

> If the path settings for incoming and outgoing fax documents have been changed,then the same changes must also be made in the HLB FAX-APL.


Incoming faxes Folder: Destination folder for incoming fax documents; ev-ery fax received is recorded in the inbox.ini file (see the fol-lowing table); changes to the path details of the destination

folder are automatically also applied to the inbox.ini log file.Outgoing faxes Folder: Folder for the fax documents to be sent; Outgoingfaxes are documented in the outbox.ini file (see the tablebelow).Polling interval: Time frame in seconds within which theMEB Service Provider searches for fax documents to besent




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


Description of the .ini and protocol files

General settings Log file for errorsYou can define the path and folder for the error log file; this

file contains information about errors that have occurredwhile documents were being sent or received.Max no. faxes/foldersHere you can define the maximum number of fax documentsthat can be stored per folder (to be sent and received). Whenthe maximum number of fax documents is reached, the doc-uments are deleted according to the "last in/last out" princi-ple. The value "0" means that there is no limit to the numberof incoming and outgoing faxes.Max. no. entries/log fileThe value entered here defines the maximum number of en-tries for all error log files (.ini files)

File name/Folder Contents Description

inbox.iniC:\MEB\FAXin

[2004200108472415151515.sff]callingPartyNumber=4050calledPartyNumber=7411Date=28.04.2001

Time=08:47:24

File name of received fax

Date of receipt

Time of connectionoutbox.ini/ C:\MEB\FAXout

[FaxFile.sff]callingPartyNumber=4050calledPartyNumber=4711Date=17.04.2001Time=16:42:50MyCookie=239475MyOtherInfo=18927364

File name of fax to be sent

Date sentTime of sendinggeneric system information

sent.ini/ C:\MEB\FAXSent

[FaxFile.sff]callingPartyNumber=4050

calledPartyNumber=4711Date=17.04.2001Time=16:42:50MyCookie=239475MyOtherInfo=18927364Status=S_OK

File name of sent fax

Date sentTime of sendinggeneric system information

OK=sentStatus=S_false = error




start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Licensing Lines

Please refer to Section 6.4.5.3 for information on how to license lines.

error.ini/ C:\MEB\Error

[FaxFile.sff]callingPartyNumber=1515

calledPartyNumber=2828Date=07.05.2001Time=09:59:04Error=11

see sent.ini

see sent.ini

Error code

File name/Folder Contents Description




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


Configuring an IP Address for the HiPath 3000

The IP address to be entered here specifies the link to the HiPath 3000 both in a standalonesystem and in a networked system. The IP address of the HiPath 3000 system operating as a

gateway to the public network should be used in a HiPath 3000/5000 network.


IP address of an HG1500 innetwork

Enter the IP address of the HG1500 board here in order toestablish a connection to the HiPath 3000; you can read outthe corresponding IP address in the HiPath 3000 Manager Eunder Network-wide Data in the Media Attachment tab.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.5 Licensing

Introduction

The release of individual features and additional lines (trunks) requires the entry of the corre-sponding license code. This license code is generated by using a specific MAC ID on a licenseserver and is retrieved via the Internet.

Licensed components in HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 are, for example

HiPath 5000 RSM

TAPI Service Provider (TSP)

Media Streaming

CSTA Message Dispatcher (CMD)

CSTA Service Provider (CSP)

HG1500 (B channels and users)

The sections below describe the steps to be carried out in order to identify the MAC ID and gen-erate the licenses.

Not for U.S.: If HiPath 3000/5000 is used with Media Streaming, the licensing of additionaltrunks is done over the MEB TAPI.

6.4.5.1 HiPath 5000 RSM Licensing

HiPath 5000 RSM is an MS Windows service. The license necessary for this service can beobtained from the central license server http://cls.icn.siemens.de/ .

MAC ID of the HiPath 3000 control board

Each licensed HiPath 5000 RSM is associated with at least one HiPath 3000 system. Duringproduction, the HiPath 3000 control boards are assigned a board-specific number with aMAC ID that is unique worldwide. To guarantee unique licensing, the license is linked to theMAC ID of the HiPath 3000 control boards associated with the HiPath 5000 RSM. In a networkcomprising a number of HiPath 3000s and a HiPath 5000 RSM, this is the MAC ID of the HiPath

3000 control board with the lowest node number (node ID).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


Procedure

1. To access the Internet page, enter the URL http://cls.icn.siemens.de/ .This page is available in both German and English.

2. Select the entry HiPath 5000 RSM.

3. To log on, enter the ID and password.

If these data are not known, contact your responsible service support.

The page for generating a license for the first time is displayed. In order to generate a li-cense for the first time, you must enter the following details:

– SD order number– Packing slip number (without the leading characters "CD")

– MAC ID of the HiPath 3000 control board (see page 6-33)

4. Now click Search.Based on the provided information, the HiPath 5000 RSM configuration is uniquely identi-fied and the relevant license file will be supplied in encrypted format.

>Prior to adding the licensing for activation in the HiPath 5000 RSM, it is necessary to

configure at least the node with the lowest node number (node ID) for the HiPath5000 RSM environment (i. e. node number and HiPath 5000 RSM IP address). TheKDS (database) of this node must be copied to the KDS directory on the HiPath 5000RSM server (default path = c:\program files\siemens\hipath\hipath

5000rsm feature server\kds). The five-day license activation timer startswhen the KDS is copied to the HiPath 5000 RSM server.Once the node is added and can be reached via directed IP communications, theserver licensing may be added and the cyclical checking process will allow success-ful integration and activation of the file, and end the five-day countdown period of thelicense activation timer.

>The SD order number and packing slip number can be found on the packing slip.The packing slip is contained inside the packaging and is not to be confused withother documents such as the order verification slip, for example.If your system was delivered in several batches, then you should use the numberof the delivery note on the base package.

>In addition to the HiPath 5000 RSM license file, you will also be offered the Hi-Path Desktop license here. HiPath Desktop is a tool that you can use to integrateHiPath Fault Management in web-based environments. See the HiPath DesktopUser Guide for information about licenses.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




5. Load the license file (*.lic) into the assigned HiPath 5000 RSM server directory (defaultpath = c:\program files\siemens\hipath\hipath 5000rsm feature serv-

er\kds).

For reasons of safety a copy of the licence file (e. g. on a floppy disk) should be carried outin every case.

6. Restart the HiPath 5000 RSM service.

Once operation is started, the HiPath 5000 RSM server periodically checks the license file.The server also checks the MAC ID linked to the license. A five-day (max.) timer starts if aconnection cannot be set up to this HiPath 3000 system. The timer is reset if a connectionto the HiPath 3000 system is successfully set up within this time. If the time runs out beforea connection is set up, an error message is generated and the HiPath 5000 RSM server istaken out of service.

>The node numbers of the networked systems in a HiPath 3000/5000 network mustnot be modified once the network has been started up. Otherwise, the license of theHiPath 5000 RSM server may be invalid if the lowest node number is assigned toanother system (another MAC ID).If a defect occurs in the HiPath 3000 control boards involved in licensing, a new li-cense file must be requested. The license reference number that was supplied whenthe original license file was received is necessary for this.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


Figure 6-3 HiPath 5000 RSM Server Licensing Routine

PSTN(analog or

digitaltelecommunica-

tion network)

HiPath 5000 RSMserver

IP

HiPath 3000

TDM

WWW

License serverhttp://

cls.icn.sie-

mens.de/

1. License file is requested by specify-

ing MAC ID, order no. and deliverynote no.

2. License file (*.lic) and license refer-ence no. are downloaded.

3. License file (*.lic) saved on the HiPath 5000 RSM server

4. MAC IDchecked



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.5.2 TAPI Service Provider Licensing

6.4.5.2.1 Determining the MAC ID

The MAC ID is a board-specific number that is unique worldwide. This MAC ID is used as acode for the encryption of different licenses and is retrieved from the first HG1500 board foundin the HiPath 3000/5000 network. This ensures that the software can only be used on the cor-responding hardware.

The MAC ID of the HG1500 in the slot with the lowest number is used for license code assign-ment.In the case of a network with more than one HiPath 3000 system, the HiPath 3000 with the low-est node ID is used for defining the MAC ID.

In order to guarantee access for HiPath 5000 RSM, you have to set the access flag on the

HG1500 board that is being used for licensing (see Help for HiPath 3000 Manager E).The license is not validated until the license key is entered during installation. At this stage, theTAPI Service Provider uses the HiPath 5000 RSM server to determine whether or not the keyentered is valid. The validity check is run again internally in combination with the MAC ID thatwas needed to generate the license key.

Procedure

>

Requirements for Identifying the MAC IDThe HiPath 3000/5000 network (HiPath 3000 systems, HiPath 5000 RSM) must becorrectly installed and configured and in operation, because only then can theMAC ID be read out. The TAPI Service Provider must also be installed and active.The MAC ID is also specified on a sticker on each HG1500 board. You can thus readthe MAC ID on the appropriate HG1500 board and compare it with the MAC ID de-termined via the TAPI for security purposes.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


1. Start the configuration dialog for the TAPI 170 service provider.

2. Click the Licenses tab .

The ID of the HG1500 board of the first HiPath 3000 in the network is displayed underMAC ID. You need this to license lines for devices on the license server (see Section6.4.5.2.2, Generating a TAPI Service Provider License for the First Time).

3. Enter the license key in the Current License input field and click Apply.

Once the lines have been enabled, the date, duration of the validity and the number of li-censed lines are displayed.

>The MAC ID is also used for customer identification and must be archived by thecustomer, as the license file cannot be retrieved again without this MAC ID.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.5.2.2 Generating a TAPI Service Provider License for the First Time

Procedure

1. To access the Internet page, enter the URL http://cls.icn.siemens.de/ .This page is available in both German and English.

2. Select the entry HiPath TAPI v2.0.




– SD order number– Packing slip number (without the leading characters "CD")

– MAC ID of the HG1500 board (see Section 6.4.5.2.1)

4. Now click Search.If the order is found, the original order quantities and those that are still available are dis-played in the second column. The third column indicates the maximum number of installa-tions allowed for each system. You must then enter the required quantity for each featureyou wish to license and click Search again.

5. Once you have checked all data, click Licenses. Enter the MAC ID again.

The license code is displayed in a window named Your License Code. It is advisable tomake a backup copy.

Replacement or Failure of the HG1500 Board


7A new license must be created when replacing the HG1500 board whose MAC ID isused for license code assignment. The MAC ID of the defective board is locked inthis case. No more licenses can be created for this MAC ID. It is no longer possibleto extend licenses either. For further information on how to retrieve another licenseplease refer to Section 6.4.5.2.4.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.4.5.2.3 Repeated Retrieval of a TAPI Service Provider License

If you lose the license code, you can create a new one at any time. To do this, you need theMAC ID of the HG1500 board, via which the licenses purchased are then made available.

1. Using the main navigation bar, open the page Configuration Data.

The rest of the steps to be followed are the same as those for a first license, but in this caseonly the MAC ID needs to be entered in order to generate the license.

6.4.5.2.4 Repeated Retrieval of a TAPI Service Provider License with a New MAC ID

If the HG1500 board fails or the server is replaced, the licenses must be regenerated with thenew MAC ID. For this you need to enter the MAC IDs for the faulty board and the new HG1500board. The licenses are then converted from the old MAC ID to the new MAC ID on the licenseserver.

1. To do this, open the page Server Exchange using the main navigation bar.

2. Enter the old and new MAC ID and click Search.

The rest of the steps to be followed are the same as those for a first license.

>The old MAC ID is locked and can no longer be used! This affects all license typesand procedures.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.5.3 Licensing Lines for Media Streaming using the MEB (Not for U.S.)

In order to provide additional resources for recorded announcements, fax and voice mail, morelines must be licensed; at present a maximum of ten lines are supported. If additional lines have

been licensed, these must be configured accordingly afterwards in the HiPath 3000 Manager E.In addition, the available lines can be allocated and reserved under the various voice services(e.g. voice mail, ACD announcements) as required so that enough resources are available forinbound and outbound fax traffic.


Licenses No. of Licensed Lines: indicates the currently licensednumber of lines. More channels can be added under Modify:Change License: here you will see the MAC ID required tocreate a license code on the server; you will also see the

number of newly licensed lines.New Code: enter the code created on the license server inorder to release additional lines.

Allocation You can use the regulator to assign the available lines to thevoice mail and fax services, thereby changing the resourcesper service as required. The settings are applied immediate-ly and the system or APL does not need to be restarted. Thechannel allocation ratio remains the same even after addi-tional channels have been licensed.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


Procedure

1. Call up the Internet site with URL http://cls.icn.siemens.de/ and click on Media Streaming.

This page is available in both German and English.



3. Click on Media Streaming.


SD order number

Packing slip number (without the leading characters "CD")

MAC ID of the network board

4. Now click Search.

If the order is found, the original order quantities and those that are still available are dis-played in the second column. The third column indicates the maximum number of installa-tions allowed for each system. You must then enter the required quantity for each featureyou wish to license and click Search again.

5. Once you have checked all data, click Licenses. Enter the MAC ID again.

The license code is displayed in a window named Your License Code. It is advisable tomake a backup copy.




start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.4.5.4 Licensing the CSTA Message Dispatcher (CMD)

Please refer to the following documentations for the licensing procedure:

Installation und Configuration HiPath TAPI 120 V2.0

Installation und Configuration HiPath TAPI 170 V2.0

6.4.5.5 Licensing the CSTA Service Provider (CSP)

Please refer to the Installation und Configuration HiPath TAPI 170 V2.0 for information concern-ing the licensing procedure.

6.4.5.6 Licensing the HG1500 (B Channels and Users)

Please refer to the HG1500 documentation for information concerning the licensing procedure.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.4.6 Windows Settings

This section describes how you can optimize the operating system Windows 2000 Server forthe implementation of HiPath 5000 RSM.

Table 6-3 Windows Settings for HiPath 5000 RSM


Optimizing thephysical memory

Windows 2000 Server is normally optimized to maximum throughput asa file server. For a HiPath 5000 RSM server, however, significantly lessmemory is needed for the system-wide disk cache.To optimize the memory go to Settings – Network and Dial-Up Con-nections – LAN Connection – Properties – File andPrint Sharing for Microsoft Networks – Properties and select the op-tion Balance.

Optimizing the virtu-al memory

To do this, go to Settings – Control Panel – System – Advanced – Per-formance Options – Virtual Memory – Change and set the Total pag-ing file size for all disk drives to 512 MB.The same values should be entered for the virtual memory’s upper andlower thresholds so that the paging file does not have to be extendedduring operation.

Optimizing avail-ability

If Windows 2000 crashes (blue screen), it creates a file containing de-bugging information from the paging file the next time the system starts.If the size of this file is the same size as the system’s physical memory,almost all of the virtual memory will be used for generating this file duringsystem startup.This may cause certain services on the HiPath 5000 RSM server to ex-perience problems in starting up. To recover this problem, you should goto Control Panel – System – Advanced – Startup and recovery andselect the option None under Save debugging information.All other options are viable. The Auto restart option forces an automaticrestart if Windows 2000 crashes, thus considerably increasing the serv-er’s availability.

SMTP service The SMTP service in Windows 2000 should always be disabled as Hi-Path 5000 RSM provides its own SMTP link which may conflict with the

Windows 2000 service. To do this, go to Start – Settings – Control Pan-el – Software – Add/remove Windows components – Internet Infor-mation Service – Details – remove the SMTP service.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Personal Call Manager and Internet Information Server

The Personal Call Manager software runs within the context of the IISuser. When a Windows 2000 Server system is being installed for the firsttime, it must be taken into account that the default security settings forthe wwwroot directory do not always grant the Personal Call Managerthe necessary access rights.You must ensure that the user account used by the Personal Call Man-ager (account for "anonymous access" on the standard website - by de-fault this is the IIS guest account IUSR_<PC name>) has full access tothe wwwroot\PCM directory.

The PCM requires the following local full access rights to the hard disk:C:\temp and C:\InetPub\wwwroot\PCM\ where C:\Inet-

Pub\wwwroot means the standard directory of the IIS (in other instal-lations this may have a completely different name).

The option "Cache ISAPI Applications" must not be disabled. This op-tion can be found under Standard website – Properties – Home Direc-tory – Configuration – Application Mapping.If the option were disabled, the Personal Call Manger would lose its"memory" of the users currently logged on and the error message "Youare not logged on" would be displayed permanently.

Application log Configure the following by right-clicking Properties in the Windows EventViewer for system and application protocol: 'Overwrite events as need-ed' and set 'Maximum log size' to approx. 2 MB.

Table 6-3 Windows Settings for HiPath 5000 RSM





P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm

Administering HiPath 5000 RSM

6.5 Administering HiPath 5000 RSM

6.5.1 HiPath Server Administration

HiPath Server Administration is a program for updating the administrative parameters for appli-cations. These parameters are saved in the central database created for applications and,where applicable, read and evaluated by the individual applications. HiPath Server Administra-tion belongs to the HiPath 5000 RSM program package.

The display of HiPath Server Administration conforms to the Windows 2000 management con-sole. For information on the general functions and basic operation of the management console,please refer to the Windows 2000 documentation or online help. This manual therefore onlyprovides a brief description of the general user interface.

6.5.1.1 Functional Overview

HiPath Server Administration manages parameters for the following functional areas:

User Administration

– for administration of the HiPath 5000 RSM server itself

– for GetAccount

– for the Personal Call Manager (PCM)

General Settings

– for importing and administering node information (configured HiPath 3000 systems inthe network)

– for importing and administering extension information for the configured nodes

Personal Call Management

– for administering the general parameters for PCM

– for administering the parameters for PCM users

– for administering the call number detection parameters for external calls

Parameters for Call Charge Manager in HiPath 3000/5000 (Get Account)

– for setting the path and file name of the text file output

– for administering the output of the evaluated data into an SQL database. This proce-dure is described in the appendix but is no longer used.

Viewing program information for HiPath Server Administration (e.g. version installed)



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.1.2 Prerequisites for Use

HiPath Server Administration must be installed with the appropriate database on the HiPath5000 RSM server. HiPath Server Administration is also started from there when processing pa-

rameters.

6.5.2 Starting, Logging in, Ending HiPath Server Administration

6.5.2.1 Starting HiPath Server Administration

A program group called HiPath and comprising Administration, GetAccount and Trace Monitoris created during HiPath 5000 RSM server installation.

To start HiPath Server Administration select Start - Programs - HiPath Server Administra-tion.

6.5.2.2 Logging in to HiPath Server Administration

The login mask appears when the program is started.

1. The User id field contains the ID of the last user to log in. You can enter another ID.

2. In the Password field, enter the password associated with the ID. If the input is correct,Server Administration is started. If the input is incorrect, e.g. wrong password or unknownuser ID, an appropriate error message appears. This must be confirmed. You are returnedto the login mask for entering the correct user data.

Provided you have appropriate access privileges, you can now start administration (see alsoSection 6.5.4.3, Administering Access Privileges for Users)

6.5.2.3 Ending HiPath Server Administration

HiPath Server Administration is ended by the standard Windows procedure, either by clickingthe system menu and selecting Close, by double-clicking the system menu or with the key com-bination h + D .




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.5.3 Error and Event Notification Procedures

Important events, messages or faults that occurred during parameter configuration inHiPath Server Administration are automatically entered in the Event Viewer under Device Man-

ager in Windows 2000.

This Event Viewer can be activated in two ways:

1. Select Settings - Control Panel - Administrative Tools - Device Manager.

2. Activate Event Viewer in HiPath Server Administration in the branch Event Viewer (Local).

Device Manager appears in the layout of a Windows 2000 management console. The event ad-ministration of HiPath Server Administration events can be found in the branch System - EventAdministration - Application.

HiPath Server Administration entries are archived with the source "ADMIN", the administrator’suser ID and a code (e.g. message, database, etc.).

The event administration log contains the following entries, for example:

Starting/ending administration

Import information

Starting/ending processing individual configuration elements

Information about deletions

Faults or problems that occurred

Interrupted actions, e.g. login cancellation

The log can, for example, be displayed in various views, exported to a file or else deleted. Logproperties can be configured, e.g. maximum log size, action to be taken when this size isreached or filter settings.

>This manual does not explain how to operate the Windows 2000 management con-sole or the specific operating and configuration options offered by Event Administra-tion. This know-how is a prerequisite for users. For more information, please refer tothe Windows 2000 documentation or the online help.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.4 User Administration

The user ID, password and additional user information (e.g. user names) are administered un-der User Administration for each user in HiPath Server Administration. Users can thus be ad-

ministered for the following applications:

Users for HiPath Server Administration itself.

Users for Call Charging (GetAccount).

Users for Personal Call Management.

To administer user information in HiPath Server Administration, the user must have logged inwith access privileges for at least HiPath Server Administration (application) and SystemAdministrator (function).

When HiPath Server Administration is started, User Administration can be found in the HiPathServer Administration - User Administration branch in tree view:




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.5.4.1 Creating a New User

To create a new user, proceed as follows:

1. Open the User Administration branch in Tree View.

2. Mark the entry User.

3. Open the context menu there or in detail view and select New....

The New User mask appears:

4. Enter the following data:

Field name Meaning

User id User id

Description Description of the user, e.g. name or area of activity.

Apostrophe Form of address used for the user. This information is not used or

displayed in HiPath Server Administration; this field can remainblank.

Password User’s password. The password uses hidden numbering andmust contain at least 3 characters.

Confirm new password For repeated password entry. The new user is only created if theentry in Password corresponds to this entry. The password is notcase-sensitive. The entry in this field also uses hidden number-ing.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




5. Confirm your input by clicking OK.

6. If the entries under Password and Confirm new password match, your information issaved, the mask is closed and the new user is displayed in detail view.

6.5.4.2 Editing the User Entry

Apart from the user ID, all values defined automatically when the new user was created can beedited. To modify a user’s ID, delete the user with the old ID and create a new user with the newID.

To edit a user, proceed as follows:

1. Open the User Administration branch in tree view and mark the entry Users.

2. Open the context menu for the user to be edited in detail view and select Edit....

3. The Edit User - <user ID> mask appears.

4. Edit the values in the usual manner and confirm your inputs with OK.

5. If the entries under Password and Confirm new password match, your information issaved, the mask is closed and the user is displayed in detail view.

>A field length (number of characters) of 8 is always shown in the Password andConfirm new password fields once the user data is saved, even if the pass-word saved contains a different number of characters. When entering data inthese fields, the real input length is displayed.

>A field length (number of characters) of 8 is always shown in the Password andConfirm new password fields, even if the password saved contains a differentnumber of characters. When entering data in these fields, the real input lengthis displayed.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.5.4.3 Administering Access Privileges for Users

When creating a new user, this user is configured in the system without activated access priv-ileges. Privileges are assigned to the user in a separate step.

To administer access privileges for a user, proceed as follows:


2. Open the context menu relating the user whose access privileges you want to set in detailview and select Access Privileges....

3. The Access Privileges - <user ID> mask appears.

4. Activate or deactivate the relevant access privileges, confirm your inputs with OK. Your in-puts are saved and will activate the next time the user logs in.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




The following access privileges can be set:

Application Function Meaning

HiPath ServerAdministration CCM administrator The user can make settings for call charge calcula-tion in HiPath Server Administration.The HiPath Server Administration - Call ChargeManager branch is available to this user in treeview after login.

CM administrator The user can make general settings for the Person-al Call Manager in HiPath Server Administration.The HiPath Server Administration - Call Man-agement branch is available to this user in treeview after login.

System administra-tor The user can administer users and make settingsfor the general parameters in HiPath Server Ad-ministration.The branches HiPath Server Administration -User Administration and HiPath Server Admin-istration - General Settings are available to thisuser in tree view after login.

WACC administra-tor

The user can make settings for Call Charging(GetAccount) in HiPath Server Administration.The HiPath Server Administration - Call Charg-ing branch is available to this user in tree view afterlogin.

Personal CallManagement

PCM user The user can star t Personal Call Management.This privilege is only available in this mask if thereare still PCM licenses available or the user was as-signed this privilege.

>The branches HiPath Server Administration - About HiPath Server Admin-istration or - Event Viewer (Local) can be accessed by every user in HiPathServer Administration, even if this user was not assigned any access privileges.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.5.4.4 Deleting a User

To delete a user, proceed as follows:


2. Open the context menu for the user to be deleted in detail view and select Delete.

3. If you confirm the ensuing security prompt with OK, the user is deleted.

6.5.4.5 Exporting a User List

To export the user information displayed to a file, proceed as follows:1. Open the User Administration branch in tree view and mark the entry Users.

2. Open the context menu, select Export List....

3. Select the destination directory for the export file in the ensuing mask and give the exportfile a name.

4. After pressing Save, the column-based user information shown in detail view is exportedwith the column headers to the specified file.

>The SERVICE user is reserved for the service technician and cannot be deleted.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.5 Administering General Settings

The following information is administered and updated during the configuration of general set-tings in the HiPath Server Administration:

Information about the nodes configured in the TCP/IP network (HiPath 3000 systems)

– Importing the configured nodes

– Editing the node data

Information about the extensions configured at the nodes

– Importing the extensions configured on the nodes

– Editing the extension data

Information about trunks for private calls

To administer general settings in HiPath Server Administration, the user must be logged in withaccess privileges for at least HiPath Server Administration (application) and System Admin-istrator (function), see also Section 6.5.4.3, Administering Access Privileges for Users.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


When HiPath Server Administration is started, the general settings are located in the HiPathServer Administration - General Settings branch in tree view:



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.5.1 Configuring Nodes

HiPath 3000 systems in a HiPath 3000/5000 network are called nodes. A maximum of 64 nodesare configurable in a network. Nodes cannot be created or deleted in HiPath Server Adminis-

tration. Node data is transferred to the HiPath 5000 RSM server by means of data import viathe network, displayed in Administration and made available for further processing.

6.5.5.1.1 Importing the Configured Node Data

To import the configured node data, proceed as follows:

1. Open the HiPath Server Administration - General Settings branch in tree view.

2. Mark the entry Nodes.

3. Open the context menu and select All Tasks - Load Node Information.

The node data is imported. During an import operation, new node data is incorporated andinformation on existing nodes is updated. Information available in Administration and noton the node, such as a description of the node, is not overwritten during an import job.

If errors occur when importing node data, these are reported and logged in the Event View-er under Device Manager in Windows 2000 (see Section 6.5.3, Error and Event NotificationProcedures).

The nodes available after the import are listed in detail view.

6.5.5.1.2 Editing Node Entries

After a node data import, a number of parameters necessary for Call Charge Manager in HiPath5000 RSM server, for example, are missing. This data can be updated when editing node in-formation.

To edit node data, proceed as follows:


2. Mark the entry Nodes.

3. Open the context menu for the node to be edited in detail view and select Edit....




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


The Edit Node - <node ID> mask appears

Enter the following data:

Field name MeaningNode id Output field for the node’s ID which is read out of the node’s config-

ured data and transferred to HiPath Server Administration. This ID isused to reference the node internally in Administration. Consequently,the repeated import of (updated) node information is possible withoutoverwriting existing node data. The node ID cannot be changed.

Node name Name of the node used in HiPath Server Administration for the node.

Description Description of the node; this can, for example, indicate the location ofthe node.

IP address IP address of the node in the TCP/IP network; this is read out of theconfigured node data.

Currency symbol Currency symbol of the node.

Rate of exchange Rate of exchange for the node currency (e. g. Pounds Sterling, USD,etc.) vis-à-vis the internal currency in the Call Charge Manager, (e.g.Euro). This value is 1 after the node data has been imported.

Country code Output field with the country code of the node in accordance with theconfigured node data.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




4. After editing the data, press OK to save your inputs. The edited node data is displayed indetail view.

6.5.5.1.3 Exporting a Node List

To export the node information displayed to a file, proceed as follows:

1. Open the General Settings branch in tree view and mark the entry Nodes.



4. After pressing Save, the column-based node information shown in detail view is exportedwith the column headers to the specified file.

Area code Output field with the area code of the node in accordance with theconfigured node data.

Tax rate (%) Applicable tax rate for the node (e.g. VAT) in per cent.

>If the value in the Rate of exchange field is deleted or entered as 0, the callcharge amount calculated for this node is always "0", in other words, no callcharges. For this reason, the rate of exchange is always set to 1 by default whennew nodes are imported. In this case, the Call Charge Manager must be adapt-ed on the basis of the internal currency set.

Field name Meaning




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.5.5.2 Configuring Extensions

Information about configured node extensions (workpoint clients) is required in HiPath ServerAdministration for calculating call charges. Extension data cannot be created or deleted in Ad-

ministration, but is imported into the HiPath 5000 RSM server via the network and displayedand made available for further processing in Administration.

6.5.5.2.1 General Properties of Extensions

General settings for immediate printout or destination number suppression can be define forextension configuration. These settings are considered default settings, e.g. for extensions thatare not yet recognized as existent in Administration during an extension import (cf. Section6.5.5.2.2) or when calculating call charges and thus are automatically created.

To configure the extension properties, proceed as follows:


2. Mark the entry Extensions.

3. Open the context menu and select Properties...

The Properties of extension mask appears:



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05






6.5.5.2.2 Importing Configured Extension Data

To import extensions configured on the node, proceed as follows:


2. Mark the entry Extensions.

3. Open the context menu and select All Tasks - Load Extension Information.

The extension data is imported. During an import operation, new extension data is incor-porated and information on existing extensions is updated. Information available in Admin-istration and not on the node, such as a description of the extension, is not overwritten dur-ing an import job.

Field name Meaning

Activate immediateprint out Select this option if immediate printout is to be activated by defaultwhen new extensions are created in Administration (import).CDR information is output immediately for this extension if the general immediate printout function is activated and the Activate immediate print out option is activated for

the relevant extension (e.g. after an individual setting when ed-iting the extension parameter).

Suppression of desti-nation no.

Select this option if the destination number is to be suppressed bydefault.More detailed data can only be entered in the fields below if thisoption is activated.

For business calls If the destination number is to be suppressed in the case of busi-ness calls, enter the number of digits to be suppressed. Call num-bers are not suppressed when the value 0 is entered.Data can only be entered in this field if the Suppression of desti-nation no. option is activated.

For private calls If the destination number is to be suppressed in the case of privatecalls, enter the number of digits to be suppressed. Call numbersare not suppressed when the value 0 is entered.Data can only be entered in this field if the Suppression of desti-nation no. option is activated.

>Additional settings for destination number suppression can be individually en-tered/modified for each extension (see Section 6.5.5.2.3, Editing Extension En-tries).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


If errors occur when importing extension data, these are reported and logged in the EventViewer under Device Manager in Windows 2000 (see Section 6.5.3, Error and Event Noti-fication Procedures).

The extensions available after the import are listed in detail view.The default settings made in the Properties of extension mask for all new extensions createdby data import apply to immediate printout and destination number suppression (cf. Section6.5.5.2.1). These settings can be adapted for each individual extension after the import opera-tion (cf. Section 6.5.5.2.3).

6.5.5.2.3 Editing Extension Entries

After an extensions data import, a number of parameters necessary for Call Charge Managerin HiPath 5000 RSM server, for example, are missing. This data can be updated when editingextension information.

To edit extension data, proceed as follows:


2. Mark the entry Extensions.3. Open the context menu for the extension to be edited in detail view and select Edit....

>The extension number is unique for all nodes, i.e. an extension number can only beentered once on all configured nodes.Immediate printout only works for call data records if the general immediate printoutfunction is activated. Call data is then output for all calls from extensions at which

this extension-specific immediate printout option is also active.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




The Edit Extension - <extension number> mask appears. Select the General tab in thismask.


Field name Meaning

Extension Extension number.

Description Description of the extension, e.g. department or functional de-scription of the owner.

Name Name of the extension owner as per the name entered at the node.

Node Node at which the extension is configured.

License for call ac-counting

This option is automatically activated for all extensions if a licensefor call accounting was installed at the same time as HiPath 5000RSM software. All calls from the relevant extension are thus calcu-lated when call accounting is active and the records calculated aresaved in the call charge database. The option can be deactivated

for individual extension, in which case calls from this extension areignored for call accounting.This option field is unavailable if the call accounting license wasnot installed.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


5. Select the Immediate printout/Destination no. suppression tab now. The followingmask appears:

Activate immediateprint out

Extension-specific setting for the immediate printout of CDR infor-mation. CDR information is output immediately for this extension if the general immediate printout function is activated and the Activate immediate printout option is activated for

the relevant extension.By deactivating this option, CDR information associated with thisextension is not output if the general immediate printout commandis activated.

Field name Meaning



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05





7. After editing the data, press OK to save your inputs. The edited extension data is displayedin detail view.

Field name Meaning

Activate immediateprint out Select this option if you want to activate immediate print out for thisextension.If this option is selected, CDR information from this extension isoutput via immediate print out if the immediate print out function isactivated.

Suppression of desti-nation no.

Select this option if the destination number is to be suppressed forthis extension.More detailed data can only be entered in the fields below if thisoption is activated.

For business calls If the destination number is be suppressed in the case of business

calls from this extension, enter the number of digits to be sup-pressed. Call numbers are not suppressed when the value 0 is en-tered.Data can only be entered in this field if the Suppression of desti-nation no. option is activated.

For private calls If the destination number is to be suppressed in the case of privatecalls from this extension, enter the number of digits to be sup-pressed. Call numbers are not suppressed when the value 0 is en-tered.Data can only be entered in this field if the Suppression of desti-nation no. option is activated.

>The extent to which a destination number suppression command configuredhere affects call charging is defined in the call charging properties.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.5.2.5 Exporting an Extension List

To export the extension information displayed to a file, proceed as follows:

1. Open the General Settings branch in tree view and mark the entry Extensions.



4. After pressing Save, the column-based extension information shown in detail view is ex-ported with the column headers to the specified file.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.5.5.3 Trunks for Private calls

Private calls can be identified via a PC entered, where applicable, and also via defined trunksearmarked for private calls.

6.5.5.3.1 Adding a Trunk for Private Calls

To create a new trunk for private calls, proceed as follows:


2. Select the entry Trunks for private calls.

3. Open the node entry for which you want to create a trunk.

4. Open the node’s context menu there or in detail view and select New....

The following mask appears:



Field name Meaning

Trunk Trunk that identifies private calls.

Description Description of this trunk.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.5.3.2 Editing a Trunk for Private Calls

To edit a trunk for private calls, proceed as follows:



3. Open the node entry for which you want to edit a trunk.

4. Open the context menu for the trunk to be edited in detail view and select Edit....

5. You can edit the trunk description in the ensuing mask.


6.5.5.3.3 Deleting a Trunk for Private Calls

To delete a new trunk for private calls, proceed as follows:



3. Open the node entry for which you want to edit a trunk.

4. Open the context menu for the trunk to be edited in detail view and select Delete.

5. A security prompt appears. Answer this with Yes. The entry is deleted and you are returnedto the edit mask.

6.5.5.3.4 Exporting a Trunk List

To export the trunks displayed for private calls to a file, proceed as follows:

1. Open the General Settings branch in tree view and mark the entry Trunks for privatecalls.



4. After pressing Save, the column-based trunks shown in detail view are exported with thecolumn headers to the specified file.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.5.6 PCM Management

Overview

The following information is administered and updated during the configuration of parametersfor Personal Call Management (PCM) in HiPath Server Administration:

Supplementary parameters for users with access to Personal Call Management

External call destination number identification

HiPath Server Administration does not provide further information on functions and parametersfor operating Personal Call Management; these can be found in the Personal Call Manager it-self and in the associated PCM user manuals.

To administer the PCM parameters in HiPath Server Administration, the user must be logged

in with access rights for at least HiPath Administration (application) and CM-Administrator (function), see also Section 6.5.4.3, Administering Access Privileges for Users).

When HiPath Server Administration is started, the PCM parameters are located in the HiPathServer Administration - Personal Call Management (PCM) branch in tree view:



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.6.1 Properties of PCM Management

General settings for call forwarding in Personal Call Management can be made in the Proper-ties of PCM mask in Administration. To do this, proceed as follows:

You can define which default project codes identify private calls in the Properties for projectcodes mask. To do this, proceed as follows:

1. Open the HiPath Server Administration - Personal Call Management (PCM) branch.

2. Open the context menu there and select the entry Properties...



Field name Meaning

Call forwarding to ex-

tension with activatedcall forwarding

By selecting this option call forwarding actions to a station with ac-

tive CF are, contrary to normal procedure, not ignored but per-formed. After call forwarding to a station with active CF, PCM callprocessing is set for the original station and the CF is performedon the system side.

Call forwarding toPCM monitored ex-tension

By selecting this option call forwarding actions to PCM-monitoredstation are, contrary to normal procedure, not ignored but per-formed. After call forwarding to a station with active CF, PCM callprocessing is set for the original station and the PCM call process-ing of the new station calls is performed.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


Confirm your input by clicking OK.

Call time per call for-warding (sec.)

Enter the call time for call forwarding in seconds here.

Time unit of pausefunction for call for-warding

Enter the time unit of the pause function for call forwarding here.

With activated PCM Enter the display text that should appear on the terminal whenPCM is active.

>Personal availability is restricted by activating the options Call forwarding to ex-tension with activated call forwarding and Call forwarding to PCM moni-

tored extension. Forwarding operations are performed purely by chance on thebasis of the call forwarding and PCM actions set at other stations. These optionsare only used for setting the general availability and not the personal availabilityof a station.

Field name Meaning



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.6.2 User Administration for PCM

6.5.6.2.1 Editing a User for PCM

Users who have been created in PCM User Administration and have access to Personal CallManagement are assigned a user ID and password. Specific additional settings can now be ad-ministered for the PCM user in PCM User Administration. To do this, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Personal Call Management (PCM) entry in tree view.

2. Mark the entry PCM User Administration.

The detail view lists all users who are configured in PCM User Administration and are per-mitted to start PCM, i.e. those for whom the access privileges Personal Call Manager (ap-plication) and PCM user (function) are activated (see also Section 6.5.4.3, AdministeringAccess Privileges for Users).

3. Open the context menu for the user to be edited in detail view and select Edit....

The Edit PCM User - <user ID> mask appears.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm



5. Click OK to save your inputs.

6.5.6.2.2 Exporting a PCM User List

To export the displayed PCM user information to a file, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Personal Call Management (PCM) branch in tree view and mark the entry PCMUser Administration.

2. Open the context menu and select Export List....


After pressing Save, the column-based PCM user information shown in detail view is exported

with the column headers to the specified file.

Field name Meaning

User User ID based on the definition in the User Administration.The field is an output field; inputs are not accepted.

Description User name based on the definition in the User Administra-tion. The field is an output field; inputs are not accepted.

Extension List field for selecting the user extension. All configured ex-tensions that have not yet been assigned to a user areavailable for selection.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.6.3 Destination Number Identification for External Calls

PCM must be able to recognize external calls in order to perform internal call monitoring. Youmust therefore enter:

all configured trunks

all routing codes (if configured)

all external connection in accordance with the HiPath 3000 Manager E dial plan (if config-ured)

Enter all networked HiPath 3000 systems here so that the PCM can recognize the appropriateexternal connection.

6.5.6.3.1 Creating a New Extension Number Entry for External Calls

To create a new extension number entry, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Personal Call Management (PCM) entry in tree view.

2. Mark the entry External Call Destination Number Identification. All configured exten-sion number entries are listed in detail view.

3. Open the context menu there or in detail view and select New....

The mask Destination Number Identification for External Calls appears:

>

HiPath 3000/5000-internal tie connections via HG1500 must not be entered here.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm




6.5.6.3.2 Deleting an Extension Number Entry

To delete an extension number entry, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Personal Call Management (PCM) branch in tree view and mark the entry Ex-ternal Call Destination Number Identification.

2. Open the context menu for the entry to be deleted in detail view and select Delete.

3. Answer the ensuing security prompt with OK, the entry is deleted.

Field name Meaning

Selected digits The trunk, the routing code or the dial plan entry in accor-dance with HiPath 3000 Manager E for initiating an exter-nal call.

Description Description of the trunk, the routing code or the dial planentry.

>The extension number bands in directly connected series systems or satellitesystems must also be configured here, e.g. for all stations on the 300-399 ex-tension number band --> dialled digit "3" or for all stations on the 670-679 ex-

tension number band --> dialled digits "67". In the case of mixed extension num-ber configuration, this configuration must, where applicable, be broken downinto the station number. Special external tie trunk connections, such as a voice-mail solution, must be configured accordingly.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.7 GetAccount

Overview

The call data records generated during HiPath 3000/5000 operation can be copied to a text filefor further processing using the GetAccount program.

6.5.7.1 Parameters for Call Data Export

For HiPath 5000 RSM, you can forward the existing call data, e.g. for external call charge cal-culation. The call data is forwarding in an ASCII file.

Proceed as follows to set the parameters for call data export:

1. Mark the Call Charging entry in tree view.

2. Open the context menu and select Properties....

The Properties of Call Charging mask appears. Activate the Call Data Export tab:

>The WinAccount software for evaluating call data records is no longer used in HiPath3000/5000 V4.0.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm




The ASCII transfer files is automatically saved in the specified folder and extended to in-clude the new call data. The file is extended by one line for each call data record. Each calldata record (line) is ended with CR+LF.

Data record structure

Field name Meaning

Mode Select the call data forwarding mode in this list field. Thefollowing modes are available: Export calls without calculation

The call data is written to the transfer file without callcharge calculation. Select this option.

The modes Export calls with calculation and Export andsave calls with calculation are intended for a future ex-pansion.

Export file name Confirm the default file name specified heregcallserve. The file extension .txt is automaticallyadded and nothing is entered here.

Export file folder Confirm the default folder for C:\coldir in which thetransfer file is saved.

Table 6-4 GetAccount Data Record Structure

No. Pos. Length Description

1 1-8 8 Date of call endformat DD.MM.YY, e.g. "13.09.00"

2 9-16 8 Time of call endformat hh:mm:ss, e.g. "14:14:00"

3 17-19 3 Line number (trunk)right-aligned with leading blanks, e.g. " 1"

4 20-22 3 HiPath node ID (corresponds to configuration in HiPath 3000 Man-ager E)right-aligned with leading blanks

5 23-28 6 Internal extension numberright-aligned with leading blanks

6 29-33 5 Blank



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Copying/Renaming the Transfer Files

Proceed as follows if you want to use the call information in the transfer file for external process-ing:

Switch to the folder containing the transfer file (default:C:\coldir).

Rename the transfer file (default: gcallserve.txt). The renamed file is now availablefor external processing.

7 34-41 8 Call durationformat hh:mm:ss, e.g. "00:04:34"

8 42-66 25 For incoming calls: external call number For outgoing calls: external call number dialled incl. the call-by-

call numberleft-aligned with succeeding blanks

9 67-77 11 Number of tariff unitsright-aligned with leading blanks

10 78 1 Call type 1: incoming

2: outgoing (default)11 79-89 11 PIN code

left-aligned with succeeding blanks

12 90-100 11 Blank

13 101-105 5 Trunkright-aligned with leading blanks

14 106-109 4 LCR Selected Route (corresponds to configuration in HiPath 3000Manager E)right-aligned with leading blanks

15 110 1 CR16 111 1 LF

>The call-by-call number can only be detected and then transferred to the transfer file(field 8) if the carrier and the dial rule table (see Section 6.5.7.2, Carrier and Section6.5.7.3, Automatic Path Selection) have been correctly and completely configured inthe Administration program.

Table 6-4 GetAccount Data Record Structure

No. Pos. Length Description




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


The transfer file is automatically recreated in the specified folder with the file name savedin the parameters and can be renamed again at a later point.

6.5.7.2 Carrier

You can define the valid telephone companies for each node in the carrier entries.

To activate the carrier configuration, open the Call Charge Manager (CCM) - Carrier branchin the structure overview:

>To avoid uncontrolled folder growth with the transfer file, an option is available for de-

leting the renamed transfer file after forwarding it for external use in this folder.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.7.2.1 Creating a New Carrier

To create a new carrier, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Carrier branch in tree view.

2. Mark the node for which you want to define a new carrier.

3. Open the relevant node in tree view or the context menu in detail view and activate New... in the context menu.

The New Carrier mask appears:


Field name Meaning

Name Name of the new carrier

Reference name Carrier name in abbreviated formNode List field in which the node to which the carrier entry applies is to

be selected. The node that was marked before you started to cre-ate a new carrier is entered by default. Node assignment can bechanged by selecting another node, i. e. the carrier entry can thusbe created for another node.

Call-by-Call number The carrier’s call-by-call number.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


5. Confirm your inputs by pressing OK. Your inputs are saved and the mask is closed. Thenew carrier is shown in detail view.

6.5.7.2.2 Editing a Carrier

To edit a carrier entry, proceed as follows:


2. Mark the node associated with the carrier entry you want to edit.3. Open the context menu for the carrier entry in detail view and select Edit....

The Edit Carrier - <carrier name> mask appears.

4. Modify the field contents as required and then confirm your inputs with OK. Your inputs aresaved and the mask is closed.

Calculation mode Select the following mode for call charge calculation in this listfield: No calculation

Call charges are not calculated for calls from this carrier.All other modes are not relevant.

Unit price Not used with HiPath 3000/5000

URL Not used with HiPath 3000/5000

Fallback carrier forthis node

Not used with HiPath 3000/5000,however, must be specified.

>If no fallback carrier is set for the node, calls for which no carrier can be deter-

mined are not evaluated. Call charges for these calls can be calculated once afallback carrier has been specified and a recalculation has been performed.

>The Node mask shows the node to which the carrier was created. Node assign-ment can be changed by selecting another node, i. e. the carrier entry can thusbe “moved" to another node.

Field name Meaning



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.5.7.2.3 Deleting a Carrier

It is only possible to delete carriers that were entered manually or via a calculation file import.Individual carriers that were entered in the database via a tariff model import cannot be deleted.

These carriers can be recognized by an appropriate entry in the column Imported from.... TheDelete function is not available for these carriers.

In addition, it is only possible to delete carriers for which no call data records exist in the data-base, as these cannot be evaluated anymore. To delete a carrier, proceed as follows:


2. Mark the node associated with the carrier entry you want to delete.

3. Open the context menu for the carrier entry to be deleted in detail view and select Delete.

4. If the call database still contains calls that were conducted with this carrier, an appropriate

message appears and must be confirmed. The delete operation is rejected.5. If the call database does not contain any calls that were conducted with this carrier, the de-

fault security prompt appears and must be confirmed by pressing Yes. The carrier is delet-ed with all existing links, e.g. tariff assignments, assigned to the carrier to be deleted.

6.5.7.2.4 Exporting a Carrier List

The node’s carrier information listed in detail view can in be exported to an ASCII file:


2. Mark the node associated with the carrier information you want to export.

3. Open the context menu in tree view and select Export List....


5. After pressing Save, the column-based carrier information shown in detail view is exportedwith the column headers to the specified file.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.5.7.3 Automatic Path Selection

6.5.7.3.1 Importing Outdial Rule Tables

The outdial rule tables set up as part of the configuration of individual nodes must be assignedto a carrier configured in HiPath 5000 RSM for call charge calculation. The outdial rule tablesassociated with the individual nodes must first be imported so that the imported data can beextended by assigning a carrier.

To import the outdial rule table of a node, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Call Charge Manager (CCM) - Automatic Path Selection branch in tree view:

2. Open the entry associated with the node for which you want to import the outdial rule table.

3. Open the context menu in the Outdial Rule Table entry and select Import outdial rule

table.The outdial rule table is imported from the node. In the case of an import operation, newentries are incorporated and information from existing entries is updated. Carrier informa-tion only available in Administration but not present in the outdial rule table is not overwrit-ten during an import operation.

If errors occur when importing the outdial rule table, these are reported and entered in theEvent Viewer under Device Manager in Windows 2000 (see Section 6.5.3, Error and EventNotification Procedures).

The outdial rule table available after the import is shown in detail view.

6.5.7.3.2 Editing Outdial Rule Table Entries

When an outdial rule table is imported, the carrier assignments that are needed for call chargecalculation in HiPath 5000 RSM are missing. The assignment can be performed by editing theoutdial rule table entries.

To edit the data, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Call Charge Manager (CCM) - Automatic Path Selection branch in tree view:

2. Open the node associated with the outdial rule table which you want to edit.

3. Select the entry Outdial Rule Table.

4. Open the context menu for the entry to be edited in detail view and select Edit....

The Edit Outdial Rule - <outdial rule name> mask appears



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




5. The following data is displayed or should be edited:

6. After editing the data, press OK to save your inputs. The edited outdial rule is displayed indetail view.

Field name Meaning

Outdial rule name Description of the outdial rule in accordance with configuration inthe node. The field is an output field, the outdial rule name cannotbe modified.

Carrier List field for selecting the carrier that corresponds to the outdialrule.

Outdial rule format Format of the outdial rule in accordance with configuration in thenode. The field is an output field, the format cannot be modified.

Procedure Procedure of the outdial rule in accordance with configuration inthe node. The field is an output field, the procedure cannot bemodified.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm

HiPath Trace Monitor

6.6 HiPath Trace Monitor

6.6.1 General

Communication between the various HiPath 5000 RSM applications is organized via variousbuffer tables and messages. You can follow the progress of each entry in the different buffertables, each instant message exchange, each program and communication message from thecomponents involved in a separate trace window, i.e. a window is opened for each componentinvolved (application).

The trace windows can be viewed with the help of the Trace Monitors and transferred to externalstorage for further processing.

Trace messages can be observed for the following HiPath 5000 RSM applications:

Feature ServerTwo trace files are available:

– \winnt\system32\carlogfile.txt provides details of which HG1500 boards have logged onto the network and when.

– \winnt\system32\rgtracefile.txt provides details on when the individual HG1500 boards were assigned a station num-ber.

HiPath Server AdministrationAdministration of the configuration parameters for component control by users, for generalsettings, call charge management and charging.

HiPath Personal Call ManagerConfiguration of call handling and call forwarding actions by means of definable profiles.

HiPath GetAccountInternal components responsible for calculating and saving call charges and for immediateprintout.

>The interpretation of the contents of the Trace Monitor’s various trace windows is not

explained in the current documentation. This information is interpreted by the ser-vice technician or Siemens for problem analysis when maintenance is required.The following is a description of the necessary steps for navigating and controllingthe Trace Monitor and for exporting the trace contents to a file for further processing.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.6.2 Starting and Ending the Trace Monitor

A program group (HiPath) comprising the Administration, GetAccount and Trace tools is creat-ed during HiPath 5000 RSM server installation.

1. To start the Trace Monitor, select Start - Programs - HiPath - Trace Monitor for HiPathApplications.

The Trace Monitor screen appears:




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


To close the Trace Monitor, proceed as follows:

1. Select File - Exit

– or press the key combination

h +

D– or select the item Close from the Trace Monitor’s system menu.

6.6.3 Trace Monitor Screen Layout

An application window with the following layout appears when you start the Trace Monitor:

Title bar

Menu bar

Workspace(open trace win-dow)

Trace Monitor sys-tem menu Minimize

Full screen

Exit

Status bar

Trace window sys-tem menu



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




The menu titles/commands available are listed in menu bar. The following menu functions areavailable:

Menu title Command Function

File Print Setup Configure the printer to output trace messages tothe printer.

Exit Close the Trace Monitor.

Trace Use Hexfont Change the output of special trace messagescontaining non-printing characters into a hex font(option activated) or ANSI font (option deactivat-ed). Default messages are always shown in ANSIformat.

Colored Text Change between color (option activated) and

black/white display (option deactivated) for tracemessages.

Add Date/Timestamp If this option is selected, a timestamp is appliedto every new trace message.

Show Window for new Appli-cation

If this option is selected, a separate trace windowappears as soon as an application that writestrace messages is activated.If this option is deactivated, trace window can bemanually opened or closed for active applica-tions by selecting the entry Trace - <name of ap-

plication>.Window Cascade Displays trace windows in a cascading arrange-

ment.

Tile Vertically Displays trace windows in a vertically tiled ar-rangement.

Tile Horizontally Displays trace windows in a horizontally tiled ar-rangement.

Arrange Icons Arranges the minimized trace window icons.

? About... Activates Trace Monitor program information.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.6.4 Print Setup for the Trace Monitor

The printer must be configured for printing out trace window contents. You can decide whetheryou want to print to the Windows default printer or another installed printer. If another printer is

selected, this is entered as the Windows default printer for all applications on the PC.

To configure the printer, proceed as follows:

1. Select the command File - Print Setup.


2. Select the printer to which the Trace Monitor should print in the Name field. Define the in-dividual printer properties you want including paper and format parameters.

3. Confirm the settings by pressing OK.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.6.5 General Functions

6.6.5.1 Opening/Closing a Trace Window

A number of options are available for opening/closing trace windows:

1. Select Show Window for new Application (tick visible in front of the entry) in the Trace menu to automatically open/close trace windows when the relevant application is started/ ended. To deactivate this option, simply select the entry; the tick disappears.

2. If this option is not set, you can open and close the trace windows for the active applicationsmanually. To do this, activate the Trace menu. The first entries offered are the availabletrace windows. Open trace windows are ticked.

– To open a closed window, activate the entry, a tick appears and the trace window isopened.

– To close an open window, select the entry once again, the tick disappears and thetrace window is closed.

6.6.5.2 Printing the Contents of a Trace Window

You can also print out a screen dump of the current trace window to the Trace Monitor’s config-ured printer for documentation purposes:

1. Activate the system menu or else the context menu (right-click trace window) for the rele-vant trace window and select the entry Print Messages.

2. The current contents of the trace window are sent to the configured printer.

6.6.5.3 Deleting the Trace Window Contents

To delete the contents of a trace window, proceed as follows:

1. Activate the system menu or else the context menu (right-click trace window) for the rele-vant trace window and select the entry Delete Messages.

2. The contents are deleted, the window is empty.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm


6.6.5.4 Freezing the Trace Window Contents

The current trace window display can be frozen to stop messages scrolling. To do this, proceedas follows:

1. Activate the system menu or else the context menu (right-click trace window) for the rele-vant trace window and select the entry Stop Window Scrolling.

The window option is set, the contents are frozen, new trace messages are loaded to thebuffer but not displayed.

2. To deactivate this option, simply select the command Stop Window Scrolling once more.

The option is removed, the last messages are displayed.

6.6.5.5 Arranging the Trace Window

The Trace Monitor’s active trace windows can be arranged as follows:

Cascade

– Press < + E

– or activate the command Window - Cascade

Tile Horizontally

– Press < + F

– or activate the command Window - Tile Horizontally

Tile Vertically

– Press < + D

– or activate the command Window - Tile Vertically

If the trace windows are minimized to icons, these can be arranged across the status line byactivating the command Window - Arrange Icons.



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




6.6.6 Exporting Trace Windows

Each trace window can accommodate 1000 (for the server PC under Windows 95/98) or 5000entries (for the server PC under Windows NT or Windows 2000). Once this capacity is reached,

the oldest entry in a trace window is deleted for every new entry. To document a trace windowsituation, you can capture the current trace window status in an external file:

1. Activate the system menu or else the context menu for the relevant trace window and selectthe entry Write Messages to File.

A message field appears in which the path/file name of the export file for the trace windowis displayed:

2. Confirm the message with OK.

The so-called shell user directory in Windows 2000 is selected by default as the destinationdirectory for export files:

C:\Documents and settings

\[Windows user]

\My files\[Application ID]

\[Trace file name]

The naming convention for export files is:

<Application ID><time>.trc

the time is saved in the format YYYYMMDDhhmm.

Example of the file name of an exported trace file:Windows user: Mayer

Application: GetAccountexported on: 02.10.2000at: 16:57:

C:\Documents and settings

\Mayer

\My files\

\WACLIENT

\WACLIENT200010021657.trc



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Saving and Restoring the Current System Configuration

1. Select Start - Programs - HiPath to start the Restore Database program.

The following mask appears.

2. Select the backup media for the database to be restored in the selection window.

To restore the database from the most up-to-date media, check the backup media dis-played

The backup date corresponding to the selected media is displayed.

The media is checked for data consistency with Check .

3. Click Restore to start the backup process.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm

Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000 RSM

6.8 Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000 RSM

Online’s P 500 uninterruptible power supply (UPS) was certified for use with HiPath 5000 RSM.

The P 500 UPS is fed through the AC power cord to the HiPath 5000 RSM server. The devicebridges power failures lasting 5 - 10 minutes by means of an integrated battery.

P 500 UPS - Front/Rear Panel

7CautionFor safety reasons and for protection against guarantee claims, changes to the UPSsettings must only be performed by specially trained technicians.The manufacturer’s safety and operating instructions must be observed.

Figure 6-4 USV P 500 - Front/Rear Panel

21 3 4 5 6

8

7

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



start_h5.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




P 500 UPS - Meaning of Displays, Switches and Jacks

No. Explanation

1 LED displays the status of the P 500 UPS. green = input voltage (mains voltage) is functioning red = UPS is suppling voltage or fault has been detected

2 Display shows UPS operating status NORMAL CHARG‘G BATTERYand reports the charging status of the battery (25, 50, 75 or 100%).

3 On/off switch

4 Input (jack for input voltage (mains voltage))There is a cavity under the socket for the input fuse (with spare fuse enclosed).

5 3-pin DIP FIX switch: 1: reduces the response voltage (minimum mains voltage value before UPS activa-

tion)– 10 V with 220/240 V systems– 5 V with 110/120 V systems.

2: increases the response voltage by 5% 3: reduces the response voltage by 5%Switch positions normally: DIP FIX 1 = off, DIP FIX 2 and 3 = on

6 Reset key deactivates the acoustic alarm if the input voltage fails, i.e. when using the UPS.

This alarm cannot be deactivated if the battery voltage falls under a certain value. activates the UPS cold start.

To protect the battery from deep discharging, the UPS can only be activated whenthe mains voltage is connected. By activating the “on” switch (1) and then pressingthe reset key, the P 500 UPS can also be activated without a network connection(cold start).The connected server must be disconnected before a cold start.The P 500 UPS requires approx. 5 - 20 s to reach the defined output voltage. Toavoid malfunctions the connected server should not be connected immediately.

7 9-pin jack for connection to the communication serverNOT USED WITH HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0

Special monitoring software can shut down the specified server via this jack, for exam-ple, in the case of extended power failures.

8 Sockets for the power supply of the communication server to be monitored.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_h5.fm




start_3g.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Startup HiPath 3000 as a Gateway

Overview

7 Startup HiPath 3000 as a Gateway

7.1 Overview

Chapter Contents


7.2 Introduction

So-called gateways provide the HiPath 5000 RSM with interfaces for trunk and tie trunk con-nections to the telecommunications network. In V4.0, the HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500 and HiPath3300 systems can be used as gateways.

Topic

Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway, page 7-2






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_3g.fm

Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway

7.3 Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway

7.3.1 Prerequisites

Refer to Section 4.2.1 for the tools and helps needed to install the HiPath 3700 system.

7.3.2 Procedure for Installation and Startup

7WarningOnly authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.

>To ensure that IP addresses are not assigned more than once in the customer net-work, you must ping each new IP address to be configured before each IP addressis assigned. If an IP address responds, then this address cannot be used again.

Table 7-1 HiPath 3700 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup


HiPath 3700 Installation (19-Inch Cabinet)

1. Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-47 (generally determined by the existing 19-inch cabinet)

2. Unpacking the Components, page 4-47 3. Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19-Inch Cabinet

4. Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet, page 4-52

5. Grounding the System, page 4-53 Checking the Protective Grounding, page 4-55

6. Connecting the Cable to the Backplane, page 4-56

7. Connecting the Line Network to the Patch Panel, page 4-68

8. Loading the System Software and Inserting Subboards on the Central ControlBoard, page 4-69

9. Configuration Notes, page 4-70 (cabinet(s) are already equipped with the boards)We recommend that you check the board population using the configuration notes.

10. Making trunk connectionsRefer to the following board descriptions for information: STMD8 (Not for U.S.) - for S0 trunk connection TMS2 (Not for U.S.) - for S2M trunk connection TMST1 (for U.S. Only) - for T1 PRI trunk



start_3g.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




11. Making IP connectionsPerform the IP connection over the HG1500 board HXGM3 (V4.0 SMR-4 or Later).For information on startup and configuration procedures, refer to the following man-uals: HG1500 V3.0 Installation Manual HG1500 V3.0 Configuration Manual


Startup HiPath 3700 (Section 5.2)

1. Supplying the System With Power, page 5-3 (Plugging in the power supply unit -> starting system boot)

2. Carrying Out a System Reload, page 5-6 3. Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type, page 5-6


5. Conducting customer-specific programming with HiPath 3000 Manager ERefer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individ-ual features.

6. Carrying out a system check The following tests must be performed if telephones are directly connected to

the gateway:

– Check the telephonesCheck the display function (displays time and date) on every telephone. Ifa display does not appear, either the telephone or the link is defective. Re-place the telephone or check the link.Perform random telephone tests as described in Section 11.3.1.8.

– Check for proper system bootingSet up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is func-tioning properly.

Test IP configurationPING the HG1500 IP address in the gateway.Set up external calls at random (from optiPoints or optiClients on HiPath 5000RSM)

Table 7-1 HiPath 3700 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup





P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_3g.fm


7.4 Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway

7.4.1 Prerequisites

Refer to Section 4.3.1 for the tools and helps needed to install the HiPath 3500 system.

7.4.2 Procedure for Installation and Startup

7WarningOnly authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.

>To ensure that IP addresses are not assigned more than once in the customer net-work, you must ping each new IP address to be configured before each IP addressis assigned. If an IP address responds, then this address cannot be used again.

Table 7-2 HiPath 3500 as a Gateway - Procedure for Installation and Startup


HiPath 3500 Installation (19-Inch Cabinet) (Section 4.3)

1. Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-106 (generally determined by the existing 19-inch cabinet)

2. Unpacking the Components, page 4-107 3. Attaching a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 to the Wall (19-Inch Housing) (Not for

U.S.), page 4-108

4. Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet, page 4-109

5. Grounding the System, page 4-111

6. Connecting Cables and the Line Network, page 4-113

7. Configuration Notes, page 4-114 (system already equipped with the boards)We recommend that you check the board population using the configuration notes.

8. Making trunk connections

Refer to the following board descriptions for information: STLS4R - for S0 trunk connection TS2R (Not for U.S.) - for S2M trunk connection TST1 (for U.S. Only) - for T1 PRI trunk

Note: Analog workpoint clients can be connected to the CBRC’s T/R ports in emer-gencies. This ensures telephone operation via the telecommunications network inthe event of IP network failure.



start_3g.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




9. Making IP connectionsPerform the IP connection over the HG1500 board HXGR3 (V4.0 SMR-4 or Later).For information on startup and configuration procedures, refer to the following man-uals: HG1500 V3.0 Installation Manual HG1500 V3.0 Configuration Manual



1. Supplying the System With Power, page 5-11 (starting system boot).






the gateway:– Check the telephones

Check the display function (displays time and date) on every telephone. Ifa display does not appear, either the telephone or the link is defective. Re-place the telephone or check the link.Perform random telephone tests as described in Section 11.3.1.8.








P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


start_3g.fm




exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Expanding, Upgrading of HiPath 3000

Overview

8 Expanding, Upgrading of HiPath 3000

8.1 Overview

Chapter Contents


Topic

Expanding HiPath 3000, page 8-2:

Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700, page 8-2

Connecting a Printer, page 8-4

ECR with HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 (not for U.S. and Canada), page 8-5 Connecting Special Equipment, page 8-20

Upgrading HiPath 3000 to HW V1.2 and SW V4.0, page 8-25

Software Upgrade, page 8-25

Hardware Upgrade, page 8-26




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm

Expanding HiPath 3000

8.2 Expanding HiPath 3000

The following section provides information on supplementary equipment or extensions that arenot described in Chapter 4, Installation HiPath 3000.

8.2.1 Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700

In the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 only, you can remove and insert peripheral boards duringoperation (hot plugging). The following startup rules apply.

Rules for Removing and Inserting Boards

7CautionAlways wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system (especially whenhandling boards).

7CautionTo ensure that the system operates without blocking, you must follow the rules inSection 4.2.6, Configuration Notes concerning the board configuration.

Table 8-1 Startup Rules for Removing and Inserting Peripheral Boards

If Then

Inserting newboard in free slot Board is integrated in the system per the rules for initial installation (referto page 4-72). System with default numbering plan

The station numbers on the new board are appended consecutivelyin ascending order to the numbers already assigned.

System with modified numbering planThe station numbers on the new board can be in any order.

Using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Manager T, you can assign a specificstation number to a port. If the number is already assigned to another object, you can exchange the two station numbers.

Replacing with un-derequipped board

of same type

The system activates the board and retains the surplus ports in the da-tabase.



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Suggested Configuration (for U.S. Only)

To prevent B-channel blocking, install the TMST1 Module only in the BC or in the first two slotsof the ECs. HiPath 3000 Manager E observes this rule when performing off-line configuration.

Replacing boardwith overequippedboard of same type

The system activates the board with the same number of ports as on theold board.After the old board is removed, you can reinitialize the slot using HiPath3000 Manager E or Manager T.When the new board is inserted, the system activates it as if it had beeninserted in a free slot. However, the CDB (customer database) area usedby the old board is left as a gap.In the case of subscriber line modules, you can use HiPath 3000 Man-ager E to retain the old station data by copying it to the new board, or youcan delete it (reset to the default state). Copying is not possible for trunkboards.

Replacing with adifferent board type

The system does not automatically activate the board.After removing the old board, you can initialize the slot using HiPath3000 Manager E or Manager T.After you have inserted the new board, the system activates it as if it hadbeen inserted in a free slot. However, the CDB area used by the oldboard is left as a gap.In the case of subscriber line modules, you can use HiPath 3000 Man-ager E to retain the old station data by copying it to the new board, or youcan delete it (reset to the default state). Copying is not possible for trunkboards.

Table 8-1 Startup Rules for Removing and Inserting Peripheral Boards

If Then




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


8.2.2 Connecting a Printer

Introduction

You can use a printer as a CDR printer (serial data transmission) or as a call charge computeroutput device (parallel data transmission).

Connection of a CDR Printer

Output Formats

For information about the output formats (compressed or uncompressed) for call detail record-ing central, see HiPath 3000/5000 Feature Description.

7Caution

Follow the safety and operating instructions provided by the printer manufacturer.

Figure 8-1 Example connection of a CDR printer to HiPath 3000

CDR printerConnecting cables:S30267-Z23-A100 = 10 mS30267-Z23-A500 = 50 m

HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700BackplaneX7 (“8-slot” cabinets)

HiPath 3750/ HiPath 370025-pinconnector

Printer25-pinconnector

1) Frame ground

2) Signal ground

1 GND 1)

2 TXD

3 RXD

4 RTS

5 CTS

6 DSR

8 DCD

20 DTR

7 GND 2)

GND 1

TXD 2

RXD 3

RTS 4

CTS 5

DSR 6

DCD 8

DTR 20

GND 7



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




8.2.3 ECR with HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 (not for U.S. andCanada)

Introduction

When installing the system, an ECR in the 19’’ cabinet is required if

emergency battery operation is necessary during a power failure or if the system requiresuninterruptible power. The necessary batteries are installed in the ECR.

the internal system power supply unit for HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 is not sufficientenough to provide power to the overall telephone configuration (corded or cordless tele-phones). In this case, the EPSU2-R external power supply unit is installed in the ECR.

7DangerAn expansion cabinet rack (ECR) equipped with an external power supply unit(EPSU2-R) may only be operated if the housing is closed.Before opening the housing, disconnect the ECR from the power supply by setting the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel

to “Off”. removing the battery fuse on the ECR front panel and unplugging all power and connecting cables.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


8.2.3.1 ECR Control, Display, and Connecting Elements

Front Panel (Figure 8-2)

Top switch for disconnecting battery power Bottom switch for disconnecting line power

6.3 A/T battery fuse (Caution: do no confuse with EPSU2-R fuse.)

Rear Panel (Figure 8-3)

Line voltage connections [1]

– Top: Line output to UPSC-DR connection socket for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300

– Below: Line input

Batteries / EPSU2-R [2] output voltage to UPSC-DR for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300orBatteries output voltage [2] to UPSM for HiPath 3700

Mounting clamp [3]Attach the braided shields of the connection cable (to the socket [2]) here.

Figure 8-2 ECR front panel (155 x 440 x 380 mm)




exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




If an EPSU2-R external power supply unit is installed in the ECR, the following additional dis-play and control elements are also included:

EPSU2-R 2.5 A/T [4] fuse for batteries (Caution: Do not confuse with battery fuse on the

ECR front panel.) LED [5] for the 48 V output voltage (DC output) in the EPSU2-R (see Table 8-2)

LED [6] for the line input voltage (AC input) in the EPSU2-R (see Table 8-2)

Figure 8-3 ECR Rear Panel With Connecting Elements

[1] [3]

[4] [5][6]

[2]




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


Table 8-2 EPSU2-R - Explanation of Display and Connecting Elements

LED [6](DC output)

LED [7](AC input)

Explanation

on on DC output and AC input voltage are working properly.

off on DC voltage not reaching output (DC consumer has a short cir-cuit).

on off AC voltage not reaching input(power failure or system powered by batteries, including addition-al power).

off off There is no AC input voltage (power failure) and the batteries aredead, or the EPSU2-R fuse is defective or was removed (by turn-

ing it to the left).



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




8.2.3.2 Components

Expansion cabinet rack (ECR): S30777-U711-E901The scope of delivery includes:

– A mounting set for installing the ECR in a 19” cabinet: C39165-A7027-D1– A mounting clamp: D72571-A80-S3– A toothed lock washer: D6797-A43-S657

Mounting set for ECR wall installation or ECR table setup: C39165-A7027-D2

EPSU2-R: S30122-K7221-X900A cable for making the ECR – HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 electrical connection is includedin the delivery: C39195-Z7001-C14

4 batteries, 12 V/7 Ah: V39113-W5123-E891

Connecting cable, ECR (batteries) – HiPath 3700 (UPSM + power failure signalling (lamp-wire connector)): Signalling equipment, for example, can be operated over a relay that isconnected in series.): C39195-A7002-B11

Connecting cable, ECR – HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300: S30267-Z361-A10

8.2.3.3 Installation Options

The expansion cabinet rack can be

installed in a 19’’ cabinet (see Section 4.3.4.5).

mounted on a wall (see Section 4.3.4.4).

set up on a table using four adhesive mounting feet.

7CautionBoth of the above-mentioned connecting cables are system specific. C39195-A7002-B11 is exclusively designed for HiPath 3700. S30267-Z361-A10 is exclusively designed for HiPath 3500 and HiPath

3300.Failure to observe the above may damage the power supply unit.

>Use the power cable to ground the ECR. Fixed, separate grounding is not required.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


8.2.3.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries

When using the UPSM or the UPSC-DR as the uninterruptible power supply unit, you need toinstall additional batteries in the ECR.

The ECR and batteries are packaged separately and included in the delivery. The batteriesshould be installed as described in Section 8.2.3.4. Only use batteries approved for HiPath3000.

Figure 8-5 shows the position of the four batteries inside the ECR.

The circuit diagram below illustrates the cable run between the batteries in the ECR and thepower supply unit of the system (UPSM for HiPath 3700, UPSC-DR for HiPath 3500 and HiPath3300). The connecting cable between the expansion cabinet rack ECR and the system cabinetis also provided.

7

Danger

Before opening the housing, disconnect the ECR from the power supply by setting the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel

to “Off”. removing the battery fuse on the ECR front panel and unplugging all power and connection cables.

Figure 8-4 HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 - ECR With Batteries

4 batteries12 V / 7 Ah

–48 V BatB

+48 V

X3

3412

+48 V–48 V UP

X2

L1 1

N 2PE 3

S1

S2

F1 T6,3 A

X1

1 L1

2 N3 PE

PE

Housing



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




7CautionWhen storing an ECR equipped with batteries or if the ECR is inactive for a long pe-

riod of time, remove the battery fuse (6,3 A/T) in the front panel of the ECR. Also,when shipping an ECR with built-in batteries, remove the batteries beforehand.

Figure 8-5 ECR With Built-in Batteries

1 2 43




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


8.2.3.4.1 Installing Batteries

ECR is supplied with four batteries in a separate package. Proceed as follows to install the bat-teries in the ECR:

7

Danger

Only V39113-W5123-E891 (12 V/7 Ah) batteries are released for connection to theUPSC-DR/UPSM and installation in the ECR.The use of other battery types is prohibited.

Step Action

1. Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel to“Off” (see Section 8.2.3.1).

2. Remove the battery fuse (ECR front panel) (see Section 8.2.3.1).3. Unplug all of the ECR’s power and connection cables.

4. Remove the ECR housing cover: To do this, remove the three screws at the rearand slide the housing cover back.

5. Remove the mounting screw [A] on the battery retainer [B].

6. Remove the battery retainer and set aside.

[B][A]



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




7. Insert the batteries carefully in the recesses provided [C].

8. Replace the battery retainer and secure the mounting screw.

Step Action

[C]




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


9. Connect the batteries: To do this, slide the eight cable connector lugs [D] carefullyonto the two connection contacts on each of the four batteries.

10. Replace the ECR’s housing cover and secure the three mounting screws at therear.

11. Connect all of the ECR’s power and connection cables.

12. Insert the battery fuse (ECR front panel) (see Section 8.2.3.1).

13. Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel to“On” (see Section 8.2.3.1).

Step Action

[D]



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




8.2.3.5 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries and EPSU2-R

If the internal system power supply unit for HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 does not provideenough power for the overall telephone configuration (corded and cordless telephones), an ad-ditional power supply is necessary. In this case, the EPSU2-R external power supply unitshould be installed in the ECR.

Figure 8-7 shows the position of the EPSU2-R inside the ECR.

The block diagram below illustrates the cable run between the EPSU2-R and the batteries in-side the ECR and the power supply unit of the system (UPSC-DR). The connecting cable be-tween the expansion cabinet rack ECR and the system cabinet is also provided.

7

Danger

An ECR equipped with an EPSU2-R may only be operated if the housing is closed.Before opening the housing, disconnect the ECR from the power supply by setting the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel

to “Off”. removing the battery fuse on the ECR front panel and unplugging all power and connecting cables.

Figure 8-6 HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 - ECR With Batteries and EPSU2-R

Fan(not available with all

systems)

EPSU2-R

Out

Input

Batt

4 batteries12 V / 7 Ah

–48 V BatE

+48 V

–48 V BatB

+48 V

–

+48 V

X3

3

4

1

+48 V

–48 V UP

X2

L1 1

N 2PE 3

S1

S2

F1 T6,3

X1

1 L1

2 N3 PE

PE

Housing




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


7CautionWhen storing an ECR equipped with batteries or if the ECR is not used for a long

period of time, remove the battery fuse (6.3 A/T) in the front panel of the ECR.When shipping an ECR with built-in batteries, remove the batteries beforehand.

Figure 8-7 ECR with Built-in EPSU2-R

EPSU2-R



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




8.2.3.5.1 Connect Fan (if needed)

The ECR delivery usually includes a fan that is built in but not connected.

To connect the fan, proceed as follows:

Step Action

1. Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel to“Off” (see Section 8.2.3.1).

2. Remove the battery fuse (ECR front panel) (see Section 8.2.3.1).

3. Unplug all of the ECR’s power and connection cables.

4. Remove the ECR housing cover: To do this, remove the three screws at the rearand slide the housing cover back.

5. Cut off the plug on the fan connection line if there is one.Strip both wire ends and attach wire end sleeves.

6. Connect both connection wires to the EPSU2-R terminal [A] as shown in Figure 8-8. Connect the red wire (fan) to the white wire (EPSU2-R) and the black wire (fan)to the black wire (EPSU2-R).Figure 8-6 shows the cable run between EPSU2-R and the fan.

7. Replace the ECR’s housing cover and secure the three mounting screws at therear.

8. Connect all of the ECR’s power and connection cables.

9. Insert the battery fuse (ECR front panel) (see Section 8.2.3.1).

10. Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel to“On” (see Section 8.2.3.1).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


Figure 8-8 Connecting the Fan to the EPSU2-R

[A]



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




If you install the fan at a later time, you must make sure that the identification ([B] in Figure 8-9) is in the upper right corner when viewed from outside.

Figure 8-9 Placement of the Fan in the ECR

[B]




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


8.2.4 Connecting Special Equipment

8.2.4.1 Entrance Telephones

Connection options

You can also make a direct connection if needed. In this case, only voice connections to theentrance telephone are possible, without the support of the opener and signal functions.

Figure 8-10 Connection Options for Entrance Telephones

Figure 8-11 Direct Connection of Entrance Telephones

HiPath 3000

Connection over entrance telephone (ET) adapter and amplifier (A)

ET adapter Amplifier Door

HiPath 3000

Connection over ET/V adapter

ET/Aadapter

Door

Amplifier

if necessary, loop in a capacitor1 µF/250 V for each

Tto T/R analog port

R




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


Configuration Notes for HiPath 3000 Manager E

Device control features (open doors, select entrance telephone, etc.) can be programmed onprocedure keys. The stored DTMF signal sequence is sent to the application.

DoorCom Analog

Configure station: Station: Parameters:Type = StandardFlags = Call waiting rejection on

System parameters:Flags = DTMF automatic

Remote station (telephone)

Configure station: Station: Parameter:Flags = Call waiting rejection offFlags = Missed calls list



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




8.2.4.2 Connecting Speakers

You have the following options:

Connection to an analog station port (the amplifier may require level adaptation)

Connection to an analog station port over an ET adapter

Connection to an analog trunk circuit

Speaker Connection to an Analog Station Port

Figure 8-13 Connecting Speakers to an Analog Station Port

HiPath 3000

SLA/SLAS ET

HiPath 3000

SLA/SLAS Amplifier

a/b Active speakersonly

ETa/b a/b

Starting contact

HiPath 3000SLA/SLAS

REAL/STRBR/ STRBR

Amplifiera/b

Starting contact




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm


Speaker Connection to an Analog Trunk Port

Figure 8-14 Connecting Speakers to an Analog Trunk Port

HiPath 3000TML/TLA

HiPath 3000TML/TLA

Amplifier

a/b

Active speakersonly

a/b

REAL/STRBStarting contact



exup.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Upgrading HiPath 3000 to HW V1.2 and SW V4.0

8.3 Upgrading HiPath 3000 to HW V1.2 and SW V4.0

The following information describes the measures that are needed to upgrade the hardwareand software.

In general, the use of the central CBCPR control board and software V4.0 in “7-slot” cabinets(HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700) is possible; however, you should note that by doing this, the maxi-mum capacity limits illustrated in Table 2-6 may not be attainable in all cases.

8.3.1 Software Upgrade

Upgrading to V4.0 is only possible from HiPath 3000 V3.0 or later.

If the software currently installed is from an earlier version or release, it must first be upgradedto V3.0 before it can be upgraded to V4.0.

CDB conversion is also necessary.

Procedure: Convert the Customer Database (CDB)

>It is not possible to upgrade HiPath 3550 to HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3350 to HiPath3300. This would require replacing the complete system.

Step Action

1. Start HiPath 3000 Manager E.2. Transfer current system CDB from the system to the PC.

3. Save the CDB under new name.

4. Convert CDB: Open the CDB saved in step 3. Enter customer data:

– Name– Contract number

Enter system-wide data:

– Target version: for example, Version 4.0– Expansion: for example, HiPath 3550 CBCC– Country version: for example, Germany

5. Save the converted CDB under a new name, for example, as offline_v40.cdb.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


exup.fm

Upgrading HiPath 3000 to HW V1.2 and SW V4.0

8.3.2 Hardware Upgrade

HiPath 3350

HiPath 3550

HiPath 3750

HW Version < 1.2 HW Version 1.2Notes: This requires the new CBCC control board. If the following subboards are present, they

must be replaced: IMODC or IMODN (replac-es the IMOD), MMC (replaces the FMC),CMA / CMS (replaces the CGM/CGMC).

HW Version < 1.2 HW Version 1.2Notes: This requires the new CBCC control board. If the following subboards are present, they


HW Version < 1.2 HW Version 1.2Notes: This requires the new CBCPR control board. If the following subboards are present, they




wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

Overview

9 Workpoint Clients

9.1 Overview

Chapter Contents


Topic

optiPoint 500, page 9-3

optiPoint 500 Telephones, page 9-5– optiPoint 500 entry– optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.)

– optiPoint 500 basic– optiPoint 500 standard / optiPoint 500 standard SL (for U.S. only)– optiPoint 500 advance– Connection Requirements for HiPath 3000– Connecting the Equipment– Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone– USB 1.1 Interface

optiPoint 500 Add-On Devices, page 9-15– optiPoint key module– optiPoint BLF

– Programming Add-On Devices– Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices

optiPoint 500 adapters, page 9-19– optiPoint analog adapter– optiPoint ISDN adapter– optiPoint phone adapter– optiPoint acoustic adapter– optiPoint recorder adapter– Possible optiPoint 500 Adapter Configurations– Comparison of optiset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters

Maximum Configurations for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-On Devices and Adapters,page 9-30

Accessories and Part Numbers, page 9-32– Local Power Supplies– Headsets– Part Numbers

optiPoint 600 office, page 9-38

optiLog 4me, page 9-41



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

Overview

optiset E privacy module, page 9-42

IP Telephony (Voice over IP (VoIP)), page 9-43

optiPoint 410 (V4.0 SMR-6 or Later), page 9-43 – optiPoint 410 Telephones – optiPoint 410 Add-On DevicesUse of optiPoint 500 AdaptersUse of optiPoint 500

Adapters – Use of optiPoint 500 Adapters

optiClient 130 V4.0, page 9-56

HiPath AP 1100, HiPath AP 1140, page 9-59

HG1500 V3.0: Determining the Number of HG1500 Boards Required, page 9-60– Applications of the HG1500 Boards

– Determining the Number of HG1500 V3.0 Boards Required – Notes on B Channel Distribution in the Case of IP Networking

Attendant Console Versions, page 9-68

optiPoint Attendant, page 9-68

optiClient Attendant, page 9-69

HiPath Cordless Office Telephones, page 9-72

Gigaset active Handset, page 9-72

Gigaset 3000 Comfort Feature Handset, page 9-73

Gigaset 3000 Micro Feature Handset, page 9-74 Gigaset 4000 Comfort Feature Handset, page 9-76

Gigaset 4000 Micro Feature Handset, page 9-77

Logging On Mobile Telephones to the System, page 9-79

Analog Telephones for HiPath 3000, page 9-83

ISDN Terminals for HiPath 3000, page 9-84

Topic



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2 optiPoint 500

Introduction

optiPoint 500 telephones handle the digital communication of voice and data (voice communi-cation only for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy). The three dialog keys and thedisplay guarantee convenient and interactive operation. Furthermore, the key lamp principle vi-sualizes the activated functions.

With the exception of optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy, the optiPoint 500 tele-phones have a USB 1.1 interface. This allows for PC-supported telephoning and Internet ac-cess over the USB interface of a PC.

The add-on devices optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF allow you to increase the numberof available function keys.

The different optiPoint 500 adapters provide a flexible extension to the telephone workstation.Additional devices (such as personal computers, fax equipment, telephones, headsets) can beconnected quickly because it is easy to build them on to the bottom of the telephones (notoptiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy) and because the adapters are “plug’n’play”.

You can find information not contained in this chapter in the optiPoint 500 Service Manual.

>The optiPoint 500 telephones described in this section are compatible with the op-

tiset E telephones. It is possible to operate both telephone families on one UP0/E board. You can also use telephones from the two families in mixed host-client con-figurations (earlier called the master-slave or primary-secondary configuration).You can find information on optiset E telephones, adapters, and add-on device in theHicom 150 H V1.0 and Hicom 150 E Office Rel.2.0-3.0 Service Manual (refer to Sec-tion 1.2.5, Information on the Intranet: Electronic Documentation on Com ESY Prod-ucts).



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

Key Programming

You can label the keys in one of the following ways: Handwritten label sheets are included with each telephone.

Using a PC:

– with the “Key Labeling Tool” (requires MS Word © ) that is on the CD “Electronic Oper-ating Instructions” (refer to Section 1.2.5, Information on the Intranet: Electronic Doc-umentation on Com ESY Products).

– with the “Online Key Labeling Tool” that can be downloaded from http://www.sie-mens.com/hipath (–> Downloads).

>Double key assignments

The programmable function keys of the optiPoint 500 telephones and the optiPointkey modules can have double assignments. First define any key as the “Shift” key.Only external phone numbers for outgoing dialing can be saved on the second lev-el. Please note that these call numbers should not be from a HiPath network.LED signaling applies to the first key level only.When the Shift function is pressed, the LED lights the Shift key. This signals that thephone numbers on the second key level are available. The Shift function is deacti-vated after 5 s or after you press a phone number or if the you press the Shift keyagain.The optiPoint BLF function keys cannot have double assignments.



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.1 optiPoint 500 Telephones

9.2.1.1 optiPoint 500 entry

Main Features

8 function keys (can be modified with HiPath 3000 Manager E) with LEDs (see page 9-4)

Open listening

2 setting keys (plus/minus) for volume and pitch

Suitable for wall mounting

No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices), no display

Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint 500 entry

Refer to Section 9.2.1.6 for connection requirements.Figure 9-1 optiPoint 500 entry - Standard Key Assignments (Default)

Consultation hold

Redial

Message

Callback

Speed dialing

Microphone on/off

Speaker

Release

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.1.2 optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.)

Main Features

12 function keys (4 can be changed using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 8 freely programmable)with LEDs (see page 9-4)

Alphanumeric LCD display (swivel) with 2 lines, 24 characters each

3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back” and “Next”

Open listening

2 setting keys (plus/minus) for volume, pitch and display contrast


No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices)

Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint 500 economy

Refer to Section 9.2.1.6 for connection requirements.

Figure 9-2 optiPoint 500 economy - Standard Key Assignments (Default)

Service Programmable

Redial Programmable

Microphone on/off Programmable

Speaker Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Release

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.1.3 optiPoint 500 basic

Main Features



3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back” and “Next”

Open listening


Interfaces and slots:

– 1 USB 1.1 interface– 1 option bay

– 1 interface for max. 2 add-on devices


Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint 500 basic


Figure 9-3 optiPoint 500 basic - Standard Key Assignments (Default)


Redial Programmable



Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Release

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.1.4 optiPoint 500 standard / optiPoint 500 standard SL (for U.S. only)

Remark: optiPoint 500 standard and standard SL (for U.S. only) function exactly the same onthe HiPath 3000 systems.

Main Features



3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”

Full duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for adapting to the room

2 setting keys (plus/minus) for volume, pitch, speaker quality and display contrast


– 1 integrated USB 1.1 interface

– 1 option bay



Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint 500 standard


Figure 9-4 optiPoint 500 standard - Standard Key Assignments (Default)


Redial Programmable



Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Release

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.1.5 optiPoint 500 advance

Main Features

19 function keys (4 can be changed using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 15 freely programma-ble) with LEDs (see page 9-4)

Alphanumeric LCD display (tiltable) with 2 lines, 24 characters each. Background lightingthat stays lit for approximately 5 s





– 1 integrated USB 1.1 interface

– 2 option bays


– 1 headset connection (121 TR9-5)


http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint 500 advance


Figure 9-5 optiPoint 500 advance - Standard Key Assignments (Default)

Service ProgrammableRedial Programmable



Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Release



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.1.6 Connection Requirements for HiPath 3000

Hardware Requirements

Refer to Section 8.2.1 for information on upgrading peripheral boards for HiPath 3750 and Hi-Path 3700.

Connecting as a Client Telephone

System HiPath 3750HiPath 3700



Hardware requirements free UP0/E porton

SLMO8/24

free UP0/E porton

CBCCCBRCSLU8

SLU8RSLMO24

free UP0/E porton

CBCCCBRCSLU8

SLU8R

>It can also be connected to an existing optiPoint 500 telephone (except for optiPoint500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy) as a client telephone (using an optiPointphone adapter).



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.1.7 Connecting the Equipment

Procedure: Connecting an optiPoint 500 Telephone

The first time the telephone is switched on,

All LEDs illuminate briefly

All LEDs on the add-on devices (AODs), if connected, light up briefly (AOD LEDs do notnecessarily flash at the same time as the LEDs on the telephone.)

All pixels on the display activate briefly

Step Activity

1. Locate a free interface on the main distribution frame.

2. Connect the cable from the main distribution frame to the wall outlet.

>The maximum range for a standalone or host telephone without additional local pow-er supply is approximately 1000 m (3280 feet) (for J-Y (ST) 2x2x0.6, ∅ 0.6 mm).Perform the telephone test in Section 11.3.1.8 to determine whether a local powersupply is needed for additional power (for example, in host-client configurations or

for larger ranges).

3. Label the keys in one of the following ways: Handwritten; label sheets come with each telephone. Over a PC:

– With the “Key Labeling Tool” (requires MS Word © ) that is on the “ElectronicOperating Instructions” CD.

– With the “Online Key Labeling Tool” that can be downloaded from http:// www.siemens.com/hipath (–> Downloads).

4. Prepare the telephone for connection:

Connect the handset cord to the telephone (marked with symbol) and to thehandset. Do you plan to connect an add-on device? Then refer to Section 9.2.2 on Page

9-15. Do you plan to connect optiPoint adapters? Then refer to Section 9.2.3 on Page

9-19.

5. Connect the line cord (marked on the telephone by a symbol).optiPoint 500 telephones are shipped with a 6 m (20 ft.) line cord and an MW6(RJ11) plug for connection to a modular telephone jack.



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

These indications show that the telephone is starting up and performing a self-test. Download-ing has finished and the telephone is ready for operation when you see the date and time onthe display.

9.2.1.8 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone

Figure 9-6 optiPoint 500 Connecting Capabilities

USB interface

MW8 (RJ45) connection jack for optiPoint key mod-ule, optiPoint BLF

MW8 (RJ45) connection jack for HiPath 3000

MW4 (RJ8) connection jacks:Upper = headset equip-mentLower = handset

Option bays(see Figure 9-10)



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.1.9 USB 1.1 Interface

Except for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy, the optiPoint 500 telephones haveone USB 1.1 interface. This forms the basis for:

PC-supported telephoning (TAPI)

Data transmission over CAPI (for example, direct Internet access, fax capability, or e-mail).If the CAPI software is installed, PCs have direct Internet access over the USB interfacewithout any additional adapter. There is a charge for this software.

TAPI and CAPI can be used simultaneously (for example, receiving a large e-mail or downloadwhile calls are being set up over a CTI application).

>

optiClient Attendant - The professional PC attendant console is connected over theUSB 1.1 interface of the optiPoint 500 basic, optiPoint 500 standard or optiPoint 500

advance.



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.2 optiPoint 500 Add-On Devices

The add-on devices optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF increase the number of availablefunction keys.

The user usually installs the add-on devices. The installation instructions are on the “ElectronicOperating Instructions” CD.

Refer to the HiPath 3000/5000 Feature Description for model-specific data for the optiPoint keymodule and the optiPoint BLF.

9.2.2.1 optiPoint key module

The optiPoint key module is an add-on device that should be mounted on the side of the tele-phone; it provides an additional 16 keys, LEDs and labelling areas for all purposes. Figure 9-9 shows the possible configurations.

It is possible to perform double assignment for the keys. Only external numbers for outgoingdialing can be saved on the second key level that is then available. Please note that these callnumbers should not be from a HiPath network (see page 9-4).

7CautionAlways disconnect the line cord before connecting add-on devices to the telephone.

Figure 9-7 optiPoint key module

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.2.2 optiPoint BLF

This is an add-on device that provides 90 additional keys, LEDs and labeling areas for all pur-poses.

The connection to the telephone or to an optiPoint key module is made over an interface cablewith the following connectors: input MW6 (RJ11), output MW8 (RJ45). Figure 9-9 shows thepossible configurations.

Power is supplied using a power supply unit (order numbers in Table 9-6) that can supply powerto max. two optiPoint BLFs. The power supply unit must be plugged directly into the designatedoptiPoint BLF port.

Figure 9-8 optiPoint BLF



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.2.3 Programming Add-On Devices

An inserted add-on device automatically registers with the system and is then ready for opera-tion. Keys can be programmed via HiPath 3000 Manager E or the respective telephone set. If

you replace the device, the information programmed under the keys is maintained (stored in thecustomer database).

If a configuration other than the one shown in Figure 9-9 is used, the LEDs and keys may notfunction correctly. You must update the database with HiPath 3000 Manager E.

Example: You replace configuration E by configuration B. You must use HiPath 3000 ManagerE to remove the optiPoint key module 2 from the database so that the LEDs and keys functioncorrectly.You can also use Manager T to delete optiPoint BLFs and optiPoint key modules.

The first optiPoint BLF that is initially connected to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700, or

HiPath 3500 automatically receives standard key assignments (default) for the first 90 systemports. No standard assignment is made if you already configured an optiPoint BLF with HiPath3000 Manager E or if other optiPoint BLFs are connected.

Replacing an optiPoint key module with an optiPoint BLF

Procedure:

Step Action

1. Unplug the connecting cable between the optiPoint key module and the telephone(or other optiPoint key module). Remove optiPoint key module.

2. Remove optiPoint key module from the database, using HiPath 3000 Manager E.

3. Plug in the optiPoint BLF. HiPath 3000 Manager E automatically detects the BLFand enters it in the database.



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.2.4 Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices

Figure 9-9 optiPoint 500 Possible Configurations for Add-On Devices

optiPointkey moduleB

C

D

E

optiPoint 500 basic,optiPoint 500 standard oroptiPoint 500 advance

optiPointBLFA

optiPointkey module

optiPointkey module

optiPointkey module

optiPointBLF

optiPoint

BLF

optiPoint

BLF

HiPath 3750 and

HiPath 3700 only



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.3 optiPoint 500 adapters

The different optiPoint 500 adapters (not optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy) allowflexible expansion of the telephone workstation by providing additional device connections

(such as PC, fax equipment, telephones, headsets).

The adapters, which are to be mounted on the bottom of the telephone, are “plug’n’play”. Whena new telephone-adapter configuration is plugged in, it generates a reset; a setup message no-tifies the system of the new configuration.

The user usually installs the adapter. The installation instructions are on the CD “Electronic Op-erating Instructions”.

Option bays

7WarningAlways disconnect the line cord before connecting adapters to the telephone or re-

moving them from the telephone.

Figure 9-10 optiPoint 500 Option Bays

Option bays: 2 x for optiPoint 500

advance (shownhere)

1 x for optiPoint 500basic and optiPoint500 standard



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.3.1 optiPoint analog adapter

The optiPoint analog adapter allows an analog device (such as telephone (DTMF only), group 3fax, modem, cordless telephone) to be connected to the optiPoint 500 or optiPoint 410 tele-

phone.The connected analog device can send and receive calls on the interface to the system regard-less of the connection status of the optiPoint 500 or optiPoint 410 telephone, as long as aB channel is available.

The adapter must always have a local power supply for operating the connected analog device.

T/R interface properties

Supply current: 30 mA

Busy signal when both B channels are busy

Ring sequence: 2.2

Supports only DTMF with Flash No ground signaling allowed

Does not support: VoiceMail server with T/R interface, message waiting lamp, dictatingequipment, speaker, announcement device (such as start/stop).

Figure 9-11 optiPoint analog adapter

MW6 (RJ11) socket assignments:

Pin Signal

1 free2 free

3 T (Tip)

4 R (Ring)

5 free

6 free

6 1



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.3.2 optiPoint ISDN adapter

The optiPoint ISDN adapter provides the basic ISDN access for S0 devices (max. 2), such asS0-PC card, group 4 fax equipment, or video communication devices (such as videoset or

videokit).S0 telephones must have their own power supply for connection.

S0 interface properties

Supports point-to-point and passive bus connections

Wired for short passive bus configurations

Cable lengths

– Maximum 100 m (328 feet) with a cable impedance of 75 ohms

– Maximum 200 m (656 feet) with a cable impedance of 150 ohms (complies with CCITTrecommendation I.430)

The NT terminating resistors are integrated into the ISDN adapter.

Figure 9-12 optiPoint ISDN adapter

MW8 (RJ45) socket assignments:

Pin Signal

1 free

2 free

3 SR1

4 SX1

5 SX2

6 SR2

7 free

8 free

8 1



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.3.3 optiPoint phone adapter

The optiPoint phone adapter is used for connecting a second optiPoint 500 telephone (clienttelephone) with its own power supply.

The system treats the client telephone as an independent telephone with a separate phonenumber and its own B channel. The client telephone can send and receive calls regardless ofthe connection status of the host telephone.

The maximum range between the host and client telephones is approximately 100 m (328 feet)(for J-Y (ST) 2x2x0.6, ∅ 0.6 mm).

Figure 9-13 optiPoint phone adapter

MW6 (RJ11) socket connections:

Pin Signal

1 free2 AUX – (T (Tip))

3 UP0/E –

4 UP0/E +

5 AUX + (R (Ring))

6 free

6 1



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

Example of a host-client configuration

Figure 9-14 Example of a Host-Client Configuration

42

local powersupply (optional)

MW wall outlets

UP0/E

to the system, 2-wire,up to 1000 m (3280 feet)

UP0/E

, 4-wire, up to 100 m(328 feet)

optiPoint 500 telephone withoptiPoint phone adapter

ClientHost

optiPoint 500 telephone

MW wall outlet

local powersupply (optional)



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.3.4 optiPoint acoustic adapter

The optiPoint acoustic adapter is used for connecting

a headset (121 TR 9-5) (see Section 9.2.5.2).

an active loudspeaker box and a desk microphone via the Y cable.

busy display/door opener and secondary bell/light paging, etc. (each with its own powersupply) via floating contacts (not supported when using the adapter on optiPoint 410).

Notes on the optiPoint acoustic adapter

The internal components of the optiPoint terminal are deactivated in speakerphone modeif an internal microphone and an external loudspeaker are used (sense lead).

optiPoint 500 basic does not support the connection of an external microphone to the op-tiPoint acoustic adapter.

The speakerphone mode selection is independent of whether the internal or an externalspeakerphone is used. External speakerphones have precedence over internal speaker-phones with the exception of manual intercom and signaling procedures.

The internal microphone, the transmitter inset and any microphone connected to the opti-Point acoustic adapter are muted in the "Mute" audio state.

Ring, alarm and key tones are transferred to the internal loudspeaker and not to an externalloudspeaker connected to the optiPoint acoustic adapter.

Figure 9-15 optiPoint acoustic adapter

Assignment of the three connection sockets:

1 Connecting a headset with the following electricalvalues (121 TR 9-5):

Microphone (electret interface):– max. power: 400 µA– supply voltage: 5 V ± 10%– series resistor: 5 kΩ ± 10%

Acoustic transformer:– Impedance: 150 Ω ± 10%– EBD: 13 dB ± 2.5 dB

2 Connecting a loudspeaker and microphone using Ycable (see Figure 9-16)

3 Floating contacts (see Table 9-1), load capacity of

max. 5 W at 24 VAC or 60 VDC

31 2



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

The volume keys on the optiPoint terminal are used to adjust the volume level of the inter-nal loudspeaker and any connected external loudspeaker. The volume of the external loud-speaker can also be adjusted using the external amplifier.

Figure 9-16 Y cable for optiPoint acoustic adapter

Table 9-1 Floating contacts of the optiPoint acoustic adapter

Pin Assign-ment

Notes

1 Free –

2 "Busy" con-tact

Signals active telephone states: Handset lifted Loudspeaker activated/headset activeThese states can be displayed, for example, on external signaling equip-ment (LED, relay, etc.). The signaling equipment must have its own powersupply.The contact can be loaded with max. 5 W at 24 VAC or 60 VDC.

3

Assignment of the MW2 connection sockets:

Internal resistance: 0 Ω; 10 µFLevel (for PCM -20 dBm): -4.8 dBm (at volume level 8; 0.775

V = 0 dBm)Sense lead to GND: int. loudspeaker deactivated; only activefor tone ringing.

Input level -50 dBm: -12 dBm PCM signalInput resistance: 150 kΩ parallel to 220 nF in series with 36kΩSense lead to GND: internal microphone deactivated.

Pin Signal

1 sense lead

2 NF+

3 Free

4 GND

Pin Signal

1 +5V

2 GND

3 Free

4 sense lead

Microphone

4 1

Y cable

Acoustic adapter

Loudspeaker



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

4 "Call" con-tact

Signals the call receipt state.This can be used, for example, to control a secondary bell.The contact can be loaded with max. 5 W at 24 VAC or 60 VDC.

5

6 Free –

Table 9-1 Floating contacts of the optiPoint acoustic adapter

Pin Assign-ment

Notes



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.3.5 optiPoint recorder adapter

The optiPoint recorder adapter allows an external recorder or a second headset to be connect-ed. Attention: The called party must be informed that the call is being recorded.

Figure 9-17 optiPoint recorder adapter

Assignment of both connection sockets:

Recorders to be connected must meet the following electrical re-quirements:Input impedance: >10 kΩ Frequency progression: 300 to 3000 Hz ± 3 dBBeep tone level: -26 dBm to -18 dBm at a 600 Ω loadMax. input level: 650 mVeff from a 600 Ω source

1 MW4 port for second headset

Pin Signal

1 Tx–

2 Rx

3 Rx

4 Tx+

2 MW6 port for recorder

Pin Signal

1 Free

2 NF

3 NF

4 NF

5 NF

6 Free

Contacts 2+3 and 4+5 are bridgedinternally.

21

4 1

6 1



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.3.6 Possible optiPoint 500 Adapter Configurations

Adapter Categories

Each UP0/E port in the system provides two B channels. This means that you can connect twotelephones, each with a separate phone number, to one UP0/E port.

Category 1 optiPoint 500 adaptersThe following adapters each require a B channel and, therefore, can only be used once on ahost terminal (host terminal requires the second B channel of the UP0/E port).

optiPoint analog adapter

optiPoint ISDN adapter

optiPoint phone adapter

If one of these adapters is used in the optiPoint 500 advance, only a category 2 adapter can beoperated in the second slot.

Category 2 optiPoint 500 adaptersThe following adapters can be used on the host and client telephones. This is also true if a cat-egory 1 optiPoint 500 adapter is already connected.

optiPoint acoustic adapter

optiPoint recorder adapter

Configurations Restrictions

Number of Usable Adapters and Add-On Devices

Section 9.2.4 shows the maximum number of adapters and telephones that can be connectedto HiPath 3000/5000. The limits also include the client telephones connected over optiPointphone adapters and the analog telephones connected over optiPoint analog adapters.

>The voltage feed test can be used to check whether a local power supply is also nec-essary for an adapter configuration. To avoid any doubts, the test should always beimplemented when installing large configurations.



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

9.2.3.7 Comparison of optiset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters

Table 9-2 Comparison of optiset E and optiPoint 500 adapters

optiset E optiPoint 500

analog adapter analog adapter

phone adapter phone adapter

data adapter integrated USB interface

control adapter

ISDN adapter ISDN adapter

acoustic adapter acoustic adapter

contact adapter

headset adapter

headset plus adapter recorder adapter



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.4 Maximum Configurations for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-OnDevices and Adapters

Table 9-3 System-Specific Maximum Configurations for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-On Devices and Adapters

Workpoint Clients/Add-On De-vices/Adapters

SYSTEM

HiPath3750

HiPath3700

HiPath3550

HiPath3500

HiPath3350

HiPath3300

optiPoint 500 telephones

Amount per system 250/3841 722 483 244 245

Amount per box (the value inbrackets applies to operationusing a PSUI)

144 (120) – – – –

optiPoint acoustic adapters

Amount per system No restriction

optiPoint analog adapters

Amount per system 1256 247 247 88 88

optiPoint recorder adapters

Amount per system No restrictionoptiPoint ISDN adapters


optiPoint phone adapters


optiPoint key modules


optiPoint BLFs

Amount per system 12 6 6 – –

optiset E telephones

Amount per system 250/3841 722 483 244 245

Amount per box (the value inbrackets applies to operationusing a PSUI)

144 (120) – – – –

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

optiset E analog adapters


optiset E control adapters


optiset E data adaptersAmount per system 50 48 48 16 16

optiset E speech adapters


optiset E privacy modules


optiset E ISDN adapters


optiset E phone adapters


optiset E key modules


optiset E BLFs

Amount per system 12 6 6 – –1 Depending on the system configuration and performance, the specified capacity limits may not always be achieved. To en-

sure that the dynamic capacity limit of HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 is not exceeded, test the configuration using the projectplanning tool (Intranet: http://intranet.mch4.siemens.de/syseng/perfeng/tools/hpt/index_en.htm). Testing is not required for

configurations of up to 250 stations and 90 l ines. Testing using the project planning tool is mandatory for configurationswhich include UCD/ACD, more than one SLC16/SLC16N, or groups of more than 10 stations.2 8xUP0/E at the central board + 5xSLU8 + 1xSLMO24.3 8xUP0/E at the central board + 5xSLU8R.4 8xUP0/E at the central board + 2xSLU8.5 8xUP0/E at the central board + 2xSLU8R.6 The total number of UP0/E stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is limited to 384.7 If the total number of UP0/E stations, analog stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than 72,

an external EPSU2 power supply unit must be used.8 If the total number of UP0/E stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than 24, a UPSC-D/

UPSC-DR must be used.

Table 9-3 System-Specific Maximum Configurations for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-On Devices and Adapters

Workpoint Clients/Add-On De-

vices/Adapters

SYSTEM

HiPath3750

HiPath3700

HiPath3550

HiPath3500

HiPath3350

HiPath3300

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.5 Accessories and Part Numbers

9.2.5.1 Local Power Supplies

You may need a local power supply if you are using large configurations or if you need to extendthe range.

You can connect a local power supply (part numbers in Table 9-6 on page 9-36) to the line cordsof a host or client telephone using two MW6 jacks and the connecting cable supplied (see Fig-ure 9-18).

Data for local power supply AUL:06D1284 (Euro):

Line voltage: 220 (230) Vac

AC line frequency: 47 to 53 Hz

Output voltage: Max. 50 V, min. 30 V

Output current: Max. 250 mA

Table 9-4 Pin Assignments of the Local Power Supply AUL:06D1284 (Euro)

Pin Assignment

1 not used

2 –

3 a-wire (tip)

4 b-wire (ring)

5 +

6 not used



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

Connection Example for a local power supply

Figure 9-18 Connection Example for a local power supply

local power supplyUPO/E (dig-ital ) jack

MW jack

from optiPoint 500 adapter(for example, here the

optiPoint analog adapter)

Analogtelephoneor device

optiPoint 500telephone

HiPath 3750



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.5.2 Headsets

A headset replaces the telephone handset, which means that the user’s hands are free whentelephoning. As of V4.0 SMR-7, a cordless headset (121 TR 9-5) can also be used.

Table 9-6 provides details on the various headset models together with the corresponding partnumbers.

Note: As of V4.0 SMR-7, a headset key can be configured for optiPoint or optiset E telephones.This allows the user to take calls and to toggle between the handset and the headset.

Figure 9-19 Example of a Corded and a Cordless Headset



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

Connection Options

optiPoint and optiset E telephones not included in the table below do not support headset con-nection.

Information on connecting the headset is provided in the respective installation instructions.

Table 9-5 Connection Options for Corded and Cordless Headsets

Telephone Connection Options for Corded and Cordless Headsets

Direct Using anoptiPoint

acoustic adapter1

1 Accepting and ending calls using the headset keys is only supported if the connection is established using an optiPointacoustic adapter.

Using an optiset Eheadset adapter or

headset plusadapter

Using an optiset Econtrol adapter

optiPoint 500 basic X

optiPoint 500 standard /

optiPoint 500 standardSL (for U.S. only)

X

optiPoint 500 advance X X

optiPoint 600 office X X

optiPoint 410 standard X X

optiset E basic X

optiset E advance plus/ comfort

X X

optiset E advance con-

ference/ conference

X X

optiset E memory X X



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiPoint 500

9.2.5.3 Part Numbers

Refer to the optiPoint 500 Service Manual for additional accessories (see Section 1.2.5, Infor-mation on the Intranet: Electronic Documentation on Com ESY Products).

Table 9-6 Part Numbers for Telephones and Accessories

Telephone / Accessories Color Part Number

optiPoint 500 entry arctic S30817-S7101-A101-*

manganese S30817-S7101-A107-*

optiPoint 500 economy arctic S30817-S7108-A101-*


optiPoint 500 basic arctic S30817-S7102-A101-*

manganese S30817-S7102-A107-*optiPoint 500 standard arctic S30817-S7103-A101-*


optiPoint 500 advance arctic S30817-S7104-A101-*


optiPoint key module arctic S30817-S7105-A101-*


optiPoint BLF arctic S30817-S7107-A101-*

manganese S30817-S7107-A107-*optiPoint phone adapter arsenic S30817-K7110-B108-*

optiPoint analog adapter arsenic S30817-K7110-B208-*

optiPoint ISDN adapter arsenic S30817-K7110-B308-*

optiPoint acoustic adapter arsenic S30817-K7110-B408-*

optiPoint recorder adapter arsenic S30817-K7110-B508-*

optiPoint 500 entry wall bracket arsenic C39363-A328-C338

optiPoint 500 basic wall bracket arsenic C39363-A329-C338

Local power supply, Euro AUL:06D1284(C39280-Z4-C71 = num-ber entered on the unit)

Local power supply, UK AUL:06D1287(C39280-Z4-C72 = num-ber entered on the unit)



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiPoint 500

Local power supply, 110 V USA AUL:51A4827(C39280-Z4-C73 = num-ber entered on the unit)

Headset Encore monaural L30460-X1282-X1

Headset Encore binaural L30460-X1282-X2

Headset Tristar L30460-X1282-X3

Headset Supra L30460-X1282-X4

Headset DuoSet L30460-X1282-X5

Headset Profile monaural L30460-X1283-X1

Headset Profile binaural L30460-X1283-X2Cordless headset Part number not available.

Table 9-6 Part Numbers for Telephones and Accessories

Telephone / Accessories Color Part Number



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.3 optiPoint 600 office

optiPoint 600 office is the first convergence telephone with UP0/E and IP interfaces (CorNet IP).

In UP0/E mode, it is the high-end product for completing the optiPoint 500 family and the follow-up version of optiset E memory.

In CorNet IP mode it functions as the high-end IP phone in the optiPoint 400 family.

Important features

19 function keys (4 changeable using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 15 user-programmable)with LEDs

Graphic LCD display (tiltable) with 8 lines of 24 characters each, touchscreen. Backgroundlighting with approximately 5 s ghosting.


Full-duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation



– 1 integrated USB-1.1 interface

– 1 adapter slot


– 1 headset port (121 TR9-5)


In UP0/E mode (UP0/E interface): SW download via PPP

In CorNet IP mode (IP interface, 10/100BaseT): WAP accessSupported standards: H.323, Hicom Feature Access, G.711, G.723.1, QoS, SecurityH.235, SNMP, HTTP, DHCP, FTP, LDAP (Data base access I/F)



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Default key assignments for optiPoint 600 office

Comparison of optiPoint 600 office and optiset E memory

Figure 9-20 optiPoint 600 office - Default Key Assignments

Table 9-7 Comparison of optiPoint 600 office and optiset E memory

optiPoint 600 office optiset E memory

Convergence product optiPoint IP adapter needed for use in IP envi-ronments

19 function keys, no integrated keypadExternal keypad possible over USB interface

12 function keys and integrated alphanumerickeypad

Full-duplex speakerphone mode Half-duplex speakerphone mode

Integrated USB-1.1 interface optiset E data adapter needed for data com-munication with a PC

Headset port optiset E headset adapter needed for headsetconnection

Graphic LCD display with background lighting,touchscreen

LCD display without background lighting, notouchscreen

Supports card reader/writer Supports card reader

Service ProgrammableRedial Programmable



Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Release



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


Connection and Configuration

Connection of the optiPoint 600 office over the UP0/E interface: Refer to page 9-12 for moreinformation.

Connection of the optiPoint 600 office over the IP interface: You can obtain information inthe installation and startup instructions (http://www.siemens.com/hipath (–> Downloads)).Use HiPath 3000 Manager E to configure a workpoint client for HiPath 3000/5000.

Supports cordless adapter –

Wide scope of functions with few adapters1 adapter slot

Many adapters necessary for using functions2 adapter slots

Table 9-7 Comparison of optiPoint 600 office and optiset E memory

optiPoint 600 office optiset E memory



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

optiLog 4me

9.4 optiLog 4me

optiLog 4me is a digital, single-channel speech recording device designed for operation withthe HiPath 3000/5000. Its design matches that of the optiPoint 500 and it can record up to 2900

hours of telephone calls.

You can set the optiLog 4me to the following modes in both digital and analog telephones:

Start RecorderRecording begins when you press the Start key.

Trader RecorderRecords and stores all calls.

Malicious Call RecorderStores calls in their entirety when you press any button during the call.

Third Party Monitoring (not currently available with HiPath 3000/5000)optiLog 4me should be installed at the central station of the system. Recording starts whenyou press the Monitor key on the telephone.

Furthermore, you can use the recorder to record conference calls using an external micro-

phone.

The optiLog 4me can be connected between the optiPoint 500 telephone and the handset. Thelocal power supply is included in the delivery.

For additional information on this, please refer to the installation and administration instructionsincluded with the adapter.

Figure 9-21 optiLog 4me



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

optiset E privacy module

9.5 optiset E privacy module

The optiset E privacy module prevents unauthorized interception of calls in which each partyhas a privacy module. The privacy module connects between telephone and handset; connec-

tion is a simple matter of plugging in the handset cord. The privacy module is supplied completewith a local power supply.

>The optiset E privacy module may be subject to import and export regulations.



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

IP Telephony (Voice over IP (VoIP))

9.6 IP Telephony (Voice over IP (VoIP))

9.6.1 optiPoint 410 (V4.0 SMR-6 or Later)

Introduction

The IP telephones of the optiPoint 410 family allow the user to carry out telephone calls in thesimple, familiar way over a data network.

All HiPath 3000/5000 features that are offered interactively on the display, in the service menu,and on function keys are available (except for Relocate).

The three dialog keys and the display guarantee convenient and interactive operation (notoptiPoint 410 entry). Furthermore, the key lamp principle visualizes the activated functions.

With the exception of the optiPoint 410 entry and optiPoint 410 economy, the optiPoint 410 selflabeling key module (not yet available) allows the number of function keys available to be in-creased. The add-on devices optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF can be used with the op-tiPoint 410 family.

The optiPoint 410 display module is used as a key module on the optiPoint 410 standard. Itsgraphical LCD display (320 x 240 dots), the touch screen and the navigation keys mean thatmany functions can be used intuitively and therefore more effectively.

The use of different optiPoint 500 adapters offers flexibility for expansion of the telephone workstation (not optiPoint 410 entry and optiPoint 410 economy).



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.6.1.1 optiPoint 410 Telephones

9.6.1.1.1 optiPoint 410 entry

Main Features

protocols

– H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet-IP

– HTTP, DHCP, SNMP, FTP

– H.235 (security)

– QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1 p/Q

Voice compression G.711, G.723 and G.729 A/B Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)

CTI (e. g. via TAPI 3rd party)

1 Ethernet (10/100Base T) interface (self-configuring) for LAN connection

8 function keys (can be modified with HiPath 3000 Manager E) with LEDs

2 setting keys (plus/minus) for volume and pitch


No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices), no display



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint 410 entry

Refer to Section 9.6.1.1.4 for information on connection and startup.

Figure 9-22 optiPoint 410 entry - Standard Key Assignments (Default)

Consultation hold

Redial

Message

Callback

Speed dialing

Microphone on/off

SpeakerRelease



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.6.1.1.2 optiPoint 410 economy

Main Features

protocols– H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet-IP




Voice compression G.711, G.723 and G.729 A/B

Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)

CTI (e. g. via TAPI 3rd party)


12 function keys (4 can be changed using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 8 freely programmable)with LEDs



Open listening



No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices)



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint 410 economy


Figure 9-23 optiPoint 410 economy - Standard Key Assignments (Default)


Redial Programmable



Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Release



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.6.1.1.3 optiPoint 410 standard

Main Features

protocols– H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet-IP, SIP




Voice compression G.711, G.722, G.723 and G.729 A/B

Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)

CTI (e. g.via TAPI 1st Party)


1Ethernet (10/100Base T) interface (self-configuring) for the PC connection

12 function keys (4 can be changed using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 8 freely programmable)with LEDs




Port for headset (121 TR 9-5)


Modularity:

– 2 adapter slots

– 1interface for up to 2 add-on devices




wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint 410 standard


Figure 9-24 optiPoint 410 standard - Standard Key Assignments (Default)


Redial Programmable



Programmable

Programmable

Programmable

Release



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.6.1.1.4 Connection and Startup

The optiPoint 410 administrator manual contains information about the procedure for connec-tion and startup of optiPoint 410 telephones.

Use HiPath 3000 Manager E to configure an optiPoint 410 telephone for HiPath 3000/5000.

Use the Deployment Tool to upgrade the optiPoint IP telephone software. Refer to theDeployment Tool Administrator Guide for IP Telephones for information on the tool.

Download

The manuals and tools referred to in this document are available for download at (http:// www.siemens.com/hipath (–> Downloads).



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


9.6.1.1.5 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone

Figure 9-25 optiPoint 410 Connection Options

Table 9-8 optiPoint 410 Description of Connections

No. Connection

1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for the LAN

2 Handset

3 Local power supply (optional)1

1 No local power supply is required if power is provided via the Ethernet cable (Power over LAN).

4 Key module

5 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for the PC

6 Headset (121 TR 9-5)7 Adapter 1

8 Adapter 2



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.6.1.2 optiPoint 410 Add-On Devices

The user usually installs the add-on devices. The installation instructions are on the “ElectronicOperating Instructions” CD.

9.6.1.2.1 optiPoint SLK module

The optiPoint SLK module is an add-on device that should be mounted on the side of the tele-phone; it provides an additional 13 keys, LEDs, and displays for all purposes. SLK (self-labelingkey) means that each key is assigned a display (1 line with 12 characters) in which the functionor call number currently saved is shown.

Double assignment can be performed for the keys if only call numbers without LED support aresaved on the first level. It is also possible to program call numbers without LED support on thesecond level. These can be internal station numbers, DID call numbers and call numbers froma HiPath network.

7

Warning

Always disconnect the line cord before connecting add-on devices to the telephone.

>A maximum of two key modules may be installed on an optiPoint 410 telephone (notoptiPoint 410 entry and optiPoint 410 economy).optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF can be used in addition to the two key mod-ules described below. All mixed-mode configurations are permitted.

Figure 9-26 optiPoint SLK Module



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


The bottom key of the first key module installed on the telephone (optiPoint SLK module or op-tiPoint key module) is automatically defined as “Shift key” (default). A Shift key must not alreadybe programmed.

9.6.1.2.2 optiPoint 410 display module

This is a key module with a graphic swivel display (240 x 320 pixels) with touch screen func-tionality and background illumination and navigation keys.

Main Features

Graphical user interface

Local personal telephone directory

Access to company-wide telephone directory via LDAP

WAP browser

Voice-controlled dialing Call list containing all incoming and outgoing calls

Speed-dialing list

Online Help

Figure 9-27 optiPoint 410 display module



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


Connection

The optiPoint display module must always be installed as the first key module, in other words,connected directly to the telephone.

The connection to the telephone is made over an interface cable with the following connectors:Input MW6, output MW8. The power supply is ensured via the connected telephone.



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


9.6.1.2.3 Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices

The following table shows the possible configurations for key modules on telephones of the op-tiPoint 410 family (not optiPoint 410 entry and optiPoint 410 economy).

9.6.1.3 Use of optiPoint 500 Adapters

The following optiPoint 500 adapters are available for use on telephones of the optiPoint 410family (not optiPoint 410 entry and optiPoint 410 economy):

optiPoint analog adapter

optiPoint acoustic adapter Note: Floating contacts are not supported when using the adapter on optiPoint 410.

optiPoint recorder adapter

Table 9-9 Key Module Configuration on an optiPoint 410 Telephone

optiPoint 410 Telephone 1st Add-On Device 2nd Add-On Device

optiPoint 410 standard

optiPoint key module –

optiPoint key module optiPoint key module

optiPoint 410 display module –

optiPoint 410 display module optiPoint key module

optiPoint 410 display module optiPoint BLF

optiPoint BLF –optiPoint BLF optiPoint BLF1

1 Configuration with two optiPoint BLFs only with HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700

optiPoint key module optiPoint BLF



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.6.2 optiClient 130 V4.0

Definition

optiClient 130 is a computer-based approximation of the optiPoint 500 telephone and its fea-tures. By using VoIP and supporting the H.323 standard, all essential CorNet N features areimmediately available to the customer on the PC when using the client in conjunction with Hi-Path 3000/5000. Communication is possible with all connected voice terminals.

User Interfaces

optiClient 130 is a software solution only and provides users with the following user interfaces:

optiClient 130 phoneoptiset E/optiPoint 500-based user interface with the following advantages:

– Quick, user-friendly operation with the same look and feel as that of optiset E and op-tiPoint 500 telephone sets.

– Availability of all conventional telephone functions.

optiClient 130 officeToolbar-based user interface with the following advantages:

– Clear and concise setup of different operating features.

– The “Dial” function window can be docked as a status toolbar on the desktop.

– All functions are currently available on screen. optiClient 130 easyCom

Intuitively developed user interface with a communication circle and the following advan-tages:

– User-friendly operation via drag&drop.

– Graphical representation of connection status.

– Creation of different designs.

– Integrated feature for sending e-mails to all parts.

– Application sharing between optiClient 130 easyCom connections.



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Application Options

Figure 9-28 shows two possible applications of the optiClient 130

Use of the optiClient 130 on the HiPath 3000 LAN

Use of the optiClient 130 as a home workstation over remote access

Features for All Interfaces

In conjunction with HiPath 3000/5000, optiClient 130 uses optiPoint 500 functionalities.The client also features ACD functions.

Quick and error-free dialing directly from the address book (LDAP or a private telephonedirectory, for example).

PC application connection: quick and error-free dialing directly from the PC application ad-dress book (MS Outlook, for example) via CTI (TAPI).

Automatic software updates via cyclical checks for new versions.

Figure 9-28 Possible Uses of the optiClient 130

HiPath 3000

Central Board

ISDN board

HG1500

ClientLAN

ISDNTelecommunica-

tions network

optiClient 130

Internetconnection

Example: use ashome workstation

optiClient 130with remote access

ISDN



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


Technical Features

Support of all essential features in compliance with CorNet N

Audio compression: G.711, G.723.1 (software codec)

Standard LAN protocols (Ethernet, IP, UDP, TCP, RTP, etc.)

H.323 protocol

Interoperability with Microsoft NetMeeting via T 120

H.323 client with H.323/H.320 gateway support

Usable transmission bandwidth for voice connections max. 64 Kbps

Minimum Hardware/Software Requirements

Pentium II 233 MHz or higher

64 Mbps memory for MS Windows 98/Windows ME

128 Mbps memory for MS Windows NT4.0/Windows 2000 SP2

Min. of 50 Mbps free memory on the hard disk

CD-ROM disk drive

Ethernet network card

Sound card capable of full-duplex, or optiPoint handset (optiPoint handset does not oper-

ate under MS Windows NT4.0).The following components are also necessary for using sound cards: microphone andloudspeaker (possibly also a handset or headset); or, alternatively, a multimedia keyboardalso featuring a hookswitch. This can, however, only be used for MS Windows NT4.0 andMS Windows 2000.

MS Windows 98, MS Windows ME, MS Windows NT4.0 (min. SP 5), MS Windows 2000operating systems.At least IE 4.01 SP 2 is required for MS Windows NT4.0 (IE 5.5 is supplied on CD).

Configuration

Use HiPath 3000 Manager E to configure a workpoint client for HiPath 3000/5000.

optiClient 130 software is upgraded automatically via Update. This can be started on a user-specific basis during login, cyclically or can be skipped.



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


9.6.3 HiPath AP 1100, HiPath AP 1140

HiPath AP 1100 and AP 1140 terminal adapters enable the connection of analog workpoint cli-ents to an IP network. Workpoint clients include analog telephones, fax machines (Group 3)

and modems (up to 33,6 kbps). Telephone calls and faxes can be transmitted over the publicInternet via the Ethernet (10BaseT) interface and by using the Internet protocol (IP).

Interfaces

1 Ethernet (1BaseT) interface

1 x RJ11 (HiPath AP 1100)or4 x RJ11 (HiPath AP 1140), for connecting the analog workpoint client(s)

Power supply unit

Connection and Configuration

Information on connecting and configuring HiPath AP 1100 and HiPath AP 1140 terminaladapters can be obtained from the Operation and Administration Manuals (http://www.sie-mens.com/hipath (–> Downloads)).

Note on configuring the HiPath AP 1100 and HiPath AP 1140 terminal adapters on HiPath3000/5000 V4.0 using HiPath 3000 Manager E:

Card configuration (HXGM, HXGS): Configure terminal adapter AP 1100/AP 1140 as the

S0 extension. Set up station (station): The following information must be entered for each Ethernet

(10BaseT) interface of the terminal adapter (AP 1100 = 1 interface, AP 1140 = 4 interfac-es):

– call number

– IP adress of the terminal adapter (parameter workpoint client)

– station type (parameter station type), corresponding to the extension to be connected,for example „Fax“



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.6.4 HG1500 V3.0: Determining the Number of HG1500 BoardsRequired

Introduction

With HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0, HG1500 V3.0 provide the resources described in Table 9-10. Ta-ble 9-11 shows the board-specific capacity limits (maximum configuration) for the correspond-ing functions.

> Additional information on this topic can be found in the HG1500 V3.0 ConfigurationManual.

Table 9-10 Technical Data (Resources) of the HG1500 V3.0 Boards

Resources HXGM3 HXGS3HXGR3

withPDM1

Routing channels/ vCAPI channelsA routing channel is required, for ex-ample, for making connections be-tween two IP networks via ISDN (IS-DN routing).

16 16

Gateway channelsA gateway channel is required, forexample, for connection between anIP workpoint client and a TDM work-point client (e.g. optiPoint 500).

16 16

PBX networking channels (IP net-working channels)A PBX networking channel is re-quired for connecting workpoint cli-ents between IP network nodes.

16 16

Fax channelsThese are special hardware resourc-es which facilitate fax via vCAPI andthe data gateway functionality.

3 2



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


DSP channels for MoH (G.711/ G.723)A DSP channel is automatically re-served for MOH when the first work-point client is configured.Each DSP channel, i.e. eachHG1500 board, supports up to 10MOH data streams. This means that

up to 10 IP workpoint clients (systemclients) can simultaneously hearMOH.

1 1

Simultaneously active IP workpointclients (system clients)This value is also the maximum num-ber of IP workpoints to be configured(system clients)

96 96

LAN connectionsNumber of LAN connection that can

be used as DSL connections.

21

21

Table 9-11 HG1500 V3.0 - Board-Specific Capacity Limits (Maximum Configuration)

Function HXGM3 HXGS3HXGR3

withPDM1

Routing partner 70 70

vCAPI clients

IP workpoint clients that supportvCAPI.

100 100

IP workpoint clients (system clients) 96 96

H.323 clients 48 48

Table 9-10 Technical Data (Resources) of the HG1500 V3.0 Boards

Resources HXGM3 HXGS3HXGR3

withPDM1



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.6.4.1 Applications of the HG1500 Boards

HG1500 V3.0 boards are used for the following functionalities.

9.6.4.1.1 IP Payload Switching

Communication between IP workpoint clients in the LAN is performed via IP payload switching.

VoIP voice data (payload) is transferred directly between two IP workpoint clients in the networkfor internal network calls. When this happens, both IP workpoint clients have full access to allsystem features.

A PBX network channel is required for signaling in cross-network connections.

Prerequisites

The following components are necessary for using payload switching: IP workpoint clients

– of type optiPoint 410 (V4.0 SMR-6 or Later)

– optiClient 130 V4.0

– optiPoint 400 standard 3.0

– optiPoint 400 economy 3.0

– optiPoint 600 office in CorNet-IP mode

HG1500 boards with Digital Signal Processor DSP (voice and data)

>Information about the various board models can be found in the following tables: Table 3-23 - HXGM3 Table 3-29 - HXGS3 / HXGR3



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


9.6.4.1.2 Gateway Functionality

Gateway connections are required for connections to TDM workpoint clients and lines. A gate-way channel is required on the HG1500 board for each gateway connection. TDM workpoint

clients and lines include, for example, UP0/E stations (optiset E, optiPoint 500)

CMI stations

Analog stations

ISDN stations

Trunk and tie lines (MSI, S0, S2M)

Examples: a consultation call to an optiPoint 500 telephone is set up during an existing connec-

tion between two IP workpoint clients. A HG1500 gateway channel is necessary on the HG1500board for the consultation call.An IP workpoint client seizes a trunk. A HG1500 gateway channel is required on the HG1500board for this trunk.

In the case of conferences, the number of gateway channels seized corresponds to the numberof stations and IP workpoint clients involved.

A DSP resource (not a B channel) is permanently reserved for every HG1500 board for playingmusic on hold (MOH). Each DSP resource, i.e. each HG1500 board supports up to 10 MOHdata streams. This means that up to 10 IP workpoint clients can simultaneously hear MOH.

Example: a license was acquired for two gateway channels and six clients. Six optiPoint 410standard are logged on. The following scenario is possible in this case: two stations can con-duct an external call, while two stations are listening to MoH and two stations are talking to eachother.

9.6.4.1.3 ISDN Routing

HG1500 boards can also be used as ISDN routers. The ISDN router can connect two physicallyseparate IP networks together via an ISDN line. Channel bundling can be used to adjust therequired bandwidth.

If an IP workpoint client wants to call an IP workpoint client that is located in another networkvia ISDN, the ISDN router (HG1500) sets up the connection between the two networks. In thisway, IP data traffic can also be routed via ISDN lines.

The router thus enables connection over different networks.

The ISDN router can also provide Internet access and facilitate teleworker access to a compa-ny network.



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.6.4.2 Determining the Number of HG1500 V3.0 Boards Required

The intensity with which gateway connections are used determines the number of HG1500boards necessary.

Channels for Gateway Connections

The following table shows the number of gateway channels (HG1500 boards) necessary basedon the existing IP workpoint clients.

A prerequisite for value calculation is that a station must spend 10% of its working time in callstatus. Provisions should be made for more gateway channels (HG1500 boards) in high trafficvolume environment (e.g. call centers).

Table 9-12 Number of Required Gateway Channels (HG1500 Boards)

IP Workpoint Clients in the system Required number of gateway channels0 – 3 2

4 – 12 4

13 – 16 6

17 – 38 8

39 – 54 10

55 – 70 12

71 – 86 14

87 – 96 1597 – 101 16

102 – 136 20

137 – 172 24

173 – 210 28

211 – 247 32

248 – 324 40

325 – 402 48

403 – 481 56482 – 500 64



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Sufficient HG1500 Resources?

Using the following calculations you can determine if the available HG1500 V3.0 boards aresufficient or if additional resources are required in the form of other HG1500 boards.

Following tests, the performance level required by each HG1500 V3.0 function was determined,and assigned a value in points. This is the performance level that must be supported by theboard. The calculation is based on the assumption that the following performance point totalsare available for each HG1500 board:

HG1500 Boards Total PerformancePoints per Board

V3.0 HXGM3 (V4.0 SMR-4 or Later) 770

HXGS3 and HXGR3 (V4.0 SMR-4 or Later) without PDM1

770

HXGS3 and HXGR3 (V4.0 SMR-4 or Later) withPDM1

720

Table 9-13 HG1500 Boards: Required Performance Level

Function Required Performance Level

HG1500 V3.0

Gateway connections,per gateway channel

G.711 (voice uncompressed) 47(receive/send = 20/30 ms)

G.723 (voice compressed) 36(receive/send = 30/30 ms)

IP workpoint client(system client/H.323client)

with normal traffic volume, withapprox. 5 calls per hour

1

with high traffic volume, with ap-prox. 10 calls per hour

2

IP trunking (signaling, 25 calls per hour) 4

ISDN routing (data), per routing channel 16

ISDN routing (voice),per routing channel

G.723 (packeting = 3) 57(packet size = 60 ms)

G.723 (packeting = 1 = default) 100(packet size = 30 ms)





Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


Calculation example:

vCAPI, per channel 34

LAN-LAN routing (1000 packets/s with 1500 bytes) 230

DSL routing 66(768 kbps download)

HG1500 V3.0

Channels for gatewayconnections (G.711)= 10

+ IP workpoint clients (sys-tem clients) with normaltraffic volume = 20

+ Channels for ISDN rout-ing (data) = 5

10 x 47 + 20 x 1 + 5 x 16 = 570

The required performance level in this case can be provided using a single HXGM3 or HXGS3/ HXGR3 board (without PDM1).

Table 9-13 HG1500 Boards: Required Performance Level

Function Required Performance Level

HG1500 V3.0



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


9.6.4.3 Notes on B Channel Distribution in the Case of IP Networking

The number of simultaneous connections possible between IP workpoint clients (system cli-ents) depends on

the number of licensed clients (in the case of internal node connections between IP work-point clients),

the number of available IP networking channels in the case of node-to-node connections(IP networking) between IP workpoint clients. Reason: In order to signal a connection, oneline (one B channel) is always required.

Example of B Channel Distribution in the Case of IP Networking

Note on Music On Hold (MOH): When an IP workpoint client is configured, a B channel/gatewaychannel and a DSP channel for MOH are automatically reserved. A license is not required forthe MOH channel. If 8 B channels are licensed, this means that the MOH channel can be usedas a 9th channel. A DSP channel is also reserved.

If 16 B channels are licensed and used exclusively for IP workpoint clients, the 16th B channelmust be used as the MOH channel.

If 16 B channels are licensed and used for mixed operation (e.g. 8 B channels for IP networkingand 8 B channels for IP workpoint clients), the MOH channel is selected from the set of B chan-nels intended for IP workpoint clients.

Number of licensed B channels = 8 This means that 8 channels to the

switching network are permitted.– Number of lines reserved for IP networking

(IP networking channels) =3 Configured with HiPath 3000 Manag-

er E

– Number of routing channels = 2 Configured withHiPath 3000 Manager I / WBM

= Number of remaining B channels for IP work-point clients and gateway channels =

3



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

Attendant Console Versions

9.7 Attendant Console Versions

9.7.1 optiPoint Attendant

A specially equipped optiPoint 500 basic, optiPoint 500 standard, optiPoint 500 advance or op-tiPoint 600 office can perform the switching service for HiPath 3000/5000. This optiPoint Atten-dant simultaneously serves as the intercept position. It is the destination for all incoming non-DID calls and calls which the call-allocation algorithms are unable to route to users (interceptcalls). The attendant routes these calls to the correct destination.

Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint Attendant

Refer to the optiPoint Attendant for HiPath 3000/5000 Operating Manual which is on the “Elec-tronic Operating Instructions” CD (see Section 1.2.5, Information on the Intranet: ElectronicDocumentation on Com ESY Products).

Figure 9-29 optiPoint 500 standard - Standard Key Assignments (Default) for optiPoint At-tendant

Service Night answer

Redial Telephone directory

Microphone on/off Call waiting

Speaker Intrusion

Hold

External 1

External 2

Release



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


9.7.2 optiClient Attendant

Introduction

optiClient Attendant V6.0 is a PC-based attendant console (Attendant P) for HiPath 3000/5000,which can be used up to six times per system.

The optiClient Attendant can also be operated as a central attendant console in a HiPath net-work.

Main Functions

Display of queued calls with type, name and telephone number

Acoustic message signaling with volume control

Display of the switching state of source and target Answering of pending calls

Speed extending of calls

Speed dialing with PC busy lamp field

Electronic telephone directory with Outlook contacts (dialing in canonical format is not sup-ported at present, not possible with Outlook Express either)

Notebook function for saving and dialing call numbers

Additional functions such as hold keys, override, callback, conference, paging, speaker an-nouncements, alarm signaling, view call charges, redial (last 10 dialed destinations)

Online Help under Windows

Convenient configuration of individual features

Service tools for diagnosis and protocols

Simple installation routine

User interface currently available in German, English, Dutch, Portuguese, Italian, Frenchand Spanish

Connection with charges for single calls with automatic display in the notebook (printable)

Search in internal telephone directory of the communication system

Connection of a blind attendant console

>Dialing from an Access database is not supported with optiClient Attendant

V6.0 or later. Dialing with Outlook contacts has been implemented instead.



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


Connection Variants for Microsoft Operating Systems

Windows ® 95 is not available.

System Requirements

Pentium III 300 MHz or higher

Min. 32 MB RAM (memory)

Graphics resolution min. 1024 x 768 pixels

Sound card with headset for signaling incoming calls

Microsoft-compatible mouse

CD-ROM or DVD drive

Min. of 50 Mbps free hard disk memory

For operation with a TCP/IP connection: Operational installation of the optiClient 130 soft-ware with configured network and sound card.

For operation on USB: optiPoint 500 telephone or optiPoint 600 office with free USB inter-face, USB cable (part number S30267-Z360-A30-1), USB driver (Call-Bridge TU) and afree USB port on the PC.

For operation using optiset E control adapters: optiset E telephone with free adapter slotand a free interface on the PC (COM ports 1-4).

Connection variant Windows ® 98 Windows ® NT

V4.0

Windows ® 2000 Windows ® XP

optiset E controladapters

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Integrated USB inter-face (optiPoint 500and optiPoint 600 of-fice)

Yes No Yes Yes

TCP/IP based on op-tiClient 130 in theLAN

No No Yes Yes



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Licensing

The optiClient Attendant V6.0 is subject to compulsory licensing. The final license must be ob-tained within 30 days of installation.

The end customer is responsible for licensing. Because the registration includes details suchas PC-relevant hardware information, both hardware replacement/upgrade and operating sys-tem change/reinstallation operations necessitate reregistration.

Model-Specific Data

Configuration and Operation

Information on installation can be found in the optiClient Attendant product software CD book-let.

The optiClient Attendant operating instructions are described in detail in the optiClient Atten-dant Operating Manual for HiPath 3000/5000 which is on the CD “Electronic Operating Instruc-tions” (refer to Section 1.2.5, Information on the Intranet: Electronic Documentation on ComESY Products).

Topic HiPath 3750HiPath 3700



Feature available in x x x

Hardware requirements – – –Software requirements V1.0 and later V1.0 and later V1.0 and later

Maximum number of connectableoptiClient Attendants

6 4 4

7WARNING (for U.S. Only)optiClient Attendant is a UL Listed I.T.E. Accessory (2Z02) for use only in UL Listedcomputers.



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

HiPath Cordless Office Telephones

9.8 HiPath Cordless Office Telephones

HiPath Cordless Office supports the mobile telephones described below. For more information,refer to the operating instructions for the specific telephones or the service manual for HiPath

Cordless Office.

9.8.1 Gigaset active Handset

Main Features

The Gigaset active industrial handset was specially designed to withstand the rigors of an in-dustrial environment. A special EX-protected version is available for areas subject to explosion.A Tango version for Latin America (frequency range 1.91 – 1.93 GHz) is not available.

The Gigaset active has the same controls, indicators, and features as the Gigaset 2000C. Vibration- and crack-resistant, dustproof housing

Spray-resistant according to EN 60529 Cl .IP 64

Connection for a headset

Call acoustics adapted to industrial environment (including increased volume)

Figure 9-30 Gigaset active Handset



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


EX version meets explosion protection standards according to EN 50014/ 50020 with clas-sification (EEx ib IICT4)

Weight including battery: around 160 g

Dimensions: 160 x 55 x 25 mm (L x W x D)

Permitted environmental conditions for operation (in non-weather-protected environment):

– Handset –10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)

– Display 0 °C to +45 °C (32 °F to 113 °F)

– 100% relative humidity

9.8.2 Gigaset 3000 Comfort Feature Handset

Main Features

12-button alphanumeric keypad (0-9,*,#)

3 function keys:

– 1 menu key for menu selection

– 2 dual-mode keys for up to four soft key functions

Figure 9-31 Gigaset 3000 Comfort Feature Handset



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


Seizure key (on-hook)

Release key (off-hook)

Hookswitch (register recall)

Speakerphone

Illuminated graphical display (up to 4 lines and 16 columns)

Enhanced user prompting with on-screen messages (multilingual)

Handset phone book for around 100 entries. Redial of the last five numbers.

Weight, including battery: around 165 g

Dimensions: 60 x 50 x 28 mm (L x W x D)

Permitted environmental conditions for operation:– +5 °C to +45 °C (41 °F to 113 °F)

– 20% to 75% relative humidity

9.8.3 Gigaset 3000 Micro Feature Handset

Figure 9-32 Gigaset 3000 Micro Feature Handset



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Main Features

12-button alphanumeric keypad (0-9,*,#)

3 function keys:

– 1 menu key for menu selection

– 2 dual-mode keys for up to 4 soft key functions

Seizure key (on-hook)

Release key (off-hook)

Hookswitch (register recall)

Illuminated graphic display (up to 4 lines and 16 columns)

Enhanced user prompting with on-screen messages (multilingual) Handset phone book for approximately 100 entries. Redial of last five numbers.

Weight, including battery: approx. 98 g

Dimensions: approx. 122 x 43 x 18 mm (L x W x H)

Permitted environmental conditions for operation:

– +5 °C to +45 °C (41 °F to 113 °F)




Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.8.4 Gigaset 4000 Comfort Feature Handset

Main Features

Alphanumeric 12-digit keypad

2 display keys

Control key (navigation key)

6 function keys:

– Off-hook key

– On-hook and on/off key

– Speakerphone key

– Caller list– Keylock (#)

– Star key (*)

Hookswitch key function (flash)

Speakerphone mode and open listening

Illuminated graphics display (5 lines, 101 x 64 pixels)

Figure 9-33 Gigaset 4000 Comfort Feature Handset



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Multilingual (13) user prompts

Internal handset directory for approx. 200 entries. Redial option for last five numbers di-alled.

Weight incl. battery: approx. 150 g

Dimensions: approx. 155.5 x 53.6 x 36.2 mm (L x W x D)


– +5 °C to +45 °C (41 °F to 113 °F)


9.8.5 Gigaset 4000 Micro Feature Handset

Main Features

Alphanumeric 12-digit keypad

2 display keys

Control key (navigation key)

Figure 9-34 Gigaset 4000 Micro Feature Handset



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


6 function keys:

– Off-hook key

– On-hook and on/off key

– Speakerphone key

– Caller list

– Keylock (#)

– Star key (*)

Hookswitch key function (flash)

Illuminated graphics display (5 lines, 101 x 64 pixels)

Multilingual (13) user prompts Internal handset directory for approx. 200 entries. Redial option for last five numbers di-

alled.

Vibrating alarm

Weight incl. battery: approx. 100 g

Dimensions: approx. 112.5 x 45.1 x 24.7 mm (L x W x D)


– +5 °C to +45 °C (41 °F to 113 °F)– 20% to 75% relative humidity



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


9.8.6 Logging On Mobile Telephones to the System

Introduction

Sixteen mobile telephones are released for use by entering the HiPath cordless system number(DECT identification, 8 hexadecimal places) and inserting the SLC16 or SLC16N board into Hi-Path 3750, HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3700, after which they can be logged on (mobile telephonecodes, or PINs, are assigned). Other mobile telephones must be released before they can beused.

Before logging on a mobile phone, you must open the login window from a system telephone

(Manager T) by entering the code and password. A maximum of 10 login windows can be openat a time. Then type the station numbers of the mobile telephones you want to log on.

9.8.6.1 Open the Login Window in HiPath 3000

The login window remains open for ten minutes per station. The handset must log on duringthis period (refer to page 9-80).

>For initial installation of the HiPath Cordless Office, the HiPath cordless system num-ber must be ordered together with the SLC16/SLC16N board. Later shipments of re-placement boards do not come with HiPath cordless system numbers.

Entry Action Display

*94 2 19970707 Open the login window Station no.:

124 Type the station number of the handsetyou want to log on (such as 124)

Station no:

125 Type the station number of the secondhandset you want to log on (such as 125)

Station no:

::

::

::



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.8.6.2 Log On the Mobile Telephone (for Gigaset 3000 Comfort, 3000 Micro)

Example: Log the mobile telephone (station number 125) onto the DECT telephone system 2,using mobile telephone PIN 11112345 .

After logging on and releasing a handset, always turn on the out-of-range warning signal. Formore information, refer to the operating instructions.

Step Entry or Key Handset Display

1. Switch on the mobile telephone by holdingdown the hook key for at least 1 second.You hear a confirmation tone.

The first time you log on, the messageRegister? appears on the handset dis-play. The second time you log on,Base 1 or a similar message is dis-played.

2. Make the following entries within oneminute.Press the menu key.

3. Select a base1 (such as Base 2 ) and con-firm.

1 Base = DECT telephone system

4. Open the add-on menu.

5. Select Register and confirm your choice. The following prompt appears:“Please enter system PIN:”

6. Enter the eight-digit system PIN (mobiletelephone code) 11112345 and confirm.

11112345

7. Once you have logged on properly, Base 2 or a similar message appears and the bellsymbol flashes.

Base 2

Base 2



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


9.8.6.3 Log On the Mobile Telephone (for Gigaset 4000 Comfort, 4000 Micro)

Example: Log the mobile telephone (station number 125) onto the DECT telephone system 2,using mobile telephone PIN 11112345 .

After logging on and releasing a handset, always turn on the out-of-range warning signal. Formore information, refer to the operating instructions.

Step Entry or Key Handset Display

1. Switch on the mobile telephone by holdingdown the hook key for at least 1 second.You hear a confirmation tone.

The first time you log on, the mes-sage Register? appears on thehandset display. The second timeyou log on, Base 1 or a similarmessage is displayed.

2. Make the following entries within one minute.Press the menu key.

3. Select a base1 (such as Base 2 ) and confirm.

1 Base = DECT telephone system

4. Open the add-on menu.

5. Select Register and confirm your choice. The following prompt appears:“Please enter PIN:”

6. Enter the eight-digit PIN (mobile telephonecode) 11112345 and confirm.

“11112345”

7. Once you have logged on properly, Base 2 ora similar message appears and the bell sym-bol flashes.

Base 2

Base 2



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.8.6.4 Check the Login Status of the Mobile Telephones

You can use the Stations object in HiPath 3000 Manager E to check the current login status ofthe mobile telephones. Double-click the Param field with the left mouse button to open the Sta-

tion Parameters window. Select the Type tab to display the station data. The CMI field showsthe login status of the individual mobile telephones.

9.8.6.5 Replace, Lock, and Log Off a Mobile Telephone

If you need to replace a handset for servicing, you must change the mobile telephone code(PIN) of the old handset before logging on the replacement telephone.

>When you replace a mobile telephone, the station must be assigned a new mobiletelephone code (PIN) in the HiPath 3000 system. This automatically logs off the mo-bile telephone.

This also prevents a person who knows the old PIN to log on an invalid mobile tele-phone.



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients

Analog Telephones for HiPath 3000

9.9 Analog Telephones for HiPath 3000

You can connect dial pulsing (DP) and DTMF telephones (such as Group 3 fax machines andmodems, answering machines, or entrance telephones) to the analog ports in the HiPath 3000.

Boards for Connecting Analog Telephones

Refer to Section 8.2.1 for information on upgrading peripheral boards in HiPath 3750 and Hi-Path 3700.

Boards for Connecting Analog Telephones (for U.S. Only)

Connecting Equipment using an optiPoint analog adapter




Hardware requirements Free analog port onSLA16

SLA8N/16N/24N

Free analog port onCBCCCBRC

4/8/16SLA

8SLARSLA8N/16N/24N

Free analog port onCBCCCBRC4/8SLA

8SLAR




Hardware requirements Free analog port onSLA16N/24N Free analog port onCBCCCBRC8SLA

8SLARSLA16N/24N

Free analog port onCBCCCBRC8SLA

8SLAR

>It is also possible to connect an analog telephone to an existing optiPoint 500 tele-

phone with the optiPoint analog adapter (except for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint500 economy).



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm

ISDN Terminals for HiPath 3000

9.10 ISDN Terminals for HiPath 3000

An S0 bus in the HiPath 3000 system family can support up to eight ISDN terminals. Each ter-minal can be dialed selectively under its multiple subscriber number or station number.

The features that can be activated depend on the type of terminal used. Different ISDN featuresare supported depending on the terminal used. Analog station users can activate system fea-tures by means of code procedures. The telephones support only those system features whichcan be activated in the idle state.

Boards for Connecting ISDN Terminals

Refer to Section 8.2.1 for information on upgrading peripheral boards in HiPath 3750 and Hi-Path 3700.

Connecting With an optiPoint ISDN adapter




Hardware requirements Free S0 port onSTMD8 Free S0 port onCBCCCBRC

STLS2/4STLS4R

Free S0 port onCBCCCBRC

STLS2/4STLS4R

>It is also possible to connect an ISDN device to an existing optiPoint 500 telephoneusing an optiPoint ISDN adapter (except for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500economy).



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


9.10.1 General S0 Wiring (for U.S. Only)

S0 wiring in the user premises is considered to be one continuous cable run with jacks for theterminating equipment (ISDN terminals) attached directly to the cable or using stubs less than

3 feet (0.91 m) in length. The jacks are located at point I interfaces in Figure 9-35. One point Iinterface is adjacent to each terminal. The wiring between each jack and its ISDN terminal cannot exceed 30 feet (9.14 m).

Figure 9-35 Reference Wiring Configuration in the User Premises Location

HiPath 3000

Tn

T1

TR

In

I1

LegendT ISDN TerminalTR Terminating Resistor, 100 ohms

(located at wall jack)I Wall jack location

T0I03 ft. (0.91 m)

30 ft. (9.14 m)



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


9.10.1.1 Specific S0 Wiring Configurations

This section describes wiring arrangements for three major S0 configurations:

Point-to-point

Point-to-multipoint—short passive bus

Point-to-multipoint—extended passive bus

Several other wiring configurations are possible; however, the wiring is guaranteed to work onlyif the configuration meets the electrical specifications described in ANSI T1.605-1991.

Point-to-Point

In a point-to-point configuration, only one terminal device is connected to each S0 port on thesystem; therefore, the connection is a direct connection.

Configuration Restrictions

The following maximums apply to point-to-point S0 wiring:

Maximum distance between the system and the device is 3000 feet (914.40 m), as shownin Figure 9-36

Maximum line-to-jack distance is 3 feet (0.91 m)

Maximum jack-to-device distance is 30 feet (9.14 m)

A 100-ohm termination is required at the ISDN terminal. If the terminal does not have a built-intermination, you must install a separate 100-ohm ISDN terminating resistor module (ModelNumber 256503) anywhere between the terminal and its wall jack.

Figure 9-36 S0 Point-to-Point Wiring

I

L = 3000 ft. (914.40 m)

TR

T 0

T ISDN TerminalTR Terminating Resistor, 100 ohms


Legend

HiPath 3000



wclient.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Workpoint Clients


Point-to-Multipoint—Short Passive Bus

A short passive bus configuration is one in which the ISDN terminals are connected at randompoints along the full length of the cable.


The following maximums apply to point-to-multipoint—short passive bus configurations:

Maximum cable distance between the system and the last terminal on the line is 405 feet(123.44 m), as shown in Figure 9-37

Supports maximum of four terminals

Maximum cable length is 30 feet (9.14 m) between each terminal and the wall jack


The terminating resistor (Model Number 256503) must be located anywhere between the lastterminal and its wall jack.

Figure 9-37 Short Passive Bus Configuration

Tn

T1

TR

In

I1

Legend



T0I03 ft. (0.91 m)

30 ft. (9.14 m)

L = 405 ft. (123.44 m)

HiPath 3000



Workpoint Clients

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


wclient.fm


Point-to-Multipoint—Extended Passive Bus

An extended passive bus configuration is one in which the ISDN terminals are grouped at thefar end of the line.


The following maximums apply to point-to-multipoint—short passive bus configurations:

Maximum cable distance between the system and the last device in the group is 1500 feet(457.20 m)

Maximum distance between the first ISDN terminal and the last ISDN terminal is 75 feet(22.86 m), as shown in Figure 9-38


Maximum jack-to-device distance is 30 feet (9.14 m)

Supports maximum of four ISDN terminals

The terminating resistor (Model Number 256503) must be located anywhere between the lastterminal and its wall jack.

Figure 9-38 Extended Passive Bus Configuration

Tn

I

L = 1500 ft. (457.20 m)

L = 75 ft.

(22.86 m)

3 ft. (0.91 m)

30 ft. (9.14 m)

TR

T0I0

I1Legend



HiPath 3000



cordless.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


HiPath Cordless Office

Overview

10 HiPath Cordless Office

This chapter contains basic information about the operation of the HiPath Cordless Office. For

more detailed information, please refer to the HiPath Cordless Office service manual.

10.1 Overview

In this chapter


Topic

Introduction, page 10-2

System Configuration, page 10-3

Technical Data for Base Stations, page 10-4

Power-Related Capacity Limits, page 10-6

Multi-SLC and System-Wide Networking, page 10-9

Planning Notes for Networked HiPath 3000 Systems Featuring Network-Wide Roaming, page10-11




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


cordless.fm

Introduction

10.2 Introduction

For Version 1.2 and later of HiPath 3000, HiPath Cordless Office can be used on all systems ofthis product line.

The BS3/1 (S30807-H5482-X) base station can be

directly connected to the UP0/E interfaces in the central control boards for HiPath 3550, Hi-Path 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300.

directly connected to the UP0/E interfaces in the SLC16 and SLC16N board for HiPath3750, HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3700.

To ensure the operation of a maximum of one base station on the central control board’s UP0/

E interfaces of the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300, a BS3/S (X30807-X5482-X100) single-cell base station can be used. In this case, it is not possible to expand with

additional base stations.A mix of both the BS2/2 (S30807-H5471-X200), BS3/1 (S30807-H5482-X), and BS3/3(S30807-H5485-X) base stations may be used on one SLC16 or one SLC16N board.

However, the BS3/1 base station cannot be simultaneously connected to the SLC16/SLC16Nboard and the CBCC within one HiPath 3550 system.

Up to four SLC16 or SLC16N boards can be used within HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. Theseboards provide complete cordless functionality (roaming and seamless connection handover)(refer to Section 10.6).SLC16 and SLC16N boards can be used in mixed mode within a single system.

V1.2, V3.0 and V4.0 of the HiPath 3000 product line do not currently support the network-widehandover feature.



cordless.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



System Configuration

10.3 System Configuration

The following table indicates the maximum possible system configuration parameters for theHiPath Cordless Office. It also shows when

CMA or CMS is necessary.

an analog trunk access is possible.

Table 10-1 HiPath Cordless Office - System Configuration for HiPath 3000 V4.0

S y s t e m

SWVersion

Max.no.

C l o c k

M o d u l e

Maximum number of basestations BS

Simultaneouscalls per BS

M a x . n o . o f

M T s

A n a l o g

t r u n k a c c e s s

V 4 . 0

S L C 1 6

S L C 1 6 N

B

S 3 / 1 v i a

1 x U P 0 / E

B

S 3 / S v i a

1 x U P 0 / E

B

S 2 / 2 v i a

2 / 1 x U P 0 / E

B

S 3 / 3 v i a

3 / 2 x U P 0 / E

B S 3 / 1

B S 3 / S

B S 2 / 2

B S 3 / 3


X – – CMS – 1 – – – 2 – – 16 no

X – – CMA – 1 – – – 4 – – 16 yes

X – – CMA 3 – – – 4 – – – 16 yes


X – – CMS – 1 – – – 2 – – 32 no

X – – CMA – 1 – – – 4 – – 32 yes

X – – CMA 7 – – – 4 – – – 32 yes

HiPath 3550 X 1 11

1 SLC16N can be used in conjunction with special SMRs for V1.2 and V3.0. Please refer to the respective sales releasedocumentation for further details.

CMS 16 – 8/16 4/8 4 – 8 12 64 yes

HiPath 3750

HiPath 3700 X 4 41

CMS 64 – 32/64 21/32 4 – 8 12

250 (with

4 SLC16/ SLC16N)2

2 Up to 128 handsets are possible at an SLC16 or SLC16N.

yes

Comments: BS3/1 (S30807-H5482-X) is a base station (Figure 10-1) that supports a maximum of 4 calls simultaneous-

ly. BS2/2 (S30807-H5471-X200)is a base station that facilitates up to 8 simultaneous calls. BS3/3 (S30807-H5485-X) is a base station that can only be operated using the SLC16 and SLC16N board.

It supports a maximum of 12 calls when connected using three UP0/E interfaces. BS3/S (X30807-X5482-X100): The BS3/S single-cell base station guarantees the operation of a maximum

of one base station on the UP0/E interfaces of the central board. It is not possible to operate additional basestations.

HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300: It is possible to operate the BS3/1 base station on

the UP0/E interfaces of the central board only in connection with the CMA clock module.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


cordless.fm

Technical Data for Base Stations

10.4 Technical Data for Base Stations

BS3/1 Base Station

Table 10-2 Technical Data for Various Base Stations

Parameter BS3/1 and BS3/S BS3/3 Outdoor cover

Power supply voltage range 42 to 54 V 42 to 54 V –

Power consumption max. 1.70 W max. 3.20 W –

Housing dimensions (W xD x H in mm)

181 x 139 x 69 202 x 172 x 43 296 x 256 x 90

Weight approx. 0.3 kg approx. 0.5 kg approx. 1.0 kg

Temperature range for indoor use:– 5 to + 50 oC

for outdoor use:– 20 to + 45 oC

Relative humidity – – up to 95%

Figure 10-1 BS3/1 S30807-H5482-X Base Station



cordless.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Technical Data for Base Stations

Outdoor Cover

A base station must be installed in a weatherproof outdoor cover to guarantee radio coverageoutdoors, for example on factory premises. The outdoor cover is suitable for mounting on walls

of buildings, roofs, and masts.The outdoor cover S30122-X7469-X already available for BS2/2 is also used for the new basestations, BS3/1 (BS3/S) and BS3/3. The only difference is that you do not need a heater forBS3/1 (BS3/S) and BS3/3.

For information on the various outdoor cover mounting options, refer to the HiPath Cordless Of-fice Service Manual.

Figure 10-2 BS3/1 (BS3/S) and BS3/3 in the Outdoor Cover S30122-X7469-X

Outdoor housingwith BS3/1 (BS3/S)

The supplied Styrofoam block [1]should be used to affix the BS3/1

(BS3/S).

Outdoor housing

with BS3/3

[1]




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


cordless.fm

Power-Related Capacity Limits

10.5 Power-Related Capacity Limits

The number of base stations, their distance from the system, and the overall telephone config-uration determine whether or not the output from the internal system power supply units is suf-

ficient or whether an additional supply is necessary.

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700The internal system power supply unit provides sufficient power to the system configura-tion specified in Table 10-1.

HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500The following tables show which telephone configurations do not need an additional powersupply:

– Table 10-3, depending on the number of BS3/1base stations connected to the centralCBCC/CBRC control.

– Table 10-4, depending on the number of BS3/1base stations connected to SLC16 orSLC16N.

– Table 10-5, depending on the number of BS2/2 base stations connected to SLC16 orSLC16N.

– Table 10-6, depending on the number of BS3/3 connected to SLC16 or SLC16N.

If extra telephone configurations are added to these, an additional power supply (byEPSU2 / EPSU2-R) is needed.

Table 10-3 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 - Maximum number of corded telephonesdepending on the number of BS3/1 base stations connected to CBCC/ CBRC

Number ofBS3/1 base stations

connected toCBCC/CBRC

Maximum number of corded telephones

analog telephones

0 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50

optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones

1 66 61 57 53 48 44

2 63 59 54 50 46 41

3 60 56 52 47 43 394 58 53 49 45 40 36

5 55 51 47 42 38 33

6 53 48 44 40 35 31

7 50 46 41 37 33 28



cordless.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




Table 10-4 HiPath 3550 - Maximum number of corded telephones depending on thenumber of BS3/1 base stations connected to SLC16 or SLC16N


connected toSLC16 or SLC16N


analog telephones

0 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50


1 66 61 57 53 48 44

2 63 59 54 50 46 41

3 60 56 52 47 43 39

4 58 53 49 45 40 36

5 55 51 47 42 38 33

6 53 48 44 40 35 31

7 50 46 41 37 33 28

8 47 43 39 34 30 26

9 45 40 36 32 27 23

10 42 38 33 29 25 20

11 40 35 31 27 22 18

12 37 33 28 24 20 15

13 34 30 26 21 17 13

14 32 27 23 19 14 10

13 29 25 20 16 12 7

16 27 22 18 13 9 5

Table 10-5 HiPath 3550 - Maximum number of corded telephones depending on thenumber of BS2/2 connected to SLC16 or SLC16N




analog telephones

0 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50


1 63 59 54 50 46 41

2 58 53 49 45 40 363 53 48 44 40 35 31

4 47 43 39 34 30 26

5 42 38 33 29 25 20

6 37 33 28 24 20 15

7 32 27 23 19 14 10

8 27 22 18 13 9 5




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


cordless.fm


Base Station Power Supply

The internal power supply unit in the respective system is the main power source for the basestations. For more information on the various power supply options, please refer to page 3-114.

Table 10-6 HiPath 3550 - Maximum number of corded telephones depending on thenumber of BS3/3 base stations connected to SLC16 or SLC16N



Maximum number of cordedtelephones

analog telephones

0 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50


1 64 60 56 51 47 42

2 60 56 52 47 43 39

3 57 52 48 43 39 35

4 53 48 44 40 35 31

5 49 44 40 36 31 27

6 45 40 36 32 27 23

7 41 37 32 28 23 19

8 37 33 28 24 20 15

>When using an additional power supply (such as EPSU2 / EPSU2-R), HiPath3550 and HiPath 3500 can be expanded up to the maximum possible capacitylimit specified in Table 2-6.



cordless.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Multi-SLC and System-Wide Networking

10.6 Multi-SLC and System-Wide Networking

Multi-SLC (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700) and System-Wide Networking (HiPath 3750, HiPath

3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300)For Version 1.2 or later of HiPath 3000, up to four SLC16 or SLC16N (Multi-SLC) boards canbe used in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 (see “SLC16 and SLC16N Board Distribution in Hi-Path 3750 and HiPath 3700 Cabinets” on page 3-110). For the total mobility of the cordless sta-tion (roaming and seamless connection handover) within the system, the radio fields of theseSLC16/SLC16N boards are synchronized.

The system views each mobile telephone (mobile station) as a corded telephone. During theadministration, a fixed port on the system’s “Home SLC16/SLC16N board” is assigned to theMT; this is used for addressing the MT.

As soon as an MT is in the area of a different radio switching location (“Current location SLC16/ SLC16N board”), an extension connection is switched using a DSS1 connection initiated by theSLC16/SLC16N. The home and current location SLC16/SLC16N exchange networking proto-col (User-to-User Signaling UUS) over this extension connection to support full mobility (seeFigure 10-3).

This function can be used not only within one system, but also among systems (among nodes)because the CorNet-N used for networking supports the UUS protocol (note: for the system-wide extension connections, you may have to take additional B channels into consideration forthe permanent connection paths (CorNet-N)). That means full mobility across the radio fieldsof the different cordless systems. All features (such as callback, group functions, voicemail) of

the mobile telephone are retained, with the exception of the network-wide handover featurewhich is not currently supported.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


cordless.fm

Multi-SLC and System-Wide Networking

Networked HiPath 3000 systems feature

max. 64 networked systems

accessible using a common station number (roaming among the systems/nodes)

call interruption when changing between systems/nodes

Figure 10-3 Example of a SLC16 Extension Connection in Networked Systems

BS

SLC1

BS

CorNet-NHome SLC16SLC16 no. = 1Station no = 124

Current locationSLC16SLC16 no. = 11Station no = 128

HiPath 3750Node ID = 1

HiPath 3550Node ID = 2

Extensionconnection

BS

SLC1

BS

SLC16 no. = 2Station no. = 141

BS

SLC1

BSBS = BS2/2, BS3/1 orBS3/3

A CorNet-N connection is possible using S0 or S2M lines or IP networking (seeHG1500 V3.0 Configuration Manual).



cordless.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Planning Notes for Networked HiPath 3000 Systems Featuring Network-Wide Roaming

10.7 Planning Notes for Networked HiPath 3000 Systems FeaturingNetwork-Wide Roaming

The demand for additional 16 B channels for fixed connection paths (CorNet N) must be taken

into account for the system-wide extension connections described on page 10-9.

If the “Network-wide roaming” feature is used, please ensure that there is no overlapping in theradio areas of individual systems with identical DECT IDs. Networked systems with identicalDECT IDs are viewed as a single system by the handset.

If the radio areas of systems with identical DECT IDs overlap, mobile telephones inadvertentlytry to perform network wide handover, which results in communication breakdown.

If networking is required for systems in which the individual radio fields overlap (for example, toincrease capacity limits or through decentralized installation), different DECT IDs must be con-figured in the individual systems. Network-wide roaming does not apply in this case.

The following describes three different scenarios for networked HiPath 3000 systems.

Scenario 1: Incorrect DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems

Identical DECT IDs and overlapping radio areas result in incorrect handover causing a break-down in communication.

Figure 10-4 Incorrect DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems

PSTN

Networking (S0, S2M, IP)

HiPath 3000 System 1DECT ID = 4711





P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


cordless.fm

Planning Notes for Networked HiPath 3000 Systems Featuring Network-Wide Roaming

Scenario 2: Correct DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems

No incorrect handover due to identical DECT IDs despite overlapping radio areas. Disadvan-tage: network-wide roaming not possible.

Scenario 3: Correct DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems

No incorrect handover despite identical DECT IDs as the radio areas do not overlap. Network-wide roaming possible.

Figure 10-5 Correct DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems

Figure 10-6 Correct DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems

PSTN

Networking (S0, S2M, IP)



PSTN



Networking(S0, S2M, IP)



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Overview

11 Service

11.1 Overview

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the options available to service technicians and custom-ers for

performing service and maintenance work.

recognizing and correcting errors.

Such work can be performed on site or using remote service.

Chapter Contents

This chapter discusses the following topics.

Topic

Service and Maintenance Tasks, page 11-3:

Backing Up the Customer Database (CDB Backup), page 11-3

Effects of Hardware Changes on Customer Data, page 11-8

Relocate/Transfer Application Processor Software (APS), page 11-11

Upgrading HiPath 3000, page 11-16 Determining System Information and Installed Software Components (HiPath Inventory

Server), page 11-17

Backing Up System Components (Backup Manager) (V4.0 SMR-7 or Later), page 11-20

Licensing, page 11-22

Guided Maintenance, page 11-23:

Diagnosis Options, page 11-23

HiPath 3000 Error Messages, page 11-34

HiPath 5000 RSM Error Messages, page 11-42Correcting errors, page 11-57:

Automatic Error Correction, page 11-57

Manual Error Correction Without HiPath 3000 Manager E, page 11-57

Manual Error Correction With HiPath 3000 Manager E, page 11-58



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Overview

Remote Service, page 11-59:

HiPath 3000 Connection Options, page 11-60

HiPath 5000 RSM Connection Options, page 11-61

Remote System Administration, page 11-61

Remote Correction of System Software (APS), page 11-62

Remote Error Signaling, page 11-63

Controlled Release of a Remote Connection, page 11-64

Remote Administration and Access Using PPP, page 11-64

Security Features, page 11-65:

Access Security, page 11-65 Automatic Logging of Administration Procedures, page 11-72

Topic



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Service and Maintenance Tasks

11.2 Service and Maintenance Tasks

11.2.1 Backing Up the Customer Database (CDB Backup)

Here a distinction is made between

backup of customer data without HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager and

backup of customer data with HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager (V4.0 SMR-7 or later).

11.2.1.1 Customer Data Backup Without HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager

Definition

CDB backup refers to saving the customer database CDB to the multimedia card MMC (HiPath3000) or copying the cyclic RAM data and saving it in two PDS (Permanent Data Service) files(HiPath 5000 RSM).

Note: The Run LED signals that a CDB backup, which takes about 30 seconds, is in progresson the MMC by repeatedly switching off for a short time.

11.2.1.1.1 Automatic Customer Data Backup

HiPath 3000

A two-stage concept guarantees automatic customer data backup.

A complete CDB backup version can be found on the MMC at any time. Deltas to this backupare stored in an SRAM area (with battery backup) in the central control board. If the SRAM areais full, the customer data is automatically backed up. This means that the entire CDB, includingSRAM content, is copied from the SDRAM in the central control board to the MCC. The currentCDB is simultaneously stored on the MMC along with the “old” CDB, which is not deleted untilthe current CDB is completely stored on the MMC.

In case of a power outage, the SDRAM content that has no battery backup is completely lost.However, by re-accessing the CDB backup on the MMC, the system’s database can be restoredto the state it was in prior to the power outage.

Regardless of the volume of changes to the database, HiPath 3000 always automatically per-forms a complete CDB backup at midnight, system-time.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


HiPath 5000 RSM

On the communication server, RAM data is copied automatically every three minutes andstored in two PDS files. The files

hicom.pds

hlb2.pds

contain the complete data description of the HiPath 5000 RSM with emulated HG1500 boards.This includes:

Customer data

Trace

Error history

Call charge data

Status data

The directory in which the two PDS files are to be stored must be defined during installation ofthe HiPath 5000 RSM software (setup). The two PDS files are created when the HiPath 5000RSM is started for the first time.

>The PDS files must not be modified, as reading of the files using conventional toolsand interpretation of the content is not possible without specialist knowledge.In the event of an error, the PDS files can be made available to the responsible Ser-

vice Support contact for diagnostic purposes. The *.trc and *.dmp files stored inthe diag subdirectory of the installation directory should also be supplied.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service


11.2.1.1.2 Manual Customer Data Backup with HiPath 3000

You can perform a manual CDB backup using HiPath 3000 Manager E (Manager T only) or (inonline mode).

However, be aware that it is not possible to deliberately abort a manual backup that is initiatedusing Manager T. Once the CDB backup process starts, it should be ended because the back-up continues to run in the background.

You can also manually initiate a CDB restore, including the call detail data, from the MMC.

Procedure: Manual CDB backup, system restoral using Manager T

Step Action

Manual customer database backup on the MMC

1. Manager T: Start system administration

2. Menu 28 -> Edit CDB

3. Menu 28-2 -> Back up CDB data

4. Menu 28-2-1 -> CDB on MMC

Loading the saved customer data from the MMC into the system

1. Manager T: Start system administration

2. Menu 28 -> Edit CDB

3. Menu 28-2 -> Back up CDB data4. Menu 28-2-2 -> CDB from MMC

Caution: When performing this action, the system performs a hard reset.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


11.2.1.2 Customer Data Backup with HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager (V4.0 SMR-7 or Later)

Definition

The HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager supports, among other things, backup of the custom-er databases (Backup Manager) of all HiPath 3000/5000 systems in the same customer net-work (see also Section 11.2.6, Backing Up System Components (Backup Manager) (V4.0SMR-7 or Later)).

The CDB backups are stored in a directory which must be defined in advance. The data backupcan either be started manually immediately or performed at a predefined time. A cyclic backup,which saves the customer data at a set time every day, is also possible.

Refer to the help provided with the HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager for information onbacking up customer data with this tool.

11.2.1.3 CDB Treatment When Replacing Central HiPath 3000 Hardware

When replacing a central control board due to a hardware defect, for example, the following op-tions are available for handling the CDB:

Procedure: After replacing board, load “current” CDB into the system

Step Action

1. Copy the current CDB and save it on the MMC.

2. Disconnect the system from the power supply.3. Remove the MMC.

4. Replace the central control board.

5. Insert the MMC.

6. Restart the system by plugging in the power plug.

7. The CDB previously stored on the MMC is loaded to the system RAM. Thecustomer system is now configured: The CMI mobile telephones are logged on. The V.24 baud rate is set up. The ACD login port is configured. All telephone options, such as volume and display, are determined per

station.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service


Procedure: After replacing board, load “old” CDB from the customer disk into thesystem

Step Action

1. Back up current CDB with HiPath 3000 Manager E.

2. Disconnect the system from the power supply.

3. Remove the MMC.

4. Replace the central control board.

5. Insert the MMC.


7. Reload.

8. If an “older” CDB update is imported, reload the CDB into the system with-out the Delta mode. The “hardware and CDR switch” remain inactive.

9. Reset. The customer system is now configured. All you have to do now is log on the CMI mobile telephones again, reset the V.24 baud rate, re-configure the ACD login port, redefine all telephone configurations, such as volume and display, per

station.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


11.2.2 Effects of Hardware Changes on Customer Data

Any changes to the hardware must be made before creating a copy of the customer databaseusing HiPath 3000 Manager E. You must ensure that the hardware configuration on the MMC

of HiPath 3000 is always current.

Hardware changes include:

Removing or inserting boards (HiPath 3000 only).

Removing or inserting telephones.

Removing or inserting add-on devices or adapters.

11.2.2.1 Inserting and Removing HiPath 3000 Boards

Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards

7CautionWhen using HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300, disconnectthe system from the power supply before removing or inserting boards.Only HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 peripheral boards can be removed or insertedduring operation.

Table 11-1 Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards

If Then

Inserting newboard in free slot

Board is integrated into the system according to the rules for initial star-tup (page 4-72). System with default numbering plan

The station numbers from the new board are appended (consecu-tively and in ascending order) to the numbers already assigned.

System with modified numbering planThe station numbers on the new board can be in any order.

Using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Manager T, you can assign a specificstation to a port. If the number is already assigned to a different object,

you can switch both numbers.Replace board with

under-equippedboard of same type

The system activates the board and retains the surplus ports in the da-tabase.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service


Replacing boardwith over-equippedboard of same type

The system activates the board with the same number of ports as on theold board.After removing the old board, you can initialize the slot using HiPath3000 Manager E or Manager T.After you have inserted the new board, the system activates it as if it hadbeen inserted into a free slot. However, the CDB area used by the oldboard is left as a gap.In the case of subscriber line modules, you can use HiPath 3000 Man-ager E to retain the old station data by copying it to the new board, or youcan delete it (reset to the default state) . Copying is not possible for trunkboards.

Replacing boardwith different board

The system does not automatically activate the board.After removing the old board, you can initialize the slot using HiPath3000 Manager E or Manager T.After you have inserted the new board, the system activates it as if it hadbeen inserted into a free slot. However, the CDB area used by the oldboard is left as a gap.In the case of subscriber line modules, you can use HiPath 3000 Man-ager E to retain the old station data by copying it to the new board, or youcan delete it (reset to the default state) . Copying is not possible for trunkboards.

>If you initiate a system reload on a system updated as described above, the systemmust be reset after the updated CDB has been installed. The reset synchronizes theport placement sequence in the system with that of the CDB.

Table 11-1 Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards

If Then



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


Procedure: Exchanging Boards

11.2.2.2 Exchanging Workpoint Clients

You can add or remove workpoint clients while the system is in operation. The data in the re-moved workpoint clients is retained.

In case of various optiPoint 500 or optiset E telephone models, meaning ones that have a dif-ferent number of programmable keys, the keypad layout of the previous model is retained. Keymodules that are not plugged in retain their technical features. With the HiPath 3000 ManagerE, you can delete the key modules that are not plugged in and remove the keys that are no long-er available.

Step Action

1. Disconnect system from power supply.2. Remove the board(s).


4. Delete board slot using user interface (29-4).

5. Disconnect system from power supply.

6. Insert new board(s).


8. Load customer data from the system.

Adapt customer data to new hardware configuration. Insert new board(s),stations, for example).

9. Load new customer data into the system.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service


11.2.3 Relocate/Transfer Application Processor Software (APS)

For system software updates, a distinction is made between

HiPath 3000 systems without HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager and

HiPath 3000 systems with HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager (V4.0 SMR-7 or later).

For networked HiPath 3000 systems with HiPath 5000 RSM Server, an APS update can onlybe performed with HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager.

11.2.3.1 APS Replacement/Transfer for HiPath 3000 Systems Without HiPath 3000/ 5000 Software Manager

Two memory areas are reserved for the application processor software on the MMC. To be ableto store two complete APS and to keep the transfer time as low as possible, part of an APS isstored in a compressed format. The APS is decompressed after it has been transferred fromthe MMC into the SDRAM area of the central control board.

11.2.3.1.1 Transferring an APS of HiPath 3000 by Replacing the MMC

Procedure

>APS replacement/transfer is not possible with HiPath 5000 RSM. You must perform

a complete software upgrade.

> APS replacement is only possible within a version and if a logical, compatible CDBis available.

Step Action

1. Create a backup of the current CDB and save on a customer disk for securityreasons.

2. Remove MMC with “old” APS.The flashing Run-LED (0.1 s on/0.1 s off) indicates that the MMC is missing.The system remains active for call processing.

3. Install new MMC with “new” APS.The system creates an automatic CDB backup and thus saves the current cus-tomer database (CDB) to the new MMC.

4. An automatic reset is then performed (hard restart for entire system with thecurrent CDB).



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


11.2.3.1.2 APS Transfer

Options

The APS Transfer feature is available with the HiPath 3000 Manager E. It facilitates

an on-site APS transfer by connecting directly using the V.24 interface.

an APS transfer via remote service from a central service center using the integrated an-

alog or digital modem or via LAN.

Function

This feature transfers the new APS in its entirety and stores it in the available area of the MMC.After the APS transfer has been completed, the system analyzes the check sum and subse-quently reports whether or not

an error was found.If so, you have to delete the transferred APS.

the APS transfer was successful.

You can then activate the APS immediately or at a later time.Resetting the system initiates the changeover from the old APS to the new APS. If problemsoccur during this process, the old APS is reactivated. Once the changeover is successful, theold APS is deleted from the MMC.

In case of power outage, the SDRAM content that has no battery backup is completely lost. Byre-accessing the current APS on the MMC, the system can be restored to the state it was inprior to the power outage.

5. Use the “APS stamp” to verify that the new APS has been activated. Use Hi-Path 3000 Manager E or Manager T (menu item 29-1-2) to make the neces-

sary query.

Step Action

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service


Procedure

Notes on the APS Transfer Sequence

If the transfer connection is interrupted (due to a line interruption, for example), the entireAPS transfer must be manually restarted via HiPath 3000 Manager E. The complete APStransfer is performed again.

Since the software is written to the MMC in compressed format during APS transfer, it mustbe unpacked after the transfer is complete (this takes about 5 minutes).

After the APS transfer, the checksum is analyzed. If the checksum finds errors, delete thetransferred APS. You then have to repeat the complete APS transfer.

Once the APS has been successfully transferred, the message “APS transfer was suc-cessful” appears. You can then finish the session.

The system software uses a special system reset (none of the other resets initiates achangeover) to change over to the new APS.You cannot use the telephone while the system resets and boots up.

Step Action

1. Save the existing customer data (for example: as “customer1.kds”).2. Select “Open CDB” from the HiPath 3000 Manager E file menu and highlight

“APS files (*.fst)”.Open the fst file using the new system software.

3. Double-click on the “Transfer” icon:Select the appropriate access and enter the PIN code.

4. Highlight “APS Transfer”. A new window appears in the top right of the screen.You can use this window to select whether to change directly to the APS after the transfer is completed.

to change to the APS at a pre-determined time.Note: If the “APS Transfer” field has a gray background, then the fst file wasnot opened correctly.

5. Start the APS transfer. Transfer time for connection via digital modem (ISDN)or LAN is approx. 20 to 30 minutes. Connections via the IMODN analog mo-dem or direct connections (V.24 interface) require longer transfer times.

6. Once the APS transfer is completed, the HiPath 3000 Manager E reports thatthe “APS transfer was successful”. Once the set transfer time has beenreached, the system resets and the new version is used for start-up.

7. Use the “APS stamp” to verify that the new APS has been activated. Use Hi-

Path 3000 Manager E or Manager T (menu item 29-1-2) to make the neces-sary query.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


After a successful changeover to the new APS, an entry in the error memory is also madeand the old APS on the MMC is deactivated. This takes approx. 10 minutes and does notimpede switching traffic. The deactivated area is now available for a new APS transfer. Thepositive or negative entry in the error memory is sent to the service center.

APS Stamp: Explanation Using Example

>Software modifications for the correction of faults and the provision of a small num-ber of new features are called software updates or service maintenance releases(SMR). A CDB conversion is not necessary.Software upgrades are used for more extensive enhancements to the scope of ser-vices. An upgrade may also include modifications to hardware as well as error cor-rections. A software upgrade changes the name of the version, e. g. from V1.0 toV2.0. A CDB conversion may be necessary.

HE580T.10.123

Production number/Software binder

Feature package

Note: Service Maintenance ReleasesSMR are identified by production numberand feature package.

System: S = HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700T = HiPath 3250/HiPath 3150U = HiPath 3550/HiPath 3500/HiPath

3350/HiPath 3300

Version 4.0 580 = HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0

Software: A = Manager/Assistant ...E = System

HiPath ...



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service


11.2.3.2 APS Transfer for HiPath 3000 Systems With HiPath 3000/5000 SoftwareManager (V4.0 SMR-7 or Later)

Definition

The HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager supports, among other things, updates of the systemsoftware (Upgrade Manager) of all HiPath 3000 systems in the same customer network. An up-date of the software of installed HG1500 boards (HG1500 V3.0 or later) can also be performed.

The following options are available under the menu item “Upgrade”:

Upgrade of all HG1500 boards and HiPath 3000 systems

Upgrade of HG1500 boards (HG1500 V3.0 or later)

Upgrade of all HiPath 3000 systems

Note: The file format “*.fli” must be selected for APS transfer using HiPath 3000/5000 Soft-ware Manager.

The software (APS and/or HG1500) is updated in two steps. First, the new software is loadedin a system memory known as the “shadow area”. This occurs in the background independentlyof the system status.

In the second step, the new software version must be made available, in other words, the switchfrom the current software version to the new software version must take place. The current soft-ware is replaced by the software in the shadow area and thus deleted. The changeover caneither be started immediately once the software has been loaded or performed at a predefinedtime.

Information about updating the system software and the HG1500 software using HiPath 3000/ 5000 Software Manager can be obtained from the help provided with this tool.

Note: If HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager is not available, the HG1500 software updatemust be performed with HiPath 3000 Manager I.

For APS transfer using HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager, the HiPath 3000/5000 TFTPserver must be installed on a server in the customer LAN. All HiPath 3000 systems must beable to access this HiPath 3000/5000 TFTP server over IP. Other TFTP servers cannot be usedfor HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager.

7WarningIt is important to make sure that the changeover time for a HG1500 board does notcoincide with the changeover time for the corresponding HiPath 3000, as this canrender the HG1500 board unfit for operation. The default setting of the HiPath 3000/ 5000 Software Manager therefore incorporates a safety margin of 10 minutes be-tween the changeovers.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


11.2.4 Upgrading HiPath 3000

For information on upgrade procedures, please see Section 8.3, Upgrading HiPath 3000 to HWV1.2 and SW V4.0.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service


11.2.5 Determining System Information and Installed SoftwareComponents (HiPath Inventory Server)

DefinitionHiPath Inventory Server is a service for determining installed software components and systeminformation in a HiPath 3000/5000 network. System information is only determined upon initialstart-up of the service.

HiPath Software Viewer, which can be called up via the Windows Start menu, enables the dis-play of the determined system information. Figure 11-1 displays the HiPath Software Vieweruser interface.

Figure 11-1 HiPath Software Viewer



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


The relevant information can be displayed in table format by clicking one of the following but-tons:

Common Software

Version and installation directory for general software components, such as HiPath 3000Manager I, TFTP server, for example.

HiPath 3000Information regarding the HiPath 3000s in the network and the installed HG1500 boards(HG1500 V2.0 or later).

HiPath 3000 Manager EVersion and installation directory for HiPath 3000 Manager E.

HiPath 5000 RSM ServerVersion and installation directory for HiPath 5000 RSM server software components, such

as DSS server or Park server, for example. CCMC / CCMS / CMD / CSP

Version and installation directory for CCMC/CCMS/CMD/CSP software components.

TAPIVersion and installation directory for TAPI software components.

MS WindowsVersion and installation directory for MS Windows software components, such as MS In-ternet Explorer, DNS server or DHCP server, for example.

PC System InformationInformation regarding server hardware and software.

All information can be updated at any time via the Update Inventory Server button.

11.2.5.1 Determining System Information with HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager(V4.0 SMR-7 or Later)

Definition

Under the HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager menu item “System info”, current system infor-

mation can be displayed/queried with the HiPath Inventory Server service, for example. The fol-lowing options are available:

Update system infoDisplays the date and time of the last update. The system information can be queried im-mediately using the “Update data” button.

eHG1500Displays the information about the HG1500 boards installed in HiPath 3000 (HG1500 V2.0or later).



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service


HiPath 3000Displays the information about the HiPath 3000 systems integrated in the HiPath 3000/ 5000 network.

The system information is initially determined automatically when the HiPath Inventory Serverservice is started for the first time. A cyclic update can be performed every ≥ 1 days. The systeminformation can be queried manually at any time. This should always be done before an update/ upgrade, for example.

Information about determining the system information using HiPath 3000/5000 Software Man-ager can be obtained from the help provided with this tool.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


11.2.6 Backing Up System Components (Backup Manager) (V4.0 SMR-7or Later)

DefinitionThe HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager allows the following system components and data-bases of a HiPath 3000/5000 network to be backed up:

Full backup (= default setting)Here, the data of all HiPath 3000 systems and HG1500 boards in the HiPath 3000/5000network as well as databases (Feature Server, SQL Server) is backed up.

eHG1500 backupWith this menu item, all HG1500 boards in the HiPath 3000/5000 network are displayed inan overview. It is possible to back up the data of one or all of the displayed HG1500

board(s) (HG1500 V3.0 or later). HiPath 3000 backup (including CDB customer database)

With this menu item, all HiPath 3000 systems in the HiPath 3000/5000 network are dis-played in an overview. It is possible to back up the data of a specific system or of all dis-played HiPath 3000 systems.

Database backupWith this menu item, all databases (Feature Server, SQL Server) are displayed in an over-view. It is possible to back up the data of one or of all database(s).

Refer to the help provided with the HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager for information on

backup with this tool.

Setting Options

It is possible to specify individually when a backup is to take place and where the backed updata can be stored.

Time of data backupThe data backup can either be started manually immediately or performed at a predefinedtime. By default, a full backup is performed cyclically, with the data being saved daily at aspecific time.

Backup pathThe path for the directory in which the backup files are to be stored can be specified.

The backup path is preset for the HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager during setup.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service


Restoring Data

The HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager allows damaged databases to be restored with thedatabase backup.

The other system components are restored using HiPath 3000 Manager E (for HiPath 3000)and HiPath 3000 Manager I or WBM (Web-based management) (for HG1500).



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm


11.2.7 Licensing

The release of individual features and additional lines (trunks) requires the entry of the corre-sponding license code. This license code is generated by using a specific MAC ID on a license

server and is retrieved via the Internet.

Licensed components in HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 are, for example

HiPath 5000 RSM

TAPI Service Provider (TSP)

Media Streaming

CSTA Message Dispatcher (CMD)

CSTA Service Provider (CSP)

HG1500 (B channels and users)

Section 6.4.5 describes the steps to be carried out in order to identify the MAC IDs and gener-ate the licenses.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

11.3 Guided Maintenance

11.3.1 Diagnosis Options

11.3.1.1 Recording HiPath 3000 Board Status

11.3.1.1.1 Central Control Boards

Run LED

A Run LED that displays the system’s operating capacity is located on all central control boardsof the HiPath 3000 product line.

Options Available?

You can call up the following options using the HiPath 3000 Manager E:

CMA CMS

LIM

IMODN

Table 11-2 Run LED - Meaning of the LED StatusRun LED Meaning

off Power outage

on Reset key quickly pressed

off Reset key pressed longer than 5 s (LED disappears as verification forinitiating a reload.)

on System boot

offfor 0.1 s

Loading operation: APS in SDRAM / Loadware / Card data

blinking0.5 s on/0.5 s off

Normal operating condition (zero load)1

1 The blinking rhythm depends on the load. The higher the load, the slower the blinking rhythm.

blinking0.1 s on/0.1 s off




Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

MPPI, UAM (only with HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350) or UAMR (only with HiPath 3500, HiPath3300)The presence of one of these Announcement and Music Modules is displayed asOption 5”.

The ALUM4 module cannot be displayed.

11.3.1.1.2 Power Supplies

11.3.1.1.3 Peripheral Boards

View Status of Peripheral Boards

You can use HiPath 3000 Manager E or Manager T to view the statuses of all peripheral boards.Display is limited to the following statuses per board:

Board not inserted

Board defective (not loaded)

Board disabled

Board enabled (active)

Board busy (at least one station or line from this board is disconnected, is being called, oris busy).

For ISDN boards, the status of the reference clock is displayed:

No reference clock

Reference clock for clock generator is created.

Table 11-3 Power Supply Status Displays

Board Status Display

HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700

UPSM The LED displays the operating status (on or off).

HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300

PSUP The LED displays the 5 V output voltage.

UPSC-D, UPSC-DR A green LED displays the 5 V output voltage. A yellow LED displays the additional power of –48 V output

voltage provided by an external power supply unit (EPSU2 orEPSU2R).



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

When viewing the status of the board using the HiPath 3000 Manager E, all peripheral boardsintegrated into the system are presented in a table. The status display is updated every 3seconds.

With the Manager T, you can only view the status of one board at a time. You can also updatethe status display by pressing a key.

You cannot perform additional activities with the HiPath 3000 Manager E and Manager T whileviewing the status of a board.

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700: LEDs on Peripheral Boards

All peripheral boards are equipped with LEDs for displaying the status of a board or port. In-formation on the meaning of the individual LED statuses can be found in the descriptions ofindividual boards in Chapter 3.

Table 11-4 HiPath 3000 Manager E - Example of Status Display of Peripheral Boards

Slot Board Not inserted Defective Locked out Idle Busy Clock source

1 STLS2 X X X

2 SLU8 X

3 SLA4 X X4 TLA8 X

5

6

7 TS2 X X

8 SLA16 X

9

10 SLMO24 X



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

Locking out and Releasing Boards and Ports

Using the HiPath 3000 Manager E and Manager T, you can lock out a complete station or trunkmodule. The lockout prevents renewed seizure after the current connection has finished. Re-

lease or lockout settings are retained after a reset.The first SLMO/SLU board can be blocked. This action does not block the first two ports. Youcan block specific ports with the "Block selection" option.

When attempting to lock out the last active trunk, you are subsequently notified that remote ser-vice through the service center is no longer possible.

11.3.1.2 Recording HiPath 3000 Trunk Status

HiPath 3000 record the current status of each individual trunk in a table. If the status changes,the new status along with the time stamp is entered. You can use HiPath 3000 Manager E toview the trunk status, in which case the following information is provided.

Data Content

Date Date of the event (as stored in system)

Time Time of the event (as stored in system)

Trunk number Number of the trunk

Slot/Port Slot and port number

Status Trunk status:

– Inactive– Incoming call– Outgoing call– Trunk-to-trunk connection– Trunk disabled (using lockout switch or HiPath 3000 Manag-

er E)– Trunk failure

Number of the connected station



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

11.3.1.3 Recording Station Status

HiPath 3000 record the current status of each individual station in a table. You can use HiPath3000 Manager E to view the station status, in which case the following information is provided.

Data Content

Station name Name of the selected station

Slot/Port For example, 7-1

Telephone model For example, optiPoint 500 advance

Telephone status Active / inactive

DID number External number of the selected station

Language Menu language of selected station

Connection status Inactive: The telephone is idle. Busy: The telephone is off the hook, but not yet dialed. Waiting: The telephone call is in the queue. Connected: The telephone is connected to a second tele-

phone with a trunk or a hunt group member. Holding: The telephone is on hold. Error: The connection cannot be established due to an er-

ror (e. g. invalid telephone number). Call: The telephone is called.

Connected to The number of the connected station or trunk

Forwarding status Off: No call forwarding activated. Internal: Call forwarding activated only for internal calls. External: Call forwarding activated only for external calls. All: Call forwarding activated for all calls.

Destination Number of call forwarding destination



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

11.3.1.4 Recording the Status of the HiPath 3000 V.24 Interfaces

You can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to view the current status of the V.24 interface, in whichcase the following information is provided.

Status of the trunks (1 = active trunk, 0 = inactive trunk)

The individual trunks are assigned as follows:DTR = HiPath 3000DSR = TelephoneRTS = HiPath 3000CTS = Telephone

This means, for example, that falsely connected or damaged cables can be determined (formore information on this, refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help).

V.24 MonitoringThe number of sent or received bytes within a time period to be selected can be recordedand then displayed or saved using a text editor (default = MS WordPad ® ).

The failure and restart of a V.24 interface generates an entry in the error history and releasesa remote error signal (V.24 failure = “Check printer” error message, V.24 restart = Withdrawalof error message).

Activated features Status of activated features (on or off): Do not disturb Call forwarding (device status) Advisory text Room monitor Code lock Station number suppression Group ringing Ringer connection Hunt group Silent call waiting Handsfree answerback Call waiting release Transfer of ringing (only for MULAP) Call forwarding MULAP (only for MULAP)

Connected station List of the connected stations

Data Content



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

11.3.1.5 Trace Options for HiPath 3000

Tracing ISDN Activities

This feature enables ISDN telephones and ISDN trunks to be traced in real-time. ISDN activi-ties are routed to HiPath 3000 Manager E and saved in a trace file. Only the ISDN sequencesare displayed on the monitor, not the content of the ISDN messages.

For recording errors, the Tracestop can be

coupled to a certain error number.

activated using remote access.

activated manually from a telephone (if the customer discovers an error such as dual con-nections).

If the trace session is over, you can start the ISDN Message Decoder (ISDN Tracer) and useit to convert the trace file into a readable format (only English). You can also read out the tracedata using remote service.

The ISDN Message Decoder is a 32 bit application which converts the ISDN layer 3 messagesand information elements into a readable format. Since you cannot find out from the trace file

whether it deals with an information element from a Euro ISDN or a QSig configuration, youhave to select the protocol. You may select the following settings from the main menu:

Raw (default setting)

Euro ISDN

QSig V1

With the “Raw” setting, the Hex values are only decoded, not interpreted. With the other twosettings, the Hex values are decoded and interpreted per feature (CC, AOC, etc.).

Tracing Call-related Activities

You can trace all activities from any telephone, trunk, etc., that are released by a call. Theseinclude consultation calls, conference calls, and hunt groups, for example.

11.3.1.6 HiPath Trace Monitor for HiPath 5000 RSM

The possible applications of the HiPath Trace Monitor are described in Section 6.6.

>Special user rights are required for activating the Trace setting in the Maintenance

menu, that are exclusively reserved by the user group Development.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

11.3.1.7 HiPath 3000 Error History

HiPath 3000 provides an error history where accrued errors are classified according to errorclass and error number with the date/time of the original error. You can use HiPath 3000 Man-

ager E to read out the error memory.Section 11.3.2 provides information on error classification.

11.3.1.8 Testing Telephones

After startup and country adaptation, you can activate the telephone test on any optiPoint 500or optiset E telephone using a code or the service menu. This test checks the display (yournumber is displayed), LEDs, and calls. The tests ends automatically after a period of time.During the test, you can satisfy yourself that the visual and audio components function properly.

Test Procedure on the System Telephone

If the time and date do not appear in the display after startup, either the system telephone orthe cable path is defective. Either exchange the system telephone or check the cable path.

11.3.1.9 Analyzing System-wide Use of Feature

HiPath 3000 features counters that determine the system-wide use of features (e.g. caller list,

call forwarding, call intrusion, etc.). You can view the counter statuses using HiPath 3000 Man-ager E.

Table 11-5 Telephone Test


1. *940 Code for telephone test

2. – For approximately five seconds, all LEDs blink quickly (ex-cept for the Service menu LED), all display pixels are activat-ed, and you can hear a tone.

>If the test does not react as described, an additional power supply (plug-in powersupply unit) for the relevant system telephone may be necessary.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

11.3.1.10 Event Viewer (Event Log)

Introduction

The Event Viewer is one of the tools included in the NT based operating systems (MicrosoftWindows NT, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows XP ...). The Event Viewer admin-isters logs that record information on programs, security, and system events on the computer.You can use it to display and administer event logs, to gather information on hardware and soft-ware problems, and to monitor security events.

You can use this standard tool to obtain status information for the HiPath 5000 RSM server andany application server present.

All events associated with the server(s) and its (their) applications are saved. The events pro-vide a quick and, especially important, time-related overview of all important actions (status,information, warning, error, ...).

The tool itself handles the event entries. You can specify the length of the event file, the validityof events in days, the reaction when the maximum size has been reached, and the displayfilter, for example.

You can save the resulting event file (log file) under any name.

Start the Event Viewer

Start it from the Windows Start menu: Start/Programs/Administrative Tools/Event Viewer

The Event Viewer associated with other application servers present can be opened via theHiPath 5000 RSM server. To do this, select the relevant server in the network browser under Operation/Connect to another computer/Other computer.

Configure the Event Viewer

The Event Viewer has at least three areas:

System log: information on all operating system components

Security log: information on changes to the security system and possible system violations

Application log: application events



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

You can configure these areas independently of one another by marking the area and selectingOperation/Properties:

The maximum log size (in kb) and the reaction if this value is exceeded are defined under

“General”. 1.44 MB (= capacity of a disk) is the recommended log size. The “Overwrite theevents as needed” setting is also recommended.

You can select an event source under “Filter”, for example, to display only the entries forthe HiPath 5000 RSM server. You can further restrict the output under Category and EventID.

Evaluate events

Double-click an entry in an Event Viewer area to obtain more precise information on an event.Use the two arrow buttons to spring from one event to the next.

The HiPath 5000 RSM server currently supports the entries listed in Table 11-7.

Save event log (log file)

When there are problems within the customer network, you can save an Event Viewer area asa event log (log file) and then give this file to the responsible service support for further diagno-sis.

Always save an event log (log file) in evt file format (file extension *.evt). The Event Viewercan read and configure the file only if it is in this format.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

11.3.1.11 HiPath Fault Management

HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 RSM systems have a separate SNMP agent that allows accessto various system data that is stored in its MIB or Management Information database. The MIB

provides basic system information, status information, event-related data, and information oninstalled hardware (slots) and configured connections (ports).

HiPath Fault Management can read information from the HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 RSMsystem MIB via SNMP requests. This allows the system to permanently monitor the status ofthe network components and to include changes of status in the network administrator infor-mation.

A graphic map of the network displays the topology and the current status of the network com-ponents.

For detailed information, refer to the product-specific documentation for HiPath Fault Manage-

ment.

SNMP functions

Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP represents a convenient platform within theTCP/IP protocol family for management tasks in the HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 RSM soft-ware. SNMP is used more or less as a management agent on the HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000RSM and handles central monitoring and administration of LAN network components, includingthe HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 RSM itself. It is possible to

address the HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 RSM over the TCP/IP protocol family.

access data from external management applications such as HiPath Fault Management,for example.

implement teleservice jobs (such as online port status, disabling and enabling ports, anddetermining free ports).

transmit service-related Class B errors.

visualize the operating status of a HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 RSM.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

11.3.2 HiPath 3000 Error Messages

Classification

Accrued errors are classified according to error class and error number. The three different er-ror classes are described below:

Error Class A = Customer-related errorHiPath 3000 Manager E fails to issue a signal/message. Class A errors are indicated onthe optiPoint Attendant display. They can be corrected by the customer without servicesupport.

The only error messages currently included are

– “Printer alarm” (caused by an empty paper tray, for example)

– “Fan failure” (caused by the fan breaking down in the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300)– “Revisor alarm” (caused by an overflow in the MMC log area, for example)

– “Too Many Key Modules” (caused by inserting more than the maximum possible num-ber optiPoint key modules specified in Table 9-3)

Error Class B = Service-related errorsThe HiPath 3000 Manager E signals Class B errors, which can be automatically forward toa service center.Errors of this class are caused by failure of the boards, individual ports, or trunks. You cangenerally correct these errors by replacing the hardware, re-configuring the customer da-

tabase, or by working together with the carrier. Table 11-6 lists all Class B errors. Error Class C = Development-related errors

HiPath 3000 Manager E fails to issue a signal/message.Class C errors require diagnosis and problem analysis by specialists.

Class B Error Messages

The actions for correcting errors specified in the below table are described as follows:

Recovery Actionare actions for correcting errors that are automatically triggered by the system software

(board reload, for example).

Technician Actionare actions that have to be performed by a service technician if the error is not correctedautomatically. This may be the case with hardware malfunctions or configuration errors.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

Table 11-6 HiPath 3000 Class B Error Messages

No. Meaning ActionRecovery

Action byTechnician

Error Class B-01 - HiPath 3000 Manager E

3 Hard restart Hard restart –

10 Hard restart using SNMP Hard restart –

14 Changes to the database “on site” – –

15 Changes to the database “remote” (re-mote service)

– –

16 APS transfer acknowledgement message – –

17 No authorization to access IP address onHiPath 3000(IP add. in data[1...4])

– Unauthorized access at-tempt.

If necessary, configureSNMP community/appli-

cation firewall.

18 Overflow in the MMC log area (log file) – Read out log file

19 Sensor alarm: Fan failure (19" housing forHiPath 3500/HiPath 3300)

– Check to see if the fan hasbroken down and/or if theventilation openings in the

housing are unblocked.

20 Overflow in the CDR buffer (CDR informa-tion)

– Check interfaces (V.24,LAN)

21 Error when identifying (name) and au-thenticating (password):from HiPath 3000 Manager E –>Data[0] = 0, Data[1..9] = call numbernumber ->Data[0] = 1, Data[1..4] = IP address


If necessary, configureSNMP community.

22 Flash area deleted – APS transfer possible

again23 SNMP process stopped – Perform hard restart

24 No access authorization for IP application(IP add. in data[1...4])


If necessary, configure ap-plication firewall (IP ad-dress/application flag).



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

Error Class B-09 - Hardware

0 Microprocessor: Error Reload board Replace board

1 Microprocessor: Error corrected – –

2 Loadware RAM: Error Reload board Replace board

3 Loadware RAM: Error corrected – –

29 Line interruption – Check line

30 Short circuit – Check line

31 Low voltage – Check voltage

32 Thermal overload – –

34 Frame loss S0: Error – Check line

35 Frame loss S0: Error corrected – –

36 Data slip S0: Error – Check line

37 Data slip S0: Error corrected – –

38 Alarm display S2M: Error – Check line

39 Alarm display S2M: Error corrected – –

42 No signal S2M

: Error – Check line

43 No signal S2M: Error corrected – –

44 Receiver remote alarm S2M: Error – Check line

45 Receiver remote alarm S2M: Error correct-ed

– –

48 Bit rate error S2M: Error – Check line

49 Bit rate error S2M: Error corrected – –

50 Loss of synchronization S2M: Error – Check line

51 Loss of synchronization S2M

: Error cor-rected

– –

58 Board self-test UP0/E: Error – Replace board

59 Board self-test UP0/E: Error corrected – –

61 Overcurrent UP0/E: Error – Replace board

62 Overcurrent UP0/E: Error corrected – –

65 Out of buffers UP0/E /CMI: Error – –



Action byTechnician



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

66 Out of buffers UP0/E /CMI: Error corrected – –

Error Class B-11 - General Errors

58 Too many layer 1 errors – Check line, possibly re-place board

Error Class B-12 - Processor Exception

0 Reset initial stack pointer Hard restart Notify appropriate servicesupport1 Reset initial program counter Hard restart

2 Interrupt access error Hard restart

3 Interrupt address error Hard restart4 Interrupt, command not permitted Hard restart

5 Interrupt, division by zero Hard restart

6 Invalid opcode exception Hard restart

7 TRAP C or TRAP V instruction Hard restart

8 Security violation Hard restart

9 Trace Hard restart

10 Line 1010 emulator Hard restart

11 Line 1111 emulator Hard restart

12 Hardware breakpoint (CBFC: possiblyEXTEB error)

Hard restart

13 Co-processor, security violation Hard restart

14 Formatting error, unwanted interruption Hard restart

15 Formatting error, unwanted interruption Hard restart

Error Class B-15 - APS Transfer

0 APS transfer successful APS transfer –

1 APS transfer successful, CDB OK – –

2 APS transfer successful, default CDBloaded

– –



Action byTechnician



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

3 Error in CRC checksum – Check transferred APSversion and re-transfer

APS.If error is still present, re-

place MMC module.

4 Return to old APS, default CDB loaded –

5 Return to old APS, old CDB loaded –

6 APS transfer interrupted – Transfer APS again

7 Country data successfully transferred – –

8 Error occurred when deleting old APS onMMC

– Transfer APS again.If error is still present, re-

place MMC module.9 Block length error during APS transfer – Transfer APS again

10 Remaining length error during APS trans-fer

– Transfer APS again

Error Class B-16 - General Errors

1 Error in pool administration (rel_pool_ele) Hard restart Notify appropriate servicesupport2 Error in pool administration

(get_trans_store)Hard restart

3 Error in pool administration(get_trans_store)

Hard restart

4 Error during COSMOS send call Hard restart

5 Error during COSMOS timer call Hard restart

6 Error during COSMOS receive call Hard restart

7 COSMOS records error (recovery) Hard restart

8 Error while handling real-time clock –

9 Watchdog error Hard restart

10 Manual hard restart – –

11 Manual reload – –

12 System had no voltage – Notify appropriate servicesupport13 Automatic customer data backup (CDB

backup) not performed–

14 Unidentified hard restart – –



Action byTechnician



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

15 Error when generating log file – Notify appropriate servicesupport16 Pool error –

17 CTXT acceptance error –

20 Required data length exceeds permittedrange

Hard restart

21 Allocation fails Hard restart

23 Cold restart – –

24 Idle status reached following restart – –

25 Licensing error – Check licensingError Class B-20 - Call Processing

0 Error in pointer administration Hard restart Notify appropriate servicesupport

1 Maximum number of stations achieved – Reduce stations

2 RS232: Interface not present (DSR) – Check interface

11 RS232: RS232: Interface ready (DSR) – –

13 All routes allocated Hard restart Notify appropriate service

supportError Class B-21 - Device Handler

0 No dial tone detected – Use headset to check dialtone.

If there is no dial tone, re-place board.

1 Dial tone detected – –

7 Reference clock on – –

8 Reference clock off – –

11 Fan alarm (19’’ housing for HiPath 3500/ HiPath 3300): Error

– Check to see if the fan hasbroken down and/or if theventilation openings in the

housing are unblocked.

12 Fan alarm (19’’ housing for HiPath 3500/ HiPath 3300): Error corrected

– –



Action byTechnician



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

13 No response from temperature sensor inthe 19’’ housing for HiPath 3500/HiPath3300

– Replace CBRC

14 Overload Code Receiver CR – Check if these errors oc-cur repeatedly or only

sporadically. If the errorsoccur repeatedly,

an additional CR8N boardcan be used for HiPath3750 and HiPath 3700.

An upgrade to the nexthighest system may benecessary for all other

systems.

15 Overload Code Sender CS –

Error Class B-23 - Network

60 System hold no buffer available Hard restart Notify appropriate servicesupport

Error Class B-26 - Presence

0 Unknown board model – Replace board

1 Board out of order Reload board –2 Maximum number of peripheral boards

exceeded– Reduce peripheral boards

to maximum number

3 Board type not compatible, slot is alreadypre-assigned with a different board model

– Replace board

4 Board is activated – –

Error Class B-28 - Recovery

0 COSMOS error: Data transmission notpossible

Hard restart Notify appropriate servicesupport

Error Class B-29 - IOP

0 COSMOS error Hard restart Notify appropriate servicesupport20 Port table queue is empty Hard restart

24 Board malfunction Reload board –

25 Board reset was detected Reload board –



Action byTechnician



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

35 No ELIC interrupts Hard restart Notify appropriate servicesupport36 SDRAM: Access to protected area Hard restart

37 SDRAM: Write error, wrong address Hard restart

38 SDRAM: Read error, wrong address –

Error Class B-30 - Firmware/Loadware

6 HDLC Controller Error on board Reload board Replace board

Error Class B-40 - MMC

0 MMC defective Hard restart Replace MMC

Error Class B-41 - LAN

4 Send: Ethernet driver not ready – For errors that appearsporadically, no action is

necessary.For errors that appear reg-

ularly, replace the LIMmodule. If this does notcorrect the error, checkthe LAN configuration.

8 Send: More than 15 futile attempts –

9 Send: Delayed collision detection –

10 Send: Carrier loss –

11 Receive: Frame error –

12 Receive: FIFO error –

13 Receive: Checksum error –

14 Receive: Defective receiving buffer –

15 Receive: Frame too short –

16 Receive: Frame too long –

17 Receive: Delayed collision detection –

18 Receive: Partial deletion of data due to theexisting write protection

–



Action byTechnician



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

11.3.3 HiPath 5000 RSM Error Messages

The following table lists the possible entries for the HiPath 5000 RSM server in the Event View-er.

Table 11-7 Event Viewer Entries for the HiPath 5000 RSM Server

Event De-faulttrap

Errortext

Meaning User reaction Cate-gory

Source

1000 X Not de-fined

Unidentifiedlogical TFTPerror in Hi-Path 3000/ 5000

adm HiPath5000RSMserver

1010 X Socketerror

General sock-et error

Save eventfile for erroranalysis

Shut down and restartserver.If error is still present,restart the PC.


1011 X Udp/tftp:un-knownservice

Logical sock-et error, un-able to installWinsock Li-brary.

Save eventfile for erroranalysis

Unrecoverable error.Restart server and re-port error to appropriateservice support.


1013 X WSAsocketerror

General sock-et error Save eventfile for erroranalysis.


adm/ car HiPath5000RSMserver

1014 X Fileopen er-ror

Logical TFTPerror. HiPath3000/5000displays amessage indi-cating thatframe pagecannot beopened.

Wait 5 minutes then re-peat action.


1015 X Errorwhilesetsock-opt

Server prob-lem: IP socketcould not beinitialized.

Save eventfile for erroranalysis.

Shut down and restartserver.If error is still present,restart the PC.




service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

1016 X Errorwhilerecv-from

HiPath 3000/ 5000 no long-er replieswhen files arereceived.


Connection error, Hi-Path 3000/5000 HIPproblems.Check if ping is working:If ping is working: wait 5mins and restart server.If ping is not workingproperly, check if the“Ping unsuccessful” er-

ror message appears inthe Event Viewer.


1017 X Errorwhilesendingto <IP-Adr>

Logical errorwhen sendingdata to HiPath3000/5000




1018 X Transfertimedout

No acknowl-edgement re-ceived/sent


Possible connection in-terruption or HiPath3000/5000 HIP prob-

lems.

adm HiPath5000RSM

server1019 X Discard-

ed pack-ets

TFTP proto-col: Datatransfer nolonger possi-ble, transfercancelled.


Unrecoverable error.Check if ping is working:If ping is working: wait 5mins and restart server.If ping is not workingproperly, check if the“Ping unsuccessful” er-ror message appears inthe Event Viewer.


1020 Receivesuc-cessful

CDB pageframe suc-cessful (read)

Information adm HiPath5000RSMserver


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

1021 Sendsuc-cessful

CDB pageframe suc-cessful (write)Event Proper-ties containsthe corre-spondingpage frameID.

Information fct/ adm

HiPath5000RSMserver

1022 Con-nectsuc-cessful

Positive ack.from FCT.Connectionwith HiPath3000/5000successful.Event proper-ties containsthe corre-sponding HIPaddress.

Information fct/ adm

HiPath5000RSMserver

1023 X Socketnot con-nected

Connectiondifficulties -HiPath 3000/ 5000 server.TCP connec-tion not avail-able


Check LAN, initiate Hi-Path 3000/5000 ping.Restart server if neces-sary. Check HiPath3000/5000 HIP.

fct HiPath5000RSMserver

1024 CDBtransfer

suc-cessful(read)

All frame pag-es success-

fully read fromHiPath 3000/ 5000 nodesby the server

Information vsrv HiPath5000

RSMserver


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

1025 CDBtransfersuc-cessful(write)

All frame pag-es success-fully writtenfrom the serv-er to all Hi-Path 3000/ 5000 nodes

Information vsrv HiPath5000RSMserver

1027 CallAd-dressTa

ble andNo-deIpT-abletransfersuc-cessful

Successfultransfer of call

address tableand Node IPtable to thesystem by theserver.

Information car HiPath5000

RSMserver

1028 X Venusdata-base

closed

Venus data-base closed

Information vsrv HiPath5000RSM

server1029 X Venus

Data-basestarted

Venus data-base opened


1030 Datasaved todisk

Saving theVenus data-base to theserver harddrive.


1031 Ping notpossible

HiPath 3000/ 5000 HIP nolonger avail-able.


Check HiPath 3000/ 5000. Check HG1500.Check LAN. Initiate Hi-Path 3000/5000 ping, ifnecessary

adm/ fct/

vsrv/ sync

HiPath5000RSMserver


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

1032 X CDBtransferto (<IP-Adr>)failed(write)

Writing datato HiPath3000/5000with specifiedIP addressfailed.


Check HiPath 3000/ 5000. Check HG1500.Check LAN. Initiate Hi-Path 3000/5000 ping, ifnecessary.Load HiPath 3000 Man-ager E data to the serv-er again. This initiatesdata transfer from the

server to HiPath 3000/ 5000.

vsrv HiPath5000RSMserver

1033 Datasync tile

Modificationto database inHiPath 3000/ 5000 reportedto the server.HiPath 3000/ 5000 dataloaded andsaved on theserver.


1034 Discon-nectionof objectrecov-ered(%1)

sync

1036 X CDBtransfer

from(<IP-Adr>)failed(read)

Data readingfrom HiPath

3000/5000(with speci-fied IP ad-dress in theserver) failed.

Save eventfile for error

analysis.

Check HiPath 3000/ 5000. Check HG1500.

Check LAN. Initiate Hi-Path 3000/5000 ping, ifnecessary.Activate HiPath 3000/ 5000 data loading viaHiPath 3000 ManagerE.

vsrv HiPath5000

RSMserver


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

1037 Inter-face er-ror (_hr=0xzzzzzzzzz)

If, 0xzzzzzzz=0x80070057,this is just in-ternal infor-mation forDevelop-ment, other-wise error.


If an error message ap-pears, RgTraceFile.txtand Carlog File must besaved.

reg HiPath5000RSMserver

1038 User in-terfaceactiveon <IP-Adr>

The user in-terface is ac-tive during async. Trialsare not can-celled and arecyclically re-peated untilsuccessful.

Information sync HiPath5000RSMserver

1039 ASSIST

ANT_LOG

1040 Node IPADD<IP-Adr>

Error

1041 No re-sourcesin sys-tem %1

fct

1042 Regsmes-sage<IP-Adr>

vsrv


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

1043 Car up-datenode IPtable en-try <IP-Adr>

Databasegenerates thenode IP tableper CDB forthe car server


1045 X %1 vserv HiPath5000RSM

server1046 Update

CallAd-dressTable (No.= %1)and No-deIpT-able(No. =

%2)

CAR as-signed a newcall addressand node IPtable by thedatabase(event 1027follows).

Information car HiPath5000RSMserver

1047 Regis-trationrequestfrom<IP-Adr>

The REGserver re-ceived a reg-istration re-quest fromHG1500.

Information reg HiPath5000RSMserver

10000

WrongrequestID

Wrong UDPpacket se-quence, asyn-

chronism.

Check LAN fct HiPath5000RSM

server1000

1Un-knownpacket

Unknown Hi-Path 3000/ 5000 IP pa-kket.

Information fct HiPath5000RSMserver


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

10002

X Socketreceive

TCP socketerror.


Possible interruptedconnection.

fct HiPath5000RSMserver

515 X Error0x%x inFunc \"SaveGeb\".Descrip-tion:%s",e.Error(),(char*)(e.De-scrip-tion())

Error whensaving an out-going calldata record.

GetAc-count

515 X Error

0x%x inFunc \"SaveKom-mend\".Descrip-tion:%s",e.Error(),(char*)(

e.De-scrip-tion())

Error when

saving an in-coming datarecord.

GetAc-

count


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

515 X Error0x%x inFunc \"Save-New-Price\".Descrip-tion:%s",e.E

rror(),(char*)(e.De-scrip-tion())

Error whensaving a re-calculatedcall datarecord.

GetAc-count

515 X Error initHKLMregistryStopserviceGetAc-count

Error whenreading startparametersfrom the HKlocal ma-chine registry.

GetAc-count

515 X Error initregistryHKCUStopserviceGetAc-count

Error whenreading startparametersfrom the HKCurrent userregistry.

GetAc-count


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

515 X Errorwhenstartingimmedi-ateprint-out.Stopservice

GetAc-count

Error whenstarting im-mediate print-out thread.

GetAc-count

515 X Error0x%x inFunc \"Insert-Sofort-Druck\".Descrip-tion:%s",e.Error(),(char*)(e.De-scrip-tion())

Error whensaving arecord for im-mediate print-out.

GetAc-count

515 X No CDRlinefound

TSP does notprovide anyCDR lines.

GetAc-count

515 X Error

TAPI Init

Error when

initializing theTAPI inter-face.

GetAc-

count


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

515 X Tapi-Func:%s ID:%d Er-ror: %s",szTapi-Func,lLineID,szEr-

rorMess

Error whencalling a TAPIfunction for aparticular line.

GetAc-count

515 X Tapi-Func:%s Er-ror: %s",szTapi-Func,szEr-rorMess

Error whencalling a TAPIfunction.

GetAc-count

515 X Box not

found indata-basecntBox =0SwitchID: %d,nVNo-deID:%d

Node data

has not yetbeen read.

GetAc-

count

515 X CDRServicein PBX:%dcouldnot bestarted

The CDR ser-vice in theswitch couldnot be start-ed.

GetAc-count


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

515 X Errorsendingcom-mand'startingCDRService'to PBX:%d

Error whensending thestart CDRservice com-mand.

GetAc-count

514 X CDRServicein PBX:%d byTSP al-readystarted

TSP has al-ready startedthe CDR ser-vice.

GetAc-count

515 X ErrorstartingCDR

serviceon PBX:%ddwParam2:0x%x

Undefined er-ror whenstarting the

CDR service.

GetAc-count

515 X Errorsendingcom-mand

'stopCDRService’

Error whensending thecommand tostop the CDR

service.

GetAc-count


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

515 X Errorstop-pingCDRSer-vice: Il-legal Ac-cess

Error whenstopping theCDR service.Access de-nied. Some-one else al-ready startedthe service.

GetAc-count

515 X Error

stop-pingCDRSer-vice: Er-ror-Code:0x%x",dwParam2

Undefined er-

ror whenstopping theCDR service.

GetAc-

count

513 X TAPIReinit TAPI wasreinitialized. GetAc-count

515 X Startserviceerror:Data-baseconnecterror

Error whenopening thedatabaseconnection.

PCM

515 X Startserviceerror:Misc.data-base er-ror

Error whenreading outthe valuessaved in thedatabase.

PCM


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Guided Maintenance

515 X LineIni-tialize:%s",TapiEr-rorMess

Error duringTAPI LineDe-vices initial-ization.

PCM

515 X Pho-neInitial-ize: %s",TapiEr-

rorMess

Error duringTAPIPhoneDevic-es initializa-

tion.

PCM

515 X PCMServiceStart er-ror:[dynam-ic errormes-sage]

General errorwhen startingthe service.

PCM

515 X The PC-

MConn.clsPCM-Connconnec-tion ob- jectcouldnot beestab-lished.

Error creating

object whenstarting theservice.

PCM


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Guided Maintenance

515 X ThePCMservicewascan-celledbe-cause ofunre-

cover-able er-rorduringinitial-ization.

Service can-cellation dueto an unre-coverable er-ror during ini-tialization.

PCM


Event De-fault

trap

Errortext


Source



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Correcting errors

11.4 Correcting errors

11.4.1 Automatic Error Correction

One of the below recovery actions is assigned to each error in the error memory. These recov-ery actions are programmed to automatically correct errors that occur.

Hard restart

Reload board

Reload CDB backup

Port lockout

Power failure transfer (loop start)

None

A watchdog activates continuous loops.

If no recovery measure is assigned or if the one that is assigned fails, a service technician hasto correct the error manually.

11.4.2 Manual Error Correction Without HiPath 3000 Manager E

Manually Activating Restart (Reset)/Reload

Pressing the reset button on the central control board of HiPath 3000

initiates a Reset (Hard restart of the entire system with the current CDB) if the button ispressed for less than 5 seconds. The Run LED lights up when the Reset button ispressed.

initiates a Reload if the button is pressed longer than 5 seconds. The Run LED disap-pears after approximately 5 seconds as verification that the reload has been initiated. Theentire content of the customer database is replaced by its default version. All country andcustomer-specific settings are lost.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Correcting errors


You can lock out and release ports using the lockout switch located on the board. The lockoutprevents renewed seizure after the current connection has finished. It creates

a port lockout in an outgoing direction on analog trunk boards.

a port lockout in outgoing and incoming directions on trunk boards.

a lockout of the entire board for subscriber line modules.

11.4.3 Manual Error Correction With HiPath 3000 Manager E

Initiating Restart (Reset)

This initiates an immediate hard restart of the entire system with the current CDB.

Initiating Reload Card

This the single board (loading Loadware) to reload.


HiPath 3000 Manager E enables you to lock out an entire subscriber line module or line circuitmodule and individual ports. The lockout prevents renewed seizure after the current connec-tion has finished. Release or lockout settings are retained after a reset.

However, you cannot lock out the first SLMO/SLU board because administration through Man-ager T runs on its first two ports.

When attempting to lock out the last active trunk, you are subsequently notified that remote ser-vice through the service center is no longer possible.

You cannot use HiPath 3000 Manager E to release boards and ports locked out with the lockoutswitch.

Power Failure Transfer

You cannot initiate a power failure transfer to analog telephones using HiPath 3000 Manager E.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Remote Service

11.5 Remote Service

Definition

Remote service is described as communication between the service center and HiPath 3000and HiPath 5000 RSM using public telecommunications networks to fulfill service tasks. Thesetasks are

remote system administration,

remote administration of Plus products via the system,

remote correction of system software (APS transfer),

automatic signaling of error messages.

Remote service facilitates the administration and maintenance of various communication sys-tems from a central location.

The connection to HiPath 3000 can be set up via the integrated digital modem (B channel), theintegrated analog modem (IMODN) or the HG1500.

Special software programs, such as pcANYWHERE, facilitate connections to HiPath 5000RSM. If the customer agrees, Remote Access Service RAS can also be used, provided this ser-vice is active on the HiPath 5000 RSM server.

Figure 11-2 Example for Teleservice with HiPath 3000

HiPath 3000

Plus Products

Service centerService PC

withHiPath 3000 Man-

ager E

Central Board

Modem

LIM

CustomerLAN

PSTN(analog or




Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Remote Service

11.5.1 HiPath 3000 Connection Options

HG1500 All HiPath 3000 systems can be accessed remotely with a LAN-LAN link via the HG1500

board. Configuration information can be found in the HG1500 V3.0 Configuration Manual.

Integrated Analog Modem (IMODN) This modem enables remote access to all systems in the HiPath 3000 product line. Accessis achieved using any trunks, tie trunks, and all subscriber lines. The IMODN is designedas a plug-in card.

The IMODN is treated as a pseudo port. It receives a number in the system that can bereached internally through direct internal dialing (DID). You can cancel the DID numbermanually to prevent external access.

Integrated digital Modem (B Channel) An integrated B channel modem is available with all systems in the HiPath 3000 productline. This type of modem facilitates remote access using both digital trunks, tie trunks, aswell as S0 subscriber lines. Data transmission is supported according to Protocol X.75.

The digital modem is treated as a pseudo port. It receives a number in the system that canbe reached internally and through direct internal dialing. You can cancel the DID numbermanually to prevent external access.

Baud rate settingsFor information about setting the baud rate for different connection types between HiPath 3000and HiPath 3000 Manager E, consult the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help.

Access to the analog/digital modem The customer must enable the access to both modems by entering a 6-digit PIN code. If theservice center is to make a connection to the HiPath 3000 over a modem, it may be necessaryto enter this individual code. It depends on which trunk type is used for the modem access. Thefollowing applies to the system default:

Access over ISDN trunk = enable procedure: customer must enter PIN code.

Access over another trunk = login without code: PIN code is not necessary.

If necessary, the system administration (only by using Manager T) can reset the PIN code backto the default value.

7CautionBe sure to disconnect the system from the power supply before removing or in-serting integrated analog modems (IMODN).



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Remote Service

11.5.2 HiPath 5000 RSM Connection Options

In general, the connection to HiPath 5000 RSM is established via special software programs,such as pcANYWHERE. Please refer to the relevant product documentation for information on

possible applications.

If the customer agrees, Remote Access Service RAS can also be used, provided this serviceis active on the HiPath 5000 RSM server. Information on establishing the Remote Access Ser-vice RAS can be obtained from the HG1500 V3.0 Configuration Manual.

11.5.3 Remote System Administration

11.5.3.1 Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 with HiPath 3000 Manager E

To establish a remote connection between HiPath 3000 and the service center (HiPath 3000Manager E), the following options are available:

Callback

Service call using a code

Automatic error signaling

Any one of these options establishes a connection using the integrated digital modem (B chan-nel) or the integrated analog modem (IMODN).

Callback

HiPath 3000 can manage up to 6 different callback indices (callback passwords and their rele-vant callback numbers), in which case the first callback connection is also the destination of theautomatic error signaling. For each callback connection, you can select either the digital mo-dem (B channel) or the analog modem (IMODN).

If you have chosen your settings and selected the connection setup option “Callback activated”,the HiPath 3000 Manager E can dial in to the system. HiPath 3000 register the callback desti-nation and saves the callback index. After 10 s, the HiPath 3000 initiates the actual callbackwith the number which is linked using the callback index. As soon as the connection is estab-lished, you can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to manage the system.

If no connection is established, HiPath 3000 will make a total of 20 attempts in intervals of 10 safter which the callback attempt ends. You then have to start it up again with HiPath 3000 Man-ager E.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Remote Service

Service call using a code

You can use any telephone to initiate a HiPath 3000 service call to the service center by select-ing the connection setup option “Service call using a code” and activating the feature “Remote

access immediately after installation”. In contrast to the usual callback procedure, this callback(service call) is not activated by HiPath 3000 Manager E itself, but by any telephone youchoose. Callback initialization is essentially skipped.

The service call destinations are the six callback indices that also apply to callback. You are notrequired to enter the relevant passwords.

The service center wait time for one service call is limited to 15 minutes, though you can end itmanually at any time.

Procedure: Activate the feature “Remote access immediately after installation”.

Automatic Error Correction

Class B errors can be automatically transferred to a service center. For more information onthis, see Section 11.5.5.

11.5.3.2 DTMF Remote Administration of HiPath 3000

This feature facilitates remote system administration by transmitting DTMF signals. The userinterface (menu prompt) is the same as that of the Manager T for system administration on site.

DTMF remote administration can be performed using either the analog or digital trunks.

11.5.4 Remote Correction of System Software (APS)

The service center performs the APS transfer (see Section 11.2.3).

Step Entry Explanation1. *994 Enter code for “Remote access immediately after installation”

2. X Select callback index (0 ... 6 possible)

3. XXXXXXX Possibly select a suffix number (max. 11 digits)The suffix selects the remote PC in the service center.

4. or # Press “OK” or the “#” button.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Remote Service

11.5.5 Remote Error Signaling

Class B errors can be automatically transferred to a service center. To do this, the “Error sig-naling” flag has to be activated and a number entered under the callback index 1.

To register an error message, the HiPath 3000 Manager E that is dialed at the service centermust be in Receive mode. If an error message is received, the HiPath 3000 Manager E auto-matically creates a file in which the error is entered. If another error occurs, it is entered in thesame file behind the previous entry.

The error report consists of one header and the error information that is transmitted in binaryform. The header contains a unique identifier that recognizes the customer system that sentthe error reports.

7

Caution

In case of a power outage, the not battery-buffered SDRAM content of the MMC iscompletely lost. With it the possibly carried out individual setting of the time param-eter "error signaling interval" is also put back on the default value 15 minutes.With the restarting of the sytem the automatic recovery action " reload CDB backup"starts and with it the reload of the customer-individual settings. Because this process

lasts longer than 15 minutes, the first error message is always signaled at the end ofthe 15-minutes default interval. Then the signaling of all other errors takes placeagain with the individually set interval.Example: The error signaling interval of a HiPath 3550 with activated error signalingwas put on 90 s. Through a power outage, the 90 s-interval is put back on the defaultvalue 15 minutes. The first error message "no voltage" is signaled 15 minutes after

restarting operation of the system. After conclusion of the recovery action "reloadCDB backup" the original 90 s-setting of the error signaling interval is again active.The signaling of other errors takes place after 90 s.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Remote Service

11.5.6 Controlled Release of a Remote Connection

With Version 1.2 and later, you can initiate the controlled release of a remote connection (withanalog or digital modem) between the HiPath 3000 and HiPath 3000 Manager E as follows:

Disconnect according to action (Default setting)After completing an action (e. g. CDB backup or APS transfer), the remote connection isautomatically disconnected.

Disconnect according to release timeAfter completing an action (CDB backup or APS transfer, for example) and the adjustablerelease time sequence (60 ... 9999 s), the remote connection is disconnected.

“Hang up” buttonBy pressing this button, you can disconnect the remote connection manually.

Use HiPath 3000 Manager E to select any one of these options.

11.5.7 Remote Administration and Access Using PPP

You can establish a connection between the system/Plus product and the service center usingeither the integrated digital modem (B channel) or the integrated analog modem (IMODN).Data is exchanged in both cases using Point-to-Point-Protocols (PPP).

For further information see “Features via LAN” in the HiPath 3000/5000 Feature Description.

11.5.7.1 Remote System Administration

You can also operate HiPath 3000 Manager E in conjunction with the relevant infrastructure(RDT network, router) using PPP.

For further information, see “Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 via PPP” in the HiPath3000/5000 Feature Description.

11.5.7.2 Remote Administration of Plus Products

You can manage Plus products from a central location using HiPath 3000. However, HiPath3000 only provide the means of transmission. Actual administration of the Plus product is doneusing special software programs like pcANYWHERE.

For further information, see “Remote Administration of Plus Products via PPP” in the HiPath3000/5000 Feature Description.

11.5.7.3 Remote Error Signaling Using SNMP

Plus products and theHiPath 3000 can transmit error messages (SNMP traps) to the servicecenter.

For further information, see “SNMP Functionality” in the HiPath 3000/5000 Feature Description.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Security Features

11.6 Security Features

11.6.1 Access Security

11.6.1.1 Logon With User Name and Password

Security

To ensure that authorized users have access to the HiPath 3000 and to prevent unauthorizedaccesses, users must be identified by a user name and authorized by a password. This appliesto all local and remote administration and maintenance procedures using HiPath 3000 Manag-er E, Manager T, HiPath 3000 Manager C, Manager TC, and AMHOST.

After the first system startup and during country initialization, you can select between the fol-

lowing security options: variable password (default)

Fixed Password

Example of first-time login with Manager T


1. *95 Start system administration

2. 31994 Default user name3. 31994 Default password

>For optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office telephones, only alphanumeric char-acters can be used. Therefore, when changing the user name or password with theManager T/Manager TC, you may enter additional characters as long as you neveruse the optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office.






http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Security Features

Variable Password

Up to 16 users can be assigned their own user ID with individual name, password, and a usergroup consisting of six pre-determined user groups (in Table 11-8). Only the data authorizedfor the relevant user group can be read and administrated.

During the first login, the system requests the identity of the user and asks for a new password(max. 15 characters from the optiPoint 500 or optiset E character set). This then overwritesthe default user name (31994) and default password (31994). This first user is then automati-cally assigned to the user group “System Maintenance”. The system informs the user that nouser is configured in the system and that the user has been assigned with “System Mainte-nance” authorization. Using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Manager T, additional users and theirpasswords can be configured in the user administration.

If a user forgets a password, it has to be deleted and re-configured by a different authorizeduser. If all authorized users forget their passwords, the system must be regenerated.

Fixed Password

When using the fixed password, only fixed user groups with unchangeable default user namesand default passwords are used. Also, new users cannot be configured in the user administra-tion.

8. XX Country code is requested (see page A-25). The systemsubsequently boots up with the country-specific default infor-

mation.Notes: On step 4 and step 5: If a new password is issued, both steps are omitted when calling





http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Security Features

Changing Password Types

Only with Manager T can you change from a variable password to a fixed password type andvice versa. To do this, you have to re-initialize the country settings. This switches the entire

content of the customer database (including user names and passwords) to a default state.If you perform country initialization in a system with a variable password, the previously createduser names and passwords remain intact as long as you do not subsequently change the pass-word type.

If a CDB is read from a system in which the default user names and passwords were changed,this CDB cannot be loaded into a HiPath 3000 system that was changed to a fixed passwordtype. Before reading this CDB, you have to set up a user (user name and password) in the sys-tem that matches a user group with a fixed password. Once this user has been set up, the CDBcan be read from the HiPath 3000. With this user name and ID, you can now load the CDB intothe system switched to the fixed password type.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Security Features

11.6.1.2 Pre-determined User Groups and Their Access Rights

User Groups With a Variable Password

The following table shows the six pre-determined user groups and their access rights.Table 11-8 Variable Password: Pre-determined User Groups and Their Access Rights

No. User groups

User rights

U s e r

a d m i n .

A u d i t

S y s t e m m a i n t .

( S e r v i c e )

C u s t o m e r a d m i n .

( C u s t . )

C h a r g e

a c c o u n t i n g

D e v e l o p m e n t

1. Setting up/deleting users Assigning users to user groups

X X1

1 As long as no user is assigned to the “User Administration” user group.

2. Assessing and archiving backup-related logfiles

Reader rights to system data (errormemory, for example), not including confi-dential customer information

X X2

2 As long as no user is assigned to the “Audit” user group.

3. Access rights to all system data (not includingdevelopment access rights) as long as no us-ers are assigned to other user groups.

X

4. Access rights to confidential customer infor-mation

Executing customer actions ( printing out cer-tain lists, for example)

X3

3 As long as no user is assigned to the “Customer administration” user group.

X

5. Access rights to non-confidential customerinformation

X X

6. Access rights to parameters and call detailrecording actions (not including interface pa-rameters for the output device)

X3, 4 X4

4 As long as no user is assigned to the “Accounting” user group.

X

7. Access rights of the “System Maintenance”user group

Setting up and reading certain parameters towhich no other user group has access.

X



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Security Features

User Groups With a Fixed Password

The following table shows the unchangeable user groups and their rights.

Table 11-9 Fixed Password: Fixed User Groups and Their Access Rights

No. User groups

User rights S y s

t e m m a i n t . ( S e r v i c e )

N a m e / P a s s w o r d =

3 1 9 9 4 / 3 1 9 9 4

C u s

t o m e r a d m i n . ( C u s t . )

N a m e / P a s s w o r d :

– M a n a g e r T C = * 9 5 / ( P a s s w o r d

n o t n e c e s s a r y )

– M a

n a g e r T = o f f i c e / o f f i c e

D e v e l o p m e n t

1. Assessing and archiving backup-related log files Reader rights to system data ( error memory, for

example), not including confidential customer infor-mation

X X

2. Access rights to all system data (not including de-velopment access rights)

X X

3. Access rights to confidential customer information Executing customer actions ( printing out certain

lists, for example)

X X X

4. Access rights to non-confidential customer infor-mation

X X X

5. Access rights to parameters and call detail record-ing actions (not including interface parameters forthe output device)

X

6. Setting up and reading certain parameters to whichno other user group has access.

X



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Security Features

11.6.1.3 System Access Options

The user’s access rights, meaning the data that the user may read or manage, always dependon the user group to which the user is assigned.

Service Tools

Manager T and Manager TCLog in by entering your user name and password (regardless of code lock)The system can only be accessed using the first two UP0/E connections from the firstSLMO/SLU board in the system.

HiPath 3000 Manager E and HiPath 3000 Manager C (local)Log in by entering your user name and password.

HiPath 3000 Manager E (remote), direct connection

Log in by entering your user name and passwordThe system can be accessed directly using the integrated digital modem (B channel) or theintegrated analog modem. However, the user is required to establish a 5 digit access codebeforehand.

HiPath 3000 Manager E (remote), callback connectionLog in by entering your user name and passwordThe system can be accessed using the integrated digital modem (B channel) or the inte-grated analog modem. However, you have to set up a callback index beforehand.

HiPath 3000/5000 Software Manager

Log in by entering your user name and password.

AMHOST

The AMHOST (Administration and Maintenance via HOST) feature allows Plus products toread certain system information and to change it, if necessary. To enable Plus products to ac-cess the system, you have to set up a user without a user group in the HiPath 3000 default useradministration. Enter “AMHOST” as the user name and “77777” as the default user password.

You can only change this password if the system is configured using a variable password. Inthis case, delete the “AMHOST” user and re-configure the system with the same user nameand a new password.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Security Features

11.6.1.4 Customer Data Security

When saving a customer database on the hard disk, a user table (part of the user administra-tion) with user name and encrypted passwords are also saved. This guarantees access secu-

rity when the customer database is opened offline later on.When opening the customer database offline, you are requested to enter your user name andpassword. The data that you enter is compared to the data in the user table. In this case, theuser group verified during this process also determines the access rights.

When loading an offline customer database into HiPath 3000, the user table that goes with itshould not be loaded into the system. Otherwise, the system-specific user administrationwould be distorted.

>

When you generate a default customer database offline, a default user table is alsoset up. If you generate a customer database like this, you can only load it into a de-fault system.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Security Features

11.6.2 Automatic Logging of Administration Procedures

Definition

All accesses to customer-related data in the HiPath 3000 are automatically logged in an areaof the MMC (LOG area) reserved for this purpose. The information recorded includes who theuser is, the data manipulated by the user, and the time. An authorized user (member of the“Audit” user group) can transfer the system data to a PC and assess it.

11.6.2.1 Logging

A log entry contains the following information:

Date and time

User name and user group Type of activity (format identification) and activity (command entry)

11.6.2.1.1 Format Identification and Command Entry

The following format information is logged:

Manager T (1)All activities are logged, regardless of system access. The respective code with the mostimportant parameters is recorded as the command entry ( station/number, for example).

Manager TC (2)Same as Manager T (1)

Session Information (3)The system access is logged, regardless whether it is logged using Manager T, HiPath3000 Manager E, or other systems. Possible command entries are:A0-1 = Login procedureA0-2 = Logout procedureA0-3 = Unauthorized login attempt

HiPath 3000 Manager E Database (4)Access to the database is logged using HiPath 3000 Manager E. Possible command en-tries are:A1-1 = Database readA1-2 = Regeneration of CDB (Load CDB into the system)A1-3 = Write database

Program Systems (5)APS transfers and system boots ( first bootup, for example) are recorded. Possible com-mand entries are:



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Security Features

– A2-1 = APSXF started– A2-2 = APSXF ended– A2-3 = APS boot (APS stamp also included)

HiPath 3000 Manager E Maintenance (6)Maintenance activities which can be assigned with the following command entries arelogged:– B1-1 = Read error memory– B1-2 = Delete error memory– B2-1 = Out of service– B3-1 = Read Direct Memory Access– B3-2 = Write Direct Memory Access– B4-1 = Delete base station status overload– B4-2 = Delete base station restart– B5-1 = Digital loopback change

– B6-1 = Trunk rolling change– B7-1 = Read trunk status– B8-1 = Delete trunk error counter

Simulated or pseudo Manager T format (7)The HiPath 3000 Manager E records the offline changes of a CDB as a “simulated” Man-ager T command. For data areas subject to change by HiPath 3000 Manager E, pseudoareas are generated. When loading an offline CDB into the system, the following simulatedcommands are logged as command entries:C1 = Pseudo area “System parameter”– C1-1 System fags/CMI

– C1-2 System intercept/AC– C1-3 Tones and calls– C1-4 Direction flag special (Variable direction#)– C1-5 System settings– C1-6 Host Link Interface– C1-7 Relocate activationC2 = Pseudo area “System timer”– C2-1 System timerC3 = Pseudo area “S0 configuration”– C3-1 Station bus

– C3-2 Line supervision– C3-3 ModeC4 = Pseudo area “Lines”– C4-1 Loop start parameter (Variable Slot/Line#)C5 = Pseudo area “Digit analysis”– C5-1 Internal number (Variable Stn#, Grp#)– C5-2 Service codesC6 = Pseudo area “Summer time”– C6-1 Summer time

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Security Features

C7 = Pseudo area “Directions”– C7-1 Direction flags (Variable direction#)C8 = Pseudo area “Door setup”– C8-1 Door setup (Variable door#)

C9 = Pseudo area “UCD Flags”– C9-1 UCD FlagsC10 = Pseud area “Delete system counter”– C10-1 Delete system counter

HiPath 3000 Manager E online (8)Archives from the log file and the user administration are logged. Possible command en-tries are:– D1-1 = Archive– D2-1 = New user– D2-2 = Delete user

– D3-1 = Change password

>Logging External Accesses (Solutions, Applications)Plus products used with “AMHOST” can only make limited changes. Because thesechanges “automatically” run simultaneously ( Check In and Check Out for hotel so-lutions, for example), these are not logged. Only the session information (user nameis “amhost”) with the command entries “Login procedure” and “Logout procedure”are logged.



service.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Service

Security Features

11.6.2.2 Issuing and Saving Log Data

Data is automatically logged in an area (LOG area) on the MCC reserved for this purpose (Hi-Path 3000) or in a special directory (HiPath 5000 RSM). It cannot be switched off.

If approximately 80 % of the MMC log area capacity is exceeded, a Class A error is issued.This error is dealt with like all Class A errors and is displayed on the optiPoint Attendant as “Re-visor Alarm.”

The log should now be read out and archived, meaning it should be saved in an archive file (fileextension = arc). If an archive is not created, the oldest datablock is overwritten if there is a dan-ger of overflow.

You can only issue log entries using HiPath 3000 Manager E. You cannot retrieve the log en-tries from the system until you have logged on as a user with “Revisor” rights.

Archive

If you request an archive (storage), the system checks whether or not there is already an ar-chive file (file extension = arc). If it is a file with log data from a previous archive, the file mustmatch the current customer. In case of a positive result, the system log entries are retrievedand attached to the existing data in the archive file. At the same time, the data in the systemis deleted.If malfunctions occur during this procedure (for example, line interruption), the entire procedureends and the archive has to be restarted.

If no archive is requested, the revisor can retrieve, view, and print the log entries. However, log

entries remain in the system.You do not have to log in to the system to use the HiPath 3000 Manager E to check archive fileson the PC monitor. In this case, a password is not required.

Multimedia Card

When replacing the multimedia card, the following applies:

If the memory area for logging data is empty, loggingrestarts.

If the memory area for logging data is not empty, logging continues.



Service

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


service.fm

Security Features

Example of a Log Printout

The following assumption applies as an example: The first system boot up has taken place andcustomer-specific programming was completed.

The sample printout (without consideration of headers and footers) refers to the following infor-mation concerning administration procedures:

The Revisor (“rev” user in “R” (Revision) user group) has generated an initial archive.

The Service (“serv” user in “S” (system maintenance) user group) has read out the systemdatabase, changed 20 station names, and written them again to the system.

The Customer (“pnkm” user in “A” (Administration) user group) has changed two additionalstation names.

The Revisor has retrieved the most recent log entries and printed them out.

1050 00-11-25 15:57:10 rev(R) (6)D1-1 Archive

1051 00-11-25 15:58:22 rev(R) (3)A0-2 Logout procedure

1052 00-11-26 09:20:15 serv(S) (3)A0-1 Login procedure

1053 00-11-26 09:21:35 serv(S) (4)A1-1 Database read

1054 00-11-26 09:21:52 serv(S) (7)14-12-*(20) Station name

1055 00-11-26 09:22:45 serv(S) (4)A1-3 Write database

1056 00-11-26 09:23:25 serv(S) (3)A0-2 Logout procedure

1057 00-11-26 10:10:15 pnkm(A) (3)A0-1 Login procedure1058 00-11-26 10:11:15 pnkm(A) (2)14-12-”30” Station name

1059 00-11-26 10:11:35 pnkm(A) (2)14-12-”31” Station name

1060 00-11-26 10:12:15 pnkm(A) (3)A0-2 Logout procedure

1061 00-11-27 11:20:30 rev(R) (3)A0-1 Login procedure



ip_.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


IP Fundamentals

Overview

12 IP Fundamentals

12.1 Overview

In this chapter


Topic

IP Network Requirements, page 12-2

General Introduction, page 12-2

H.323 Protocol, page 12-2

Voice Compression G.711, G.723.1, page 12-3 QoS - Quality of Service, page 12-4

Network Analysis, page 12-6

>This section provides introductory information only and does not replace IP training.



IP Fundamentals

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


ip_.fm

IP Network Requirements

12.2 IP Network Requirements

12.2.1 General Introduction

A number of protocols play a role in data communication (X.25, Frame Relay, ATM and TCP/ IP). The IP (Internet Protocol) switching layer is the Internet’s key protocol and permits interop-erability with other networks and protocols, for example, Ethernet, X.25, Frame Relay and ATM.IP is consequently often used as a synonym for the technology as a whole. The protocols TCP,UDP and RTP are used by the various applications and requirements in the Internet, such as

“File Transfer (FTP)”, “e-mail (SMTP)” and “WWW”.RTP (Real Time Protocol) is used for voice transmission. The term “Voice over IP (VoIP)” indi-cates that the IP protocol is used to transport voice information.

There are nowadays various protocols that result from the efforts of diverse standardizationbodies and standardization drives.

12.2.2 H.323 Protocol

H.323 encompasses the following subjects:

Signaling (H.245, ...)

Video transmission

Voice transmission/voice compression, e. g.

– G.723.1 (5.3/6.3 Kbps)

– G.729A (8 Kbps)

Data applications (Application Sharing, T.120)

It is clear that this standard offers much more than just what is needed for voice transmission

via data networks. H.323 was developed for multimedia applications.

>For special requirements regarding bandwidth, delay, QoS, etc. for a HiPath 3000/

5000 V4.0 customer IP network, please refer to the “Requirement specifications in-cluded with the contract for a HiPath 3000/5000 solution”.



ip_.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


IP Fundamentals


12.2.3 Voice Compression G.711, G.723.1

HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 supports voice compression based on G.711 and G723.1.

G.711 (64 Kbps) is used by default for voice compression.G.723.1 permits the use of, for example, teleworking via ISDN and relieves existing data net-works. G.723.1 reduces the VoIP bandwidth requirement for speech communication to approx.50 Kbps. This permits bidirectional voice connection via a single ISDN B channel. This enablesthe connection of teleworkstations or branch offices to the corporate network via a 64 kbit con-nection. We do not recommend running other applications (e. g. Application Sharing, FileTransfer) at the same time as a bidirectional VoIP connection via 64 Kbps, however, as this gen-erally reduces voice quality. It is advisable to use both B channels at an S0 port for this.



IP Fundamentals

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


ip_.fm


12.2.4 QoS - Quality of Service

Introduction

Data transmission in IP networks can encounter:

Time problems due to large e-mail attachments and web surfing

Network bottlenecks as a result of multiple requests for the same web page

Reduced voice quality due to:

– Delay (decline in voice quality due to delay)

– Variable delays (decline in voice quality due to jitter)

– Packet loss (decline in voice quality due to packet loss)

Quality of Service includes various methods which guarantee certain transmission propertiesin packet-orientated networks (IP).

It is therefore important to ensure a minimum bandwidth for the duration of transmission,for example, in the case of Voice over IP. When several equal-access applications are operatingvia IP, the available transmission link bandwidth (e. g. an ISDN B channel, 64 Kbps) is sharedbetween these applications. Consequently, packet loss may occur during a voice connection,causing poor voice quality.

HiPath 3000/5000 QoS

In HiPath 3000/5000 networks, different types of traffic are transported via a single IP infra-structure. It is the aim of Quality of Service to fulfill the data traffic and voice traffic require-ments.

To prevent voice traffic from being suppressed by data traffic, the former must be given highpriority. In addition, it must be specified that high-priority traffic is transmitted before traffic withlower priority. This is specified on layers 2 and 3:

The three bits in the 802.1p field, which is part of the 802.1Q tag, are used on layer 2.

On layer 3, the six bits in the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) field are used in the IP headers’Type of Service (ToS) byte.

It is also essential that sufficient bandwidth is available within the QoS class in use (Codepoint/ IEEE802.1p User Priority). The following table lists the QoS values used for DiffServ and theUser Priority IEEE802.1p field.



ip_.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


IP Fundamentals


Information on the QoS procedures used for HG1500 can be found in the HG1500 V3.0 Con-figuration Manual.

Table 12-1 Possible QoS settings

Traffic type DiffServ

Code Point

802.1p field(Priority 0 (= lowest) – 7 (=

highest)

Traffic class

Voice payload (RTP/RTCP) AF12(001100)

6 Guaranteed service

Data payload (fax gateway) AF11(001010)

6 Guaranteed service

Signaling (H.225, H.245 andreal-time application signaling)

AF21(010010)

5 Controlled Load

All other traffic types DE (000000) 0 Best effort



IP Fundamentals

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


ip_.fm

Network Analysis

12.3 Network Analysis

The Network Analysis service module is used to check whether the customer’s communicationnetwork is suitable for business-over-IP solutions from Siemens AG (HiPath 3000, HiPath4000, HiPath 5000 RSM, etc.). The assessment is carried out on the basis of parameters pre-set by the products. The customer receives a final report in which the network structure andoperating parameters (percentage utilization, delay, jitter) are documented.

Information can be found on the HiPath Network Analysis homepage: https://netinfo.icn.sie-mens.de/es/products/prod_netzwerk_analyse_v2/product/home_page.

Customer benefits and cost-effectiveness

Preparation of the network for future applications (VoIP)

Determination of current traffic volume and percentage utilization, baselining

Decision-making assistance for the introduction of VoIP solutions

Network analysis performance specification

Examination of the suitability of customer networks for Siemens AG Voice-over-IP solu-tions

Recording of relevant parameters over a predefined test time

Assessment on the basis of product specifications

Interpretation of test results with suggestions of further measures

Final report with recommendations

Configuration notes

For use when planning Siemens AG Voice-over-IP solutions

For use only in SNMP-based IP data networks (routers, IP switches, hubs)

>Network analysis must be performed before installation of the relevant systems and

applications to guarantee smooth operation in the customer network.Network analysis determines the conditions under which the customer’s network issuitable for HiPath 3000/5000. The result report is an integral component of the re-quirement specifications in the HiPath 3000/5000 solution contract.



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual A-1

System Programming Codes (Expert Mode Codes)

A System Programming Codes (Expert Mode Codes)

Introduction

You can administer HiPath 3000 systems from an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone (with dis-play) using expert mode at either of the first two stations (UPO/E). You can initiate expert modeby entering a sequence of consecutive digits that branch you to the desired option.

Error Message Displays

You must acknowledge error messages. When the system reports an error as a result of enter-ing a previously used code, the expert mode code appears at the beginning of the second lineof the display. You can use the expert mode code to go directly to the desired menu segment.

Menu Selection Using Codes

Depending on the menu you enter either single-digit or multi-digit codes. You can use * on thenumeric keypad to change the item and # to call the configuration option.

Accessing System Administration

Users can access system administration by entering a user name (ID) and password (authen-tication). Depending on the active password concept (refer to Section 11.6.1 for more details),the procedure is as follows:

For an example of the first time system administration is called via Manager T after the systemis booted, refer to page 11-65.

Table A-1 Starting System Administration (Service)

Step Input Explanation

1. *95 Start system administration

2. XXXXX Enter user name: Fixed password concept: User name = 31994 Variable password concept: Individual user name

3. XXXXX Enter password: Fixed password concept: Password = 31994 Variable password concept: Individual password




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

A-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

pcodes.fm

Table A-2 Expert Mode Code Groups

Code Group Function

System maintenance expert mode (previously Manager T)

11 Call detail recording

12 System speed dial

13 Account Code

14 Configure station

15 Toll restriction

16 Incoming calls

17 Networking18 Traffic restriction

19 Displays

20 ISDN parameters

21 Analog CO interface

22 System settings

23 Codes

24 Entrance phone

25 Announcement/Music26 Relays

27 Sensors (HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 only)

28 Edit CDB

29 System details

30 Remote administration

31 UCD

32 Radio paging equipment (not for U.S.)

33 Attendant console34 DISA

35 Least cost routing (LCR)

36 HiPath Cordless Office (not for U.S.)

37 Security

51 – 63 Customer administration (previously Manager TC)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Table A-3 Expert Mode Codes

Code Function

11 Call detail recording

11 1 CDR/station (call detail recording at station)

11 1 1 View CDR/station; enter station number (11-74)

11 1 2 Print CDR/station

11 2 CDR per trunk (call detail recording per trunk)

11 2 1 View CDR per trunk; select slot/trunk

11 2 2 Print CDR per trunk

11 3 CDR central (call detail recording central)11 3 1 Print format: 0 = Compressed, 1 = Long

11 3 2 Station number format, Suppress digits; 0 = No, 1 = Yes

11 3 3 Incoming calls: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

11 3 4 Call duration: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

11 3 5 Print MSN: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

11 3 6 Call charge display, 1 = Amount / 2 = Pulses

11 3 7 Outgoing without connection, 0 = no / 1 = yes

11 4 Call charge factor (not for U.S.):Enter 0 % to 10000 %

11 5 ISDN units (not for U.S.):Enter 0 % to 10000 %

11 6 Currency, alphanumeric entry of max. 3 characters (not for U.S.)

11 7 Call log: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

11 8 CDRA (call detail recording, attendant), pay phone, station.

11 9 Calculation accuracy (0 to 3)

11 9 1 Calculation accuracy, fractional digits

12 System speed dial

12 1 Speed dial numbers, external station numbers000 to 999 (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500);000 to 299 (HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300)

12 2 Speed dial names, alphanumeric entries of up to 16 positions (optiset Ememory and optiPoint 600 office only), only if speed-dialing numbershave been entered




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

13 Account Code (ACCT)

13 1 Code entries, list 0 to 999

13 2 Verification mode: 0 = Non-verified, 1 = Code entries,2 = Code length

13 3 Trunk group mode: 0 = Non-verified, 1 = Forced

13 4 Code length (1 to 11)

14 Configure station

14 10 Copy station data

14 11 Station type

14 11 0 Default

14 11 1 Fax

14 11 2 Voice mail (5 digits)

14 11 3 Speaker

14 11 4 Answering machine

14 11 5 External music on hold (MOH)

14 11 6 Analog telephone MW

14 11 7 Voice mail (6 digits)

14 11 8 Door, pulse

14 11 9 Memo

14 12 Station name, alphanumeric entry of up to 16 characters (optiset Ememory and optiPoint 600 office only)

14 13 Busy override: 0 = Denied, 1 = Allowed

14 14 Associated dialing: 0 = Denied, 1 = Allowed

14 15 DISA: 0 = Denied, 1 = Allowed

14 16 Call waiting rejection: 0 = Off, 1 = On

14 17 Headset: 0 = Off, 1 = On

14 18 Call pickup group:HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700: Groups 1 to 32, max. 32 stationsHiPath 3550, HiPath 3500: Groups 1 to 16, max. 32 stationsHiPath 3350, HiPath 3300: Groups 1 to 8, max. 8 stations

14 19 Reset station PIN: 0 = Reset to 00000

14 20 Override do not disturb: 0 = No, 1 = Yes


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



14 21 Caller list: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

14 22 Trace call: 0 = Denied, 1 = Allowed (not for U.S.)

14 23 Call forwarding external: 0 = Denied, 1 = Allowed

14 24 Reserved

14 25 Data compression: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

14 26 Select language:11 = German12 = US English13 = French14 = Spanish15 = English16 = Italian17 = Dutch18 = Portuguese19 = Finnish20 = Czech21 = Danish22 = Swedish23 = Norwegian24 = Turkish

25 = Telekom, German26 = Polish27 = Hungarian28 = Russian29 = Greek30 = Slovenian31 = Serbo-Croatian32 = Estonian33 = Latvian34 = Lithuanian35 = Chinese36 = Slovakian37 = Catalonian

14 27 Stop voice calling, 0 = off / 1 = on

14 28 Phone lock intercept: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

14 29 Signaling method: 1 = DTMF, 2 = Dial pulses

14 30 optiPoint BLF (busy lamp field or BLF; not for U.S): Display: No BLF, oneBLF, two BLFs


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

14 31 Collect call barring per station

14 32 Set up station in telephone directory, 0 = no / 1 = yes

14 33 Editing the telephone number, 0 = no / 1 = yes

14 34 Monitoring, 0 = not authorized, 1 = authorized

14 35 Keypad dialing, 0 = not authorized, 1 = authorized

15 Toll restriction

15 1 Restriction, day; specify reference stationEnter new data:0 = No access except by system speed-dialing

1 = Incoming only2-7 = Allowed list / Allowed lists 1-68-13 = Denied list / Denied lists 1-614 = Full access

15 2 Restriction, night; specify reference stationEnter new data:0 = No access except by system speed-dialing1 = Incoming only2-7 = Allowed list / Allowed list 1-68-13 = Denied list / Denied list 1-6

14 = Full access15 3 Allowed lists

15 3 1 Allowed list 1, 100 entries

15 3 2 Allowed 2, 10 entries





15 4 Denied lists15 4 1 Denied list 1, 50 entries

15 4 2 Denied 2, 10 entries






Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



15 5 Number of authorized stations (for verification purposes only)

15 6 Telephone lock0 = No access except by system speed-dialing1 = Incoming only2 - 7 = Allowed lists 1-6 (AL 1 to AL 6)8 - 13 = Denied lists 1-6 (DL 1 to DL 6)14 = Full access (full)

15 7 Toll restriction, 0 = Per digit, 1= En-bloc

15 8 COS of transferred trunks

15 9 Toll restriction, private

16 Incoming calls

16 10 Internal station numbers

16 10 1 Station

16 10 1 1 Change station number, position -> station number

16 10 1 2 Find station number, position -> slot/port

16 10 2 Groups

16 11 DID numbers; (internal) station number is displayed; enter (new) stationnumber

16 12 Intercept, day; enter new destination, group or Stn. no., max. 6 digits

16 13 Intercept, night; enter new destination, group or Stn. no., max. 6 digits

16 14 Intercept mode

16 14 1 On no answer: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

16 14 2 On busy

16 14 2 1 Intercept: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

16 14 2 2 On busy: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

16 14 3 On misdialed number: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

16 14 4 On incomplete number: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

16 14 5 On recall: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

16 15 Hunt/group call

16 15 1 Called station no.; select group and assign destination


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

16 15 2 Group type; select group and type:1 = Circular hunt group2 = Linear hunt group3 = Group call4 = Group call, no answer5 = Basic MULAP6 = Executive MULAP

16 15 3 Group name; select group and enter name(optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office only)

16 15 4 Select host (primary)/executive, group, and station (only stations thatare not the host (primary) telephone in another group)

16 16 Call allocation, day; select slot/trunk and assign station no.

16 17 Call allocation, night; select slot/trunk and assign station no.

16 18 Call forwarding—no answer

16 18 1 Select call destination list and destination index (1 – 4).Call destination lists: up to and including V1.2 = 70 V3.0 and later =

– 500 for HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700– 376 for HiPath 3550, HiPath 3500

– 70 for all other systemsSelect destination (1 – 4), possible entries: targeted call number of a station or a group * = identical to called station #9 = system search of all stations except for the executive-exten-

sions #201 – #260 = uniform call distribution group 01 to group 60 #301 ', – #316 = announcement device 1 to 16 an external destination, i.e., call numbers in satellites and in the

central office

16 18 2 Internal calls; select station/group: up to and including V1.2 = 1 – 70 V3.0 and later =

– 1 – 500 for HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700– 1 – 376 for HiPath 3550, HiPath 3500– 1 – 70 for all other systems


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



16 18 3 External calls, day; select station/group: up to and including V1.2 = 1 – 70 V3.0 and later =


16 18 4 External calls, night; select station/group: up to and including V1.2 = 1 – 70 V3.0 and later =


16 18 5 Number of rings (1 to 15) for station/group

16 18 6 Night bell, location for station/group

16 18 7 Night bell, mode:1 = Immediate connect, 2 = After timeout

16 18 8 Call forwarding (CF) on busy, 0 = Do not forward call, 1 = Forward call

16 19 Ring cadence, 0 = Type 1, 1 = Type 2, 2 = Type 3

16 20 DID DTMF, 0 = Denied / 1 = Allowed

16 21 Collect call barring (Brazil), 0 = off / 1 = on

17 Networking

17 11 Prime Line: 0 = Off, 1 = On

17 12 Assign trunk group; select slot/trunk and assign trunk groupTrunk group 1-8 (HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300)Trunk group 1-16 (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700, HiPath3500)

17 13 Overflow trunk group; select trunk group and assign overflow trunkgroup

17 14 Trunk type CO/CS; select trunk type:0 = CO, 1 = CS

17 15 Trunk group name; select trunk group and enter name(optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office only)

17 16 Trunk group hunt mode; select trunk group:0 = Circular, 1= Linear

17 17 Rerouting (optimized B channel utilization)

17 17 1 Rerouting active: 0 = No, 1 = Only if known, 2 = Always


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

17 17 2 Change trunk groups: 0 = Denied, 1 = Allowed

17 18 Central intercept

17 19 Call data routing

17 19 1 Destination system

17 19 2 System number, 1-255

17 19 3 Group number, 1-40

17 19 4 Node number

17 20 Digit repetition; select trunk group: 0 = Off, 1 = On

17 21 Path optimization: 0 = No, 1 = Yes17 22 QSig: Voice mail

17 22 1 Callback access number

17 22 2 Callback access name

17 23 QSig: Busy signaling

17 23 1 Station, 0 = no / 1 = yes

17 23 2 Station number, destination system

17 23 3 System number, destination system

18 Traffic restriction18 1 Configure exec./sec. groups; select group, enter:

1 = Exec. 1 / 2 = Exec. 2 / 3 = Sec. 1 / 4 = Sec. 2HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700: Group 1-16HiPath 3550, HiPath 3500: Group 1-10HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300: Group 1-4

18 2 Hotline

18 2 1 Hotline destinationsHiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500: Destination 1-6HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300: Destination 1

18 2 2 Hotline station number

18 2 2 1 Hotline mode: 0 = Off, 1 = Hotline, 2 = Hotline after timeout

18 2 2 2 Hotline assignmentHiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500: 1-6HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300: 1

18 2 3 Hotline timeout, 1-99 x s


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



18 3 ITR groups (internal traffic restriction groups)

18 3 1 Group assignment

18 3 1 1 Station (Group 1-6)

18 3 1 2 Trunks; select slot and trunk (Group 1-6)

18 3 1 3 Speed-dialing number assignment

18 3 1 3-1 Minimum speed-dialing group, Select group, 0 to 999

18 3 1 3-2 Maximum speed-dialing group, Select group, 0 to 999

18 3 2 Connection groups

18 3 2 1 Connection group: select group, 0 = No, 1 = Yes19 Displays

19 11 Text messages: select message no. 0 to 9 and enter alphanumeric text(up to 24 characters) (optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office only)

19 12 Advisory messages: select message no. 0 to 9 and enter alphanumerictext (up to 24 characters) (optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 officeonly)

19 13 Enter 4-digit time in the format HHMM (hour minute)

19 14 Enter 6-digit date in the format DDMMYY (day month year)

19 15 Call duration: 0 = Off, 1 = On19 16 Names and station numbers:

0 = Station number, 1 = Name, 2 = Names and station numbers

19 17 Recall: 1 = Initial caller, 2 = Recalling station

19 18 Unscreened transfer: 1 = Transfer from, 2 = Transferred party

20 ISDN parameters

20 1 Caller ID suppression: 0 = Off, 1 = On

20 2 System station number - incoming

20 2 1 Station number; select trunk group20 2 2 National number; select trunk group

20 2 3 International number; select trunk group

20 2 4 Type, outgoing; select trunk group:0 = Unknown, 1 = Station, 2 = National, 3 = International

20 2 5 National prefix (U.S. = 1)

20 2 6 International prefix (U.S. = 011)


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

20 3 Reference clock

20 3 1 Priority list; select position (slot and port)

20 3 2 Denied list; select position (slot and port)

20 4 EU parameters (not for U.S.)

20 4 1 S0 port configuration; select slot/port and determine connection type(not for U.S.):1 = Automatic2 = DSS1 trunk PP3 = DSS1 trunk PMP4 = Euro-bus

5 = CorNet 16 = CorNet 27 = ECMA-QSIG8 = ISO-QSIG

20 4 2 S2M port configuration; select slot/port and determine connection type(not for U.S.):1 = DSS1 trunk PP2 = CorNet 13 = CorNet 24 = ECMA-QSIG (not for U.S.)

5 = ISO-QSIG (not for U.S.)20 4 3 S0 bus MSN (for verification purposes only) (not for U.S.)

20 4 4 Call forwarding PMP (not for U.S.)

20 4 4 1 Multiple subscriber numbers, select index, 1 to 10 (not for U.S.)

20 4 4 2 MSN trunks, select index, 1 to 10 (not for U.S.)

20 5 US parameters (for U.S. only)

20 5 1 x CACH EKTS (U.S. only): 0=disabled, 1=enabled

20 5 1 BRI parameter

20 5 1 1 CO/protocol:1 = AT&T/NI 12 = AT&T/Custom3 = Siemens/NI 14 = NT/NI 1

20 5 1 2 SPID admin, select station, select slot/port

20 5 1 3 CAID admin, stn., select CAID


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



20 5 1 4 PDID admin, stn., select PDID

20 5 1 5 FIN - for message waiting

20 5 1 6 CACH EKTS, select slot/port, 0 = Off / 1 = On

20 5 2 PRI parameters

20 5 2 3 Emulation type

20 5 2 4 Frame/line/encod

20 5 2 5 B-chn alloc. mode

20 5 2 6 Remote payload

20 5 2 7 No. of B-chn20 5 2 8 B-chn identifier

20 5 2 9 Trk grp service

20 5 2 10 Facility

20 5 2 11 Protocol type:11 = AT&T/Custom12 = AT&T/NI213 = AT&T/NI2 OSA14 = AT&T/4ESS15 = Siemens/Custom16 = Siemens/Custom OSA17 = Siemens/NI218 = Siemens/NI2 OSA19 = MCI/DEX60020 = MCI/DMS25021 = BELL/DMS10022 = BELL DMS100 TNS23 = Nortel/DMS10024 = Nortel DMS100 TNS25 = SPRINT/DMS250

26 = Westinghouse27 = FTS/DMS25028 = FTS/5ESS29 = GENERIC/NI230 = GENERIC/NI2 OSA31 = QSIG32 = IDA-P


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

20 5 2 12 Frame/line/encod, select slot0 = ESF/B8ZS/Normal1 = SF/ZCS/Inverted

20 5 2 13 Inwats parameter

20 5 2 13-1 Trunk group

20 5 2 13-2 DNIS

20 5 2 13-3 Entrance telephone ring destination


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



20 5 2 14 Calling service, select trunk group11 = NONE12 = AT&TSDN-GSDN13 = AT&TSDDN14 = MCI-VN-VS15 = SPRINT-VPN16 = WICN-PV17 = MEG800-TFM18 = MCI 80019 = ULTRA-80020 = WICN-INWATS

21 = MEG22 = MCI-PRISIM-WATS23 = SPR-ULTRA-WATS24 = WICN-OUTWATS25 = ACCU-SDS26 = LDS-WC-TSAA27 = INTER-80028 = MULTIQUEST29 = MCI-90030 = SDS5631 = SDS64C

32 = SDS64R33 = DMS100-PV34 = DMS100-INWATS35 = DMS100-OUTWATS36 = DMS100-FX37 = 5ESS-INWATS38 = WATS-MSB39 = DMS100-TIE40 = NI2-INWATS41 = NI2-OUTWATS42 = NI2-FX43 = NI2-TIE44 = NI2-HOTEL45 = NI2-SCOCS46 = CALL-BY-CALL 147 = CALL-BY-CALL 248 = CALL-BY-CALL 349 = CALL-BY-CALL 450 = WATS-BANDED


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

20 5 2 15 CBC pool:11 = AT&TSDN-GSDN12 = AT&TSDDN13 = MCI-VN-VS14 = SPRINT-VPN15 = WICN-PV16 = MEG800-TFM17 = MCI 80018 = ULTRA-80019 = WICN-INWATS20 = MEG

21 = MCI-PRISIM-WATS22 = SPR-ULTRA-WATS23 = WICN-OUTWATS24 = ACCU-SDS25 = LDS-WC-TSAA26 = INTER-80027 = MULTIQUEST28 = MCI-90029 = SDS5630 = SDS64C31 = SDS64R

32 = DMS100-PV33 = DMS100-INWATS34 = DMS100-OUTWATS35 = DMS100-FX36 = 5ESS-INWATS37 = WATS-MSB38 = DMS100-TIE39 = NI2-INWATS40 = NI2-OUTWATS41 = NI2-FX42 = NI2-TIE43 = NI2-HOTEL44 = NI2-SCOCS

20 5 2 16 CBC access code

20 5 3 S0 bus MSN, select slot/port

20 5 4 QSIG: S0 parameter

20 6 QSIG parameter


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



20 6 1 System number

20 6 2 Group number

20 7 Keypad dialing, 0 = not allowed / 1 = allowed

20 8 System station number - outgoing

20 8 1 Port number

20 8 2 National number

20 8 3 International number

20 8 4 Suppress station number

21 Analog CO interface21 1 Signaling method; select slot/trunk:

0 = Automatic,1 = DTMF,2 = Dial pulses3 = MFC-R2,4 = MFC-R2 with OAD

21 1 3 MFC-R2

21 1 4 MFC-R2 with OAD

21 2 Delayed dialing; select trunk group:0 = No pause, 1 = 1 s, 2 = 3 s, 3 = 6 s, 4 = 9 s

21 3 Incoming CO delay; select trunk group: 1 = 6 s, 2 = 13 s

21 4 Distance from CO; select slot and trunk: 0 = Short 1 = Long

21 5 Call charging module, select slot/trunk: 0 = off / 1 = on

21 6 Silent reversal: 0 = No, 1 = Yes (not for U.S.)

21 7 Port status: 0 = on, 1 = Off (SW), 2 = Off (HW), 3 = Off (HW, SW)

22 System settings

22 11 Music on hold (MOH): 0 = Off, 1 = No ring tone, 2 = Ring tone, 3 = An-nouncement device 1

22 12 Directory: 0 = No, 1 = Internal, 2 = LDAP, 3 = All

22 13 V.24 (RS-232) configuration

22 13 1 CB baud rate, select V.24 port,1 = 9600 baud2 = 2400 baud3 = 19200 baud


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

22 13 2 Port assignment

22 13 2 1 Port for CSTA/CDRC (call detail recording central)Output, 0 = None / 1 = V.24 port / 2 = UP0/E port / 3 = PC AC/ 4 = LAN

22 13 2 2 Port for CDRS (call detail recording at station)Output, 0 = None / 1 = V.24 port / 2 = UP0/E port

22 13 2 3 Port for CDRT (call detail recording per trunk)Output, 0 = None / 1 = V.24 port / 2 = UP0/E port

22 13 2 4 Port for CDB printout

22 13 2 5 Port for CDR printout

22 13 2 6 Port for CDRA (call detail recording, attendant); if a pay phone is config-ured, also see code 11 8Output, 0 = None / 1 = V.24 port / 2 = UP0/E port

22 14 Call FWD, external

22 14 1 Connect call: 0 = On answer, 1 = Immediately

22 14 2 Call FWD, no answer: 0 = Deactivate, 1 = Activate

22 15 Caller list mode,1 = External only2 = External and internal

3 = Ext. ring/call22 16 Applications

22 16 1 UCD: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

22 17 Tones

22 17 1 Conference, alert tone: 0 = Off, 1 = On

22 17 2 Call pickup, alert tone: 0 = Off, 1 = On

22 18 Transfer key (Retrieve), 1 = Press once, 2 = Press twice

22 19 Class of service

22 19 1 Night answer, Pos. 1-5; enter station22 19 2 Central telephone lock

22 20 DTMF automatic: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

22 21 Key click: 0 = Off, Volume level 1 to 4

22 22 DTMF mark to space ratio: 1 = 70/70 ms, 2 = 80/80 ms,3 = 80/250 ms, 4 = 200/200 ms

22 23 Phone lock destination


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



22 24 Stn. relocate: 0 = Denied, 1 = Allowed

22 25 Trunk reservation: 0 = Off, 1 = On

22 26 Speaking volume, 0 = Default / 1 = High

22 27 CO features (Transfer/Conference/Drop):0 = disabled, 1 = enabled

22 28 Feature Identification Number (FIN) for Transfer (U.S. only)

22 29 Feature Identification Number (FIN) for Conference (U.S. only)

22 30 Feature Identification Number (FIN) for Drop (U.S. only)

22 31 Default MSN (for U.S. only): 0 = Off, 1 = On

22 32 DTMF hidden, 0 = Off/1 = On

22 33 Announcement with connection, 0 = Not allowed/1 = Allowed

22 34 MFC-R2 parameters

22 34 1 Collect call barring

22 34 2 DID digits

22 35 Common hold

22 35 1 By hanging up

22 35 2 Without hanging up

22 36 Switch line, DSS; 0 = no / 1 = yes(Status 1: USA; Status 0: ROW-rest of world)

22 37 Advisory call, 0 = off / 1 = on

22 38 Trace stop facility

22 38 1 Stop trace

22 38 1 01 Assistant, 0 = inactive / 1 = active

22 38 1 09 HW, 0 = inactive / 1 = active

22 38 1 12 Processor, 0 = inactive / 1 = active

22 38 1 15 APSXF, 0 = inactive / 1 = active

22 38 1 16 General, 0 = inactive / 1 = active(error 19 cannot be set to inactive)

22 38 1 20 CP, 0 = inactive / 1 = active

22 38 1 21 DH, 0 = inactive / 1 = active

22 38 1 23 Network, 0 = inactive / 1 = active


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

22 38 1 26 Presence, 0 = inactive / 1 = active

22 38 1 28 Recovery, 0 = inactive / 1 = active

22 38 1 29 IO process, 0 = inactive / 1 = active

22 38 1 30 LW, 0 = inactive / 1 = active (0 to n)

22 38 1 11 LW date, 0 = inactive / 1 = active (41 to n)

22 38 2 Reset, 1 = Delete all/ 2 = System default

22 39 IP access

22 39 1 IP interface, mode:0 = Inactive

1 = HIP Forwarding2 = LIM3 = SLIP Routing

22 39 2 IP address, data (7 ... 15): x.x.x.x (x = 0 ... 255)Use either “*” or “.” as a separator.

23 Codes

23 1 Substitute code *, code 75

23 2 Substitute code #, code 76

23 3 Trunk access code; select slot and trunk and enter new code

23 4 Trunk group code; select trunk group followed by position 1-10 for codeand enter new codeTrunk group 1-8 (HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300)Trunk group 1-16 (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700, HiPath3500)

23 5 Attendant code

23 5 1 Attendant code DID

23 5 2 Attendant code internal

23 6 Second trunk access code23 7 Reset telephone lock code

24 Entrance phone

24 1 Entrance phone; select door, max. 6 digits, door 1-4

24 2 Destination; select door, max. 6 digits, door 1-4

24 3 Door opener; select door: 0 = Not available, 1 = Available,2= Available with DTMF, door 1-4


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



24 4 Call forwarding, door, external; select door: 0 = Deactivate,1 = Activate

24 5 Door opener, DTMF; select station: 0 = Denied, 1 = Allowed

25 Announcement/Music

25 1 Announcement devices; select announcement device:1 for HiPath 3350, HiPath 33001 to 4 for HiPath 3550, HiPath 35001 to 16 for HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700

25 2 Announcement type; select announcement device: 1 = Announcement/ music, 2 = Music on hold, 3 = Internal music

25 3 Announcement before answer; select slot and trunk

25 4 External MOH(Only enter analog line module stations.)

26 Relays

26 1 Type; select relay 1 to 4 and assign function:11 = Manual on and off12 = Off after timeout13 = Door opener14 = Speaker amplifier (starting contact for amplifier)

15 = Busy display16 = Music on hold17 = Call charge pulse (not for U.S.)18 = Second bell19 = Station active20 = Announcement or music

26 2 Switching timeSelect relay 1 through 4 and enter up to 3 digits (0 to 255)

26 3 Assigned stationSelect relay 1 through 4 and enter stations or groups (up to 5 digits)

26 4 Relay name; select relay 1 through 4, enter alphanumeric name of max.16 characters (optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office only)


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

27 Sensors (HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300only)

27 1 Type: 0 = Alarm, 1 = UCD call distribution

27 2 Destination station no.; select sensor 1 - 4External station with seizure code (trunk/direction)Internal station with station prefix (if programmed)

27 3 Station no. for announ.; select sensor 1 - 4 and enter station or groupnumber (max. 6 digits)

27 4 Announcement control; select sensor 1 - 4 and enter control characters0 - 9, *, #, max. 24 digits

27 5 Ring duration; select sensor 1 through 4 and enter 1 to 255

27 6 Ring interval; select sensor 1 through 4 and enter 0 to 255

27 7 Number of rings; select sensor 1 through 4 and enter 1 to 255

27 8 Blocking time; select sensor 1 through 4 and enter 0 to 255

27 9 Sensor text; select sensor 1 to 4, enter alphanumeric text of up 16 char-acters (optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office only)

28 Edit CDB (HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700/HiPath 3500 only)

28 1 Print CDB data

28 2 Save CDB data

28 2 1 CDB to MMC

28 2 2 CDB from MMC

29 System details

29 1 System

29 1 1 System type (for verification purposes only)

29 1 2 Software version (for verification purposes only)

29 1 3 Load APS via V.24Acknowledged by turning system on/off.

29 2 Status display

29 2 1 Call forwarding, external, 0 = Off, 1 = On (for verification purposes only)

29 2 2 Night answer, 0 = Off, 1 = On (for verification purposes only)

29 2 3 Trunk, 0 = Inactive, 1 = Active (for verification purposes only)

29 2 4 Ping, 1 = IP address, 2 = Start


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



29 2 5 MAC address

29 3 Options (HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 only)

29 3 1 Type per option (for review only)1 = Relays2 = Call detail recording3 = Fax/DID4 = ANI5 = Announcement (Beyer)

29 3 2 Software version for each option (1 to 16) (for verification purposes only)

29 3 3 Reset options

29 4 Boards

29 4 1 Board type, select slot:11 = TMS212 = TMST1 - digital13 = TIEL14 = TMDID15 = TML8W16 = TMOM17 = TMGL818 = TLA2

19 = TLA420 = TLA821 = TS222 = TMGL223 = TMGL424 = TMQ225 = TMQ426 = TST1 - digital27 = STMD28 = STLS2

29 = STLS430 = SLA1631 = SLMO832 = SLMO2433 = SLMC8 (CMI V1)34 = 4SLA35 = 8SLA


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

29 4 1 Board type, select slot:36 = 16SLA37 = SLU838 = ILAN39 = SLC16 (CMI V2.2M)42 = SLMO8K43 = SLMO24K44 = SLA8N45 = SLA16N46 = SLA24N47 = TMAMF

48 = CR849 = SLU4 (Octopus E 10)50 = SLU2 (Octopus E 10)51 = HXGM (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700)52 = HXGS (HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300)53 = IVMS854 = IVML855 = IVML2456 = SLAS1657 = TMCAS58 = SLU8 (UP0/E interfaces on CBCC, CBRC, CBCP)

59 = SLU4 (UP0/E interfaces on SBSCO)60 = SLU2 (UP0/E interfaces on SBSCS)61 = 4SLAN62 = 8SLAN63 = 16SLAN64 = HXGM365 = HXGS366 = SLC16N67 = STMD2

29 4 2 xx Reset board (for BG no., see 29-4-1)

29 4 3 0-9 Board status29 4 4 Disable / Enable board


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



29 5 Initialize country: select country code (00 to 99)11 = Germany12 = Netherlands13 = France14 = Finland15 = United Kingdom16 = Italy17 = Spain18 = Portugal19 = Switzerland20 = Austria

21 = International22 = Ireland23 = Belgium24 = Brazil25 = South Africa26 = China28 = India29 = Czech Republic30 = Denmark31 = Australia32 = Argentina

33 = Philippines36 = Singapore37 = Hungary38 = Malaysia40 = Indonesia41 = Russia42 = Thailand46 = Poland47 = Greece49 = Sweden50 = Norway51 = Turkey52 = U.S.A. and Canada53 = Pakistan54 = Hong Kong55 = New Zealand56 = Taiwan57 = Korea


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

30 Remote administration

30 1 DTMF access: 0 = No access, 1 = Access as host (primary), 2 = Accessas client (secondary), 3 = Host and client (primary and secondary)

30 2 ISDN trunk access: 0 = Enable procedure, 1 = Logon (DID) without PIN,2 = Logon (DID) with PIN, 3 = Callback

30 3 Other access: 0 = Enable procedure, 1 = Logon without code,2 = Logon (DID) with code, 3 = Callback

30 4 Reset password

30 5 Integrated modem

30 5 1 Station number, up to 6 digits30 5 2 DID number

30 5 3 CAID admin (for U.S. only)

30 6 Digital modem

30 6 1 Station number, max. 6 digits

30 6 2 DID number

30 6 3 CAID admin

30 7 Callback call

30 7 1 Destination; select position (1-6)30 7 2 Password; select position (1-6)

30 7 3 X.75 protocol: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

30 8 Auto CDB printout, state 0 = No / 1 = Yes

30 9 USBS D-channel access (not for U.S.)

30 9 1 Station number

30 9 2 DID number

31 UCD

31 1 Group assignment; select group ID

31 2 Group parameters

31 2 1 Announcement device; select groupHiPath 3750, HiPath 3700: Announcement device 1-16HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300: Announcementdevice 1-4

31 2 2 Wait times; select group, time: 1-9 x 30 s


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



31 2 3 Call cycles

31 2 3 1 Primary cycles; select group

31 2 3 2 Secondary cycles; select group

31 2 4 AICC connection; select group, 0 = Off / 1 = On

31 2 5 Max. waiting calls; select group

31 3 Work time, 0 = No autowork / 1-20 = Work time x 30 s

31 4 Call priority external; select slot/trunk

31 5 Call priority internal

32 Radio paging equipment (not for U.S.)32 1 Radio paging port (slot and trunk) (not for U.S.)

32 2 Radio paging type (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 only): 1 = Standard, 2 =Enhanced (not for U.S.)

32 3 Protocol, 1 = ESPA 4.4.5, 2 = ESPA 4.4.3 (not for U.S.)

32 4 Operation mode (not for U.S.)

32 4 1 Mode urgent (not for U.S.)

32 4 2 Mode normal (not for U.S.)

32 4 3 Mode text (not for U.S.)

32 5 Display (not for U.S.)

32 5 1 Dial number (not for U.S.)

32 5 1 1 Code length (not for U.S.)

32 5 1 2 Display, filler: 0 = None, 1 = Left, 2 = Right (not for U.S.)

32 5 1 3 Filler (not for U.S.)

32 5 2 Text (not for U.S.)

32 5 2 1 Code length (not for U.S.)

32 5 2 2 Display, filler: 0 = None, 1 = Left, 2 = Right (not for U.S.)32 5 2 3 Filler (not for U.S.)

32 6 PSE data transfer; select sequence: 1 = Operation mode,2 = Dial number, 3 = Text (not for U.S.)

32 7 PSE dial assignment; select station (not for U.S.)

32 8 PSE dial numbers; select index (not for U.S.)


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

33 Attendant console

33 1 Maximum waiting calls

33 2 Reserved

33 3 Speed transfer, 0 = Denied / 1 = Allowed

33 4 Transfer undialed trunk: 0 = Denied, 1 = Allowed

34 DISA

34 1 Day, night; select slot and trunk: 0 = None, 1 = Night only,2 = Day only, 3 = Day and night

34 2 DID number

34 3 Security mode: 0 = After timeout, 1 = After #

34 4 CAID admin (for U.S. only)

35 Least cost routing (LCR) (optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 of-fice only)

35 1 LCR on or off: 0 = Off, 1 = On

35 2 Dialing mode: 0 = Overlap sending, 1 = En-bloc sending

35 3 Outdial rule

35 3 1 Name; select line

35 3 2 Format; select line

35 3 3 Type; select line0 = Unknown1 = Main carrier2 = 1-layer mode3 = 2-layer mode4 = CN5 = DICS6 = PRI

35 4 Authorization code; select index (1-16)35 5 LCR schedule

35 5 1 Length of time; select day index (1 = Monday to 7 = Sunday) and timeformat (hhmm)

35 5 2 Time period; select day index (1 = Monday to 7 = Sunday) and time pe-riod 1-8

35 6 Access (1 to 15); select station


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



35 7 Routing tables

35 7 1 Trunk group; select table/line

35 7 2 Assign outdial rule; select table/line

35 7 3 Min. authorization; select table/line

35 7 4 Assign time period; select table/line

35 7 5 Warning, Select table/line, 1 = None / 2 = Display /3 = Tone / 4 = Display and tone

35 8 Dialing plan

35 8 1 Dialed digits; select line

35 8 2 Assign routing table; select line

35 8 3 Account codes, 0 = No, 1 = Yes

35 8 4 Toll restriction, personal calls: 0 = No / 1 = Yes

36 HiPath Cordless Office (not for U.S.)

36 1 Log on CMI unit; select device, 1 = Inactive (not for U.S.)

36 2 CMI code; select device (not for U.S.)

36 3 CMI number; select device, changes not possible (not for U.S.)

36 4 Reset cordless code (not for U.S.)

36 5 DECT identification, data (not for U.S.):1. E/ARC2. EIC3. FPN4. FPS

37 Security

37 1 Change password


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm

51 – 63 Customer administration (previously Manager TC)

51 System speed dialing

51 1 Speed-dialing numbers

51 2 Speed-dialing names

52 Time, hour/minute

53 Date, mmddyy

54 Call detail recording(does not appear if another station has call detail recording authoriza-tion)

54 1 CDR at station54 1 1 Edit CDRS

54 1 2 Print CDRS

54 2 CDR per trunk

54 2 1 Edit CDRT

54 2 2 Print CDRT

54 4 Call charge factor

54 5 ISDN factor

54 6 Currency designation

54 7 Call log

54 8 CDRA pay phone

55 Station names

56 Text messages

57 Advisory messages

58 Language selection

59 Group names

60 Account codes

60 1 Account code list

60 2 Testing, 0 = Not checked, 1 = ACCT list, 2 = Number of digits

60 3 Input operation, 0 = Optional, 1 = Mandatory

60 4 Number of digits

61 Hotline


Code Function



pcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



61 1 Hotline destinations

61 2 Hotline station

61 2 1 Hotline mode, 0 = Off, 1 = Hotline, 2 = Code blue

61 2 2 Hotline assignment

61 3 Hotline timeout

62 Codes, remote administration

63 Codes, Cordless

99 Access

The bolded messages appear in optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office telephones only.


Code Function




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


pcodes.fm



fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual B-1

Codes for Activating/Deactivating Features

B Codes for Activating/Deactivating Features

This appendix describes the options for activating and deactivating features depending on the

different Workpoint Clients (WpC).

Table B-1 contains all the activation/deactivation procedures for analog workpoint clients,TDM workpoint clients without a display and CMI mobile phones. The table onlycontains the access codes for TDM workpoint clients with a display, CMI featuremobile phones and IP workpoint clients. The procedures for S0 workpoint clientseither correspond to procedures for analog workpoint clients or are handled viathe relevant ISDN protocol with the terminal-specific user interface.The table also contains information about the effect of the telephone lock andthe status-specific locking of features.

Table B-2 contains a description of the various types of workpoint clients.

Table B-1 Codes for activating/deactivating features

Feature

Operating procedure for

Sup-

ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint

clients without

display,

CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents

TDM workpoint clients with

display,

CMI feature mobile phones,

IP workpoint clients,

optiClient 130 phone

optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g

t e l e p h o n e l o c k

S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d

P r o g r a m m a b l e

D i a l o g

S e r v i c e

Activate relay *90+Relay no. 7590... *90... – V, T – H – – A X RK,BS

Deactivate re-lay

#90+Relay no. 7690... #90... – V, T – H – – A X RK,BS

Accept call

waiting (camp-on)

*55 Call wait-

ing(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

*55 – V BR,

WA,RG,GS,BS

U Mouse

click,Drag&Drop

Mouse

click

A – – Also possible via

the DSS, GESP,LTG or MUSAPkey

Abbreviations: Call states: RH = idle, BR = ready, WA = digit input, BS = busy, RK = incoming call, RG = outgoing call , GS = call Key programming: V = key can be programmed with complete feature, U = key can be programmed to start procedure, T = key with

toggle functionality Menu level: H = Main menu, U1 = 1st submenu, U2 = 2nd submenu




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

B-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

fcodes.fm

Silent call wait-ing (camp-on)on

– –– *87 – V, T RH U1 Localfeature

Localfeature

D X RK,BS

Silent call wait-ing (camp-on)off

– – #87 – V, T ID U1 Localfeature

Localfeature

D X RK,BS

Logon mode(for handset)

*942+Code+Stn. no.

– *942 – – – H – – D,C X

Display callerlist

– – #82... – V RH,BR

U Localfeaturemenu

Localfeaturemenu

D X Only if enabled

Write to callerlist/save call

number

– – *82 – – RG,GS

– Localactive

menu

Localactive

menu

D X RK,BR,

WA

Only if enabled

Do not disturbon

*97 7597 *97 – V, T RH U Fea-ture key

Fea-ture key

A X RK,BS

Do not disturboff

#97 7697 #97 – V, T RH U Fea-ture key

Fea-ture key

A X RK,BS

Call forward-ing on, inter-nal/external

*1+Type+Stn.no.

751...or

Call for-warding(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

*1... – V, U,T

RH U Fea-ture key

Fea-ture key

A X RK,BS

Later selection ofthe forwardingtype:1 = All calls, 2 =Ex. calls only, 3 =Int. calls only

Call forward-ing off

#1 761 #1 – V, T RH U1 Fea-ture key

Fea-ture key

A X RK,BS


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint

clients withoutdisplay,

CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents

TDM workpoint clients withdisplay,




optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e

Abbreviations: Call states: RH = idle, BR = ready, WA = digit input, BS = busy, RK = incoming call, RG = outgoing call, GS = call Key programming: V = key can be programmed with complete feature, U = key can be programmed to start procedure, T = key with




fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Call forward-ing in EDSS1trunk on (notfor tenant ser-vice)

– – *64... – V, U,T

RH U1 – – A X RK,BS

Only for S0 trunkconnection andauthorized sta-tions.Later selection ofthe forwarding line:1 = immediate, 2 =unanswered calls,3 = on busy.All call forwardingtypes can be acti-vated indepen-dently of each oth-er.

Call forward-ing in EDSS1trunk off (notfor tenant ser-vice)

– – #64... – V, T RH U1 – – A X

Call forward-ing on for eachMULAP

*501+MU-LAP+Type+Stn.no.

75501 *501 – V, T – H – – A Only for MULAPmembers

Call forward-ing off for eachMULAP

#501+MULAP 76501 #501 V, T – H – – A Only for MULAPmembers

UCD (uniformcall distribu-tion), logon

*401+ID – *401.. – V, U,T

– U2 Fea-ture key

Fea-ture key

D, E, N, X RK,BS

Only for UCDgroup members

UCD (uniformcall distribu-tion), logoff

#401 – #401 – V, T – U2 – Fea-ture key

D, E, N X RK,BS

Only for logged onstations

UCD, available *402 – *402 – V, T – U2 – Fea-

ture key

D, E, N X RK,

BS

Only for logged on

stationsUCD, unavail-able

#402 – #402 – V, T – S2 – Fea-ture key

D, E, N X RK,BS


UCD, reworkon

*403 – *403 – V, T – U2 – Fea-ture key

D, E, N X RK,BS



Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


fcodes.fm

UCD, reworkoff

#403 – #403 – V, T – U2 – Fea-ture key

D, E, N X RK,BS


UCD, nightdestination

*404 +* or Stn.no.

– *404...

– V, U,T

– U2 – Fea-ture key

D, E, N X RK,BS


UCD, nightdestination off

#404 – #404 – V, T – U2 – Fea-ture key

D, E, N X RK,BS


UCD, queue – – *405 – V – U2 – Calldistri-butionmenu

D X RK,BS


Call accep-tance

– – – – V – – Mouseclick,

Drag&

Drop

Localfeaturemenu,

Key

A X RH,BR,WA,

BS,RG

Can only be acti-vated using key

Advisory mes-sage on

– – *69... – V, U,T

RH U1 Localfeaturemenu

Localfeaturemenu

D X RK,BS

Advisory mes-sage off

– – #69... – V, T RH U1 Localfeaturemenu

Localfeaturemenu

D, C X RK,BS

Associated di-aling

*67+Stn. +Stn.no.

7567... *67... – U – H – – A X Only for authorizedstations

Associatedservices

*83+Stn.+Services proce-

dure...

7583 *83... – U – H – – A X RK,BS

Only for authorizedstations

Busy override *62 – *62 – V RG U1 – Localmenu

D, E, N,C

– – Only for authorizedstations


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e





fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Automatic re-dial on

– – – – – RG,GS(ex-ter-nal)

– – – D X – Only for workpointclients with displayand with speaker-phone

Automatic re-dial off

– – – – – RH – – – D X – Only for workpointclients with displayand with speaker-phone

Room monitoron

*88 – *88 – V – H – – D, E, N X WA,RG,

GS,RK,BS

Not possible forworkpoint clientswithout a speaker-phone when hand-set is on-hook

Room monitoroff

– – – – – – – – – D, E, N – Room monitor offby hanging up orpressing the loud-speaker or releasekey

Telephonelock on, indi-vidual

*66+Code 7566... *66... – U, T RH U1 Fea-ture key

Fea-ture key

A – RK,BS

Telephonelock off, indi-vidual

#66+Code 7666... #66... – U, T RH,BR

U1 Fea-ture key

Fea-ture key

A – IC,BS

Change tele-phone lock ac-

cess code

*93+Oldcode+2 x New

code

7593... *93... – – – H Localfeature

menu

Localfeature

menu

A X RK,BS

Reset servic-es/features forown workpointclient

#0 760 #0 – – – H – Fea-ture key

A x RK,BS

See feature de-scription: Resetactivated features


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


fcodes.fm

Speaker calls *80+Stn. no. 7580 *80 – V, U – H Menu Fea-ture key

D, S – RK,BS.WA,RG

Speaker calls to agroup: Paging onlypossible if "Speak-er calls" has beenenabled for thecalled party. Thecalled party’s mi-crophone is acti-vated if "Speakercalls" has been en-abled for this party(not for paging).

Handsfree an-swerback on

– – *96 – V, T RH U1 – – D X – Only for WpC withspeakerphone

Handsfree an-swerback off

– – #96 – V, T RH U1 – – D X – Only for WpC withspeakerphone

Direct stationselection(DSS)

– – – – V – – – – D – – Only for executive/ secretary configu-ration

DISA (DirectInward SystemAccess)

– – – – – – – – – – – – Activation onlypossible from ex-ternal location forauthorized sta-tions/lines

Internal DISA *47+DISA stn.no.+DISA

STN.+service

+Suffix dialing

– *47... – V, U RH U1 – – D, E, N X WA,RG,RK,BS

Within a HiPath5000 RSM net-work only.

Features cannotbe activated fromanalog (DP) or S0 WpC.


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e





fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



ENB (electron-ic notebookfunction)

– – – X – – – – Localfeature

D X – Only for enhancedworkpoint clients

Terminalidentification

– – – – – – – Possi-ble viacentraldata-base

Possi-ble viacentraldata-base

C – – Performed auto-matically followingline seizure fromthe idle state

Relocate:Save configu-ration

*9419(only TDM WpCwithout display)

– *9419 – – – – Possi-ble viacentraldata-base

Possi-ble viacentraldata-base

D, E X WA,RG,RK,BS,GS

Relocate: Re-activation,load configura-tion

#9419(only TDM WpCwithout display)

– #9419 – – – – – – D, E X WA,RG,RK,BS,GS

Telephone test *940 – *940 – – – U1 – – D, E – WA,RG,RK,BS,GS

Malicious callID

*84 MCID(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

*84 – V – H – – A – –

Flex call *505+Stn. no. 75508 *508 – V – H – – ––

EmergencyTrunk Access

*43+Trunk code 7543... *43.. – U – H – – A X RK,BS

Only for attendant


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


fcodes.fm

Call chargedisplay (seecharge dis-play)

Call detail re-cording, atten-dant (CDRA)

– – – – V – – – – D x RK,BS

Only if appropriateauthorization is as-signed

Selective lineseizure

See numberingplan

Seenumber-ing plan

Seenum-ber-ingplan

– V – – Seenum-beringplan

Seenum-beringplan

A X – Only with trunk keyfor prime lineTelephone lock foroutgoing lines only

Group call See numbering

plan

See

number-ing plan

See

num-ber-ingplan

– V – – See

num-beringplan

See

num-beringplan

A – – Group calls can be

programmed onDSS key

Group call, join *85 7585 *85 – V, T RH U1 Fea-ture

menu

Fea-ture

menu

A X RK,BS

All group calls, join= *85*

Group call,leave

#85 7685 #85 – V, T RH U1 Fea-ture

menu

Fea-ture

menu

A X RK,BS

All group calls,leave = #85#

Hold key – – – – V – – Mouseclick,Key

Localactivemenu

D, E – –

Hardware set-tings +/– ...(local pro-cedure for CMI) – +/–... X – – – LocalKey LocalKey D, E, C – RK From idle state:Call parameters,speaker mode (ifavailable)From talk state:Volume


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e





fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Host con-trolled stationdisplay

– – – – – – – – – – – – Only for workpointclients with display.Text is sent by theapplication.

Hotel terminal *491+Stn. no. 75491 *491 – – – H – – A X WA,RK,BS,RG

Activate LED

Hotline – – – – – – – – – A – – Hotline destina-tion is defined foreach individualstation in the CDR.

Send mes-

sage (mes-sage waiting)

*68+(Stn.

no.)+Text no.

7568... *68... – V, U RH,

RG

U1 Local

featuremenu

Local

featuremenu

A X RK,

BS

Without dialing call

number in ringingstate

Read mes-sage (mes-sage waiting)

– – – – – RH,BR,GS

– Localfeaturemenu

Localfeaturemenu

D X RK,BS

Cancel/an-swer/displaymessage(messagewaiting)

#68 7668 #68... – – RH U1 – Localfeaturemenu

A X RK,BS

Suffix dialing notpermitted for D, S.Suffix dialing for E,N, C: 0 = delete allsent and receivedmessages, 1 = de-lete all sent mes-sages, 2 = deleteall received mes-

sages, 3 = callsender.

Fax waitingmessage/an-swering ma-chine

Only TDM work-point clientswith corre-

sponding key

– – – V – h – – D, E – – Feature deleted bypressing the key


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


fcodes.fm

Internal call See numberingplan

Seenumber-ing plan

Seenum-ber-ingplan


Seenum-beringplan

A – – Internal call can beprogrammed onDSS key

Disconnectkey

– – – – V – – En-block

dialingwith

correc-tion op-

tion

En-block

dialingwith

correc-tion op-

tion

– – –

Keypad *503 – X503 – – GS – Can bedis-

played

– D, C –– –

Three-partyconference

– 3-PTY(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

– – – GS – Localactivemenu

Localactivemenu

S – – Initiation from callwith C station. Bstation is put onhold.

End three-par-ty conference

– 3-PTY(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

– – – GS – Localactivemenu

Localactivemenu

S – RH,BR,WA,RG,BS,RK

Status as prior toconference call.Dialog menu pro-vides further op-tions for endingconference

Conference

(up to 5 sta-tions)

*3 – *3 – V GS U1 Local

activemenu

Local

activemenu

D, E, N,

C

– – Initiation from call


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e





fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



End confer-ence (up to 5stations)

#3 – #3 – V GS U1 Localactivemenu

Localactivemenu

D, E, N,C

– RH,BR,WA,RG,BS,RK

Status as prior toconference call.Dialog menu pro-vides further op-tions for endingconference.

Call chargedisplay for ownstation (GET)

– – *65 – V – H – – D X – Deletion only bysystem administra-tor

Station speed-dialing num-ber, save/ change

*92+ISDno.+Stn. no.

– *92... – – – H LocalETD

feature

LocalETD

feature

D, E, N,C

X RK,BS

ISD 0 ... 9Mobile phonesalso have an addi-tional local proce-dure

Dial stationspeed-dialing(SSD)

*7+ISD no. – *7... – V, U – H LocalETD

feature

LocalETD

feature

A X RK,BS

000 ... 999Mobile phonesalso have an addi-tional local proce-dure

Dial systemspeed-dialing(SSD)

*7+ISD no. 757... *7... – V, U – H PrivateETD

feature

PrivateETD

feature

A RK,BS

000 ... 999

Trunk queuing,automatic

– – – – V – – – E, N, C X RH,BR,RG,RK,GS

Automatically af-ter timeout if en-abled in the CDR

Trunk queuing,manual

– – – – V BS – – – D X RH,BR,RG,RK,GS

Activation bypressing a key ifenabled in theCDR


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e





fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Night answeron

*44+wait (5 s) or * or

Stn. no.

75... *44... – V, U,T

RH U1 – Fea-ture key

A X RK,BS

Standard night an-swer using * or af-ter 5 s timer

Night answeroff

#44+wait (5 s) or * or

Stn. no.

7644 #44 – V, T RH U1 – Fea-ture key

A X RK,BS

Repertory key/ DSS

– – – – V – – Speeddialing

key

Speeddialing

key

D X – Key can be as-signed an internalor external callnumber.Telephone lockingfor external reper-tory key only.

Paging, seespeaker call toa group

Park on *56+Park slot Suspend(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

*56.. – U, T – H Key,Menu

Localactivemenu

A – RH,BR

Retrieveparked call

#56+Park slot Resume(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

#56... – U, T – H Key,Menu

Localfeaturemenu

A – WA,EG,GS,RK,BS

Radio paging

equipment(PSE comfort),paging

– – *45..

Key-Fe

only

– Key-

Feonly

– Key-

Feonly

– – A – –


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


fcodes.fm

Radio pagingequipment(PSE comfort),meet me

#45+Stn. no. 7645.. #45.. – – – H – – A – –

Account code(ACCT)

*60+ACCT 7560... *60... – U – H –/man-datoryACCTpossi-

ble

–/man-datoryACCTpossi-

ble

A X WA,RG,RK,BS

ACCT can also beentered withoutservice code fol-lowing ext. line sei-zure.

Trunk groupseizure

See numberingplan

Seenumber-ing plan

Seenum-ber-ingplan


Seenum-beringplan

A X – Telephone lockonly permitted forseizure of outgoinglines.

RS232 failuresignaling

– – – – – – – – – D – –

Set callback *58 CCBS(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

*58 – V, T RG U1 Localactivemenu

Localactivemenu

A – RH,BR,WA,GS,RK,BS

View/deletecallback re-quests

#58 CCBS(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

#58... – U, T RH U1 Localfeaturemenu

Localfeaturemenu

A X RH,BR,WA,GS,RK,

BS


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e





fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Initiate call-back(exclusivehold)

DP: DialCMI, DTMF:

FlashTDM WpC with-

out display:Consultation

hold key

HOLD(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

– – – GS – Drag&Drop,menu

By dial-ing newnumber

A – –

Station num-ber suppres-sion on, temp

*86 CLIR(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

*86 – V, T RH U1 Fea-ture

menu

Fea-ture

menu

A X RK,BS

Station num-ber suppres-

sion off, temp

#86 CLIP(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

#86 – V, T RH U1 Fea-ture

menu

Fea-ture

menu

A X RK,BS

Station num-ber, assign forMUSAP

*41+DID no. 7541... *41... – V – H – – A X – This must be fol-lowed by seizure ofexternal line.

Ring transferexecutive/sec-retary

*502+MULAP 75502 *502 – V, T – H – – A X Only for memberof the executiveMULAP groups

Group ringingon

*81+Stn. no. 7581... *81... – U, V,T

– H – – A X RK,BS

Group ringingoff

#81 7681 #81 – U, V,T

RH H – – A X RK,BS

Silent call/ Ringer cutoffon

– – *98 – V, T RH U1 Localfeature

Localfeature

D X RK,BS

A short advisorytone is activated.The optical signalsare retained.


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


fcodes.fm

Silent call/ Ringer cutoffoff

– – #98 – V, T RH U1 Localfeature

Localfeature

D X RK,BS

Hunt group, join

*85 7585 *85 – V, T RH U1 Fea-ture

menu

Fea-ture

menu

A X RK,BS

All hunt groups, join = *85*

Hunt group,leave

#85 7685 #85 – V, T RH U1 Fea-ture

menu

Fea-ture

menu

A X RK,BS

All hunt groups,leave = #85#

Service menu – – – X,T

– – – – – D – BS Service key as forstopping and start-ing procedure

Remote ser-

vice call

*994+In-

dex+Suffix dial-ing

75944 *994 – – – U1 – – A – –

Silent monitor-ing

*944+Stn. no. *944.. – – – – – – D, E, C X WA,RG,BS,RK

Only for selectedcountries and forauthorized sta-tions, not for IPWpC

Trunk flash onanalog trunk

*51 – *51 – V – H – – D, E, N,C

X –

Speaker on/off –(if loudspeak-ers available)

– – X,T

– – – PC fea-ture

PC fea-ture

D, E (ifloud-

speak-ers are

avail-able)

– –

Silent ringing,see ringer cut-off

–


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e





fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Language se-lection

*48 At login At login –

Substitutioncode for ‘*’

75 75 75 – – – – – – A – –

Substitutioncode for ‘#’

76 76 76 – – – – – – A – –

System ad-ministration

– – *95... – – – H – – D Seenotes

WA,RG,RK,BS

Only for authorizedstations via accesscode.User data is pro-tected via tele-phone lock feature.

System ad-

ministrationRemote DTMFadministrationand mainte-nance, enable(service sys-tem)

– – *991..

.

– – – – – – D – WA,

RG,RK,BS

System ad-ministrationRemote DTMFadministrationand mainte-nance, enable(customer sys-

tem)

– – *992...

– – – – – – D – WA,RG,RK,BS

Only for authorizedstations via accesscode.

System admin.via HOST (al-so remote),enable

– – *993...

– – – – – – D – WA,RG,RK,BS

Only for authorizedstations via accesscode.


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


fcodes.fm

Key program-ming

– – *91... – – – H Local Local D X RK,GS

Toll fraud mon-itoring

– – – – – – – – – D X – Only for attendant,if enabled

Telephone di-rectory

– – – – V RH,BR,GS

– Private (local di-rectory on PC) +LDAP interface

D –

Telephonedata service(TDS)

*42 7542 *42 – U,V – H – Fea-ture key

A – RK,BS

Activate timedreminder

*46+time 7546... *46.. – U, V,T

– H – – D, N, E,C

X –

Deactivatetimed remind-er

#46+time 7646... #46.. – U, V,T – H – – D, N, E,C X

Trace Stop *509 – *509 – V – – – A – –

Release key – – – – V – – Localactivemenu,

key

Localactivemenu,

key

A – –

Enable dooropener, DTMF

*89+Stn.no.+Code

7589 *89... – U, V,T

– H – – A X –

Disable dooropener, DTMF

#89+Stn.no.+Code

7689 #89... – U, V,T

– H – – A X –

Door opener

via adaptercabinet

*61+Stn. no. 7561 *61... – U, V GS H – – A – – Only if entrance

telephone is con-figured


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e





fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Transfer(screened/un-screened)

– ECT(local S0

WpCfunction-

ality)

– – – RG,GS

– Drag&Drop,MenuKey

Localactivemenu

A – –

Overload indi-cation

– – – – V – – – – D – – Only for France

Call pickup, di-rected

*59+Stn. no. 7559... *59... – U – H Usingstatus-sup-

portedspeeddialingkeys

Usingstatus-sup-

portedspeeddialingkeys

A – WA,RG,RK,BS

Call pickup inpickup group

*57 7557 *57 – V RH,BR,GS

U – – A – WA,RG,RK,BS

Pick up DTMF: FlashTDM WpC with-


hold key

– – – – GS – GS D, N, E,C

– –

Extending un-dialed trunks

– – – – – WA – – – D – – Only for authorizedstations

AC call (seenumbering

plan)

9 9 9 – – – – 9 9 A – –

Redial Redial key – – X – – – Localfeature

Localfeature

D, E, C X – Cannot be pro-grammed underDSS.


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


fcodes.fm

Retrieval of ex-ternal callplaced oncommon hold

*63+Trunk code 7563.. *63.. – V – H Localfeaturemenu

Localfeaturemenu

A – – Retrieval also pos-sible with trunk key

Central tele-phone lock

*943+Stn. no.+* or #

75943.. *943.. – U – H – – A X Only for authorizedstations

Return to heldcall(exclusive holdoff)

*0 orCMI, DTMF:

FlashTDM WpC with-


hold key

Retrieve *0 – – BR,WA,RG,GS,BS

U1 MouseClick,key

Localactivemenu

Applicationsharing Mouseclick A –

Image displayof called party

Drag&Drop,

Mouseclick

Internet/Web-Browser inte-grated

Drag&Drop,

Mouseclick

E-mail integra-tion

Drag&Drop,

Mouseclick

Modifiable de-sign

X

Missing call in-dication

X


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e





fcodes.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Call durationcounter for in-coming/outgo-ing calls

X

Extended calllist features(for example,delete individ-ual entries, de-lete identicalentries)

X

Intelligentheadset/hand-set support

X

Find automaticpark slot

X

1 The codes are valid for DTMF telephones. Substitution codes 75 and 76 must be entered instead of "*" and "#" for DP tele-phones.


Feature


Sup-ported

work-

point

clients

(see

abbre-

via-

tions

in Ta-

ble B-

2)

Locking of

feature

Note

TDM workpoint


CMI feature

mobile

phones,

analog work-

point clients1

S0 work-

point cli-

ents





optiCli-

ent 130

easy-

Com

optiCli-

ent 130

office

C o d e +

p r o c e d u r e

C o d e

C o d e

Key Menu

C o d e

C o d e

U s i n g


S t a t u s

l o c k i n g o n

F i x e d


D i a l o g

S e r v i c e






P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


fcodes.fm

Description of the different workpoint client groups from Table B-1

Table B-2 Description of the different workpoint client groups

Workpoint client group Description/examples Abbreviation

All workpoint clients All workpoint clients listed below A

TDM workpoint clients without dis-

play

optiPoint 500 entry optiset E entry optiset E basic

E

TDM workpoint clients with display optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.) optiPoint 500 basic optiPoint 500 standard optiPoint 500 advance optiPoint 600 office (in UP0/E mode) optiset E standard optiset E advance plus/comfort optiset E advance conference/conference optiset E memory

D

analog workpoint clients DP and DTMF terminals N

S0 workpoint clients ISDN terminals S

IP workpoint clients optiPoint 400 standard 3.0 optiPoint 400 economy 3.0 optiPoint 410 entry (without display) optiPoint 410 economy optiPoint 410 standard

optiPoint 600 office (in IP mode)

I

CMI mobile phones Gigaset 1000 C

CMI feature mobile phones Gigaset 3000 Comfort Gigaset 3000 Micro Gigaset 4000 Comfort Gigaset 4000 Micro



portnos.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual C-1

IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used with HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0

C IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used with HiPath3000/5000 V4.0

This supplement contains information about the HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 components men-tioned in the following table.

The necessary information for erecting firewalls is provided on each component. Firewalls en-sure that customer intranets are protected from external access.

>The relevant information on applications that can be used in HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0can be found in the respective product documentation.

TopicHiPath 3000, page C-2

HiPath 5000 RSM, page C-3

HiPath FM Managed Systems (at the moment not available for HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0), pageC-5

HG1500, page C-6

optiClient 130, page C-8

optiPoint 400 / optiPoint 410 / optiPoint 420 / optiPoint 600 office, page C-9

HiPath AP 1100 / HiPath AP 1140, page C-10

Middleware for Call Control, page C-11

Middleware for Media Streaming Applications, page C-12




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

C-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

portnos.fm

HiPath 3000

C.1 HiPath 3000

Table C-1 HiPath 3000 - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used

Service/ Application

Proto-col

ServerPort

ConnectWith Other

Servers

PossibleClients

Application Config-urable

Telnet TCP 23 – Administration viaManager T

No

TFTP UDP 69 X APS transfer viaTFTP, HiPath5000 RSM net-work

No

ADM TCP 7000 – FeatureServer

HiPath 5000 RSMnetwork

No

CSTA TCP 7001 – HiPath 5000 RSMnetwork

No

SYNC TCP 7024 – FeatureServer


No

FCT TCP 7100 – FeatureServer


No

SNMP (Get/ Set)

UDP 161 – SNMP browser,HiPath FM

No

Online TraceReport

TCP 21965 – XTrace Online Trace Tool No



portnos.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



HiPath 5000 RSM

C.2 HiPath 5000 RSM

Table C-2 HiPath 5000 RSM - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used


Proto-col

ServerPort

ConnectWith Oth-er Servers

Possible Cli-ents


CAR_Server TCP 12062 – HiPath 5000 RSMnetwork

Feature Serv-er: c:\pro-grams\sie-mens\hipath3000 5000 dbserver\vsrv.ini

REG_Server TCP 12061 – HG1500 HiPath 5000 RSM

network

Feature Serv-

er: c:\pro-grams\sie-mens\hipath3000 5000 dbserver\vsrv.ini

TFTP Server UDP 69 – APS transfer viaTFTP

Registry entry

HiPath FMServer

UDP 161 X Managed sys-tem

SNMP (Get/Set) FM propertyfiles

HiPath FM

Server

UDP 162 (or

3162)

– optiPoint 400,

optiPoint 600,optiClient 130,eCS, PCS

SNMP (Traps) FM property

files

HiPath FMServer

RMI 3042,defined

port range3050 -3065

– HiPath FM Cli-ent

Communicationfrom Client to Hi-Path FM Server

FM propertyfiles

HiPath FMServer

Socket:propri-etary

protocol

3041,3043,3044,

3045

– HiPath FM Cli-ent

Communicationfrom Client to Hi-Path FM Server

FM propertyfiles

SQL Server TCP 1433 – Feature Serverdatabase, CCMC,Get Account

SQL Server UDP 1434 –




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


portnos.fm

HiPath 5000 RSM

SW Viewer(SNMP)

UDP 161 – Between applica-tion servers: SWViewer to SWViewer

No

DeploymentTool

UPD 5100 – Software upgrade No

FTP Server FTP 21 – DeploymentTool,optiPoint 400,

optiPoint 600

FTP Server No

DNS UDP 53 – optiPoint 400,optiPoint 600,optiClient 130

ADS name resolu-tion

No

DHCP UDP 67 – optiPoint 400,optiPoint 600,optiClient 130(PC)

IP address alloca-tion

No

TomCat WebServer

TCP 8005,8080,8443

– HiPath 3000/ 5000 SoftwareManager

HiPath InventoryServer, UpgradeManager, BackupManager

No

Table C-2 HiPath 5000 RSM - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used


Proto-col

ServerPort

ConnectWith Oth-

er Servers

Possible Cli-ents





P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


portnos.fm

HG1500

C.4 HG1500

Table C-4 HG1500 - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used


Proto-col

ServerPort


Possible Clients Application Config-urable

H.323(H.225/ Q931)

TCP 1720 X HG1500,optiPoint 400,optiPoint 600,optiClient 130,Netmeeting,AP11xx, MEB (notfor U.S.)

Voice over IP: callcontrol

No

H.323(H.245)

TCP 12100 -12195

X HG1500,optiPoint 400,optiPoint 600,optiClient 130,Netmeeting,AP11xx, MEB (notfor U.S.)

Voice over IP: callcontrol for mediachannels

No

RTP/RTCP UDP 15000 -15131

X HG1500,optiPoint 400,optiPoint 600,optiClient 130,

Netmeeting,AP11xx, MEB (notfor U.S.)

Voice over IP:voice packettransmission

No

VOPTISET TCP 4060 – optiPoint 400,optiPoint 600,optiClient 130

Voice over IP:system clientcontrol

No

DataGate-way

TCP 8765 X HG1500, MEB (notfor U.S.)

Fax, modem,X.75 data trans-mission

No

ADMIN TCP 12000 – HiPath 3000 Man-

ager I

Administration via

HiPath 3000Manager I

No

VCAPI TCP 12001 – VCAPI Client (e. g.telematics SWAVM Fritz!32)

Call control andmedia transmis-sion

No

AccountingServer

TCP 13042 – IP accounting (e. g.Teledata Office)

IP accounting No



portnos.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



HG1500

SNMP (Get/ Set)

UDP 161 – SNMP browser, Hi-Path FM

SNMP browser,HiPath FM

No

SNMP(Traps)

UDP 162 X optiPoint 400,optiPoint 600,optiClient 130

Sending/receiv-ing SNMP errormessages

No

NetworkingUnit

TCP 12050 – IP networking No

DSL Diag-nostics Serv-

er

UDP 12200 – DSL status tool DSL status dis-play

No

CallAddressResolution

TCP 12062 X HG1500 Call number serv-er, call monitoring(can be activatedby the Adminis-trator)

No

TFTP UDP 69 X APS transfer,CDB backup viaTFTP

No

Online Trace

Report

TCP 21966 – XTrace Online Trace Tool No

Table C-4 HG1500 - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used


Proto-col

ServerPort

ConnectWith Oth-

er Servers

Possible Clients Application Config-urable




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


portnos.fm

optiClient 130

C.5 optiClient 130

Table C-5 optiClient 130 - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used


Proto-col

ServerPort


Possible Cli-ents


VOPTISET TCP 4060 X HG1500 Voice over IP:system clientcontrol

No

H.323(H.225/ Q931)

TCP 1720 X HG1500 Voice over IP: callcontrol

No

H.245 TCP 12000 -12100 =

V2.5+V4.0,12100 -12115 =

V2.0

X HG1500 Voice over IP: callcontrol for mediachannels

Registry entry

RTP UDP 29100 -29131

X HG1500,optiPoint 400,optiPoint 600,optiClient 130


Registry entry

T.120 TCP 1503 X optiClient 130

easyCom, Net-meeting

Application shar-

ing


Proto-col

ClientPort

Port Server Application Config-urable

VOPTISET(CorNet-TC)

TCP 1024 -65535

HG15004060

Voice over IP:system clientcontrol

No



portnos.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



optiPoint 400 / optiPoint 410 / optiPoint 420 / optiPoint 600 office

C.6 optiPoint 400 / optiPoint 410 / optiPoint 420 / optiPoint 600 office

Table C-6 optiPoint 400 / optiPoint 410 / optiPoint 420 / optiPoint 600 office - IP Protocols

and Port Numbers UsedService/

ApplicationProto-

colServer

Port ConnectWith Oth-er Servers

Possible Cli-ents


VOPTISET TCP 4060 X HG1500 Voice over IP:system clientcontrol

No

H.323(H.225/ Q931)


No

H.323(H.245)

TCP 1024 -65535

X HG1500 Voice over IP:transmission formedia channels

No


X HG1500,optiPoint 400,optiPoint 410,optiPoint 420,optiPoint 600,optiClient 130


No

HTTP TCP 8085 – Administration

PC with browser

HTTP Web inter-

face for adminis-tration

No




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


portnos.fm

HiPath AP 1100 / HiPath AP 1140

C.7 HiPath AP 1100 / HiPath AP 1140

Table C-7 HiPath AP 1100 / HiPath AP 1140 - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used


Proto-col

ServerPort


Possible Cli-ents


H.323(H.225/ Q931)


No

H.323(H.245)

TCP 1024 -65535

X HG1500 Voice over IP:transmission formedia channels

No


X HG1500 Voice over IP:voice packettransmissionRTP = port 5004,5006, 5008, ...5130.RTCP = RTP port+ 1

No

HTTP TCP 8085 – AdministrationPC with browser

HTTP Web inter-face for adminis-tration

No



portnos.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Middleware for Call Control

C.8 Middleware for Call Control

Table C-8 Middleware for Call Control - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used


Proto-col

ServerPort


Possible Cli-ents


TAPI 120 TCP – X TAPI ServiceProvider

No

TAPI 170 V2 TCP 8503 – TAPI ServiceProvider

No

CMD TCP 8000 +node ID

(presently8001 -8064),7700

– TAPI 120 CSTA MessageDispatcher

Via user inter-face

CSP TCP 8000, 8800 – CSTA ServiceProvider

Via user inter-face



power_calc.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual D-1

Identifying System Power Requirement

D Identifying System Power Requirement

This supplement specifies the power requirement of the boards and components of the HiPath3000 systems. In addition, information is provided on the power requirement of the differentworkpoint clients, key modules and adapters.

With this information,

the individual system power requirement can be identified.

every system configuration can be checked to see whether the nominal output of the powersupply unit is sufficient or whether an additional power supply may be needed.

> The following values are for orientation only, and can vary depending on the trafficflow.

Topic

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Boards Power Requirement, page D-2

HiPath 3550 Boards Power Requirement, page D-4




Workpoint clients, Key Modules and Adapter Power Requirements, page D-10Check Whether the Output of a Power Supply Unit is Sufficient, page D-12

Identifying the Primary System Power Requirement, page D-15

>To ensure that a system’s dynamic capacity limit is not exceeded, the configurationcan be tested using the project planning tool (Intranet: http://intranet.mch4.sie-mens.de/syseng/perfeng/tools/hpt/index_en.htm).




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

D-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

power_calc.fm

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Boards Power Requirement

D.1 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Boards Power Requirement

Table D-1 Nominal output of the HiPath 3750 power supply unit and HiPath 3700

Power Supply Unit Part Number Max. Nominal Output in W

5 V –48 V

UPSM S30122-K5950-A76100S30122-K5950-S76100S30122-K5959-S121(for RSAonly)

60.0 166.0

>

You must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and theconnected workpoint clients of a system box exceeds the maximum possible UPSM

output. Section D.7 contains a sample calculation.

Table D-2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Boards Power Requirement

Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W

5 V –48 V

BS3/1 S30807-H5482-X – 2.0

BS3/3 S30807-H5485-X – 3.0

CBCPR (including sub-

modules)

S 30810-Q2936-X 8.5 –

GEE8 S30817-Q664-xxxx 1.0 –

HXGM3 S30810-Q2942-X 12.0 –

IVML8 S30122-X7380-X100 3.0 0.7

IVML24 S30122-X7380-X 5.0 1.0

REAL S30807-Q5913-X 0.5 –

SLA8N S30810-Q2929-X200 1.5 1.5

SLA16N S30810-Q2929-X100 3.0 3.0

SLA24N S30810-Q2929-X 4.5 4.5SLC16 S30810-Q2922-X 8.0 –

SLC16N S30810-Q2193-X100 5.0 –

SLMO8 S30810-Q2901-X100 0.7 –

SLMO24 S30810-Q2901-X 1.5 –

STMD2 S30810-Q2558-X400 2.0 –



power_calc.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Boards Power Requirement

STMD8 S30810-Q2558-X200 2.0 –

TIEL S30810-Q2520-X 1.0 –

TMAMF S30810-Q2587-A200 1.81 16.91

TMCAS S30810-Q2938-X Not Available

TMDID8 S30810-Q2507-X 1.41 23.81

TMGL8 S30810-Q2703-X 1.61 2.11

TML8W S30817-Q626-Axxx/Bxxx 1.0 –

TMST1 S30810-Q2920-X 3.0 –TMS2 S30810-Q2915-X 3.0 –1 Identified at a traffic flow of 0.8 Erlang

Table D-2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Boards Power Requirement


5 V –48 V

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


power_calc.fm

HiPath 3550 Boards Power Requirement

D.2 HiPath 3550 Boards Power Requirement

Table D-3 Nominal output of the Power Supply Units HiPath 3550


5 V –48 V

UPSC-D S30122-K5660-M300 40.0 53.0

UPSC-D with EPSU2 S30122-K5660-M300 withS30122-K7221-X2

40.0 140.0

>You must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and theconnected workpoint clients exceeds the maximum possible output of the UPSC-Dwith or without EPSU2. Section D.7 contains an sample calculation.

Table D-4 Boards Power Requirement HiPath 3550


5 V –48 V

BS3/1 S30807-H5482-X – 2.0

BS3/3 S30807-H5485-X – 3.0

CBCC (including submod-ules)

S30810-Q2935-A201 7.0 0.5

GEE12 S30817-Q951-Axxx 0.5 –

GEE16 S30817-Q951-Axxx 0.5 –

GEE50 S30817-Q951-Axxx 0.5 –

HXGS3 (including fan kit) S30810-Q2943-X 10.0 2.8

HXGS3 (excluding fan kit) S30810-Q2943-X 10.0 –

IVMS8 S30122-Q7379-X 2.6 0.3

PDM1 S30807-Q5692-X100 – 5.0

SLA8N S30810-Q2929-X200 0.2 0.5

SLA16N S30810-Q2929-X100 3.0 3.0

SLA24N S30810-Q2929-X 4.5 4.5

SLC16 S30810-Q2922-X 8.0 –

SLC16N S30810-Q2193-X100 5.0 –

SLMO24 S30810-Q2901-X 1.5 –

SLU8 S30817-Q922-A301 0.8 –



power_calc.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




STLS2 S30817-Q924-B313 0.6 –

STLS4 S30817-Q924-A313 1.0 –

STRB S30817-Q932-A 0.5 –

TLA2 S30817-Q923-Bxxx 0.1 –

TLA4 S30817-Q923-Axxx 0.2 –

TLA8 S30817-Q926-Axxx 0.4 –

TMAMF S30810-Q2587-A400 1.81 16.91

TMCAS S30810-Q2938-X Not AvailableTMGL4 S30810-Q2918-X 4.71 0.11

TMQ4 S30810-Q2917-X 3.8 –

TST1 S30810-Q2919-X 0.8 –

TS2 S30810-Q2913-X100 0.9 –

V24/1 S30807-Q6916-X100 0.3 –

4SLA S30810-Q2923-X200 0.7 0.7

8SLA S30810-Q2923-X100 1.3 1.3

16SLA S30810-Q2923-X 2.5 2.51 Identified at a traffic flow of 0.8 Erlang

Table D-4 Boards Power Requirement HiPath 3550


5 V –48 V

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


power_calc.fm



Table D-5 Nominal output of the HiPath 3350 Power Supply Units


5 V –48 V

PSUP S30122-K5658-M 15.0 19.2

UPSC-D S30122-K5660-M300 20.01

1 Nominal output = 40 W. Due to build-up of heat, not more than 20 W may be withdrawn.

53.0

UPSC-D with EPSU2 S30122-K5660-M300 withS30122-K7221-X2

40.0 140.0

> You must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and theconnected workpoint clients exceeds the maximum possible output of the PSUP orthe UPSC-D with or without EPSU2. Section D.7 contains an sample calculation.

Table D-6 HiPath 3350 Boards Power Requirement


5 V –48 V

BS3/1 S30807-H5482-X – 2.0

BS3/3 S30807-H5485-X – 3.0

CBCC (including submod-ules)

S30810-Q2935-A201 7.0 0.5

GEE12 S30817-Q951-Axxx 0.5 –

GEE16 S30817-Q951-Axxx 0.5 –

GEE50 S30817-Q951-Axxx 0.5 –

HXGS3 (including fan kit) S30810-Q2943-X 10.0 2.8

IVMP8 S30122-Q7379-X100 2.6 0.3

PDM1 S30807-Q5692-X100 – 5.0

SLU8 S30817-Q922-A301 0.8 –

STLS2 S30817-Q924-B313 0.6 –

STLS4 S30817-Q924-A313 1.0 –

STRB S30817-Q932-A 0.5 –

TLA2 S30817-Q923-Bxxx 0.1 –

TLA4 S30817-Q923-Axxx 0.2 –



power_calc.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




TLA8 S30817-Q926-Axxx 0.4 –

TMGL4 S30810-Q2918-X 4.71 0.11

TMQ4 S30810-Q2917-X 3.8 –

V24/1 S30807-Q6916-X100 0.3 –

4SLA S30810-Q2923-X200 0.7 0.7

8SLA S30810-Q2923-X100 1.3 1.3

16SLA S30810-Q2923-X 2.5 2.51 Identified at a traffic flow of 0.8 Erlang



5 V –48 V

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


power_calc.fm



Table D-7 Nominal Output of the HiPath 3500 Power Supply Units


5 V –48 V

UPSC-DR S30122-K7373-M900 40.0 53.0

UPSC-DR with EPSU2R1

1 Installed in expansion box EBR S30777-U711-E901

S30122-K7373-M900 withS30122-K7221-X900

40.0 140.0

>

You must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and theconnected workpoint clients exceeds the maximum possible output of the UPSC-DRwith or without EPSU2-R. Section D.7 contains an sample calculation.



5 V –48 V

BS3/1 S30807-H5482-X – 2.0

BS3/3 S30807-H5485-X – 3.0

CBRC (including submod-

ules)

S30810-K2935-Z 7.0 0.5

HXGR3 S30810-K2943-Z 10.0 –

IVMS8R S30122-K7379-Z 2.6 0.3

Fan for HiPath 3500 – – 1.4

PDM1 S30807-Q5692-X100 – 5.0

SLU8R S30817-K922-Z301 0.8 –

STLS4R S30817-K924-Z313 1.0 –

STRBR S30817-Q932-Z 0.5 –

TLA4R S30817-Q923-Zxxx 0.2 –

TMGL4R S30810-K2918-Z 5.71

1 Identified at a traffic flow of 0.8 Erlang

0.11

TST1 S30810-K2919-Z 0.8 –

TS2R S30810-K2913-Z100 0.9 –

8SLAR S30810-K2925-Z 1.3 1.3

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



power_calc.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05





Table D-9 Nominal Output of the Power Supply Units HiPath 3300


5 V –48 V

UPSC-DR S30122-K7373-M900 20.01

1 Nominal output = 40 W. Due to build-up of heat, not more than 20 W may be withdrawn.

53.0

UPSC-DR with EPSU2R2

2 Installed in expansion box EBR S30777-U711-E901

S30122-K7373-M900 withS30122-K7221-X900

40.0 140.0

>You must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and the

connected workpoint clients exceeds the maximum possible output of the UPSC-DRwith or without EPSU2-R. A sample calculation is shown in Section D.7.



5 V –48 V

BS3/1 S30807-H5482-X – 2.0

BS3/3 S30807-H5485-X – 3.0

CBRC (including submod-ules) S30810-K2935-Z 7.0 0.5

HXGR3 S30810-K2943-Z 10.0 –

IVMP8R S30122-K7379-Z100 2.6 0.3

Fan for HiPath 3300 – – 1.4

PDM1 S30807-Q5692-X100 – 5.0

SLU8R S30817-K922-Z301 0.8 –

STLS4R S30817-K924-Z313 1.0 –

STRBR S30817-Q932-Z 0.5 –TLA4R S30817-Q923-Zxxx 0.2 –

TMGL4R S30810-K2918-Z 5.71

1 Identified at a traffic flow of 0.8 Erlang

0.11

8SLAR S30810-K2925-Z 1.3 1.3

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


power_calc.fm

Workpoint clients, Key Modules and Adapter Power Requirements

D.6 Workpoint clients, Key Modules and Adapter PowerRequirements

An average power requirement is specified, which is identified at a traffic flow of 0.15 Erlang.

Table D-11 Workpoint clients, Key Modules and Adapter Power Requirements

Workpoint Client Net Power Requirement in W(from –48 V output)

optiPoint 500

optiPoint 500 entry 0.3

optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.) 0.7

optiPoint 500 basic 0.7

optiPoint 500 standard /optiPoint 500 standard SL (for U.S. only)

0.7

optiPoint 500 advance 0.72

optiPoint key module 0.05

optiPoint BLF 01

optiPoint analog adapter 02

optiPoint ISDN adapter 0.7

optiPoint phone adapter 0.18

optiPoint acoustic adapter 0.25

optiPoint recorder adapter 0.3optiPoint 600 office 01

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



power_calc.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Workpoint clients, Key Modules and Adapter Power Requirements

optiset E

optiset E entry 0.36

optiset E basic 0.36

optiset E standard 0.41

optiset E advance plus/comfort 0.43

optiset E advance conference/conference 0.85

optiset E memory 0.56

optiset E key Module 0.06

Hicom Attendant BLF 01

optiset E acoustic adapter 0.02

optiset E analog adapter 02

optiset E contact adapter 0.7

optiset E control adapters 0.34

optiset E data adapter 0.76

optiset E headset adapter 0.03

optiset E headset plus adapter 0.23

ISDN adapter in optiset E telephone 0.05

optiset E phone adapter 0.06

Analog telephone (40 mA for short trunk) in active status 0.31 Power is supplied from a plug-in power supply.2 Power is supplied to the connected analog telephone from a plug-in power supply.

Table D-11 Workpoint clients, Key Modules and Adapter Power Requirements

Workpoint Client Net Power Requirement in W(from –48 V output)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


power_calc.fm

Check Whether the Output of a Power Supply Unit is Sufficient

D.7 Check Whether the Output of a Power Supply Unit is Sufficient

Apart from the secondary power requirements, the power output must also be checked to en-sure that the maximum possible output of the system’s power supply unit is sufficient. For this,

the power requirement on the 5 V output format and on the –48 V output format must be exam-ined separately.

A separate calculation must be performed for every HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 system box(UPSM).

Procedure

Proceed as follows to identify the secondary power requirement of a system:

1. Determine secondary power requirement at the 5 V output

2. Determine secondary power requirement at the –48 V output

Using the specified values, check whether the total power requirement exceeds the maximumpossible output of the power supply unit at the 5 V output or at the –48 V output. If this is thecase, you have the following options:

HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 with UPSMFor multiple box systems, the distribution of boards on the system boxes can be optimized.Please observe the configuration notes in Section 4.2.6.

HiPath 3550 with USPSC-DThe maximum nominal output at the –48 V output can be increased from 53 W to 140 Wby using the EPSU2 external power supply unit.

7WarningTo guarantee smooth system operation, the nominal output of the power supply unitat the 5 V output and at the –48 V output must be greater than the respective sec-ondary power requirement.

5 V power requirement of the boards/components used

= secondary power requirement at the 5 V output

–48 V power requirement of the boards/components used

+ power requirement of connected workpoint clients (analog and digital telephones),key modules and adapters

= secondary power requirement at the –48 V output



power_calc.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05




HiPath 3350 with USPSC-DDue to build-up of heat, the 5 V output format can only be loaded with a maximum of 20 W.A maximum nominal output of 40 W is possible by using the EPSU2 external power supplyunit. In addition, the maximum nominal output of the –48 V output increases from 53 W to

140 W.

HiPath 3500 with UPSC-DRThe maximum nominal output of the –48 V output can be increased from 53 W to 140 Wby using the EPSU2-R external power supply unit.

HiPath 3300 with USPSC-DRDue to build-up of heat, the 5 V output format can only be loaded with a maximum of 20 W.A maximum nominal output of 40 W is possible by using the EPSU2-R external power sup-ply unit. In addition, the maximum nominal output of the –48 V output increases from 53 Wto 140 W.

Sample calculation for a HiPath 3550

1. Determine secondary power requirement at the 5 V output

The maximum nominal output of UPSC-D at the –5 V output amounts to 40 W and isenough to cover the specified power requirement.

power requirements of the boards/ components used =

7.00 W 1 x CBCC

10.00 W 1 x HXGS3 (including fan kit)

0.90 W 1 x TS2

2.40 W 3 x SLU8

1.30 W 1 x 8SLA

5.00 W 1 x SLC16N

0.00 W 12 x BS3/1

= secondary power requirement at the5 V output =

26.60 W




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


power_calc.fm


2. Determine secondary power requirement at the –48 V output

The maximum nominal output of UPSC-D at the –48 V output amounts to 53 W and isenough to cover the specified power requirement.

power requirements of the boards/ components used =

0.50 W 1 x CBCC

2.80 W 1 x HXGS3 (including fan kit)0.00 W 1 x TS2

0.00 W 3 x SLU8

1.30 W 1 x 8SLA

0.00 W 1 x SLC16N

24.00 W 12 x BS3/1

+ power requirement of connected work-point clients, key modules and adapt-ers =

0.56 W 1 x optiset E memory

4.32 W 6 x optiPoint 500 advance

0.85 W 1 x optiset E advance confer-ence/conference

8.40 W 12 x optiPoint 500 basic

2.40 W 8 x optiPoint 500 entry

0.00 W 2 x Hicom Attendant BLF

0.00 W 2 x optiPoint BLF

0.40 W 8 x optiPoint key module

0.50 W 2 x optiPoint acoustic adapter

1.80 W 6 x analog telephones

= secondary power requirement at the48 V output =

47.83 W



power_calc.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05



Identifying the Primary System Power Requirement

D.8 Identifying the Primary System Power Requirement

Procedure

Proceed as follows to identify the primary power requirement of a system:

1. Determine overall secondary power requirement

2. Identifying primary power requirement

power requirements of the boards/components used

+ power requirement of connected workpoint clients (analog and digital telephones),key modules and adapters

= overall secondary power requirement

overall secondary power requirement

+ requirements of power supply units (UPSM = 30 W, PSUP/UPSC-D/UPSC-DR =12 W respectively)

+ requirements of EPSU2/EPSU2R (10 W respectively)

= the result should be multiplied by the factor 1.2 to allow for the degree of efficiency ofthe power supply.




P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


power_calc.fm

Identifying the Primary System Power Requirement

Sample calculation for a HiPath 3550

1. Determine overall secondary power requirement

2. Identifying primary power requirement

The primary power requirement of HiPath 3550 with the expansion mentionedamounts to approximately 103.7 W.

power requirements of the boards/ components used = 7.50 W 1 x CBCC12.80 W 1 x HXGS3 (including fan kit)

0.90 W 1 x TS2

2.40 W 3 x SLU8

2.60 W 1 x 8SLA

5.00 W 1 x SLC16N

24.00 W 12 x BS3/1

+ power requirement of connected work-

point clients, key modules and adapt-ers =

0.56 W 1 x optiset E memory

4.32 W 6 x optiPoint 500 advance0.85 W 1 x optiset E advance confer-

ence/conference

8.40 W 12 x optiPoint 500 basic

2.40 W 8 x optiPoint 500 entry

0.00 W 2 x Hicom Attendant BLF

0.00 W 2 x optiPoint BLF

0.40 W 8 x optiPoint key module

0.50 W 2 x optiPoint acoustic adapter1.80 W 6 x analog workpoint clients

= entire secondary power requirement = 74.43 W

overall secondary power requirement=

74.43 W

+ UPSC-D requirement = 12.00 W

Allow for the degree of efficiency of thepower supply unit:

86.43 W x 1.2 = 103.7 W



hp3hp5shLOF.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual W-1

Figures

Figures 0

Figure 2-1 HiPath 3000 as Networked Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Figure 2-2 HiPath 5000 RSM Multi-Node System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Figure 2-3 HiPath 3750 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Figure 2-4 HiPath 3550 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Figure 2-5 HiPath 3350 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Figure 2-6 HiPath 3700 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Figure 2-7 HiPath 3500 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Figure 2-8 HiPath 3300 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Figure 2-9 HiPath 5000 RSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Figure 3-1 CBCC Interface (S30810-Q2935-A201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Figure 3-2 CBRC Interface (S30810-K2935-Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Figure 3-3 CBCP Board (S30810-Q2935-B201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Figure 3-4 CBCPR Board (S30810-Q2936-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35Figure 3-5 CMA with Spacing Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Figure 3-6 Networking Options for HiPath 3000 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Figure 3-7 CR8N (S30810-Q2513-X100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43Figure 3-8 CUC Backplane (S30777-Q750-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44Figure 3-9 CUCR Backplane (S30777-Q750-Z). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44Figure 3-10 CUP Backplane (S30777-Q751-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45Figure 3-11 CUPR Backplane (S30777-Q751-Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45Figure 3-12 LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Procedure for LAN

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48Figure 3-13 LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - C39195-Z7213-A1 Adapter

Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48Figure 3-14 LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Attachment of the Patch

Cable to the Backplane Grill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49Figure 3-15 PSUP Interface (S30122-K5658-M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51Figure 3-16 UPSC-D (S30122-K5660-M300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54Figure 3-17 UPSC-D (S30122-K5660-M300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54Figure 3-18 UPSC-D - Switches and LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55Figure 3-19 UPSC-D - Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Figure 3-20 UPSC-DR (S30122-K7373-M900) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59Figure 3-21 UPSC-DR (S30122-K7373-M900) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60Figure 3-22 UPSC-DR - Switches and LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61Figure 3-23 UPSC-DR - Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62Figure 3-24 UPSM Front and Rear Views (S30122-K5950-S100) (Not for U.S.) . . . . 3-66Figure 3-25 Front and Rear Views of the UPSM (S30122-K5950-A100) . . . . . . . . . . 3-67Figure 3-26 Rear View of the BSG 48/38 Battery Cabinet (S30122-K5950-F300). . . 3-68Figure 3-27 Connections Between the BSG 48/38 Battery Box and UPSM

(HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69



Figures

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05W-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

hp3hp5shLOF.fm

Figure 3-28 HXGM3 (S30810-Q2942-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72Figure 3-29 HXGM3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73Figure 3-30 HXGM3 LAN Adapter Connector for Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75Figure 3-31 HXGM3 LAN Adapter Cable for Backplane (for U.S. only). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76Figure 3-32 HXGS3 (S30810-Q2943-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79Figure 3-33 HXGR3 (S30810-K2943-Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79Figure 3-34 HXGS3/HXGR3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80Figure 3-35 HXGS3 Installation of the Fan Kit in HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84Figure 3-36 HXGS3 Securing Clips for Fan Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85Figure 3-37 HXGS3 Connection of the Fan Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85Figure 3-38 IVML8 and IVML24 - Packing Protection Covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86Figure 3-39 IVML8 and IVML24 (S30122-X7380-X100/-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87Figure 3-40 LAN Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89Figure 3-41 IVMP8 and IVMP8R - Packing Protection Covering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90

Figure 3-42 IVMP8 and IVMP8R (S30122-Q7379-X100/-K7379-Z100) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91Figure 3-43 IVMS8 and IVMS8R - Packing Protection Covering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94Figure 3-44 IVMS8 and IVMS8R (S30122-Q7379-X/-K7379-Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95Figure 3-45 IVMS8R - Front View (S30122-K7379-Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96Figure 3-46 SLA8N (Not for U.S.), SLA16N, and SLA24N (S30810-Q2929-

Xxxx/-Xxxx/-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99Figure 3-47 SLC16 (S30810-Q2922-X) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107Figure 3-48 SLC16N (S30810-Q2193-X100). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107Figure 3-49 Base Station Power Supply Via One UP0/E Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115Figure 3-50 Base Station Power Supply Via Two UP0/E Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116Figure 3-51 BS3/3 Power Supply Via Three UP0/E Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117

Figure 3-52 EPSU2 - Indicators and Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118Figure 3-53 EPSU2 - Holes for Mounting on the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121Figure 3-54 SLMO8 and SLMO24 (S30810-Q2901-X100 / S30810-Q2901-X). . . . . 3-122Figure 3-55 SLU8 Interfaces (S30817-Q922-A301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128Figure 3-56 SLU8R Interfaces(S30817-K922-Z301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130Figure 3-57 STLS2 (Not for U.S.) and STLS4 Interfaces (S30817-Q924-

B313 / -A313) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131Figure 3-58 MWxx Jack Pin Assignment (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133Figure 3-59 S0 Bus Wiring From STLS4 Port or optiset E ISDN adapter

(for U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134Figure 3-60 Pin Assignment of MW Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136Figure 3-61 Wiring and Ranges for S0 Bus Jacks (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137Figure 3-62 STLS4R Interfaces (S30817-K924-Z313) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138Figure 3-63 STMD8 (S30810-Q2558-X200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140Figure 3-64 S0 Trunk Connection (Not for U.S.) (Example for HiPath 3750). . . . . . . 3-142Figure 3-65 S0 Connection to NT (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142Figure 3-66 S0 Networking Options (Not for U.S.) (Examples for HiPath 3750) . . . . 3-144Figure 3-67 S0 bus to the STMD8 via the MDFU or MDFU-E (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . 3-145Figure 3-68 Jack Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-145



hp3hp5shLOF.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Figures

Figure 3-69 S0 Bus—Example of Wall Jack Assignment (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . 3-146Figure 3-70 S0 Bus Wiring From STMD8 Port or ISDN adapter (for U.S. Only) . . . 3-149Figure 3-71 TIEL (S30810-Q2520-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153Figure 3-72 E&M Interface Type 1 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-155

Figure 3-73 E&M Interface Type 1A (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-156Figure 3-74 E&M Interface Type 1B or 5 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-157Figure 3-75 E&M Interface Type 2 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158Figure 3-76 E&M Interface Type 2 Circuit Diagram, MDFU or MDFU-E

Numbering (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159Figure 3-77 TLA2 and TLA4 Interfaces (S30817-Q923-Bxxx/Axxx) (Not for U.S.). . 3-165Figure 3-78 TLA8 Interfaces (S30817-Q926-A301) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166Figure 3-79 TLA4R Interfaces (S30817-Q923-Zxxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167Figure 3-80 TMAMF (S30810-Q2587-Axxx). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169Figure 3-81 Pin Assignments of the TMAMF Diagnostic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-170

Figure 3-82 TMCAS (S30810-Q2938-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173Figure 3-83 TMCAS in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Backplane View ofthe “8-Slot” Basic Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177

Figure 3-84 TMCAS in HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178Figure 3-85 TMDID8 Switches and Indicators (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-183Figure 3-86 TMGL4 Module Interfaces (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-186Figure 3-87 TMGL4R Interfaces (S30810-K2918-Z) (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-188Figure 3-88 TMGL8 Module (S30810-Q2703-X) (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190Figure 3-89 TML8W (S30817-Q626-Axxx/Bxxx) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-192Figure 3-90 TMOM (S30810-Q2535-X) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-196Figure 3-91 TMOM—PSE Interface (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-198

Figure 3-92 TMQ4 Module Interfaces (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201Figure 3-93 TMST1 (S30810-Q2920-X) (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-203Figure 3-94 TMST1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) C39228-

A7195-A12 (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205Figure 3-95 TMS2 (S30810-Q2915-X) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206Figure 3-96 S2M Trunk Connection (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-209Figure 3-97 Supplying NTs Via S2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-210Figure 3-98 S2M—NT Connection (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-210Figure 3-99 S2M - NT Connection Deutsche Telekom (for Germany only) . . . . . . . . 3-211Figure 3-100 S2M Networking Options (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-212Figure 3-101 TST1 Interfaces (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-213Figure 3-102 TS2 Interfaces (S30810-Q2913-X100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-216Figure 3-103 TS2R Interfaces (S30810-K2913-Z100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-216Figure 3-104 S2M Trunk Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-218Figure 3-105 S2M - NT Connections for Spain and Portugal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-219Figure 3-106 4SLA and 8SLA Interfaces (S30810-Q2923-X200 / -X100) . . . . . . . . . 3-220Figure 3-107 16SLA Interfaces (S30810-Q2923-X) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-222Figure 3-108 8SLAR Interfaces (S30810-K2925-Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-224Figure 3-109 ALUM4 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-226



Figures


hp3hp5shLOF.fm

Figure 3-110 ALUM4 Interfaces (S30817-Q935-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-227Figure 3-111 ALUM4 Circuit in Power Failure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-229Figure 3-112 ANI4 Interface (S30807-Q6917-Axxx) (for selected countries only). . . . 3-230Figure 3-113 ANI4 - Installation Steps (for selected countries only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-233Figure 3-114 ANI4R Interface (S30807-Q6917-Z103) (for selected countries

only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-234Figure 3-115 EXM Slot for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . 3-237Figure 3-116 EXMR Connection to HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-237Figure 3-117 EXMNA Interfaces (S30807-Q6923-X) (for U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-238Figure 3-118 EXMNA Slot for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . 3-238Figure 3-119 GEE8 (S30817-Q664-xxxx) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-240Figure 3-120 GEE12, GEE16, and GEE50 Interfaces (S30817-Q951-Axxx) . . . . . . . 3-241Figure 3-121 HOPE Board (S30122-Q7078-X; S30122-Q7079-X—in U.S.) . . . . . . . . 3-243Figure 3-122 OPAL (C39195-A7001-B130). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-245

Figure 3-123 OPALR (C39195-A7001-B142) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-246Figure 3-124 Trunk Failure Transfer Using PFT1/PFT4 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-247Figure 3-125 Installation Location of PFT1 and PFT4 (MDFU or MDFU-E)

(Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-248Figure 3-126 PFT1 (S30777-Q539-X) and PFT4 (S30777-Q540-X) Board

Assignment (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-249Figure 3-127 Installation Location of the REAL Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-251Figure 3-128 Relay Contacts (De-Energized) and MDFU Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-252Figure 3-129 STBG4 interfaces (S30817-Q934-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-254Figure 3-130 STRB Interfaces (S30817-Q932-M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-256Figure 3-131 STRBR Interfaces (S30817-Q932-Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-256

Figure 3-132 STRB and STRBR Board Relay and Sensor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-257Figure 3-133 V24 Interface (S30807-Q6916-X100). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-260Figure 3-134 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - V.24 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-260Figure 3-135 V.24 (RS-232) Contact Assignments, HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 . . 3-261Figure 3-136 V.24 Cable Assignment (C30267-Z355-A25). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-263Figure 4-1 HiPath 3750 - Removing the Front and Rear Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Figure 4-2 HiPath 3750 Wall-Mount Kit (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Figure 4-3 Wall Mounting for a One-Cabinet System (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Figure 4-4 HiPath 3750 - Installing a Two-Cabinet System (Stacked). . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Figure 4-5 HiPath 3750 Wall-Mount Kit (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Figure 4-6 Wall Mounting for a Stacked Two-Cabinet System (for U.S. Only) . . . . . 4-19Figure 4-7 HiPath 3750 - Mounting the Stabilizer Feet (Three-Cabinet

System Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Figure 4-8 HiPath 3750—Installing a Two-Cabinet System (Side by Side) . . . . . . . . 4-21Figure 4-9 HiPath 3750—Installing a Three-Cabinet System (Stacked) . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Figure 4-10 HiPath 3750 Seismic Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Figure 4-11 Seismic Anchoring for Multiple Cabinets (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Figure 4-12 HiPath 3750 - Grounding the System and Main Distribution Frame. . . . . 4-27Figure 4-13 HiPath 3750 - Protective Grounding Option 1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28



hp3hp5shLOF.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Figures

Figure 4-14 HiPath 3750—Protective Grounding Option 1b. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Figure 4-15 Basic Cabinet Earth Ground (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Figure 4-16 HiPath 3750 - Backplane of the “8-Slot” Basic Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Figure 4-17 HiPath 3750 - Backplane of the “8-Slot” Expansion Cabinets. . . . . . . . . 4-33

Figure 4-18 Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connecting Cables between BCand EC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Figure 4-19 Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connecting Cables between BC,EC1 and EC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Figure 4-20 TMST1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) C39228-A7195-A12(for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Figure 4-21 Stripping the Open-End Cable (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Figure 4-22 Assignments (Numbering) of the Splitting/Jumper Strips, view from

above (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Figure 4-23 MDFU—Layout and Dimensions (367.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm)

(Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Figure 4-24 MDFU-E—Layout and Dimensions (669.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm)(Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Figure 4-25 HiPath 3700 - Removing the Front and Rear Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49Figure 4-26 HiPath 3700 - Installation in the 19-Inch Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51Figure 4-27 HiPath 3700 - Mounting the Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52Figure 4-28 HiPath 3700 - Grounding the Systems and Patch Panel in a

19-Inch Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54Figure 4-29 HiPath 3700 - Backplane of the “8-Slot” Basic Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56Figure 4-30 HiPath 3700 - Backplane of the “8-Slot” Exp. Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57Figure 4-31 Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connecting Cables between BC

and EC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58Figure 4-32 Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connecting Cables between BC,

EC1 and EC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59Figure 4-33 Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62Figure 4-34 Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63Figure 4-35 S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64Figure 4-36 Laying Wire Pairs at the S0 Patch Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Figure 4-37 Stripping the Open-End Cable for the S0 Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66Figure 4-38 S2M /T1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) C39228-A7195-A12 . . . 4-67Figure 4-39 Layout of the Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X for Different Peripheral

Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68Figure 4-40 Slot Numbers and Widths in “8-Slot” BC, EC1, and EC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71Figure 4-41 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700—Initialization of Subscriber Line

Circuits and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73Figure 4-42 PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75Figure 4-43 PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76Figure 4-44 PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76Figure 4-45 Locking and Unlocking Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78Figure 4-46 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Space Requirements (for U.S. Only) . . . 4-84



Figures


hp3hp5shLOF.fm

Figure 4-47 MDFU Layout and Dimensions (367.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm)(Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Figure 4-48 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Wall Attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90Figure 4-49 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Mounting Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90Figure 4-50 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Grounding an External Main

Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92Figure 4-51 HiPath 3550 - Backplane Connection for a Peripheral Board in

HiPath 3750 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94Figure 4-52 Layout of CABLU S30269-Z41-A30 ( 3 m long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95Figure 4-53 Integrated Distribution Frame - Slip-on Connector Screw Connections . . 4-96Figure 4-54 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Power Cable with Ferrite Sleeve . . . . . . 4-98Figure 4-55 HiPath 3550 - Wall Housing System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100Figure 4-56 HiPath 3550 - Slots in the Wall Housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101Figure 4-57 HiPath 3550 - Options Adapter Long (OPAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Figure 4-58 HiPath 3350 - Wall Housing System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102Figure 4-59 HiPath 3350 - Slots in the Wall Housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102Figure 4-60 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Wall Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108Figure 4-61 HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 - Mounting the 19-Inch Cabinet . . . . . . . . 4-110Figure 4-62 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112Figure 4-63 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Connecting cable to ECR . . . . . . . . . . 4-113Figure 4-64 HiPath 3500 - Slot Levels in the 19-Inch Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114Figure 4-65 HiPath 3300 - Slot Levels in the 19-Inch Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115Figure 6-1 HiPath 5000 RSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Figure 6-2 RAM Space of the HiPath 5000 RSM server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Figure 6-3 HiPath 5000 RSM Server Licensing Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

Figure 6-4 USV P 500 - Front/Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96Figure 8-1 Example connection of a CDR printer to HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Figure 8-2 ECR front panel (155 x 440 x 380 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Figure 8-3 ECR Rear Panel With Connecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Figure 8-4 HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 - ECR With Batteries . . . . . . . . 8-10Figure 8-5 ECR With Built-in Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Figure 8-6 HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 - ECR With Batteries and EPSU2-R . . . . . . . 8-15Figure 8-7 ECR with Built-in EPSU2-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Figure 8-8 Connecting the Fan to the EPSU2-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Figure 8-9 Placement of the Fan in the ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Figure 8-10 Connection Options for Entrance Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Figure 8-11 Direct Connection of Entrance Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Figure 8-12 Connecting DoorCom Analog to HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Figure 8-13 Connecting Speakers to an Analog Station Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Figure 8-14 Connecting Speakers to an Analog Trunk Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Figure 9-1 optiPoint 500 entry - Standard Key Assignments (Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Figure 9-2 optiPoint 500 economy - Standard Key Assignments (Default) . . . . . . . . . 9-6Figure 9-3 optiPoint 500 basic - Standard Key Assignments (Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Figure 9-4 optiPoint 500 standard - Standard Key Assignments (Default) . . . . . . . . . 9-8



hp3hp5shLOF.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Figures

Figure 9-5 optiPoint 500 advance - Standard Key Assignments (Default) . . . . . . . . 9-10Figure 9-6 optiPoint 500 Connecting Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Figure 9-7 optiPoint key module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Figure 9-8 optiPoint BLF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Figure 9-9 optiPoint 500 Possible Configurations for Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Figure 9-10 optiPoint 500 Option Bays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Figure 9-11 optiPoint analog adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Figure 9-12 optiPoint ISDN adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Figure 9-13 optiPoint phone adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Figure 9-14 Example of a Host-Client Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Figure 9-15 optiPoint acoustic adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Figure 9-16 Y cable for optiPoint acoustic adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Figure 9-17 optiPoint recorder adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Figure 9-18 Connection Example for a local power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Figure 9-19 Example of a Corded and a Cordless Headset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Figure 9-20 optiPoint 600 office - Default Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Figure 9-21 optiLog 4me. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Figure 9-22 optiPoint 410 entry - Standard Key Assignments (Default). . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Figure 9-23 optiPoint 410 economy - Standard Key Assignments (Default) . . . . . . . 9-47Figure 9-24 optiPoint 410 standard - Standard Key Assignments (Default) . . . . . . . . 9-49Figure 9-25 optiPoint 410 Connection Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Figure 9-26 optiPoint SLK Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Figure 9-27 optiPoint 410 display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Figure 9-28 Possible Uses of the optiClient 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Figure 9-29 optiPoint 500 standard - Standard Key Assignments (Default) for

optiPoint Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Figure 9-30 Gigaset active Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72Figure 9-31 Gigaset 3000 Comfort Feature Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73Figure 9-32 Gigaset 3000 Micro Feature Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74Figure 9-33 Gigaset 4000 Comfort Feature Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76Figure 9-34 Gigaset 4000 Micro Feature Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77Figure 9-35 Reference Wiring Configuration in the User Premises Location . . . . . . . 9-85Figure 9-36 S0 Point-to-Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86Figure 9-37 Short Passive Bus Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87Figure 9-38 Extended Passive Bus Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88Figure 10-1 BS3/1 S30807-H5482-X Base Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Figure 10-2 BS3/1 (BS3/S) and BS3/3 in the Outdoor Cover S30122-X7469-X . . . . 10-5Figure 10-3 Example of a SLC16 Extension Connection in Networked Systems. . . 10-10Figure 10-4 Incorrect DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000

systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Figure 10-5 Correct DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems . . 10-12Figure 10-6 Correct DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems . . 10-12Figure 11-1 HiPath Software Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17Figure 11-2 Example for Teleservice with HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59



Figures


hp3hp5shLOF.fm



hp3hp5shLOT.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual X-1

Tables

Tables 0

Table 1-1 Information on the intranet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Table 2-1 Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Table 2-2 Boards for HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Table 2-3 Boards for HiPath 3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Table 2-4 Boards for HiPath 3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Table 2-5 Boards for HiPath 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Table 2-6 HiPath 3000/5000 - System-Specific Capacity Limits (Maximum

Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Table 2-7 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Table 2-8 Telephone Interface-to-Interface Ranges (with J-Y (ST) 2x2x0,6,

0.6 mm diameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Table 2-9 Cable Lengths for Direct Trunk and CorNet-N Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Table 2-10 Default numbering for HiPath 3000 V4.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Table 2-11 U.S. and Canadian Regulatory Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Table 3-1 HiPath 3000 – Functional Overview of All Boards and Components

Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Table 3-2 HiPath 3000 – Model Overview of all Boards and Components Used . . . 3-8Table 3-3 CBCC - X1 to X4 Contact Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Table 3-4 CBRC - X1 and X3 Contact Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Table 3-5 CBCC and CBRC - X9 Contact Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Table 3-6 CBCC and CBRC - V.24 Interface Assignment (SUB-D Plug) . . . . . . . . 3-27Table 3-7 CBCC and CBRC - LAN Connector Assignment (RJ45 Jack) . . . . . . . . 3-27Table 3-8 Numbering Plan for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Table 3-9 CBCP - X1 to X4 Contact Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Table 3-10 CBCP - X9 Contact Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Table 3-11 CBCP - V.24 Connector Assignment (SUB-D Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Table 3-12 CBCP - LAN Connector Assignment (RJ45 Jack). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Table 3-13 Numbering Plan for HiPath 3350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Table 3-14 CBCPR - V.24 Interface Assignment (SUB-D Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Table 3-15 CBCPR - LAN Connector Assignment (RJ45 Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Table 3-16 Recommendations for CMA and CMS Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Table 3-17 CR8N - LED Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43Table 3-18 LIM - RJ45 Jack Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47Table 3-19 Multimedia Card Models and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50Table 3-20 UPSC-D - Bridging Times with Battery Pack S30122-K5928-X

(48 V/1,2 Ah) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53Table 3-21 UPSC-DR - Bridging Times with four Batteries V39113-W5123-E891

(4 x 12 V/7 Ah Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58Table 3-22 UPSM - Bridging Times with Battery Pack S30122-K5950-Y200

(48 V/7 Ah) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65



Tables

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05X-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

hp3hp5shLOT.fm

Table 3-23 HXGM3 Board Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71Table 3-24 HXGM3 Extension Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72Table 3-25 HXGM3 LED Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74Table 3-26 HXGM3 V.24 interface X10 Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74Table 3-27 HXGM3 LAN Adapter Connector Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75Table 3-28 HXGM3 LAN Adapter Cable Assignments (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76Table 3-29 HXGS3/HXGR3 Board Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78Table 3-30 HXGS3/HXGR3 Extension Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78Table 3-31 HXGS3/HXGR3 LAN Interface Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81Table 3-32 HXGS3/HXGR3 V.24 Interface X10 Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82Table 3-33 IVML8 and IVML24 - LED Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88Table 3-34 LAN Adapter Assignment (SIPAC 1 SU - RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89Table 3-35 IVMP8 and IVMP8R - Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 (LAN

Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92

Table 3-36 IVMP8 and IVMP8R - LED Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93Table 3-37 IVMS8 and IVMS8R - Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 (LANConnector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97

Table 3-38 IVMS8 and IVMS8R - LED Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98Table 3-39 SLA8N (Not for U.S.), SLA16N, and SLA24N—LED Statuses. . . . . . . . 3-100Table 3-40 SLA8N, SLA16N, and SLA24N - Cable 1 Assignment (SU Xx8)

(not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101Table 3-41 SLA8N, SLA16N, and SLA24N - Cable 2 Assignment (SU Xx9)

(not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102Table 3-42 SLA16N and SLA24N - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (for U.S. only) . . . . 3-103Table 3-43 SLC16/SLC16N—LED Statuses (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108

Table 3-44 SLC16/SLC16N - Cable Assignment (not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109Table 3-45 HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 - Maximum Number of SLA24N and

SLMO24 User Groups (Depending on the Number of Base StationsConnected at SLC16 or SLC16N (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111

Table 3-46 HiPath 3550 - Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Dependingon the Number of BS3/1s at SLC16 or SLC16N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112



Table 3-49 EPSU2 - Explanation of Indicators and Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119Table 3-50 EPSU2 - Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119Table 3-51 SLMO8 and SLMO24—LED Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123Table 3-52 SLMO8 and SLMO24 - Cable 1 Assignment (SU Xx8) (Not for U.S.) . . 3-124Table 3-53 SLMO8 and SLMO24 - Cable 2 Assignment (SU Xx9) (Not for U.S.) . . 3-125Table 3-54 SLMO24 - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126Table 3-55 SLU8 Contact Assignments (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128Table 3-56 SLU8 Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129Table 3-57 SLU8R Contact Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130



hp3hp5shLOT.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Tables

Table 3-58 STLS4 Module Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132Table 3-59 STLS4R Contact Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139Table 3-60 STMD8— LED Statuses (H301 to H308) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141Table 3-61 STMD8 - Cable and Connector Assignment (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . 3-147

Table 3-62 STMD8 - Assignment (SU Xx8) (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148Table 3-63 TIEL—Functions of the DIP-FIX Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154Table 3-64 TIEL—LED Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-160Table 3-65 TIEL - Cable Assignment (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161Table 3-66 TIEL - Assignment (SU Xx8) (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163Table 3-67 TLA2 and TLA4—Contact Assignments (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165Table 3-68 TLA8—Contact Assignments (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166Table 3-69 TLA4R Contact Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167Table 3-70 TMAMF—LED Statuses (H100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171Table 3-71 TMAMF—LED Statuses (H0 to H7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171

Table 3-72 TMAMF - Cable Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-172Table 3-73 TMCAS - Seven-Segment Display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176Table 3-74 TMS2-TMCAS C39195-A9700-B510 Connecting Cable Assignment. . 3-177Table 3-75 TS2-TMCAS C39195-A9700-B511 Connecting Cable Assignment . . . 3-178Table 3-76 C39195-A9700-B512 TMCAS Cable Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-179Table 3-77 C39195-A9700-B514 TMCAS Cable Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-179Table 3-78 Trunk Conditions for Setting TMDID8 Switches (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . 3-184Table 3-79 TMDID8—LED Statuses (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184Table 3-80 TMDID8 - Assignment (SU Xx8) (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-185Table 3-81 TMGL4 Module Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-187Table 3-82 TMGL4R Module Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-189

Table 3-83 TMGL8—LED Statuses (for U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-191Table 3-84 TMGL8 - Assignment (SU Xx8) (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-191Table 3-85 TML8W—LED Statuses (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-193Table 3-86 TML8W - Cable Assignment (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-194Table 3-87 TMOM—LED Statuses (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199Table 3-88 TMOM - Cable Assignment (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200Table 3-89 TMQ4 Module Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-202Table 3-90 TMST1—LED Statuses (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-204Table 3-91 TMST1 Adapter—Cable Assignment (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205Table 3-92 TMS2—Jumper Settings (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-207Table 3-93 TMS2—SU connector assignments and cable color codes . . . . . . . . . 3-207Table 3-94 TMS2—LED Statuses (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-208Table 3-95 TST1 Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-214Table 3-96 Contact Assignments for X2 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-217Table 3-97 Contact Assignments for the MW8 (RJ48C) jack X5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-217Table 3-98 4SLA and 8SLA Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-221Table 3-99 4SLA/8SLA Contact Assignments, 8SLA Interface Assignments

(for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-221Table 3-100 16SLA Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-222



Tables


hp3hp5shLOT.fm

Table 3-101 8SLAR Contact Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-224Table 3-102 ALUM4 Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-227Table 3-103 ALUM4 Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-228Table 3-104 ANI4 - LED Statuses for Trunk Channel 1 (for selected

countries only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-231Table 3-105 ANI4 Pin Assignments (for selected countries only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-232Table 3-106 ANI4R Pin Assignments (for selected countries only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-235Table 3-107 Announcement and Music Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-236Table 3-108 EXMNA Interface Assignments (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-239Table 3-109 GEE12, GEE16, and GEE50 Modules (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-241Table 3-110 GEE12, GEE16, and GEE50 Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.) . . . . 3-242Table 3-111 REAL - Cable and Connector Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-253Table 3-112 STBG4 Contact Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-254Table 3-113 STRB Contact Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-258

Table 3-114 STRBR Contact Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-259Table 3-115 Pin Assignments of the V.24 Sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-261Table 3-116 V.24 Adapter Assignment (C39334-Z7080-C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-262Table 4-1 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - System Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . 4-3Table 4-2 AC Power Requirements (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Table 4-3 Connector Assignments on the “8-Slot Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Table 4-4 Color Codes for the Open-End Cable (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Table 4-5 AC Power Requirements (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47Table 4-6 Connector Assignments on the “8-Slot Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57Table 4-7 Number of Time-Division Multiplex Channels Required Per Board . . . . . 4-74Table 4-8 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Static traffic capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

Table 4-9 Visual Inspection Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80Table 4-10 HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - System

Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82Table 4-11 AC Power Requirements (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85Table 4-12 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Static traffic capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103Table 4-13 AC Power Requirements (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106Table 4-14 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Static traffic capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116Table 5-1 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Table 5-2 RUN LED - LED Status Meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Table 5-3 Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type . . . . . . . . . 5-6Table 5-4 Entering the System Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Table 5-5 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Table 5-6 RUN LED - LED Status Meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Table 5-7 Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type . . . . . . . . 5-14Table 5-8 Entering the system number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Table 6-1 HW/SW minimum requirements for HiPath 5000 RSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Table 6-2 HiPath 5000 RSM - Preparing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Table 6-3 Windows Settings for HiPath 5000 RSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44Table 6-4 GetAccount Data Record Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78



hp3hp5shLOT.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Tables

Table 7-1 HiPath 3700 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation andStartup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Table 7-2 HiPath 3500 as a Gateway - Procedure for Installation and Startup. . . . . 7-4Table 7-3 HiPath 3300 as a Gateway - Procedure for Installation and Startup. . . . . 7-6

Table 8-1 Startup Rules for Removing and Inserting Peripheral Boards. . . . . . . . . . 8-2Table 8-2 EPSU2-R - Explanation of Display and Connecting Elements . . . . . . . . . 8-8Table 9-1 Floating contacts of the optiPoint acoustic adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Table 9-2 Comparison of optiset E and optiPoint 500 adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Table 9-3 System-Specific Maximum Configurations for UP0/E Workpoint

Clients, Add-On Devices and Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Table 9-4 Pin Assignments of the Local Power Supply AUL:06D1284 (Euro) . . . . 9-32Table 9-5 Connection Options for Corded and Cordless Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Table 9-6 Part Numbers for Telephones and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Table 9-7 Comparison of optiPoint 600 office and optiset E memory . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Table 9-8 optiPoint 410 Description of Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Table 9-9 Key Module Configuration on an optiPoint 410 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Table 9-10 Technical Data (Resources) of the HG1500 V3.0 Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Table 9-11 HG1500 V3.0 - Board-Specific Capacity Limits (Maximum

Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61Table 9-12 Number of Required Gateway Channels (HG1500 Boards) . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Table 9-13 HG1500 Boards: Required Performance Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65Table 10-1 HiPath Cordless Office - System Configuration for HiPath 3000 V4.0 . . 10-3Table 10-2 Technical Data for Various Base Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Table 10-3 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 - Maximum number of corded

telephones depending on the number of BS3/1 base stations

connected to CBCC/CBRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Table 10-4 HiPath 3550 - Maximum number of corded telephones depending

on the number of BS3/1 base stations connected to SLC16 orSLC16N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Table 10-5 HiPath 3550 - Maximum number of corded telephones dependingon the number of BS2/2 connected to SLC16 or SLC16N . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Table 10-6 HiPath 3550 - Maximum number of corded telephones dependingon the number of BS3/3 base stations connected to SLC16 orSLC16N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Table 11-1 Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8Table 11-2 Run LED - Meaning of the LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23Table 11-3 Power Supply Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24Table 11-4 HiPath 3000 Manager E - Example of Status Display of Peripheral

Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25Table 11-5 Telephone Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30Table 11-6 HiPath 3000 Class B Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35Table 11-7 Event Viewer Entries for the HiPath 5000 RSM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42Table 11-8 Variable Password: Pre-determined User Groups and Their

Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68



Tables


hp3hp5shLOT.fm

Table 11-9 Fixed Password: Fixed User Groups and Their Access Rights. . . . . . . 11-69Table 12-1 Possible QoS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Table A-1 Starting System Administration (Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1Table A-2 Expert Mode Code Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2Table A-3 Expert Mode Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3Table B-1 Codes for activating/deactivating features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1Table B-2 Description of the different workpoint client groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22Table C-1 HiPath 3000 - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2Table C-2 HiPath 5000 RSM - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3Table C-3 HiPath FM Managed Systems (at the moment not available for

HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0) - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used . . . . . . . . C-5Table C-4 HG1500 - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6Table C-5 optiClient 130 - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8Table C-6 optiPoint 400 / optiPoint 410 / optiPoint 420 / optiPoint 600 office - IP

Protocols and Port Numbers Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9Table C-7 HiPath AP 1100 / HiPath AP 1140 - IP Protocols and Port NumbersUsed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

Table C-8 Middleware for Call Control - IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used . . . . C-11Table C-9 Middleware for Media Streaming Applications - IP Protocols and Port

Numbers Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12Table D-1 Nominal output of the HiPath 3750 power supply unit and

HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2Table D-2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Boards Power Requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . D-2Table D-3 Nominal output of the Power Supply Units HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4Table D-4 Boards Power Requirement HiPath 3550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

Table D-5 Nominal output of the HiPath 3350 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6Table D-6 HiPath 3350 Boards Power Requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6Table D-7 Nominal Output of the HiPath 3500 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8Table D-8 HiPath 3500 Boards Power Requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8Table D-9 Nominal Output of the Power Supply Units HiPath 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9Table D-10 HiPath 3300 Boards Power Requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9Table D-11 Workpoint clients, Key Modules and Adapter Power Requirements . . . . D-10



hp3hp5shabb.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual Y-1

Abbreviations

Abbreviations X

This list contains the abbreviations used in this manual.

A

ADPCM Adaptive Difference Pulse Code Modulation

ALUM Power Failure Transfer

AMHOST Administration and Maintenance via HOST

ANI Automatic Number Identification

APS Application Program Software

B

BC Basic Cabinet (HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700)

BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempts

BSG Upright Battery Housing

C

CABLU Cabling Unit

CAS Channel Associated Signaling

CBCC Central Board with Coldfire Com

CBCP Central Board with Coldfire Point

CBCPR Central Board with Coldfire Pro

CBRC Central Board Rack Com

CCBS Completition of Calls to Busy Subscribers

CDB Customer Database

CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation

CLIR Calling Line Identification RestrictionCMA Clock Module ADPCM

CMS Clock Module Small

CPFSK Continous Phase Frequency Shift Keying

CR Code Receiver

CUC Connection Unit Com

CUCR Connection Unit Com Rack



Abbreviations

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05Y-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

hp3hp5shabb.fm

CUP Connection Unit Point

CUPR Connection Unit Point Rack

D

DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications

DiffServ Differentiated Services

DSP Digital Signal Processor

E

EC1 First Expansion Cabinet (HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700)

EC2 Second Expansion Cabinet (HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700)

ECG Euro-ISDN–CAS-Gateway

ECGM Euro-ISDN-CAS-Gateway MaintenanceECR Expansion Cabinet (19") Rack

ECT Explicit Call Transfer

EPSU External Power Supply Unit

Erl Erlang

ESD Electrostatically Sensitive Devices

ESM Electronic Service Manual

ET Entrance Telephone

F

FSK Frequency Shift Keying

G

GEE Call Metering Receiving Equipment

H

HPCO HiPath ProCenter Office

HXGM HiPath Xpress Gateway Medium

HXGR HiPath Xpress Gateway Rack

HXGS HiPath Xpress Gateway Small

I

IMODN Integrated Modem Card New

IP Internet Protocol

IVML Integrated Voice Mail Large

IVMP Integrated Voice Mail Point



hp3hp5shabb.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Abbreviations

IVMPR Integrated Voice Mail Point Rack

IVMS Integrated Voice Mail Small

IVMSR Integrated Voice Mail Small Rack

L

LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocoll

LED Light Emitting Diode

LIM LAN Interface Module

M

MCID Malicious Call Identification

MDFU Main Distribution Frame Universal

MDFU-E Main Distribution Frame Universal, EnhancedMMC Multimedia Card

MSN Multiple Subscriber Number

MW Mini Western

N

NT Network Termination

O

OPAL Option Adapter Long

OPALR Option Adapter Long RackP

PCM Personal Call Manager

PCM Pulse Code Modulation

PDM1 PMC DSP Module

PDS Permanent Data Service

PFT Power Failure Transfer

PSE Radio Paging Equipment

PSUP Power Supply Unit Point

Q

QoS Quality of Service

R

RDT Remote Data Transmission

REAL Relay Failure Transfer



Abbreviations


hp3hp5shabb.fm

RJ Registered Jack

ROW Rest Of World

RSM Real-Time Services Manager

S

SELV Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit

SLA Subscriber Line Analog

SLC Subscriber Line Cordless

SLK Self-Labeling Key

SLMO Subscriber Line Module Cost Optimized UP0/E

SLU Subscriber Line UP0/E

SLUR Subscriber Line UP0/E RackSMR Service Maintenance Release

SP Service Provider

STLS Subscriber Trunk Line S0

STLSR Subscriber And Trunk Line S0 Rack

STMD Subscriber and Trunk Module Digital S0

STRB Control Relay Board

STRBR Control Relay Board Rack

T

TAPI Telephony Application Programming Interface

TIEL Tie Line Ear & Mouth

TLA Trunk Line Analog

TLAR Trunk Line Analog Rack

TMAMF Trunk Module Analog for Multifrequency Code Signaling

TMCAS Trunk Module Channel Associated Signaling

TMGL4 Central Office Trunk Module

TMGL4R Central Office Trunk Module RackTMGL8 Trunk Module Ground Start/Loop Start

TML8W Trunk Module Loop Start World

TMOM Trunk Module Outgoing Multipurpose

TMS2 Trunk Module S2M

TMST1 Trunk Module S1/T1



hp3hp5shabb.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Abbreviations

TS2 Trunk Module S2M

TS2R Trunk Module S2M Rack

TW Twin-Wire

U

UAE Universal wall socket

UPSC-D Uninterruptible Power Supply Com-DECT

UPSC-DR Uninterruptible Power Supply Com-DECT Rack

UPSM Uninterruptible Power Suppy Modular

UPSMres Uninterruptible Power Supply Modular Reset-Signal

V

VPN Virtual Private NetworkW

WAP Wireless Application Protocol

WpC Workpoint Client



Abbreviations


hp3hp5shabb.fm



Index

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05Z-2 HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual

hp3hp5shIX.fm

boardsHiPath 3300

installing 4-112overview 3-19replacing 4-112

HiPath 3350installing 4-93overview 3-14replacing 4-93

HiPath 3500installing 4-112overview 3-17replacing 4-112

HiPath 3550

installing 4-93overview 3-11replacing 4-93

HiPath 3700initializing 4-72inserting/removing 4-78, 8-2installing 4-78overview 3-8replacing 8-2slots in "8-Slot" cabinets 4-70width of peripheral boards 4-72

HiPath 3750initializing 4-72inserting/removing 4-78, 8-2installing 4-78overview 3-8replacing 8-2slots in "8-Slot" cabinets 4-70width of peripheral boards 4-72

power requirement D-1bridging times

UPSC-D 3-53UPSC-DR 3-58UPSM 3-65

BSG 48/38 3-68

Ccabinets, "7-Slot" 8-25cabinets, "8-Slot" (HiPath 3700) 4-56cabinets, "8-Slot" (HiPath 3750) 4-32CABLU (HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350) 4-95

CABLUs (HiPath 3750) for MDFU/MDFU-E4-36

capacity limits for UP0/E workpoint clients,add-on devices and adapters 9-30

CAS protocol 3-173, 3-206, 3-215CBCC 3-21

figure 3-23LAN connector assignment 3-27numbering plan 3-28V.24 assignment 3-27X1 to X4 contact assignments 3-25X9 contact assignments 3-26

CBCP (for Deutsche Telekom AG only) 3-29figure 3-30

LAN connector assignment 3-32numbering plan 3-33V.24 assignment 3-32X1 to X4 contact assignments 3-31X9 contact assignments 3-31

CBCPR 3-34figure 3-35LAN connector assignment 3-36V.24 assignment 3-36

CBRC 3-21figure 3-24

LAN connector assignment 3-27numbering plan 3-28V.24 assignment 3-27X1 and X3 contact assignments 3-25X9 contact assignments 3-26

CDB backup 11-3central board

HiPath 3350 (for Deutsche Telekom AGonly) 3-29HiPath 3500/3300 3-21HiPath 3550/3350 3-21HiPath 3700 3-34HiPath 3750 3-34

central boards 3-1certification number

CS-03 2-24FCC registration number 2-24Industry Canada CS-03 2-24



hp3hp5shIX.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05

HiPath 3000/HiPath 5000 V4.0, Service Manual Z-3

Index

changing the system configuration (HiPath3550/HiPath 3350/HiPath 3500/HiPath3300) 5-13

changing the system configuration (HiPath

3750/HiPath 3700) 5-5clearance

HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 4-84HiPath 3750 4-6

CMA 3-37CMD, licensing 6-43CMS 3-38codes

feature access B-1system programming (expert mode

codes) A-1color code 4-40compliance

FCC 1-22FCC and Industry Canada 1-21

compliance to technical specifications 2-24configurations

HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (for U.S. only)8-3

connect fan (in ECR) 8-17connecting

ISDN S0 terminals (HiPath 3750/3700)3-149ISDN terminals (HiPath 3550 and HiPath3350) 3-133

connecting cable to the expansion cabinetECR 4-113

connecting cable, BC-EC "8-Slot" 4-34, 4-58controlled release of a remote connection

11-64cordless mobile telephone 9-72CorNet-N ranges 2-22correcting errors 11-57country initialization 5-14country initialization (HiPath 3750 and HiPath

3700) 5-6CR8N 3-42

illustration 3-43LED states 3-43

CS-03 certification number 2-24

CSP, licensing 6-43CSTA/V.24 cable, pin out 3-263CUC 3-44CUCR 3-44

CUP 3-45CUPR 3-45customer data

effects due to hardware changes 11-8customer database backup 11-3customer database conversion 8-25

Ddata security 1-14data terminals

ISDN

HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 3-133HiPath 3750/3700 3-149

delay 12-2Deployment Tool 9-50determining system information 11-17diagnosis options 11-23DiffServ code point 12-4digital modem 11-60disposal, battery 1-11DoorCom Analog 8-21

double key assignment 9-4EE&M

interface types 3-151signaling protocols 3-152

earth ground (HiPath 3750) 4-29ECG cabinet 3-173, 3-206, 3-215ECG protocol converter 3-173, 3-206, 3-215ECGM tool 3-174, 3-181ECR installing 8-5

ECR, connecting cable 4-113electrical environment 2-5electronic service manual

structure 1-2emergencies 1-12, 1-18entrance telephones 8-20

DoorCom Analog 8-21environmental conditions 2-25



Index


hp3hp5shIX.fm

EPSU2 3-118EPSU2-R 8-15error messages 11-34error signaling interval 11-63ESM

structure 1-2Euro-ISDN–CAS-Gateway ECG 3-173,

3-206, 3-215event log 11-31

HiPath 5000 RSM error 11-42event viewer 11-31

HiPath 5000 RSM error 11-42exchanging boards 11-10exchanging telephones 11-10

exchanging workpoint clients 11-10EXMcontact assignments 3-239slot for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 33503-237

EXMNA (for U.S. Only) 3-238slot for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 33503-238

EXMRconnection to HiPath 3500 and HiPath3300 3-237

expansion cabinet ECR, connecting cable4-113

expansion cabinet ECR, installing 8-5expert mode codes

account code A-4analog CO interface A-17announcement/music A-21attendant console A-28call detail recording A-3codes A-20configure station A-4DISA A-28displays A-11entrance phones A-20incoming calls A-7ISDN parameters A-11least cost routing (LCR) A-28networking A-9print CDB data A-22

radio paging equipment A-27relays A-21remote administration A-26sensors A-22system characteristics A-22system settings A-17system speed dial A-3toll restriction A-6traffic restriction A-10UCD A-26

extension connection 10-9external power supply EPSU2 3-118external power supply EPSU2-R 8-15

F

fan connection (in ECR) 8-17fan kit for HXGS3 in HiPath 3550/HiPath

3350 3-83FCC and Industry Canada Compliance 1-21FCC compliance 1-22FCC registration number 2-24FCC rules 1-22ferrite for HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 4-98ferrite sleeve for HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350

4-98

field-replaceable units (for U.S. only)all models 3-7HiPath 3300 3-20HiPath 3350 3-15HiPath 3500 3-18HiPath 3550 3-13HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 3-10

firewall C-1FRUs (for U.S. only)

all models 3-7

GgatewayHiPath 3300 7-6HiPath 3500 7-4HiPath 3700 7-2

gateway connection (HG1500 V3.0) 9-63gateway functionality (HG1500 V3.0) 9-63



hp3hp5shIX.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Index

GEE12/GEE16/GEE50 3-241contact assignments 3-242interfaces 3-241module 3-241

GEE8 3-240figure 3-240level setting 3-240

general safety 1-16GetAccount 6-4, 6-77

automatic path selection 6-84carrier 6-80

Gigaset 3000 Comfort 9-73Gigaset 3000 Micro 9-74Gigaset 4000 Comfort 9-76

Gigaset 4000 Micro 9-77Gigaset active 9-72ground loops

HiPath 3700 4-55HiPath 3750 4-26

HH.323 protocol 12-2hazards 1-19HDLC segments for HiPath 3750 and HiPath

3700 4-74

helpfor installation (HiPath 3700) 4-2for installation (HiPath 3750) 4-2

HG1500 licensing 6-43HG1500 V3.0

B channel distribution in the case of IPnetworking 9-67boards 3-70, 3-77capacity limits 9-61determining the required number ofboards 9-60

techn. data (resources) of the boards9-60

Hicom Office PhoneMail Entry board 3-243hicom.pds 11-4HiPath 3000 2-2, 2-5HiPath 3000 capacity limits 2-19HiPath 3000 upgrade 8-25

HiPath 3000/5000 Software ManagerAPS transfer 11-15backing up customer data 11-6backing up system components 11-20

determining system information 11-17HiPath 3150 2-5HiPath 3250 2-5HiPath 3300

as a gateway 7-6construction data 2-12FRUs for U.S. 3-20installation 4-81startup 5-10system environment 2-17

HiPath 3350construction data 2-9FRUs for U.S. 3-15installation 4-81numbering plan (for Deutsche TelekomAG only) 3-33startup 5-10system environment 2-15

HiPath 3500as a gateway 7-4construction data 2-11

FRUs for U.S. 3-18installation 4-81numbering plan 3-28startup 5-10system environment 2-16

HiPath 3550construction data 2-8FRUs for U.S. 3-13installation 4-81numbering plan 3-28startup 5-10system environment 2-14

HiPath 3700as a gateway 7-2construction data 2-10FRUs for U.S. 3-10installation 4-2startup 5-2system environment 2-13



Index


hp3hp5shIX.fm

HiPath 3750construction data 2-6FRUs for U.S. 3-10installation 4-2startup 5-2system environment 2-13

HiPath 500 2-5HiPath 5000 RSM 2-2, 2-18, 6-1

administration 6-46connecting an UPS 6-96extensions 6-60HiPath Trace Monitor 6-86, 11-29licensing 6-33nodes 6-57

prerequisites 6-5RAM requirements 6-5HiPath AP 1100 9-59HiPath AP 1140 9-59HiPath Cordless Office 10-1

base station power supply 3-114base stations 10-2capacity limits 10-6configuring 9-79EPSU2 external power supply 3-118extension connection 10-9

login window 9-79mobile telephone 9-72multi-SLC 10-9networking among systems 10-9outdoor cover 10-5single-cell BS 10-2, 10-3SLC16/SLC16N 3-106system configuration 10-3system number 3-106system numbers 9-79tech. base station data 10-4

HiPath Desktop, licensing 6-34HiPath Fault Management 11-33HiPath Inventory Server 11-17HiPath server administration 6-46HiPath Software Viewer 11-17HiPath Trace Monitor 6-86, 11-29hlb2.pds 11-4HOPE board 3-243

hospital use (HiPath 3750) 4-24hot plugging 8-2HXGM3 3-70

determining the required number 9-60extension modules 3-72figure 3-72interfaces 3-73LAN adapter cable for backplane (U.S.only) 3-76LAN adapter connector for backplane3-75LED statuses 3-74techn. data (resources) 9-60V.24 interface 3-74

versions 3-71HXGR3 3-77determining the required number 9-60extension modules 3-78figure 3-79interfaces 3-80LAN interfaces 3-81techn. data (resources) 9-60V.24 interface 3-82versions 3-78

HXGS3 3-77

determining the required number 9-60extension modules 3-78fan kit for HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 3-83figure 3-79interfaces 3-80LAN interfaces 3-81techn. data (resources) 9-60V.24 interface 3-82versions 3-78

I

IMODN 3-46, 11-60Industry Canada certification number 2-24information on the intranet 1-15initializing boards (HiPath 3700) 4-72initializing boards (HiPath 3750) 4-72



hp3hp5shIX.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Index

installation (HiPath 3500/3300) 4-81, 4-105grounding the system 4-111HiPath 3300 slots 4-115HiPath 3500 slots 4-114

installation in a 19-inch cabinet 4-109installation location 4-106installation versions 4-105procedure 4-82tools and help 4-81unpacking components 4-107visual inspection 4-117wall installation 4-108

installation (HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350) 4-81,4-83

attach ferrite 4-98attaching the system to the wall 4-90connecting the cable 4-94HiPath 3350 slots 4-102HiPath 3350 system overview 4-102HiPath 3550 slots 4-101HiPath 3550 system overview 4-100installation site 4-83MDFU 4-86, 4-91procedure 4-82tools and help 4-81

unpacking the components 4-85visual inspection 4-104

installation (HiPath 3700) 4-2, 4-46checking grounding 4-55connecting cable between BC and EC4-58connecting the cable 4-56grounding 4-53help, tools 4-2installation site 4-47loading the system software 4-69mounting the patch panel 4-52mounting the system cabinet 4-48procedure 4-3removing the cabinet covers 4-48stripping the open-end cable 4-66unpacking the components 4-47visual inspection 4-80

installation (HiPath 3750) 4-2, 4-5checking the protective grounding 4-31connecting cable between BC and EC4-34

connecting the cable 4-32earth ground 4-29freestanding installation

base elements 4-20secondary protection 4-45wall mounting for two cabinets stacked

4-17grounding 4-26help, tools 4-2installation site 4-6

jumpering 4-41line network 4-41loading the system software 4-69MDFU/MDFU-E 4-9procedure 4-3protective grounding (for U.S. Only) 4-29removing cabinet covers 4-11seismic anchors 4-24setting up system cabinets 4-10single-cabinet 4-12stripping the open-end cable for MDFU/

MDFU-E 4-39three-cabinet stacked 4-22two cabinets side by side 4-21two cabinets stacked 4-15unpacking the components 4-8visual inspection 4-80wall mounting for one cabinet 4-12

installing an expansion cabinet rack (ECR)8-5

integrated modem 3-46, 11-60Interface-to-interface ranges 2-22IP network requirements 12-2IP payload switching (HG1500 V3.0) 9-62IP protocols C-1ISDN

S0 interface connection 3-135terminal connection (not for U.S.) 3-136trunk connection (not for U.S.) 3-135



Index


hp3hp5shIX.fm

ISDN adapterSTLS4 wiring 3-134STMD8 wiring 3-149

ISDN message decoder 11-29ISDN routing (HG1500 V3.0) 9-63ISDN S0 bus

from STLS4 or ISDN adapter 3-134from STMD8 or ISDN Adapter 3-149HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350

general information 9-85point-to-multipoint long 9-88point-to-multipoint short 9-87point-to-point 9-86

ISDN S0 wiring

HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350general information 9-85point-to-multipoint long 9-88point-to-multipoint short 9-87point-to-point 9-86

IVML8/IVML24 3-86figure 3-87LAN adapter 3-89LED statuses 3-88lockout switch 3-87packing protection covering 3-86

IVMP8/IVMP8R 3-90figure 3-91LAN connector assignment 3-92LED statuses 3-93lockout switch 3-91packing protection covering 3-90

IVMS8/IVMS8R 3-94figure 3-95LAN connector assignment 3-97LED statuses 3-98lockout switch 3-95packing protection covering 3-94

J jumper strips

assignment 4-42

Kkey assignment 9-4keyed holes for mounting

HiPath 3750 4-12, 4-17

LLAN adapter cable for backplane HiPath

3750/HiPath 3700 (U.S. only) 3-76LAN adapter connector for backplane HiPath

3750/HiPath 3700 3-75licensing 6-33, 11-22

CMD 6-43CSP 6-43HG1500 6-43HiPath 5000 RSM 6-33

HiPath Desktop 6-34Media Streaming 6-41TAPI service provider 6-37

LIM 3-47local power supply 9-32

connection example 9-33LOG area 11-72, 11-75

MMAC ID 6-33, 6-37main distribution frame (HiPath 3550)

installation 4-86main distribution frame (HiPath 3550/HiPath

3350) 4-91cables 4-97protective grounding 4-91

main distribution frame (HiPath 3750) jumpering 4-41layout and dimensions 4-43mounting 4-9

MDF (HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350)

cables 4-97MDFU (HiPath 3550)grounding 4-91installation 4-86

MDFU/MDFU-E (HiPath 3750) jumpering 4-41layout and dimensions 4-43mounting 4-9



hp3hp5shIX.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Index

MEB service provider 6-4, 6-25licensing lines 6-41

Media Extension Bridge service provider 6-4Media Streaming 6-4, 6-25

licensing lines 6-41memory backup 11-3minimum clearances


MMC 3-50replace 11-11

mobile telephonechecking the login status 9-82log off 9-82

mountingone cabinet on the wall (HiPath 3750)4-12two stacked cabinets on the wall (HiPath3750) 4-17

mounting holesHiPath 3750 4-12, 4-17

mounting spaceHiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 4-84HiPath 3750 4-6

multimedia card MMC 3-50

multi-SLC 10-9Nnetwork analysis 12-6network termination

cable set for Spain/Portugal (HiPath3550 and HiPath 3500) 3-219connecting

S0 3-142S2M 3-209

power feeding (S2M, HiPath 3550 and

HiPath 3500) 3-218power feeding (S2M, HiPath 3750/Hi-Path 3700) 3-209S2M connection (HiPath 3550 and Hi-Path 3500) 3-218

networkingHiPath 4000 CorNet-N connection 3-135

NT connectionpower feeding (S2M, HiPath 3550 andHiPath 3500) 3-218power feeding (S2M, HiPath 3750/Hi-

Path 3700) 3-209S2M (HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500)3-218

numberfor CS-03 certification 2-24for FCC registration 2-24ringer equivalency 2-24

numbering plan 2-23numbering plan (HiPath 3350/HiPath 3300)

5-12

numbering plan (HiPath 3550/HiPath 3500)5-12numbering plan (HiPath 3750 and HiPath

3700) 5-4

Ooffline programming 5-9, 5-17OPAL 3-245OPALR 3-245open-end cable (HiPath 3700) for patch panel

4-66

open-end cable (HiPath 3750) for MDFU/ MDFU-E 4-39operating conditions 2-25optiClient 130 V4.0 9-56optiClient attendant 9-69optiLog 4me 9-41options 3-6optiPoint 410 9-43

add-on devices 9-52display module 9-53possible configurations 9-55

SLK module 9-52telephones 9-44

connecting and start-up 9-50connections 9-51economy 9-46entry 9-44standard 9-48

using adapters 9-55



Index


hp3hp5shIX.fm

optiPoint 500 9-3adapters

acoustic adapter 9-24analog adapter 9-20configurations 9-28ISDN adapter 9-21phone adapter 9-22recorder adapter 9-27slots 9-19

BLF 9-16key module 9-15local power supply 9-32

connection example 9-33part numbers, accessories 9-32

telephones 9-5advance 9-9basic 9-7connecting 9-12connection requirements 9-11connections 9-13economy 9-6entry 9-5standard 9-8standard SL (for U.S. only) 9-8

USB 1.1 interface 9-14

optiPoint 600 office 9-38optiPoint attendant 9-68optiPoint BLF 9-16optiPoint key module 9-15optiset E privacy module 9-42outdoor cover 10-5outlet requirements

HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300 4-106HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 4-85HiPath 3700 4-47HiPath 3750 4-7

overview of boardsHiPath 3300 3-19HiPath 3350 3-14HiPath 3500 3-17HiPath 3550 3-11HiPath 3700 3-8HiPath 3750 3-8

Ppart numbers

all boards 3-1, 3-8all components 3-1, 3-8backplanes (HiPath 3700) 4-58, 4-59backplanes (HiPath 3750) 4-34, 4-35cabinets (HiPath 3700) 4-58, 4-59cabinets (HiPath 3750) 4-34, 4-35CABLUs, open-end cables (HiPath 3700)4-60CABLUs, open-end cables (HiPath 3750)4-36connecting cables (HiPath 3700) 4-58,4-59

connecting cables (HiPath 3750) 4-34,4-35password 11-65password type 5-14password type (HiPath 3750 and HiPath

3700) 5-6patch panel 4-60, 4-62payload switching (HG1500 V3.0) 9-62PCM segments for HiPath 3750 and HiPath

3700 4-74PDM1 3-72

PDS files 11-4peripheral boards 3-3personal call management PCM 6-70PFT1/PFT4 3-247

assignment 3-249installation location 3-248trunk failure transfer 3-247

pin assignments of V.24 sockets 3-261pin out of CSTA/V.24 cable 3-263port numbers C-1potential hazards

sources 1-19power failure transfer

REAL 3-250power feeding

external applications 3-250, 3-252NT (HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500)3-218NT (HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700) 3-209



hp3hp5shIX.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Index

power outlet requirementsHiPath 3500/HiPath 3300 4-106HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 4-85HiPath 3700 4-47

HiPath 3750 4-7power requirement (boards, workpoint cli-

ents, adapter) D-1power supply

HiPath 3300 3-57HiPath 3350 3-51, 3-52HiPath 3500 3-57HiPath 3550 3-52HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 3-63

printer connection 8-4

privacy 1-14project planning tool 2-19, 9-31protection, secondary

HiPath 3750 4-45protective grounding

HiPath 3500/3300 4-111HiPath 3700 4-53

checking 4-55HiPath 3750 4-26

checking 4-31system cabinets (for U.S. only) 4-29

HiPath 3750 (for U.S. Only) 4-29protocols 12-2PSUP 3-51

interfaces (S30122-K5658-M) 3-51

Qquality of service QoS 12-4

Rradio paging equipment 3-197

TMOM

PSE interface 3-198PSE signals 3-197ranges

CorNet-N 2-22telephone interface to interface 2-22trunk 2-22

REAL 3-250cable and connector assignment 3-253electrical relay data 3-251installation location 3-251

power failure transfer 3-250relay contacts 3-252special connections 3-250

recommended configuration (HiPath 3700)4-73

recommended configuration (HiPath 3750)4-73

registration number for FCC 2-24reinitialization

for expansions (HiPath 3550/HiPath

3500/HiPAth 3350/3300) 5-13for expansions (HiPath 3750 and HiPath3700) 5-5procedure (HiPath 3350/HiPath 3300/Hi-Path 3500/HiPath 3550) 5-13procedure (HiPath 3750 and HiPath3700) 5-5

related informationmanuals and guides (for U.S. only) 1-21

reload 5-6, 5-14remote access immediately after installation

11-62remote administration 11-61remote connection, controlled release 11-64remote service 11-59repairs 1-22reporting accidents 1-12, 1-18requirements for hospital use (HiPath 3750)

4-24reset board 3-87, 3-91, 3-95ring generator

settings (UPSM, -A100) 3-67settings (UPSM, -S100) 3-66

ringer equivalency number 2-24routing (HG1500 V3.0) 9-63RS-232

contact assignments 3-261rules

FCC 1-22



Index


hp3hp5shIX.fm

SS0 bus

from STLS4 or ISDN adapter 3-134from STMD8 or ISDN adapter 3-149HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350

general information 9-85point-to-point 9-86

point-to-multipoint long 9-88point-to-multipoint short 9-87

safety information 1-5caution 1-9danger 1-6general 1-16high voltages 1-16

warning 1-8with electricity 1-16safety information for Australia 1-13safety symbols 1-5, 1-19secondary protection (HiPath 3750) 4-45security 11-65seismic anchoring (HiPath 3750) 4-24service 1-22, 11-1service and repairs 1-22service call using a code 11-62service maintenance release SMR 11-14

shift key 9-4Siemens intranet 1-15signal order from MDF cables (HiPath 3550/

HiPath 3350) 4-97single-cell base station 10-2, 10-3SLA8N/SLA16N/SLA24N 3-99

cable and connector assignment 3-101cable and connector assignment (forU.S. only) 3-103connection conditions 3-105LED statuses 3-100switches and LEDs 3-99

SLC16/SLC16N 3-106base station power supply 3-111cable and connector assignment 3-109distribution in HiPath 3750 and HiPath3700 cabinets 3-110figure 3-107LED statuses 3-108lockout switch 3-107

SLMO8/SLMO24 3-122cable and connector assignment 3-124cable and connector assignment (forU.S. only) 3-126figure 3-122LED statuses 3-123

SLU8 3-128contact assignments 3-128interfaces 3-128

SLU8R 3-130contact assignments 3-130interfaces 3-130

SMR 11-14SNMP 11-33software update 11-14software upgrade 11-14space requirements


speech recording device optiLog 4me 9-41splitting strips

assignment 4-42startup

HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath3500,HiPath 3300 5-10HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 5-2

static traffic capacityHiPath 3500/HiPath 3300 4-116HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 4-103HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 4-77

station diagnosis 11-27station status 11-27STBG4 3-254

contact assignments 3-254interfaces 3-254



hp3hp5shIX.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Index

STLSinterfaces 3-131STLS2 (not for U.S.) 3-131STLS4 3-131

ISDN adapter wiring compared 3-134STLS4R 3-138


STMD8 3-140cable and connector assignment 3-147cable and connector assignment (forU.S. only) 3-148figure 3-140ISDN adapter wiring compared 3-149

LED states 3-141point-to-multipoint connection 3-143point-to-point connection 3-143S0 bus to terminals 3-145S0 connection to NT 3-142S0 networking 3-144S0 trunk connection 3-142

STRB 3-255connection values 3-256contact assignments 3-258interfaces 3-256

STRBR 3-255contact assignments 3-259interfaces 3-256

stripping the multi-conductor cable (open-endcable) 4-39, 4-66

subboards, inserting 4-69surge protector 3-114surge protector (HiPath 3700) for patch panel

4-62surge protector (HiPath 3750) for MDFU/

MDFU-E 4-41system configuration, changing (HiPath

3550/HiPath 3350/HiPath 3500/HiPath3300) 5-13

system configuration, changing (HiPath3750/HiPath 3700) 5-5

system power requirement D-1system software upgrade 11-11system software, installing 4-69

TTAPI service provider 6-24

licensing 6-37technical base station data 10-4

technical specifications 2-21telephone test 11-30telephones 9-1

interface to interface ranges 2-22terminals

ISDN dataHiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 3-133HiPath 3750/3700 3-149

terminating resistors (HiPath 3700) 4-59terminating resistors (HiPath 3750) 4-35

tie trunk circuits, analog 3-150TIEL 3-150cable and connector assignment 3-161cable and connector assignment (forU.S. only) 3-163data for the interface 3-152DIP-FIX switch positions 3-154figure 3-153interface types 3-151LED statuses 3-160signal wire connection 3-155

signaling protocols 3-152time-division multiplex channels for HiPath

3750 and HiPath 3700 4-74TLA2 3-165


TLA4 3-165contact assignments 3-165interfaces 3-165

TLA4R 3-167contact assignments 3-167interfaces 3-167

TLA8 3-165contact assignments 3-166interfaces 3-166



hp3hp5shIX.fm

P31003-H3540-S403-6-7620, 06/05


Index

Uuninterruptible power supply for HiPath 3750

and HiPath 3700 3-63uninterruptible power supply for HiPath 5000

RSM 6-96updating HG1500 11-15updating system software 11-15Upgrade Manager 11-15upgrade of the system software 11-11upgrading HiPath 3000 8-25UPSC-D 3-52

bridging times 3-53connectors 3-56figure 3-54

switches and indicators 3-55UPSC-DR 3-57battery pack for HiPath 3500/HiPath3300 8-10bridging times 3-58connectors 3-62figure 3-59switches and indicators 3-61

UPSM 3-63battery pack for HiPath 3700 8-10bridging times 3-65

figure (-A100) 3-67figure (-S100) 3-66

USB 1.1 interface 9-14user groups and their access rights 11-68USV P 500 6-96

VV.24

contact assignments 3-261V.24 adapter 3-262V.24 cable, pin out 3-263

V.24 interface 3-260V.24 interfaces (HiPath 3700) 4-57V.24 interfaces (HiPath 3750) 4-33V24/1 3-260version hub 11-14visual inspection

HiPath 3700 4-80HiPath 3750 4-80

voice compression 12-3

voice mailHOPE board 3-243

W

wall attachmentsHiPath 3750 4-12, 4-17wall mounting (HiPath 3750)

one cabinet 4-12two stacked cabinets 4-17wall-mount kit 4-12, 4-17

web-based management WBM 3-70, 3-77wiring

ISDN S0general information 9-85point-to-multipoint long 9-88

point-to-multipoint short 9-87point-to-point 9-86

workpoint client power requirement D-1workpoint clients 9-1



Index

hp3hp5shIX.fm

HiPath 3000 V4 Service Manual Issue 6.pdf

Documents

Transcript of HiPath 3000 V4 Service Manual Issue 6.pdf